Method and interface for initiating communication

Methods and interfaces for initiating communications

[0001] Cross-references to related applications

This application requires that the title of "METHODS AND INTERFACES FOR INITIATING COMMUNICATIONS" submitted on August 31, 2021 be the U.S. Provisional Application No. 63/239,403, and the title submitted on September 13, 2021 is "METHODS AND INTERFACES FOR INITIATING COMMUNICATIONS" " U.S. Provisional Application No. 63/243, 681, filed on April 25, 2022, titled "METHODS AND INTERFACES FOR INITIATING COMMUNICATIONS", U.S. Provisional Application No. 63/334,604, filed on August 24, 2022, titled " Priority to U.S. Provisional Application No. 63/400,732 titled "METHODS AND INTERFACES FOR INITIATING COMMUNICATIONS" and U.S. Application No. 17/898,342 titled "METHODS AND INTERFACES FOR INITIATING COMMUNICATIONS" filed on August 29, 2022, the entirety of each application The contents are hereby incorporated by reference.

Technical field

[0003] The present disclosure relates generally to computer user interfaces, and more particularly to techniques for managing communication user interfaces.

Background technique

[0004] Electronic computer systems provide means for communicating, such as via text messages and email.

Contents of the invention

[0005] However, some techniques for managing communication user interfaces using electronic devices are often cumbersome and inefficient. For example, some existing technologies use complex and time-consuming user interfaces that may include multiple key presses or keystrokes. Existing techniques require more time than required, resulting in wasted user time and device energy. This latter consideration is particularly important in battery-operated devices.

[0006] Accordingly, the present technology provides electronic devices with faster and more efficient methods and interfaces for managing communication user interfaces. Such methods and interfaces optionally supplement or replace other methods for managing communication user interfaces. Such methods and interfaces reduce the cognitive load imposed on the user and produce more effective human-machine interfaces. For battery-powered computing devices, such methods and interfaces save power and increase the time between battery charges.

[0007] According to some embodiments, a method performed at a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices is described. The method includes detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to initiate communication via the computer system; and responsive to detecting the user input, displaying, via the display generation component, a first user interface, comprising: according to Determining that the computer system is unable to reach the terrestrial wireless communications network, displaying a corresponding selectable communication option that, when selected via the one or more input devices, initiates a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communications network ; and upon determining that the computer system can reach the corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network, initiating a process for communicating via the corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network without displaying the corresponding selectable communication option.

[0008] According to some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transient computer can

The read storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including: Instructions: detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to initiate communication via the computer system; and responsive to detecting the user input, displaying, via the display generation component, a first user interface, including: based on determining the The computer system is unable to reach the terrestrial wireless communication network, displays a corresponding selectable communication option that, when selected via the one or more input devices, initiates a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network; and Upon determining that the computer system can reach the corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network, a process for communicating via the corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network is initiated without displaying the corresponding selectable communication option.

[0009] According to some embodiments, a transient computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising Instructions for detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to initiate communication via the computer system; and in response to detecting the user input, displaying, via the display generation component, a first user interface, including: upon determining that the computer system is unable to reach the terrestrial wireless communications network, displaying corresponding selectable communication options that, when selected via the one or more input devices, initiate the corresponding selectable communication options for conducting via the non-terrestrial wireless communications network a process of communicating; and based on determining that the computer system can reach the corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network, initiating a process for communicating via the corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network without displaying the corresponding selectable communication option.

[0010] According to some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system includes: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for : detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to initiate communication via the computer system; and responsive to detecting the user input, displaying, via the display generating component, a first user interface, comprising: determining that the computer The system is unable to reach the terrestrial wireless communications network, displays a corresponding selectable communication option that, when selected via the one or more input devices, initiates a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communications network; and in accordance with Determining that the computer system can reach the corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network, initiating a process for communicating via the corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network without displaying the corresponding selectable communication option.

[0011] According to some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system is configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, including means for detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to initiate communication via the computer system ; and means for: in response to detecting the user input, displaying the first user interface via the display generating component, including: displaying corresponding selectable communication options based on determining that the computer system cannot reach the terrestrial wireless communication network, when When selected via the one or more input devices, the corresponding selectable communication option initiates a process for communicating via a non-terrestrial wireless communication network; and upon determining that the computer system can reach the corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network, initiating a process for communicating via The corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network performs a communication process without displaying the corresponding selectable communication options.

[0012] According to some embodiments, a computer program product is described. The computer program product includes one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including: Instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to initiate communication via the computer system; and in response to detecting the user input, displaying, via the display generating component, a first user interface, including: based on determining The computer system cannot reach the ground

a wireless communications network that displays a corresponding selectable communication option that, when selected via the one or more input devices, initiates a process for communicating via a non-terrestrial wireless communications network; and the computer system based on determining A corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network can be reached, and a process for communicating via the corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network is initiated without displaying the corresponding selectable communication option.

[0013] According to some embodiments, a method performed at a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices is described. The method includes: when the computer system is in a low-bandwidth communication mode: displaying, via the display generating component, a first set of selectable communication content options corresponding to corresponding content for communication, wherein the first set of selectable communication content options are specific to the low bandwidth communication mode; detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first set of one or more inputs corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option in a first set of selectable communication content options; upon detecting the first after the set of one or more inputs, display via the display generating component a second set of selectable communication content options corresponding to corresponding content for the communication, wherein the second set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low-bandwidth communication mode; Detecting, via the one or more input devices, a second set of one or more inputs corresponding to a selection of a second communication content option in a second set of selectable communication content options; detecting a second set of one or more inputs corresponding to a selection of the first communication content including an input of a request for a communication of content corresponding to the selection of the option and the second communication content option; and in response to receiving the input corresponding to the request to send the communication, sending the communication including one or more inputs from the first set and the second A communication of content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the selection of the second communication content option is grouped into one or more inputs.

[0014] According to some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs Includes instructions for: When the computer system is in the low-bandwidth communication mode: display, via the display generating component, a first set of selectable communication content options corresponding to corresponding content for the communication, wherein the first set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low-bandwidth communication mode; detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first set of one or more inputs corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option in a first set of selectable communication content options; upon detecting the first set of one or more after the input, display via the display generating component a second set of selectable communication content options corresponding to corresponding content for the communication, wherein the second set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode; via the one or The plurality of input devices detects a second set of one or more inputs corresponding to a selection of a second communication content option in a second set of selectable communication content options; selection of communication content options, input of a request for communication of content corresponding to the Communication of content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the selection of the second communication content option.

[0015] According to some embodiments, a transient computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising Instructions for: when the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode: displaying, via the display generating component, a first set of selectable communication content options corresponding to corresponding content for communication, wherein the first set of selectable communication content options specific to the low bandwidth communication mode; detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first set of one or more inputs corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option in a first set of selectable communication content options; upon detecting After the first set of one or more inputs, a second set of selectable communication content options corresponding to corresponding content for the communication is displayed via the display generating component, wherein the second set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth Communication mode; detecting a response to a request via the one or more input devices

a second set of one or more inputs corresponding to selection of a second communication content option in a second set of selectable communication content options; detecting a message corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option and a selection of a second communication content option. input of a request for communication of content; and in response to receiving an input corresponding to a request to send the communication, sending content including the first communication selected from the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs. The communication of content corresponding to the selection of the option and the second communication content option.

[0016] According to some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system is configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, including: one or more processors; and a memory that stores one or more data configured to be executed by the one or more processors. a program, the one or more programs including instructions for: when the computer system is in a low-bandwidth communication mode: displaying, via the display generating component, a first set of selectable communication content corresponding to corresponding content for communication options, wherein a first set of selectable communication content options are specific to the low-bandwidth communication mode; detecting via the one or more input devices a first communication content option corresponding to selection of a first communication content option in the first set of selectable communication content options. a set of one or more inputs; upon detecting the first set of one or more inputs, displaying via the display generating component a second set of selectable communication content options corresponding to corresponding content for the communication, wherein the second set Selectable communication content options are specific to the low-bandwidth communication mode; detecting via the one or more input devices a second set of one or more communication content options corresponding to a selection of a second one of the second set of selectable communication content options. input; detecting input corresponding to a request to send a communication including content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option; and in response to receiving the input corresponding to the request to send the communication, sending the communication including Communication of content corresponding to selection of first communication content options and second communication content options selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs.

[0017] According to some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system is configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, including: means for: when the computer system is in a low-bandwidth communication mode: display via the display generation component corresponding to the communication for communication a first set of corresponding selectable communication content options, wherein the first set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low-bandwidth communication mode; detecting via the one or more input devices corresponding to the first set of selectable communication content options a first set of one or more inputs for selection of a first communication content option; upon detecting the first set of one or more inputs, displaying, via the display generating component, a second display corresponding to corresponding content for the communication. a set of selectable communication content options, wherein a second set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low-bandwidth communication mode; detecting, via the one or more input devices, a second communication corresponding to the second set of selectable communication content options a second set of one or more inputs for a selection of a content option; detecting an input corresponding to a request to send a communication including content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option; and for the following operations Means for: in response to receiving an input corresponding to a request to send the communication, sending a first communication content option and a second communication content including options selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs. The selection of options corresponds to the content of the communication.

[0018] According to some embodiments, a computer program product is described. The computer program product includes one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including: Instructions: when the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode: display, via the display generating component, a first set of selectable communication content options corresponding to corresponding content for communication, wherein the first set of selectable communication content options are specific to the a low bandwidth communication mode; detecting, via the one or more input devices, a first set of one or more inputs corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option in a first set of selectable communication content options; upon detecting the first set of communication content options After one or more inputs, the display generation component displays the

a second set of selectable communication content options corresponding to corresponding content for the communication, wherein the second set of selectable communication content options is specific to the low bandwidth communication mode; detecting via the one or more input devices corresponding to the second set of selectable communication content options a second set of one or more inputs corresponding to a selection of a second one of the set of selectable communication content options; detecting a transmission that includes content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option. an input of a request to communicate; and in response to receiving an input corresponding to a request to send the communication, sending an option including a first communication content selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs and The selection of the second communication content option corresponds to the communication of content.

[0019] According to some embodiments, a method performed at a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices is described. The method includes detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications; and responsive to detecting the user input, displaying an alignment element via the display generating component, including: based on determining the The computer system is not properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites, the alignment element is displayed with a first alignment appearance, the first alignment appearance indicates that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites communicating with the one or more satellites and including a graphical indication; and detecting a change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system while displaying the alignment element in a first alignment appearance; and in response to detecting a change in the orientation of the computer system A change in the orientation of a predetermined portion changes the appearance of the aligned element.

[0020] According to some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs Instructions are included for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications; and in response to detecting the user input: displaying, via the display generation component, an alignment element, including : Based on a determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites, displaying the alignment element in a first alignment appearance, the first alignment appearance indicating that the computer system is not properly aligned. aligning for communication with the one or more satellites and including a graphical indication; and detecting a change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system while displaying the alignment element in a first alignment appearance; and in response to detecting Orientation changes to predetermined portions of the computer system change the appearance of the alignment elements.

[0021] According to some embodiments, a transient computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising Instructions for detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications; and in response to detecting the user input, displaying an alignment element via the display generation component, comprising: Displaying the alignment element with a first alignment appearance indicating that the computer system is not properly aligned based on a determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites for communicating with the one or more satellites and including a graphical indication; and detecting a change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system while displaying the alignment element in a first alignment appearance; and in response to detecting Orientation changes of predetermined portions of the computer system change the appearance of the alignment elements.

[0022] According to some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system is configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, including: one or more processors; and a memory that stores one or more data configured to be executed by the one or more processors. a program, the one or more programs including instructions for detecting, via the one or more input devices, a user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications

input; and in response to detecting the user input: displaying an alignment element via the display generating component, including: based on determining that the computer system is not properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites, with a first pair displaying the alignment element in a first alignment appearance indicating that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites and including a graphical indication; and displaying the alignment element in a first alignment appearance detecting a change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system when aligning the element; and changing an appearance of the alignment element in response to detecting a change in orientation of the predetermined portion of the computer system.

[0023] According to some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system is configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices, including: means for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications; and means for: in response to detecting the user input: displaying an alignment element via the display generating component, including: upon determining that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites , displaying the alignment element in a first alignment appearance indicating that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites and including a graphical indication; and in a first alignment appearance Alignment appearance detects a change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system when displaying the alignment element; and changes the appearance of the alignment element in response to detecting a change in orientation of the predetermined portion of the computer system.

[0024] According to some embodiments, a computer program product is described. The computer program product includes one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including: Instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications; and in response to detecting the user input: displaying, via the display generating component, an alignment element, including: determining the computer The system is not properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites, the alignment element is displayed in a first alignment appearance, the first alignment appearance indicates that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites communicating and including graphical indications; and detecting a change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system while displaying the alignment element in a first alignment appearance; and in response to detecting a change in orientation of the computer system A change in the orientation of a predetermined portion changes the appearance of the aligned element.

[0025] According to some embodiments, a method performed at a computer system in communication with one or more input devices is described. The method includes, when preparing to initiate a communication with a first recipient, outputting a query as to whether a second recipient different from the first recipient is allowed to receive information corresponding to the communication without adding the second recipient as A participant in the conversation of the communication; detecting a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to send a message to the first recipient, after outputting a query as to whether the second recipient is allowed to receive information corresponding to the communication; and in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs: based on determining that the computer system detects one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication between the user and the first recipient. input, sending a message including corresponding information to the first recipient, and enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to the second recipient; and based on determining that the computer system has not detected a message corresponding to allowing the second recipient to receive One or more inputs corresponding to a request for information communicated between a user and a first recipient, sending a message including the corresponding information to the first recipient without enabling delivery of a message including the corresponding information to the second recipient. At least part of the message.

[0026] According to some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with one or more input devices, the one or more programs including: Instructions for operation: When preparing to initiate a communication with the first recipient, output information regarding whether a second recipient different from the first recipient is allowed to receive the communication corresponding to the first recipient.

query for information without adding the second recipient as a participant in the conversation for that communication; after outputting a query as to whether the second recipient is allowed to receive information corresponding to the communication, detecting a request for information corresponding to the communication to the first recipient A sequence of one or more inputs that is a request for a party to send a message; and in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs: based on determining that the computer system detects and allows the second recipient to receive messages corresponding to the user and the first recipient. one or more inputs corresponding to the request for communication information, sending a message including the corresponding information to the first recipient, and enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to the second recipient; and based on the determination the computer system does not detect one or more inputs corresponding to the request to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication between the user and the first recipient, sending a message to the first recipient including the corresponding information, without enabling delivery of a message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to the second recipient.

[0027] According to some embodiments, a transient computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with one or more input devices, the one or more programs including for Instructions: When preparing to initiate a communication with a first recipient, output a query as to whether a second recipient different from the first recipient is allowed to receive information corresponding to the communication without adding the second recipient to the a participant in a conversation of a communication; detecting a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to send a message to the first recipient after outputting a query as to whether the second recipient is allowed to receive information corresponding to the communication; and In response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs: based on a determination that the computer system detects one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication between the user and the first recipient. input, sending a message including corresponding information to a first recipient, and enabling delivery of a message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to a second recipient; and based on determining that the computer system has not detected a message corresponding to allowing the second recipient to receive One or more inputs corresponding to a request for information communicated between a user and a first recipient, sending a message including the corresponding information to the first recipient without enabling delivery to the second recipient of at least one message including the corresponding information part of the message.

[0028] According to some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system is configured to communicate with one or more input devices and includes: one or more processors; and a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, The one or more programs include instructions for, when preparing to initiate a communication with a first recipient, outputting a query as to whether a second recipient different from the first recipient is allowed to receive information corresponding to the communication , without adding the second recipient as a participant in the conversation of the communication; after outputting a query as to whether the second recipient is allowed to receive information corresponding to the communication, detecting a message corresponding to a message sent to the first recipient a sequence of one or more inputs requested; and in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs: based on a determination that the computer system detects and allows the second recipient to receive a communication corresponding to the user and the first recipient one or more inputs corresponding to the request for information, sending a message including the corresponding information to the first recipient, and enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to the second recipient; and based on determining that the computer system has not Detecting one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication between the user and the first recipient, sending a message to the first recipient including the corresponding information without enabling the communication to the first recipient. The second recipient delivers a message including at least a portion of the corresponding information.

[0029] According to some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system is configured to communicate with one or more input devices, including: means for: when preparing to initiate communication with a first recipient, outputting information regarding whether a second reception that is different from the first recipient is allowed. a party receiving a query corresponding to information of the communication without adding the second recipient as a participant in the conversation of the communication; means for: outputting information regarding whether the second recipient is allowed

After the recipient receives a query corresponding to the information of the communication, detecting a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to send a message to the first recipient; and means for: in response to detecting one or more The sequence of inputs: sending to the first recipient upon a determination that the computer system detects one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to a communication between the user and the first recipient a message including corresponding information, and enabling delivery of a message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to a second recipient; and based on determining that the computer system does not detect and allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication between the user and the first recipient. The communication request corresponds to one or more inputs, sending a message including the corresponding information to the first recipient without enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to the second recipient.

[0030] According to some embodiments, a computer program product is described. The computer program product includes one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with one or more input devices, the one or more programs including instructions for: When preparing to initiate a communication with a first recipient, output a query as to whether a second recipient different from the first recipient is allowed to receive information corresponding to the communication without adding the second recipient to the conversation for that communication a participant; detecting a sequence of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to send a message to the first recipient after outputting a query as to whether the second recipient is allowed to receive information corresponding to the communication; and in response to detecting The sequence of one or more inputs: based on a determination that the computer system detects one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication between the user and the first recipient, to the first recipient. A recipient sends a message including corresponding information and enables delivery of a message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to a second recipient; and based on determining that the computer system does not detect and allow the second recipient to receive messages corresponding to the user and the first A request for communication of information between recipients corresponds to one or more inputs, sending a message including the corresponding information to a first recipient without enabling delivery of a message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to a second recipient.

[0031] According to some embodiments, a method is described. The method includes: at the computer system: when the computer system communicates with the first communication network: determining that a corresponding standard has been met; and in response to determining that the corresponding standard has been met, automatically sending an instruction indicating the computer system without user input. Updated location information of an updated location, wherein the updated location information is accessible to a device other than the computer system; detecting that the first communications network is unavailable after automatically sending the updated location information one or more times when corresponding criteria are met. ; And when the first communication network is unavailable, the computer system can update the location information via the second communication network, and has met the corresponding criteria, giving up automatically sending the updated location information.

[0032] According to some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described that stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system. The one or more programs include instructions for: when the computer system communicates with the first communication network: determining that a corresponding criterion has been met; and in response to determining that the corresponding criterion has been met, automatically sending without user input Updated location information indicating an updated location of the computer system, wherein the updated location information is accessible by a device other than the computer system; after automatically sending the updated location information one or more times when corresponding criteria are met, detection of the first One communication network is unavailable; and when the first communication network is unavailable, the computer system can update the location information via the second communication network, and has met the corresponding criteria, giving up automatically sending the updated location information.

[0033] According to some embodiments, a transient computer-readable storage medium is described that stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system. The one or more programs include instructions for: when the computer system communicates with the first communication network: determining that a corresponding criterion has been met; and in response to determining that the corresponding criterion has been met, automatically sending without user input indicate the calculation

updated location information of an updated location of a computer system, wherein the updated location information is accessible by a device other than that computer system; detecting the first communication after automatically sending the updated location information one or more times when corresponding criteria are met The network is unavailable; and when the first communication network is unavailable, the computer system is able to update the location information via the second communication network, and the corresponding criteria have been met, giving up automatically sending the updated location information.

[0034] According to some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system includes: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for when the computer system communicates with the first communications network: determining that the corresponding criteria have been met; and in response to determining that the corresponding criteria have been met, automatically sending updated location information indicating the updated location of the computer system without user input , wherein the updated location information can be accessed by devices other than the computer system; after automatically sending the updated location information one or more times when corresponding criteria are met, it is detected that the first communication network is unavailable; and when the first communication network is unavailable When the computer system is able to update the location information via the second communication network and has met the corresponding criteria, it gives up automatically sending the updated location information.

[0035] According to some embodiments, a computer system is described. The computer system includes: means for: determining that a corresponding standard has been met when the computer system communicates with the first communication network; and in response to determining that the corresponding standard has been met, automatically sending an indication that the corresponding standard has been met without user input. Updated location information of an updated location of a computer system, wherein the updated location information is accessible by a device other than the computer system; means for automatically sending the updated location information one or more times when corresponding criteria are met After that, it is detected that the first communication network is unavailable; and means for the following operations: when the first communication network is unavailable, the computer system can update the location information via the second communication network, and has met the corresponding standards, and gives up automatically sending the information. Update location information.

[0036] According to some embodiments, a computer program product is described that includes one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system. The one or more programs include instructions for: when the computer system communicates with the first communication network: determining that a corresponding criterion has been met; and in response to determining that the corresponding criterion has been met, automatically sending without user input Updated location information indicating an updated location of the computer system, wherein the updated location information is accessible by a device other than the computer system; after automatically sending the updated location information one or more times when corresponding criteria are met, detection of the first One communication network is unavailable; and when the first communication network is unavailable, the computer system is able to update the location information via the second communication network and has met the corresponding criteria, giving up automatically sending the updated location information.

[0037] According to some embodiments, a method is described. The method includes: at a computer system in communication with an output generation component, one or more input devices, and an external computer system: receiving a request to initiate communication via the one or more input devices; and in response to receiving the request to initiate communication: Upon determining that the external computer system is connected to the terrestrial wireless communications network, initiating a process for communicating via the terrestrial wireless communications network; and upon determining that the external computer system is not connected to the terrestrial wireless communications network, providing, via the output generating component, use of the external Tips for computer systems to connect to non-terrestrial networks.

[0038] According to some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described that stores one or more programs configured to be configured with an output generating component, one or more input devices One or more processors of the computer system execute in communication with the external computer system. The one or more programs include instructions for: receiving a request to initiate communication via the one or more input devices; and in response to receiving the request to initiate communication: determining that the external computer system is connected to a terrestrial wireless communications network , initiating a process for communicating via the terrestrial wireless communications network; and upon determining that the external computer system is not connected to the terrestrial wireless communications network, via the terrestrial wireless communications network

The output generation component provides prompts for using the external computer system to connect to non-terrestrial networks.

[0039] According to some embodiments, a transient computer-readable storage medium is described that stores one or more programs configured to be configured with an output generating component, one or more input devices, and External computer system communications are executed by one or more processors of the computer system. The one or more programs include instructions for: receiving a request to initiate communication via the one or more input devices; and in response to receiving the request to initiate communication: determining that the external computer system is connected to a terrestrial wireless communications network , initiating a process for communicating via the terrestrial wireless communications network; and based on determining that the external computer system is not connected to the terrestrial wireless communications network, providing, via the output generating component, a prompt to use the external computer system to connect to the non-terrestrial network.

[0040] According to some embodiments, a computer system configured to communicate with an output generation component, one or more input devices, and an external computer system is described. The computer system includes: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for: : receiving a request to initiate communication via the one or more input devices; and in response to receiving the request to initiate communication: initiating a process for communicating via the terrestrial wireless communications network based on determining that the external computer system is connected to the terrestrial wireless communications network ; and based on determining that the external computer system is not connected to the terrestrial wireless communication network, providing a prompt to use the external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network via the output generating component.

[0041] According to some embodiments, a computer system configured to communicate with an output generation component, one or more input devices, and an external computer system is described. The computer system includes: means for receiving a request to initiate communication via the one or more input devices; and means for: in response to receiving the request to initiate communication: based on determining that the external computer system is connected to the terrestrial wireless a communications network that initiates a process for communicating via a terrestrial wireless communications network; and providing, via the output generating component, a prompt for using the external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network upon determining that the external computer system is not connected to the terrestrial wireless communications network. .

According to some embodiments, a computer program product is described that stores one or more programs configured to communicate with an output generating component, one or more input devices, and an external computer system. Executed by one or more processors of a computer system. The one or more programs include instructions for: receiving a request to initiate communication via the one or more input devices; and in response to receiving the request to initiate communication: determining that the external computer system is connected to a terrestrial wireless communications network , initiating a process for communicating via the terrestrial wireless communications network; and based on determining that the external computer system is not connected to the terrestrial wireless communications network, providing, via the output generating component, a prompt to use the external computer system to connect to the non-terrestrial network.

[0043] According to some embodiments, a method is described. The method includes, at a computer system in communication with an output generation component and one or more input devices, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more numbers that includes a selection of a corresponding number for text-based communication. input; and in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs including a selection of a corresponding number for text-based communication: based on determining that a set of alternative communication criteria is met, wherein the set of alternative communication criteria includes when the corresponding a first criterion that is satisfied when the number is a number of the corresponding type and a second criterion that is satisfied when the corresponding communication network is unavailable: via the output generating means outputs a prompt, the prompt including being executable via an alternative communication network different from the corresponding communication network Instructions for communication with the corresponding number.

[0044] According to some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with an output generating component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs Includes instructions for:

detecting a set of one or more inputs via the one or more input devices that includes a selection of a corresponding number for text-based communication; and responsive to detecting a set of one or more inputs that includes a selection of a corresponding number for text-based communication. The set of one or more inputs: a set of alternative communication criteria is determined to be satisfied, wherein the set of alternative communication criteria includes a first criterion that is satisfied when the corresponding number is a number of a corresponding type and a third criterion that is satisfied when the corresponding communication network is unavailable. Second criterion: A prompt is output via the output generating component, the prompt including an indication that communication with the corresponding number can be performed via an alternative communication network different from the corresponding communication network.

[0045] According to some embodiments, a transient computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured for execution by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with an output generating component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising Instructions for detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs including a selection of a corresponding number for text-based communication; and in response to detecting a set of one or more inputs including a selection of a corresponding number for text-based communication. The set of one or more inputs for selection of a corresponding number for communication: based on a determination that a set of alternative communication criteria is met, wherein the set of alternative communication criteria includes a first criterion that is met when the corresponding number is a number of a corresponding type and a first criterion that is met when the corresponding number is a number of a corresponding type. A second criterion is fulfilled when the communication network is unavailable: via the output generating means outputs a prompt including an indication that communication with the corresponding number can be performed via an alternative communication network different from the corresponding communication network.

[0046] According to some embodiments, a computer system configured to communicate with an output generation component and one or more input devices is described. The computer system includes: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for : detecting a set of one or more inputs via the one or more input devices that includes a selection of a corresponding number for text-based communication; and responsive to detecting that includes a selection of a corresponding number for text-based communication The set of one or more inputs: based on the determination that a set of alternative communication standards are met, wherein the set of alternative communication standards includes a first standard that is met when the corresponding number is a number of a corresponding type and a first standard that is met when the corresponding communication network is unavailable. Second criterion: a prompt is output via the output generating means, the prompt including an indication that communication with the corresponding number can be performed via an alternative communication network different from the corresponding communication network.

[0047] According to some embodiments, a computer system configured to communicate with an output generation component and one or more input devices is described. The computer system includes: means for detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs including a selection of a corresponding number for text-based communication; and means for : in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs including a selection of a corresponding number for text-based communication: based on determining that a set of alternative communication criteria is met, wherein the set of alternative communication criteria includes when the corresponding number is a first criterion that is satisfied when the corresponding communication network is not available and a second criterion that is satisfied when the corresponding communication network is unavailable: via the output generating component outputs a prompt, the prompt includes that the corresponding number can be performed via an alternative communication network different from the corresponding communication network communication instructions.

[0048] According to some embodiments, a computer program product is described. The computer program product includes one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with an output generating component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including: Instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs including a selection of a corresponding number for text-based communication; and in response to detecting a set of one or more inputs including a selection of a corresponding number for text-based communication. The set of one or more inputs selected: based on a determination that a set of alternative communication criteria is met, wherein the set of alternative communication criteria includes a first criterion that is met when the corresponding number is a number of the corresponding type and when the corresponding communication network is unavailable Second criterion met: output prompts via the output generation component,

The prompt includes an indication that communication with the corresponding number may be performed via an alternative communication network different from the corresponding communication network. [0049] According to some embodiments, a method is described. The method includes: at a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, wherein the computer system is configured to communicate via an alternative communication network when the corresponding communication network is unavailable: when the computer system communicates via the corresponding communication network detecting a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communications network test mode via the one or more input devices when the network's ability to communicate is enabled; in response to detecting a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate the alternative communications network test mode The set of one or more inputs of the request for a mode activates an alternative communication network test mode; and when the alternative communication network test mode is activated, a set of user interfaces are displayed via the display generation component.

[0050] According to some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured for execution by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, wherein the computer system is configured To communicate via an alternative communication network when the corresponding communication network is unavailable, the one or more programs include instructions for: when the computer system's ability to communicate via the corresponding communication network is enabled, communicate via the one or more An input device detects a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communications network test mode; in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communications network test mode, activating the alternative communications network test mode Select the communication network test mode; and when the alternative communication network test mode is activated, display a set of user interfaces via the display generation component.

[0051] According to some embodiments, a transient computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured for execution by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, wherein the computer system is configured to To communicate via an alternative communication network when the corresponding communication network is unavailable, the one or more programs include instructions for: when the computer system's ability to communicate via the corresponding communication network is enabled, communicate via the one or more The input device detects a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate the alternative communications network test mode; in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to activate the alternative communications network test mode, activating the alternative a communications network test mode; and displaying a set of user interfaces via the display generation component when the alternative communications network test mode is activated.

According to some embodiments, a computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices is described, wherein the computer system is configured to communicate via an alternative communication network when the corresponding communication network is unavailable. communication. The computer system includes: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for : detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communication network test mode when the computer system's ability to communicate via a corresponding communication network is enabled; in response to detecting activating the alternative communications network test mode corresponding to the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to activate the alternative communications network test mode; and displaying, via the display generation component, a set of user interfaces when the alternative communications network test mode is activated .

According to some embodiments, a computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices is described, wherein the computer system is configured to communicate via an alternative communication network when the corresponding communication network is unavailable. communication. The computer system includes means for detecting, via the one or more input devices, a request corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communications network test mode when the computer system's ability to communicate via a corresponding communications network is enabled. a set of one or more inputs; means for: activating an alternative communications network test mode in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate the alternative communications network test mode; and for: Means of operation: when the alternative communication network test mode is activated, a set of user interfaces are displayed via the display generation component

noodle.

[0054] According to some embodiments, a computer program product is described. The computer program product includes one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, wherein the computer system is configured to operate on a corresponding communications network communicating via an alternative communication network when unavailable, the one or more programs including instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, the corresponding communication network when the computer system's ability to communicate via the corresponding communication network is enabled. a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communications network test mode; activating an alternative communications network test mode in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communications network test mode ; and displaying a set of user interfaces via the display generation component when the alternative communication network test mode is activated.

[0055] According to some embodiments, a method is described. The method includes, at a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one(s) corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending a communication to a respective recipient. or multiple inputs; in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending a communication to the corresponding recipient, initiating a process for sending a communication to the corresponding recipient; During the process in which the recipient sends the communication, detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display a system user interface; and in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display a system user interface. and grouping one or more inputs, displaying a system user interface and a user interface object corresponding to the communication via the display generation component, including: based on determining that a process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient is in a first state, in a first appearance Display a user interface object corresponding to the communication; and display the communication corresponding to the communication in a second appearance different from the first appearance based on determining that the process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient is in a second state that is different from the first state. user interface object.

[0056] According to some embodiments, a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium is described. The non-transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs Includes instructions for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending a communication to a corresponding recipient; The set of one or more inputs to a request for a process to send a communication to a corresponding recipient, initiating the process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient; during the process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient, via the one or more the input device detects a set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to display the system user interface; and responsive to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to display the system user interface, display the system via the display generation component The user interface and the user interface object corresponding to the communication include: displaying the user interface object corresponding to the communication in a first appearance according to the determination that the process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient is in the first state; and according to the determination to use When the process of sending the communication to the corresponding recipient is in a second state different from the first state, the user interface object corresponding to the communication is displayed in a second appearance different from the first appearance.

[0057] According to some embodiments, a transient computer-readable storage medium is described. The transitory computer-readable storage medium stores one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs comprising Instructions for detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending a communication to a corresponding recipient; the set of one or more inputs to a request by the corresponding recipient to send the communication, initiating the process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient; during the process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient, via the one or more A set of input device detections corresponding to requests to display the system user interface

one or more inputs; and in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to display the system user interface, displaying the system user interface and the user interface object corresponding to the communication via the display generation component, including: according to Determining that the process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient is in a first state, displaying a user interface object corresponding to the communication in a first appearance; and determining that the process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient is in a state different from the first state. A second state of the state displays the user interface object corresponding to the communication in a second appearance that is different from the first appearance.

[0058] According to some embodiments, a computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices is described. The computer system includes: one or more processors; and memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for : detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending a communication to the respective recipient; responsive to detecting a set of one or more inputs corresponding to initiating a process for sending a communication to the respective recipient; The set of one or more inputs of a request for a process that initiates a process for sending a communication to a corresponding recipient; and during the process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient, detecting via the one or more input devices corresponding to a display a set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to display the system user interface; and responsive to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to display the system user interface, displaying the system user interface via the display generating component and corresponding to the communication The user interface object includes: displaying the user interface object corresponding to the communication in a first appearance according to the determination that the process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient is in the first state; and according to the determination for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient. The communication process is in a second state that is different from the first state, and the user interface object corresponding to the communication is displayed in a second appearance that is different from the first appearance.

[0059] According to some embodiments, a computer system configured to communicate with a display generation component and one or more input devices is described. The computer system includes: means for detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending a communication to a respective recipient; Means: In response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient, initiating a process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient; means for: detecting, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display a system user interface during a process for transmitting the communication to the respective recipient; and means for: in response to detecting to the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to display the system user interface, display the system user interface and the user interface object corresponding to the communication via the display generation component, including: based on the determination for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient The process is in a first state, displaying the user interface object corresponding to the communication in a first appearance; and the process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient is in a second state that is different from the first state, and is different from the first state. A second appearance of a appearance displays user interface objects corresponding to the communication.

[0060] According to some embodiments, a computer program product is described. The computer program product includes one or more programs configured to be executed by one or more processors of a computer system in communication with a display generation component and one or more input devices, the one or more programs including: Instructions: to detect, via the one or more input devices, a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending a communication to the corresponding recipient; in response to detecting a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending a communication to the corresponding recipient; The set of one or more inputs requested by the process of communication, initiating the process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient; and during the process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient, detecting the corresponding input device via the one or more input devices a set of one or more inputs in response to a request to display a system user interface; and in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display a system user interface, displaying, via the display generation component, the system user interface and corresponding The user interface object of the communication includes: used to send the corresponding receiving message according to the determination

The process of sending the communication by the party is in a first state, displaying a user interface object corresponding to the communication in a first appearance; and based on determining that the process of sending the communication to the corresponding recipient is in a second state that is different from the first state, A user interface object corresponding to the communication is displayed in a second appearance that is different from the first appearance.

[0061] Executable instructions for performing these functions are optionally included in a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors. Executable instructions for performing these functions optionally included in a transitory computer-readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors.

[0062] Thus, devices are provided with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for managing communication user interfaces, thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction of such devices. Such methods and interfaces may supplement or replace other methods for managing communication user interfaces.

Description of drawings

[0063] For a better understanding of the various described embodiments, reference should be made to the following detailed description in conjunction with the accompanying drawings, wherein like reference numerals indicate corresponding parts throughout the figures.

[0064] FIG. 1A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device with a touch-sensitive display, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0065] FIG. 1B is a block diagram illustrating example components for event processing in accordance with some embodiments.

[0066] FIG. 2 illustrates a portable multifunction device with a touch screen, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0067] FIG. 3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunctional device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, according to some embodiments.

[0068] FIG. 4A illustrates an example user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0069] FIG. 4B illustrates an exemplary user interface for a multifunctional device having a touch-sensitive surface separate from the display, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0070] Figure 5A illustrates a personal electronic device according to some embodiments.

[0071] FIG. 5B is a block diagram illustrating a personal electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.

[0072] Figures 6A-6y illustrate exemplary user interfaces for initiating communications when a terrestrial wireless communications network is unreachable and for communicating in a low bandwidth mode, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0073] FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating a method for initiating communications when a terrestrial wireless communications network is unreachable, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0074] FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating a method for initiating communications when a terrestrial wireless communications network is unreachable, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0075] Figures 9A-9U illustrate an exemplary user interface for aligning a computer system with one or more satellites in accordance with some embodiments.

[0076] FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for aligning a computer system with one or more satellites in accordance with some embodiments.

[0077] FIGS. 11A-11P illustrate exemplary user interfaces for managing message recipients in accordance with some embodiments.

[0078] FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a method for managing message recipients in accordance with some embodiments.

[0079] Figures 13A-13AA illustrate an example user interface for sending updated location information in accordance with some embodiments.

[0080] FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a method for sending updated location information in accordance with some embodiments. [0081] Figures 15A-15AF illustrate an exemplary user interface for initiating communications in accordance with some embodiments. [0082] FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating a method for initiating communications in accordance with some embodiments.

[0083] Figures 17A-17R illustrate an exemplary user interface for initiating communications via an alternative communications network, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0084] FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating a method for initiating communications via an alternative communications network, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0085] Figures 19A-19O illustrate an exemplary user interface for testing alternative communication networks in accordance with some embodiments.

[0086] FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating a method for testing alternative communications networks in accordance with some embodiments.

[0087] Figures 21A-21L illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing user interface objects corresponding to processes, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0088] FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating a method for providing a user interface object corresponding to a process, in accordance with some embodiments.

Description of embodiments

[0090] The following description sets forth exemplary methods, parameters, etc. It should be appreciated, however, that such descriptions are not intended to limit the scope of the disclosure, but are provided as a description of exemplary embodiments.

[0091] There is a need for electronic devices that provide efficient methods and interfaces for managing communications. For example, methods and user interfaces are needed for initiating communications, determining whether to use terrestrial or non-terrestrial (eg, satellite) communications networks, and providing feedback to users for aligning satellites for communications. For example, methods and user interfaces are needed for sending updated location information (eg, when terrestrial communications networks are unavailable). Such technologies may reduce the cognitive load on users who need to transmit or share updated location information under certain conditions (e.g., emergencies), thereby enhancing effectiveness by ensuring proper use of the device. Additionally, such techniques reduce processor power and battery power that would otherwise be wasted on redundant user input.

[0092] FIGS. 1A-1B, 2, 3, 4A-4B, and 5A-5B below provide descriptions of exemplary devices for performing techniques for managing communications. 6A-6Y illustrate exemplary user interfaces for initiating communications when a terrestrial wireless communications network is unreachable and communicating in a low-bandwidth communications mode, in accordance with some embodiments. Figure 7 is a flowchart illustrating a method for initiating communication when a terrestrial wireless communication network is unreachable. Figure 8 is a flowchart illustrating a method for communicating in a low bandwidth mode. The user interfaces in Figures 6A to 6y are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in Figures 7 and 8.

[0093] Figures 9A-9U illustrate an exemplary user interface for aligning a computer system with one or more satellites in accordance with some embodiments. Figure 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for aligning a computer system with one or more satellites. The user interfaces in Figures 9A-9U are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in Figure 10.

[0094] Figures 11A-11P illustrate exemplary user interfaces for managing message recipients in accordance with some embodiments. Figure 12 is a flowchart illustrating a method for managing message recipients. The user interfaces in Figures 11A-11P are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in Figure 12.

[0095] Figures 13A-13AA illustrate an example user interface for sending updated location information in accordance with some embodiments. Figure 14 is a flowchart illustrating a method for sending updated location information. The user interfaces in Figures 13A-13AA are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in Figure 14.

[0096] Figures 15A-15AF illustrate an exemplary user interface for initiating communications in accordance with some embodiments. picture

16 is a flowchart showing a method for initiating communication. The user interfaces in Figures 15A-15AF are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in Figure 16.

[0097] Figures 17A-17R illustrate an exemplary user interface for initiating communications via an alternative communications network, in accordance with some embodiments. Figure 18 is a flowchart illustrating a method for initiating communications via an alternative communications network. The user interfaces in Figures 17A-17R are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in Figure 18.

[0098] Figures 19A-19O illustrate an exemplary user interface for testing alternative communication networks in accordance with some embodiments. Figure 20 is a flowchart illustrating a method for testing alternative communications networks. The user interfaces in Figures 19A-19O are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in Figure 20.

[0099] Figures 21A-21L illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing user interface objects corresponding to processes, in accordance with some embodiments. Figure 22 is a flowchart illustrating a method for providing user interface objects corresponding to processes. The user interfaces in Figures 21A-21L are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in Figure 22.

[0100] The processes described below enhance device operability and make user-device interfaces more efficient through various techniques (e.g., by helping users provide appropriate input and reducing user errors when operating/interacting with the device) , including by providing improved visual feedback to the user, reducing the amount of input required to perform an action, providing additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls, and performing actions when a set of conditions has been met. No further user input and/or additional technology is required. These technologies also reduce power usage and extend a device's battery life by enabling users to use the device faster and more efficiently. Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an action and providing clear feedback to the user enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in emergency situations for several reasons. Using the device effectively saves battery life, which is important in emergency situations because some emergency communication features use satellite communications and WeChat communication may use a lot of energy (e.g., more energy than cellular communication), and also because in emergency situations Opportunity to recharge the device may be limited (for example, because the user is in a remote location where power is unavailable). A user interface that clearly instructs how to use the device quickly and efficiently is especially important in emergency situations, as users may be nervous and more likely to make mistakes. In emergency situations, reducing errors by providing clear instructions and feedback saves time communicating with emergency services, which increases the likelihood that emergency assistance will be provided more quickly.

[0101] Furthermore, in methods described herein in which one or more steps depend on one or more conditions being met, it should be understood that the method may be repeated in multiple iterations, such that during the iteration, All conditions determining a step in the method have been met in different iterations of the method. For example, if a method requires performing a first step if a condition is met, and performing a second step if the condition is not met, one of ordinary skill will know to repeat the stated steps until both the condition is met and the condition is not met. (In no particular order). Thus, a method described as having one or more steps that depend on one or more conditions being satisfied may be rewritten as a method that repeats until each condition stated in the method has been satisfied. However, this does not require that the system or computer-readable medium state that the system or computer-readable medium contains instructions for performing a conditional operation based on the satisfaction of the corresponding condition or conditions, and therefore be able to determine whether the condition has been satisfied possible, without explicitly repeating the steps of the method until all conditions determining the step in the method have been met. One of ordinary skill in the art will also understand that, similar to a method having optional steps, a system or computer-readable storage medium may repeat the steps of the method as many times as necessary to ensure that all optional steps have been performed .

[0102] Although the following description uses the terms "first," "second," etc. to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by the terms. In some embodiments, these terms are used to distinguish one element from another element. For example, a first touch could be named a second touch and similarly a second touch could be named a first touch, without departing from the scope of the various described embodiments. In some implementations, the first touch and the second touch are two separate references to the same touch. In a

In some embodiments, both the first touch and the second touch are touches, but they are not the same touch.

[0103] The terminology used in the description of the various described embodiments herein is for the purpose of describing the particular embodiment only and is not intended to be limiting. As used in the description of the various described embodiments and the appended claims, the singular forms "a", "an" and "the" are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. It will also be understood that the term "and/or" as used herein refers to and encompasses any and all possible combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. It will also be understood that the terms "comprising" and/or "comprising" when used herein specify the presence of stated features, integers, steps, operations, elements and/or parts, but do not exclude the presence or addition of one or Various other features, integers, steps, operations, elements, parts, and/or groupings thereof.

[0104] The term "if" is optionally interpreted to mean "at that time," "at the time," or "in response to determining" or "in response to detecting," depending on the context. Similarly, depending on the context, the phrase "if it is determined..." or "if [stated condition or event] is detected" is optionally interpreted to mean "when it is determined..." or "in response to the determination..." or "on detection of [stated condition or event]" or in response to detection of [stated condition or event]".

[0105] This document describes embodiments of electronic devices, user interfaces for such devices, and associated processes for using such devices. In some embodiments, the device is a portable communication device, such as a mobile phone, that also includes other functionality such as PDA and/or music player functionality. Exemplary embodiments of portable multifunctional devices include, but are not limited to, products from Apple Inc. (Cupertino, California) for iPhone® devices, iPod Touch® devices, and iPad® devices. Other portable electronic devices are optionally used, such as laptops or tablets with touch-sensitive surfaces (eg, touch screen displays and/or touch pads). It should also be understood that in some embodiments, the device is not a portable communications device, but rather a desktop computer having a touch-sensitive surface (eg, a touch screen display and/or touch pad). In some embodiments, the electronic device is a computer system in communication with the display generation component (eg, via wireless communication, via wired communication). The display generation component is configured to provide visual output, such as display via a CRT display, display via an LED display, or display via image projection. In some embodiments, a display generation component is integrated with the computer system. In some embodiments, the display generation component is separate from the computer system. As used herein, "displaying" content includes displaying content (e.g., by display controller 156 rendered or decoded video data).

[0106] In the following discussion, an electronic device including a display and a touch-sensitive surface is described. However, it should be understood that the electronic device optionally includes one or more other physical user interface devices, such as a physical keyboard, mouse, and/or joystick.

[0107] The device typically supports a variety of applications, such as one or more of the following: drawing applications, rendering applications, word processing applications, website creation applications, disk editing applications, spreadsheet applications, Gaming Apps, Phone Apps, Video Conferencing Apps, Email Apps, Instant Messaging Apps, Fitness Support Apps, Photo Management Apps, Digital Camera Apps, Digital Video Camera Apps, Web Browsing Apps, Digital Music player application and/or digital video player application.

[0108] Various applications executing on the device optionally use at least one common physical user interface device, such as a touch-sensitive surface. One or more functions of the touch-sensitive surface and corresponding information displayed on the device are optionally adapted and/or varied for different applications and/or within respective applications. In this way, the common physical architecture of the device, such as a touch-sensitive surface, optionally supports various applications with a user interface that is intuitive and clear to the user.

[0109] Attention now turns to an embodiment of a portable device having a touch-sensitive display. Figure 1A is a schematic diagram according to

A block diagram of a portable multifunction device 100 with a touch-sensitive display system 112 of some embodiments. Touch-sensitive display 112 is sometimes referred to as a "touch screen" for convenience, and is sometimes referred to or referred to as a "touch-sensitive display system." Device 100 includes memory 102 (which optionally includes one or more computer-readable storage media), memory controller 122, one or more processing units (CPUs) 120, peripheral interfaces 118, RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110. Speaker 111, microphone 113, input/output (I/O) subsystem 106, other input control devices 116, and external ports 124. Device 100 optionally includes one or more optical sensors 164. Device 100 optionally includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165 for detecting the intensity of contact on device 100 (eg, a touch-sensitive surface, such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100 ). Device 100 optionally includes one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile output on device 100 (eg, on a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100 or touchpad 355 of device 300 to generate tactile output). These components optionally communicate via one or more communication buses or signal lines 103 .

[0110] As used in this document and the claims, the term "intensity" of contact on a touch-sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of contact (e.g., finger contact) on the touch-sensitive surface. ), or a surrogate for the force or pressure of contact on a touch-sensitive surface. The intensity of contact has a range of values that includes at least four different values and more typically includes hundreds of different values (eg, at least 256). The intensity of contact is optionally determined (or measured) using various methods and various sensors or combinations of sensors. For example, one or more force sensors below or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are optionally used to measure force at different points on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (eg, weighted average) to determine an estimated contact force. Similarly, the pressure-sensitive tip of the stylus is optionally used to determine the pressure of the stylus on the touch-sensitive surface. Alternatively, the size of the contact area detected on the touch-sensitive surface and/or its change, the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface in the vicinity of the contact and/or its change, and/or the resistance of the touch-sensitive surface in the vicinity of the contact and/or its change. Variation is optionally used as a surrogate for the force or pressure of contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, surrogate measurements of contact force or pressure are used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (For example, intensity thresholds are described in units corresponding to the surrogate measurement). In some implementations, a surrogate measurement of contact force or pressure is converted to an estimated force or pressure, and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is measured in units of pressure pressure threshold). Using the intensity of contact as an attribute of user input allows the user to access additional device functionality that would otherwise be inaccessible to the user on smaller devices with limited real-world area used for (e.g., on touch-sensitive displays) ) display affordances represent and/or receive user input (e.g., via a touch-sensitive display, touch-sensitive surface, or physical/mechanical control such as a knob or button).

[0111] As used herein and in the claims, the term "tactile output" refers to the physical displacement of a device relative to the device's previous position, a component of the device (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface) that will be detected by a user using the user's sense of touch ) The physical displacement of a component relative to another component of the device (e.g., the housing), or the displacement of a component relative to the center of mass of the device. For example, where a device or a component of a device is in contact with a user's touch-sensitive surface (e.g., fingers, palm, or other part of the user's hand), tactile output generated through physical displacement will be interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation that corresponds to A perceived change in the physical characteristics of a device or a component of a device. For example, movement of a touch-sensitive surface (eg, a touch-sensitive display or trackpad) is optionally interpreted by the user as a "press click" or "release click" of a physical actuation button. In some cases, the user will feel a tactile sensation, such as a "press click" or a "release click," even after the touch-sensitive surface is physically pressed (eg, displaced) by the user's movement. When the physical actuation button does not move. As another example, movement of the touch-sensitive surface may optionally be interpreted or sensed by the user as "roughness" of the touch-sensitive surface, even when there is no change in the smoothness of the touch-sensitive surface. While such a user's interpretation of a touch will be limited by the user's individualized sensory perception, many sensory perceptions of touch are common to most users. Therefore, when tactile output is described as corresponding to a specific sensory perception of the user (e.g., "press

(down click, release click, roughness), unless otherwise stated, the generated tactile output corresponds to the physical displacement of the device or its components that would generate a typical (or average) user's The sensory perception.

[0112] It should be understood that device 100 is only one example of a portable multifunctional device and that device 100 may optionally have more or fewer components than those shown, optionally combining two or more components. , or optionally with a different configuration or arrangement of these components. The various components shown in Figure 1A are implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of both hardware and software, including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits.

[0113] Memory 102 optionally includes high-speed random access memory, and optionally also includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices. Memory controller 122 optionally controls other components of device 100 to access memory 102 .

[0114] Peripheral interface 118 may be used to couple input peripherals and output peripherals of the device to CPU 120 and memory 102 . The one or more processors 120 run or execute various software programs, such as computer programs (eg, including instructions) and/or sets of instructions stored in the memory 102 to perform various functions of the device 100 and process data. In some embodiments, peripheral interface 118, CPU 120, and memory controller 122 are optionally implemented on a single chip such as chip 104. In some other embodiments, they are optionally implemented on separate chips.

[0115] RF (radio frequency) circuit 108 receives and transmits RF signals, also known as electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 108 converts electrical signals to/from electromagnetic signals and communicates with communication networks and other communication devices via the electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 108 optionally includes well-known circuitry for performing these functions, including, but not limited to, antenna systems, RF transceivers, one or more amplifiers, tuners, one or more oscillators, digital signal processors, encoders, etc. Decoding chipset, Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card, memory and more. RF circuitry 108 optionally communicates through wireless communications with networks and other devices such as the Internet (also known as the World Wide Web (WWW)), intranets, and/or wireless networks (such as cellular telephone networks, wireless local area networks (LAN) and/or Metropolitan Area Network (MAN)) oRF circuitry 108 optionally includes well-known circuitry for detecting near field communications (NFC) fields, such as through short range communications radios. Wireless communications optionally use any of a variety of communications standards, protocols and technologies, including but not limited to Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA), High Speed Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA), Evolution, Data Only (EV-DO), HSPA, HSPA+, Dual Cell HSPA (DC-HSPDA) , Long Term Evolution (LTE), Near Field Communication (NFC), Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (W-CDMA), Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA), Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy (BTLE), Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n, and/or IEEE 802.11ac), Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, email protocols (e.g., , Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP) and/or Post Office Protocol (POP)), instant messaging (e.g., Extensible Message Processing and Presence Protocol (XMPP), Session Initiation Protocol for Instant Messaging and Presence Exploitation Extensions (SIMPLE), Instant Messaging and Presence Service (IMPS)), and/or Short Message Service (SMS), or any other appropriate communications protocol including communications protocols that have not been developed as of the date of submission of this document.

[0116] Audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, and microphone 113 provide the audio interface between the user and device 100. Audio circuit 110 receives audio data from peripheral device interface 118 , converts the audio data into electrical signals, and transmits the electrical signals to speaker 111 . Speaker 111 converts electrical signals into human-audible sound waves. Audio circuitry 110 also receives electrical signals converted from sound waves by microphone 113 . Audio circuitry 110 converts the electrical signals into audio data and transmits the audio data to peripherals interface 118 for processing. Audio data is optionally retrieved from and/or transferred to memory 102 and/or RF circuitry 108 by peripherals interface 118 . In some embodiments, audio circuitry 110 also includes a headset jack (eg, 212 in Figure 2). The headset jack provides an interface between the audio circuitry 110 and a removable audio input/output peripheral.

The equipment may be such as an output-only headset or a headset having both an output (eg, a monaural headset or a binaural headset) and an input (eg, a microphone).

I/O subsystem 106 couples input/output peripherals on device 100, such as touch screen 112 and other input control devices 116, to peripheral device interface 118. I/O subsystem 106 optionally includes a display controller 156 , optical sensor controller 158, depth camera controller 169, intensity sensor controller 159, tactile feedback controller 161, and one or more input controllers 160 for other input or control devices. The one or more input controllers 160 receive electrical signals from/send electrical signals to other input control devices 116 . The other input control devices 116 optionally include physical buttons (eg, push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slide switches, joysticks, click dials, and the like. In some implementations, input controller 160 is optionally coupled to any (or not to any of) a keyboard, an infrared port, a USB port, and Pointing device such as a mouse. one or more buttons (eg, 208 in Figure 2) optionally includes up/down buttons for speaker 111 and/or microphone 113 volume control. The one or more buttons optionally include a push button (eg, 206 in Figure 2). In some embodiments, an electronic device is a computer system that communicates (eg, via wireless communication, via wired communication) with one or more input devices. In some embodiments, the one or more input devices include a touch-sensitive surface (eg, a trackpad as part of a touch-sensitive display). In some embodiments, one or more input devices include one or more camera sensors (e.g., One or more optical sensors 164 and/or one or more depth camera sensors 175 ), such as for tracking the user's gestures (eg, hand gestures and/or air gestures) as input. In some embodiments, one or more input devices are integrated with the computer system. In some embodiments, one or more input devices are separate from the computer system. In some embodiments, the mid-air gesture is detected without the user touching an input element that is part of the device (or independent of an input element that is part of the device) and is based on the detected portion of the user's body passing through Movement in the air (including movement of the user's body relative to an absolute reference (e.g., the angle of the user's arm relative to the ground or the distance of the user's hand relative to the ground), movement relative to another part of the user's body (e.g., the user movement of the user's hand relative to the user's shoulder, movement of one of the user's hands relative to the user's other hand, and/or movement of the user's fingers relative to the user's other finger or part of the hand), and Gestures that involve absolute movement of a part of the user's body (e.g., a tap gesture that involves a hand in a predetermined posture that will move a predetermined amount and/or speed, or a shake gesture that involves a predetermined speed or amount of rotation of a part of the user's body).

[0118] A quick press of the push button optionally disengages the lock of the touch screen 112 or optionally begins the process of unlocking the device using gestures on the touch screen, as in a submission titled "Unlocking a Device by Performing Gestures on an Unlock Image" U.S. Patent Application No. 11/322,549 (i.e., U.S. Patent No. 7,657,849), which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. A long press of a push button (eg, 206) optionally powers the device 100 on or off. The functionality of one or more buttons is optionally user-customizable. The touch screen 112 is used to implement virtual or soft buttons and one or more soft keyboards.

[0119] Touch-sensitive display 112 provides an input and output interface between the device and the user. Display controller 156 receives electrical signals from and/or sends electrical signals to touch screen 112 . Touch screen 112 displays visual output to the user. Visual output optionally includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively, "Graphics"). In some implementations, some or all of the visual output optionally corresponds to user interface objects.

[0120] Touch screen 112 has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor, or set of sensors that accepts input from a user based on tactile and/or tactile contact. Touch screen 112 and display controller 156 (together with any associated modules and/or instruction sets in memory 102 ) detect contact on touch screen 112 (and any movement or interruption of the contact) and convert the detected contact

Translated into interactions with user interface objects (eg, one or more soft keys, icons, web pages, or images) displayed on touch screen 112 . In the exemplary embodiment, the point of contact between touch screen 112 and the user corresponds to the user's finger.

Touch screen 112 optionally uses LCD (liquid crystal display) technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, or LED (light emitting diode) technology, but in other embodiments other display technologies are used. Touch screen 112 and display controller 156 Contact is optionally detected using any of a variety of touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch screen 112 . Any movement or interruption of the touch sensing technologies include, but are not limited to, capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies. In an exemplary embodiment, projected mutual capacitance sensing technology is used, such as that used in the iPhone® and iPod Touch® from Apple Inc. (Cupertino, California).

[0122] The touch-sensitive display in some embodiments of touch screen 112 is optionally similar to the multi-touch-sensitive touch panels described in the following U.S. Patents: 6,323,846 (Westerman et al.), 6,570,557 (Westerman et al.), and/or 6,677, 932 (Westerman et al.) and/or U.S. Patent Publication 2002/0015024A1, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. However, touch screen 112 displays visual output from device 100, whereas a touch-sensitive touchpad does not provide visual output.

[0123] Touch-sensitive displays in some embodiments of touch screen 112 are described in: (1) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/381,313, Multipoint Touch Surface Control 1er', filed May 2, 2006; (2) 2004 U.S. Patent Application No. 10/840,862, "Multipoint Touchscreen" submitted on May 6, 2004; (3) U.S. Patent Application No. 10/903,964, Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices" submitted on July 30, 2004; (4) 2005 January U.S. Patent Application No. 11/048,264, "Gestures For Touch Sensitive Input Devices" submitted on January 31; (5) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/038,590, Mode-Based Graphical User Interfaces For Touch Sensitive, submitted on January 18, 2005 Input Devices; (6) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/228,758 filed on September 16, 2005, "Virtual Input Device Placement On A Touch Screen User Interface"; (7) U.S. Patent Application No. 11/228, 700, 'Operation Of A Computer With A Touch Screen Interface, filed on September 16, 2005; (8) 2005 U.S. Patent Application No. 11/228,737, Activating Virtual Keys Of A Touch-Screen Virtual Keyboard^^, filed on September 16; and U.S. Patent Application No. 11/367,749/'MultiFunctional Hand-Held Device, filed on March 3, 2006 . All of these applications are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

[0124] Touch screen 112 optionally has a video resolution in excess of 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen has a video resolution of approximately 160 dpi. The user optionally makes contact with touch screen 112 using any suitable object or attachment such as a stylus, finger, or the like. In some embodiments, the user interface is designed to work primarily through finger-based contacts and gestures, which may not be as precise as stylus-based input due to the larger contact area of the finger on the touch screen. In some embodiments, the device converts rough finger-based input into precise pointer/cursor positions or commands for performing the user's desired action.

[0125] In some embodiments, in addition to a touch screen, device 100 optionally includes a touchpad for activating or deactivating certain functions. In some embodiments, the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output. The touchpad is optionally a touch-sensitive surface separate from the touch screen 112 or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch screen.

[0126] Device 100 also includes a power system 162 for powering various components. Power system 162 optionally includes a power management system, one or more power sources (eg, batteries, alternating current (AC)), a recharging system, power fault detection circuitry,

Power converters or inverters, power status indicators (e.g., light emitting diodes (LEDs)), and any other components associated with the generation, management, and distribution of power in portable devices.

[0127] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more optical sensors 164. FIG. 1A shows an optical sensor coupled to optical sensor controller 158 in I/O subsystem 106 . Optical sensor 164 optionally includes a charge coupled device (CCD) or complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor. Optical sensor 164 receives light from the environment projected through one or more lenses and converts the light into data representing an image. In conjunction with imaging module 143 (also called a camera module), optical sensor 164 optionally captures still images or video. In some embodiments, the optical sensor is located on the rear of the device 100, opposite the touch screen display 112 on the front of the device, enabling the touch screen display to be used as a viewfinder for still and/or video image capture. In some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the front of the device such that an image of the user is optionally captured for video conferencing while the user views other video conferencing participants on the touch screen display. In some embodiments, the position of the optical sensor 164 can be changed by the user (e.g., by rotating the lens and sensor in the device housing) such that a single optical sensor 164 is used with a touch screen display for video conferencing and still images and/or Video images are collected from both.

[0128] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more depth camera sensors 175. FIG. 1A shows a depth camera sensor coupled to depth camera controller 169 in I/O subsystem 106 . Depth camera sensor 175 receives data from the environment to create a three-dimensional model of objects (eg, faces) within the scene from a viewpoint (eg, depth camera sensor). In some embodiments, in conjunction with imaging module 143 (also referred to as a camera module), depth camera sensor 175 is optionally used to determine depth maps of different portions of images captured by imaging module 143 . In some embodiments, a depth camera sensor is located on the front of device 100 such that images of the user with depth information are optionally acquired for video conferencing while the user views other video conferencing participants on the touch screen display, and captures images with Selfie of depth map data. In some embodiments, depth camera sensor 175 is located at the rear of the device, or both the rear and front of device 100 . In some embodiments, the position of the depth camera sensor 175 can be changed by the user (e.g., by rotating the lens and sensor in the device housing) such that the depth camera sensor 175 is used with a touch screen display for video conferencing and still images and/or Video images are collected from both.

[0129] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165. FIG. 1A illustrates a contact intensity sensor coupled to intensity sensor controller 159 in I/O subsystem 106 . Contact intensity sensor 165 optionally includes one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electrical force sensors, piezo force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other intensity sensors (e.g., for measuring touch A sensor that detects the force (or pressure) of contact on a sensitive surface). Contact intensity sensor 165 receives contact intensity information (eg, pressure information or a proxy for pressure information) from the environment. In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is collocated with or adjacent to a touch-sensitive surface (eg, touch-sensitive display system 112). In some embodiments, at least one contact strength sensor is located on the rear of device 100 opposite touch screen display 112 on the front of device 100 .

[0130] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more proximity sensors 166. FIG. 1A shows proximity sensor 166 coupled to peripherals interface 118 . Alternatively, proximity sensor 166 is optionally coupled to input controller 160 in I/O subsystem 106 . Proximity sensor 166 is optionally implemented as described in the following U.S. Patent Application Nos.: 11/241,839, entitled "Proximity Detector In Handheld Device"; 11/240,788, entitled "Proximity Detector In Handheld Device"; 11/620,702 , named "Using Ambient Light Sensor To Augment Proximity Sensor Output"; 11/586,862, named "Automated Response To And Sensing Of User Activity In Portable Devices"; and 11/638,251, named "Methods

And Systems For Automatic Configuration Of Peripherals", these U.S. patent applications are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. In some embodiments, when the multifunctional device is placed near the user's ear (e.g., when the user is making a phone call ), the proximity sensor turns off and the touch screen 112 is disabled.

[0131] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more tactile output generators 167. FIG. 1A shows a haptic output generator coupled to haptic feedback controller 161 in I/O subsystem 106 . Tactile output generator 167 optionally includes one or more electroacoustic devices such as speakers or other audio components; and/or electromechanical devices for converting energy into linear motion such as motors, solenoids, electroactive polymers, pressure Electric actuators, electrostatic actuators, or other haptic output generating components (e.g., components used to convert electrical signals into haptic output on a device). Contact strength sensor 165 receives tactile feedback generation instructions from tactile feedback module 133 and generates tactile output on device 100 that can be felt by a user of device 100 . In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator is collocated with or adjacent a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112 ), and optionally provided vertically (e.g., inward/outward of the surface of device 100 ) or laterally (eg, backward and forward in the same plane as the surface of device 100 ) to generate tactile output. In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the rear of device 100 opposite touch screen display 112 on the front of device 100 .

[0132] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more accelerometers 168. FIG. 1A shows accelerometer 168 coupled to peripherals interface 118 . Alternatively, accelerometer 168 is optionally coupled to input controller 160 in I/O subsystem 106 . The accelerometer 168 optionally performs as described in U.S. Patent Publications 20050190059, "Acceleration-based Theft Detection System for Portable Electronic Devices" and 20060017692, Methods And Apparatuses For Operating A Portable Device Based On An Accelerometer, both U.S. patent publications are incorporated by reference in their entirety. In some embodiments, information is displayed on the touch screen display in either a portrait view or a landscape view based on analysis of data received from one or more accelerometers. Device 100 optionally includes a magnetometer and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver in addition to accelerometer 168 for obtaining information about the position and orientation (eg, portrait or landscape) of device 100 .

[0133] In some embodiments, the software components stored in memory 102 include operating system 126, communications module (or instruction set) 128, contact/motion module (or instruction set) 130, graphics module (or instruction set) 132 , a text input module (or set of instructions) 134 , a global positioning system (GPS) module (or set of instructions) 135 , and an application program (or set of instructions) 136 . Additionally, in some embodiments, memory 102 (FIG. 1A) or 370 (FIG. 3) stores device/global internal state 157, as shown in FIGS. 1A and 3. Device/global internal state 157 includes one or more of the following: active application state, which indicates which applications (if any) are currently active; display state, which indicates what applications, views, or other information occupy Various areas of the touch screen display 112; sensor status, including information obtained from the device's various sensors and input control devices 116; and location information related to the device's position and/or attitude.

Operating system 126 (e.g., Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS various software components and/or drivers for power management, etc.) and facilitate communication between various hardware components and software components.

[0135] Communications module 128 facilitates communication with other devices through one or more external ports 124 and also includes various software components for processing data received by RF circuitry 108 and/or external ports 124. External ports 124 (e.g., Universal Serial Bus (USB), FireWire, etc.) are suitable for coupling to other devices directly, or indirectly through a network (e.g.,

Internet, wireless LAN, etc.) for coupling. In some embodiments, the external port is a multi-pin (eg, 30-pin) connector that is the same as or similar to and/or compatible with the 30-pin connector used on iPod® (a trademark of Apple Inc.) devices.

[0136] Contact/motion module 130 optionally detects contact with touch screen 112 (in conjunction with display controller 156) and other touch-sensitive devices (eg, a touchpad or a physical click wheel). Contact/motion module 130 includes various software components for performing various operations related to contact detection, such as determining whether contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger press event), determining the strength of the contact (e.g., the force of the contact or pressure, or a surrogate for the force or pressure of contact), determining whether there is movement in contact and tracking movement on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger drag events), and determining whether contact has ceased (e.g. , detect finger lift event or contact break). Contact/motion module 130 receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface. Determining movement of the contact point optionally includes determining velocity (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or acceleration (change in magnitude and/or direction) of the contact point, the movement of the contact point being determined by a series of Contact data representation. These operations are optionally applied to a single point of contact (eg, single finger contact) or multiple points of simultaneous contact (eg, "multi-touch"/multiple finger contacts). In some implementations, contact/motion module 130 and display controller 156 detect contacts on the touch pad.

[0137] In some embodiments, the contact/motion module 130 uses a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an action has been performed by the user (eg, determine whether the user has "clicked" on an icon). In some embodiments, at least a subset of the intensity thresholds are determined based on software parameters (e.g., the intensity threshold is not determined by the activation threshold of a particular physical actuator and can be determined without changing the physical hardware of the device 100 being adjusted). For example, the mouse "click" threshold for a trackpad or touchscreen can be set to any of a wide range of predefined thresholds without changing the trackpad or touchscreen display hardware. Additionally, in some implementations, a user of the device is provided with the ability to adjust one or more intensity thresholds within a set of intensity thresholds (e.g., by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and/or by utilizing a system-level click on the "Intensity" parameter software settings to adjust multiple intensity thresholds at once).

[0138] Contact/motion module 130 optionally detects gesture input by the user. Different gestures on a touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns (e.g., different motion, timing, and/or intensity of detected contact). Therefore, gestures are optionally detected by detecting specific contact patterns. For example, detecting a finger tap gesture involves detecting a finger down event and then detecting a finger lift (off) at the same location (or substantially the same location) as the finger down event (e.g., at the location of the icon) event. As another example, detecting a finger swipe gesture on a touch-sensitive surface includes detecting a finger press event, then detecting one or more finger drag events, and then detecting a finger lift (lift-off) event.

[0139] Graphics module 132 includes various known software components for rendering and displaying graphics on touch screen 112 or other display, including for changing the visual impact of displayed graphics (e.g., brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast or other visual attributes). As used herein, the term "graphics" includes any object that can be displayed to a user, including but not limited to text, web pages, icons (such as user interface objects including soft keys), digital images , video, animation, etc.

[0140] In some implementations, graphics module 132 stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is optionally assigned a corresponding code. The graphics module 132 receives one or more codes for specifying graphics to be displayed from an application program or the like, together with coordinate data and other graphics attribute data if necessary, and then generates screen image data to output to the display control Device 156.

[0141] Haptic feedback module 133 includes various software components for generating instructions for use by haptic output generator 167 to generate haptics at one or more locations on device 100 in response to user interaction with device 100 output.

[0142] Text input module 134, optionally a component of graphics module 132, is provided for use in various applications (e.g.,

For example, a soft keyboard for entering text in Contacts 137, Email 140, IM 141, Browser 147 and any other application that requires text input).

The GPS module 135 determines the location of the device and provides this information for use in various applications (e.g., to the phone 138 for use in location-based dialing; to the camera 143 as picture/video metadata ; and to applications that provide location-based services, such as weather widgets, local yellow pages widgets, and map/navigation widgets).

[0144] Application 136 optionally includes the following modules (or sets of instructions), or subsets or supersets thereof:

[0145]·Contacts module 137 (sometimes called address book or contact list);

[0146] Telephone module 138;

[0147] Video conferencing module 139;

[0148]·Email client module 140;

[0149] Instant messaging (IM) module 141;

[0150] Fitness support module 142;

[0151]·Camera module 143 for still images and/or video images;

[0152]·Image management module 144;

[0153]·Video player module;

[0154]·Music player module;

[0155] Browser module 147;

[0156]·Calendar module 148;

[0157] Widget module 149, which optionally includes one or more of the following: weather widget 149-1, stock market widget 149-2, calculator widget 149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4, dictionary widget 149-5, and other widgets obtained by users, and widgets 149-6 created by users;

· Widget creator module 150 for forming user-created widgets 149-6;

[0159] Search module 151;

[0160] · Video and music player module 152, which merges the video player module and the music player module;

[0161]·Note module 153;

[0162] Map module 154; and/or

[0163] Online video module 155.

Examples of other applications 136 optionally stored in memory 102 include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, rendering applications, JAVA enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management , speech recognition and speech copying.

[0165] In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, contacts module 137 is optionally used to manage an address book or contact list (e.g., stored in memory 102 or in the application internal state 192 of the contacts module 137 in the memory 370), including: adding one or more names to the address book; deleting a name from the address book; adding a phone number, email address, physical address, or other information Associating with names; associating images with names; categorizing and categorizing names; providing phone numbers or email addresses to initiate and/or facilitate communications via telephone 138, video conferencing module 139, email 140, or IM 141; etc.

[0166] Telephone module 138 is optionally used for input in conjunction with RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134. and

Character sequence corresponding to the phone number, access one or more phone numbers in the contact module 137, modify the entered phone number, dial the corresponding phone number, conduct a conversation, and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is completed. As noted above, wireless communications optionally use any of a variety of communications standards, protocols, and technologies.

[0167] Combined with RF circuit 108, audio circuit 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, touch screen 112, display controller 156, optical sensor 164, optical sensor controller 158, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134 , contact module 137 and phone module 138, video conference module 139 includes executable instructions to initiate, conduct and terminate a video conference between the user and one or more other participants according to user instructions.

[0168] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, email client module 140 includes functions to create, send, receive, and manage in response to user instructions. Email executable instructions. In conjunction with the image management module 144, the email client module 140 makes it very easy to create and send emails with still or video images captured by the camera module 143.

[0169] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, instant messaging module 141 includes executable instructions for inputting correspondence with instant messages sequence of characters, modify previously entered characters, transmit the corresponding instant message (for example, using the Short Message Service (SMS) or Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocols for phone-based instant messaging or using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS for for Internet-based instant messaging), receive instant messages, and view received instant messages. In some embodiments, instant messages transmitted and/or received optionally include graphics, photos, audio files, video files, and/or other attachments supported in MMS and/or Enhanced Messaging Services (EMS). As used herein, "instant messaging" refers to both phone-based messages (eg, messages sent using SMS or MMS) and Internet-based messages (eg, messages sent using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS).

[0170] In conjunction with the RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, GPS module 135, map module 154, and music player module, the fitness support module 142 includes Executable instructions for creating a fitness (e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burn goals); communicating with fitness sensors (exercise equipment); receiving fitness sensor data; calibrating sensors used to monitor fitness; selecting and playing for fitness music; and display, store and transmit fitness data.

[0171] In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, optical sensor 164, optical sensor controller 158, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and image management module 144, camera module 143 includes executable instructions for: Still images or videos (including video streams) are captured and stored in memory 102 , characteristics of the still images or videos are modified, or the still images or videos are deleted from memory 102 .

[0172] In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and camera module 143, image management module 144 includes functions for arranging, modifying (e.g., editing), or Executable instructions to otherwise manipulate, tag, delete, present (e.g., in a digital slideshow or album), and store still images and/or video images.

[0173] In conjunction with the RF circuit 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, the browser module 147 includes a browser module 147 for browsing the Internet according to user instructions, including searching, linking to , executable instructions that receive and display web pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages.

[0174] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, email client module 140, and browser module 147, calendar module 148 includes to create, display, modify, and store calendars and calendar-associated data (e.g., calendar entries, to-do items, etc.)

executable instructions.

[0175] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and browser module 147, widget module 149 is optionally downloaded and used by the user Micro-applications (e.g., weather widget 149-1, stock market widget 149-2, calculator widget 149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4, and dictionary widget 149-5) or micro-applications created by users (For example, user-created widget 149-6). In some implementations, widgets include HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) files, CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) files, and JavaScript files. In some embodiments, widgets include XML (Extensible Markup Language) files and JavaScript files (eg, Yahoo! widgets).

[0176] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and browser module 147, widget creator module 150 is optionally used by the user to create Widgets (for example, turning a user-specified portion of a web page into a widget).

[0177] In conjunction with the touch screen 112, the display controller 156, the contact/motion module 130, the graphics module 132, and the text input module 134, the search module 151 includes a method for searching the memory 102 according to user instructions with one or more search criteria (e.g., , one or more user-specified search terms) that match text, music, sounds, images, videos, and/or other files.

[0178] In conjunction with the touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, RF circuitry 108, and browser module 147, a video and music player module 152 is included to allow the user to download and executable instructions for playing back recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, and for displaying, presenting, or otherwise playing back video (e.g., on touch screen 112 or executable instructions on an external display connected via external port 124). In some embodiments, device 100 optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player such as an iPod (a trademark of Apple Inc.).

[0179] In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, notes module 153 includes executable instructions for creating and managing notes, to-do items, etc. according to user instructions. .

[0180] In conjunction with the RF circuitry 108, the touch screen 112, the display controller 156, the contact/motion module 130, the graphics module 132, the text input module 134, the GPS module 135, and the browser module 147, the map module 154 is optionally used to respond to user requests. The instructions receive, display, modify, and store maps and data associated with the maps (e.g., driving directions, data regarding stores and other points of interest at or near a specific location, and other location-based data).

[0181] In combination with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact/motion module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, RF circuitry 108, text input module 134, email client module 140, and browser module 147, Online video module 155 includes instructions for allowing a user to access, browse, receive (e.g., by streaming and/or downloading), playback (e.g., on a touch screen or on an external display connected via external port 124 above), send emails with links to specific online videos, and otherwise manage online videos in one or more file formats such as H.264. In some embodiments, the instant messaging module 141 is used instead of the email client module 140 to send links to specific online videos. Additional descriptions of online video applications may be found in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/936,562, entitled "Portable Multifunction Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Playing Online Videos" filed June 20, 2007 and December 31, 2007 The submitted name is Portable Multifunction Device,Method,and No. 11/968,067, "Graphical User Interface for Playing Online Videos", the contents of these two patent applications are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.

[0182] Each of the modules and applications described above corresponds to a module for performing one or more functions described above and the methods described in this patent application (e.g., the computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein). Set of executable instructions. These modules (e.g., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs (e.g., computer programs (e.g., including instructions)), processes, or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are optionally combined in various embodiments or Rearrange in other ways. For example, the video player module is optionally combined with the music player module into a single module (eg, video and music player module 152 in Figure 1A). In some embodiments, memory 102 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures described above. In addition, memory 102 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.

[0183] In some embodiments, device 100 is a device on which operation of a predefined set of functions is performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or touch pad. By using a touch screen and/or touchpad as the primary input control device for operating device 100, the number of physical input control devices (eg, push buttons, dials, etc.) on device 100 is optionally reduced.

[0184] The predefined set of functions performed exclusively through the touch screen and/or touch pad optionally includes navigation between user interfaces. In some embodiments, the touchpad, when touched by a user, navigates device 100 from any user interface displayed on device 100 to the main menu, main desktop menu, or root menu. In such implementations, a touchpad is used to implement the "menu button." In some other implementations, the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device rather than a touchpad.

[0185] FIG. 1B is a block diagram illustrating example components for event processing in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 102 (FIG. 1A) or memory 370 (FIG. 3) includes event classifier 170 (e.g., in operating system 126) and corresponding application 136-1 (e.g., the aforementioned applications 137-151 , 155, any one application from 380 to 390).

[0186] Event classifier 170 receives event information and determines the application 136-1 to which to deliver the event information and the application view 191 of application 136-1. Event classifier 170 includes event monitor 171 and event dispatcher module 174. In some embodiments, application 136-1 includes application internal state 192 that indicates one or more current applications displayed on touch-sensitive display 112 when the application is active or executing. view. In some embodiments, device/global internal state 157 is used by event classifier 170 to determine which application(s) is currently active, and application internal state 192 is used by event classifier 170 to determine which event information to deliver. to application view 191.

[0187] In some embodiments, application internal state 192 includes additional information, such as one or more of the following: recovery information to be used when application 136-1 resumes execution, indication that information is being used User interface state information displayed or prepared for display by application 136-1, a state queue used to enable the user to return to a previous state or view of application 136-1, and repetition of previous actions taken by the user/ Undo queue.

[0188] Event monitor 171 receives event information from peripheral device interface 118. Event information includes information about sub-events (eg, user touches on touch-sensitive display 112 as part of a multi-touch gesture). Peripheral interface 118 transmits information it receives from I/O subsystem 106 or sensors such as proximity sensor 166 , one or more accelerometers 168 , and/or microphone 113 (via audio circuitry 110 ). Information received by peripherals interface 118 from I/O subsystem 106 includes information from touch-sensitive display 112 or touch-sensitive surface.

[0189] In some implementations, event monitor 171 sends requests to peripheral device interface 118 at predetermined intervals. In response, peripheral device interface 118 transmits event information. In other embodiments, the peripheral device interface 118 may only receive a signal if there is a significant event (e.g., a received signal above a predetermined noise threshold and/or a received signal for more than a predetermined duration).

Event information is transmitted only when the time is input).

[0190] In some embodiments, the event classifier 170 also includes a hit view determination module 172 and/or an active event identifier determination module 173.

[0191] When the touch-sensitive display 112 displays more than one view, the hit view determination module 172 provides a software process for determining where within one or more views a sub-event has occurred. A view consists of the controls and other elements that the user can see on the monitor.

[0192] Another aspect of the user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes referred to herein as application views or user interface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-based gestures occur. The application view (of the corresponding application) in which the touch is detected optionally corresponds to a programmatic level within the application's programmatic or view hierarchy. For example, the lowest level view in which a touch is detected is optionally called a hit view, and the set of events recognized as correct input is optionally determined based at least in part on the hit view of the initial touch that started based on Touch gesture.

[0193] Hit view determination module 172 receives information related to sub-events of touch-based gestures. When an application has multiple views organized in a hierarchical structure, the hit view determination module 172 identifies the hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy where the sub-event should be processed. In most cases, a hit view is the lowest level view in which an initiating subevent (e.g., the first subevent in a sequence of subevents forming an event or potential event) occurs. Once a hit view is identified by hit view determination module 172, the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to the same touch or input source for which it was identified as a hit view.

[0194] The active event recognizer determination module 173 determines which view or views within the view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In some implementations, active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that only hit views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that all views that include the physical location of a sub-event are actively participating views, and therefore determines that all actively participating views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, even if the touch sub-event is completely localized to the area associated with one particular view, views higher in the hierarchy will remain the actively participating views.

[0195] Event dispatcher module 174 distributes event information to event recognizers (eg, event recognizer 180). In implementations that include active event recognizer determination module 173 , event dispatcher module 174 delivers event information to the event recognizer determined by active event recognizer determination module 173 . In some implementations, the event dispatcher module 174 stores event information in an event queue, which is retrieved by the corresponding event receiver 182 .

[0196] In some embodiments, operating system 126 includes event classifier 170. Alternatively, application 136-1 includes event classifier 170. In yet another embodiment, event classifier 170 is a standalone module or part of another module stored in memory 102 such as contact/motion module 130 .

[0197] In some embodiments, application 136-1 includes a plurality of event handlers 190 and one or more application views 191, each of which includes a corresponding view for handling events occurring in the application's user interface Instructions for touch events within. Each application view 191 of application 136-1 includes one or more event recognizers 180. Typically, a corresponding application view 191 includes a plurality of event recognizers 180 . In other embodiments, one or more of event recognizers 180 is part of a separate module, a higher level such as a user interface toolkit or application 136-1 from which it inherits methods and other properties. Object. In some implementations, corresponding event handler 190 includes one or more of: data updater 176 , object updater 177 , GUI updater 178 , and/or event data received from event classifier 170 179. Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls data updates

176, object updater 177, or GUI updater 178 to update the application internal state 192. Alternatively, one or more of the application views 191 include one or more corresponding event handlers 190 . Additionally, in some implementations, one or more of data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178 are included in respective application views 191.

[0198] The corresponding event identifier 180 receives event information (eg, event data 179) from the event classifier 170 and identifies the event based on the event information. Event identifier 180 includes event receiver 182 and event comparator 184. In some embodiments, event identifier 180 also includes metadata 183 and at least a subset of event delivery instructions 188 (which optionally includes sub-event delivery instructions).

[0199] Event receiver 182 receives event information from event classifier 170. Event information includes information about sub-events such as touch or touch movement. Depending on the sub-event, the event information also includes additional information such as the location of the sub-event. When the sub-event involves the movement of a touch, the event information optionally also includes the rate and direction of the sub-event. In some embodiments, the event includes rotation of the device from one orientation to another (e.g., from portrait orientation to landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes information about the current orientation of the device (also referred to as device pose ) corresponding information.

[0200] The event comparator 184 compares event information with predefined event or sub-event definitions and determines the event or sub-event based on the comparison, or determines or updates the status of the event or sub-event. In some implementations, event comparator 184 includes event definition 186 . Event definition 186 contains definitions of events (eg, predefined sequences of sub-events), such as event 1 (187-1), event 2 (187-2), and others. In some embodiments, sub-events in events (eg, 187-1 and/or 187-2) include, for example, touch start, touch end, touch move, touch cancel, and multi-touch. In one example, event 1 (187-1) is defined as a double-click on the displayed object. For example, a double-click includes a first touch on the displayed object for a predetermined duration (touch start), a first lift-off for a predetermined duration (touch end), and a second touch on the displayed object for a predetermined duration (touch start). and a second lift-off (end of touch) of a predetermined duration. In another example, event 2 (187-2) is defined as a drag on the displayed object. For example, dragging includes a touch (or contact) on a displayed object for a predetermined length of time, movement of the touch on the touch-sensitive display 112 , and lifting of the touch (end of touch). In some embodiments, events also include information for one or more associated event handlers 190 .

[0201] In some embodiments, event definitions 186 include definitions of events for corresponding user interface objects. In some implementations, event comparator 184 performs hit testing to determine which user interface object is associated with the sub-event. For example, in an application view that displays three user interface objects on touch-sensitive display 112 , when a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display 112 , event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which of the three user interface objects A user interface object is associated with the touch (sub-event). If each displayed object is associated with a corresponding event handler 190, the event comparator uses the results of this hit test to determine which event handler 190 should be activated. For example, event comparator 184 selects the event handler associated with the subevent and the object that triggered the hit test.

[0202] In some embodiments, the definition of a corresponding event (187) also includes a delay action that delays delivery of event information until it has been determined that the sequence of sub-events does or does not correspond to the event type of the event recognizer.

[0203] When the corresponding event recognizer 180 determines that the sub-event sequence does not match any event in the event definition 186, the corresponding event recognizer 180 enters the event impossible, event failed, or event ended state, thereafter ignoring touch-based Subsequent sub-events of the gesture. In this case, other event recognizers (if any) that remain active for the hit view continue to track and handle sub-events of the ongoing touch-based gesture.

[0204] In some embodiments, the corresponding event recognizer 180 includes metadata 183 with configurable properties, tags, and/or lists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery to the actively participating event recognizer. exist

In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers interact or are capable of interacting with each other. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether subevents are delivered to different levels in the view or programmatic hierarchy.

[0205] In some embodiments, when one or more specific sub-events of an event are recognized, the corresponding event recognizer 180 activates the event handler 190 associated with the event. In some implementations, the corresponding event recognizer 180 delivers event information associated with the event to the event handler 190 . Activating event handlers 190 is different from sending (and deferred sending) sub-events to the corresponding hit view. In some embodiments, event recognizer 180 throws a tag associated with the recognized event, and event handler 190 associated with the tag retrieves the tag and executes a predefined process.

[0206] In some embodiments, event delivery instructions 188 include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-event without activating an event handler. In contrast, subevent delivery instructions deliver event information to the event handler associated with the subevent sequence or to the actively participating view. An event handler associated with a subevent sequence or with an actively participating view receives event information and performs a predetermined process.

[0207] In some embodiments, data updater 176 creates and updates data for use in application 136-1. For example, the data updater 176 updates the phone number used in the contact module 137, or stores the video file used in the video player module. In some embodiments, object updater 177 creates and updates objects for use in application 136-1. For example, object updater 177 creates new user interface objects or updates the location of user interface objects. GUI updater 178 updates the GUI. For example, GUI updater 178 prepares display information and sends the display information to graphics module 132 for display on the touch-sensitive display.

[0208] In some embodiments, event handler 190 includes, or has access to, data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178. In some embodiments, data updater 176 , object updater 177 , and GUI updater 178 are included in a single module of respective application 136 - 1 or application view 191 . In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules.

[0209] It should be understood that the above discussion regarding event handling of user touches on a touch-sensitive display also applies to other forms of user input utilizing input devices to operate the multifunction device 100, and not all user input is initiated on the touch screen. of. For example, mouse movements and mouse button presses, optionally in conjunction with single or multiple keyboard presses or holds; contact movements on a touchpad, such as tapping, dragging, scrolling, etc.; stylus input; device movements; head commands; detected eye movements; biometric inputs; and/or any combination thereof are optionally used as inputs corresponding to sub-events defining the event to be discerned.

[0210] FIG. 2 illustrates a portable multifunction device 100 having a touch screen 112 in accordance with some embodiments. The touch screen optionally displays one or more graphics within user interface (UI) 200. In this embodiment, and other embodiments described below, the user is able to control the user's behavior by, for example, using one or more fingers 202 (not shown to scale) or one or more styluses 203 (not shown to scale). Draw to scale) Make a gesture on the shape to select one or more of these shapes. In some embodiments, selection of one or more graphics will occur when the user breaks contact with the one or more graphics. In some embodiments, the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (left to right, right to left, up and/or down) and/or has occurred with device 100 Rolling of the touching finger (right to left, left to right, up and/or down). In some implementations or in some situations, inadvertent contact with a graphic does not select the graphic. For example, a swipe gesture that sweeps over an application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application when the gesture corresponding to the selection is a tap.

[0211] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more physical buttons, such as a "Home" or menu button 204. As previously mentioned, menu button 204 is optionally used to navigate to any application 136 in a set of applications that are optionally executed on device 100 . Alternatively, in some embodiments, the menu buttons are implemented as soft keys displayed in the GUI on touch screen 112 .

[0212] In some embodiments, the device 100 includes a touch screen 112, a menu button 204, a push button 206 for turning the device on/off and for locking the device, one or more volume buttons 208, a user identity module ( SIM card slot 210, headset jack 212 and docking/charging external port 124. The push button 206 is optionally used to power the device on/off by depressing the button and keeping the button depressed for a predefined time interval; Release the button before passing to lock the device; and/or to unlock the device or initiate the unlocking process. In alternative embodiments, device 100 also accepts voice input through microphone 113 for activating or deactivating certain functions. Device 100 also optionally includes one or more contact strength sensors 165 for detecting the intensity of contact on touch screen 112, and/or one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile output for a user of device 100 .

[0213] FIG. 3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunctional device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, according to some embodiments. Device 300 need not be portable. In some embodiments, device 300 is a laptop computer, desktop computer, tablet computer, multimedia player device, navigation device, educational device (such as a children's learning toy), gaming system, or control device (eg, a home controller or industrial controller). using the controller). Device 300 generally includes one or more processing units (CPUs) 310, one or more network or other communication interfaces 360, memory 370, and one or more communication buses 320 for interconnecting these components. Communications bus 320 optionally includes circuitry (sometimes referred to as a chipset) that interconnects system components and controls communications between system components. Device 300 includes an input/output (I/O) interface 330 having a display 340, which is typically a touch screen display. The I/O interface 330 also optionally includes a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device) 350 and a touchpad 355 , a haptic output generator 357 for generating haptic output on the device 300 (e.g., similar to the one referenced above). Tactile output generator 167), sensor 359 described in Figure 1A (eg, optical sensor, acceleration sensor, proximity sensor, touch-sensitive sensor, and/or contact intensity sensor (similar to contact intensity sensor 165 described above with reference to FIG. 1A )). Memory 370 includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM, or other random access solid-state memory devices; and optionally includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, Flash memory device or other non-volatile solid-state storage device. Memory 370 optionally includes one or more storage devices located remotely from CPU 310 . In some embodiments, memory 370 stores programs, modules and data structures similar to those stored in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 (FIG. 1A), or a subset thereof. Additionally, memory 370 optionally stores additional programs, modules, and data structures that are not present in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 . For example, the memory 370 of the device 300 optionally stores a drawing module 380, a presentation module 382, a word processing module 384, a website creation module 386, a disk editing module 388, and/or a spreadsheet module 390, while the portable multifunction device 100 (Fig. The memory 102 of 1A) optionally does not store these modules.

[0214] Each of the above-described elements in Figure 3 is optionally stored in one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices. Each of the above-described modules corresponds to a set of instructions for performing the above-described functions. The above-described modules or computer programs (eg, sets of instructions or including instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs (eg, computer programs (eg, including instructions)), processes or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are optionally may be combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 370 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures described above. In addition, memory 370 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.

[0215] Attention now turns to an embodiment of a user interface optionally implemented on, for example, the portable multifunction device 100.

[0216] FIG. 4A illustrates an exemplary user interface for an application menu on the portable multifunction device 100 in accordance with some embodiments. A similar user interface is optionally implemented on device 300. In some embodiments, user interface 400 includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof:

Signal strength indicators 402 for wireless communications such as cellular signals and Wi-Fi signals;

[0218]·Time 404;

[0219] Bluetooth indicator 405;

[0220]·Battery status indicator 406;

Tray 408 with icons for commonly used applications, such as:

o an icon 416 of the phone module 138 labeled "Phone," which icon 416 optionally includes an indicator 414 of the number of missed calls or voicemails;

o an icon 418 of the email client module 140 labeled "Mail," which icon 418 optionally includes an indicator 410 of the number of unread emails;

o Icon 420 of browser module 147 labeled "Browser"; and

[0225] Video and Music Player Module 152 (also known as iPod (a trademark of Apple Inc.) module

152) icon labeled "iPod" 422; and

[0226] Icons for other applications, such as:

Icon 424 of oIM module 141 labeled "Message";

[0228] o icon 426 of the calendar module 148 labeled "Calendar";

o Icon 428 of the image management module 144 labeled Photo';

[0230] o Icon 430 of the camera module 143 labeled "Camera";

[0231] o Icon 432 of the online video module 155 labeled "Online Video";

[0232] The icon 434 of the stock market widget 149-2 labeled "stock market";

[0233] o Icon 436 of map module 154 labeled 'Map';

[0234] Icon 438 of weather widget 149-1 labeled "Weather";

[0235] o icon 440 of the alarm clock widget 149-4 labeled "clock";

[0236] o icon 442 of the fitness support module 142 labeled "Fitness Support";

[0237] An icon 444 of the notes module 153 labeled "Notes"; and

[0238] Settings application or module icon 446 labeled "Settings" that provides access to the settings of the device 100 and its various applications 136.

[0239] It should be noted that the icon labels shown in Figure 4A are merely exemplary. For example, the icon 422 of the video and music player module 152 is labeled "Music" or "Music Player." Optionally use additional labels for various application icons. In some implementations, the label of the corresponding application icon includes the name of the application corresponding to the corresponding application icon. In some implementations, the label of a particular application icon is different from the name of the application corresponding to that particular application icon.

[0240] FIG. 4B shows a device (eg, device 300 of FIG. 3) having a touch-sensitive surface 451 (eg, tablet or touchpad 355 of FIG. 3) separate from display 450 (eg, touch screen display 112). An example user interface. Device 300 also optionally includes one or more contact intensity sensors for detecting the intensity of contact on touch-sensitive surface 451 (e.g.

For example, one or more of sensors 359 ) and/or one or more haptic output generators 357 for generating haptic output for a user of device 300 .

[0241] Although some of the following examples will be given with reference to input on the touch screen display 112 (in which the touch-sensitive surface and display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects input on a touch-sensitive surface separate from the display. , as shown in Figure 4B. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface (eg, 451 in Figure 4B) has a principal axis (eg, 452 in Figure 4B) that corresponds to a principal axis (eg, 453 in Figure 4B) on the display (eg, 450) . According to these embodiments, the device detects contact with touch-sensitive surface 451 (eg, in FIG. 4B , 460 corresponds to 468 and 462 corresponds to 470 ) at a location that corresponds to a corresponding location on the display. 460 and 462). In this way, when the touch-sensitive surface (eg, 451 in Figure 4B) is separated from the display of the multifunctional device (eg, 450 in Figure 4B), user input (eg, contact) detected by the device on the touch-sensitive surface 460 and 462 and their movement) are used by the device to manipulate the user interface on the display. It should be understood that similar methods are optionally used for other user interfaces described herein.

[0242] Additionally, although the following examples are given primarily with reference to finger inputs (e.g., finger contacts, single-finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures), it should be understood that in some embodiments, these finger inputs One or more finger inputs in are replaced by input from another input device (for example, mouse-based input or stylus input). For example, a swipe gesture is optionally replaced by a mouse click (eg, instead of contact) followed by movement of the cursor along the path of the swipe (eg, instead of contact movement). As another example, the tap gesture is optionally replaced by a mouse click while the cursor is over the location of the tap gesture (eg, instead of detecting contact, followed by ceasing to detect contact). Similarly, when multiple user inputs are detected simultaneously, it will be understood that multiple computer mice are optionally used simultaneously, or that mouse and finger contact are optionally used simultaneously.

[0243] FIG. 5A illustrates an exemplary personal electronic device 500. Device 500 includes body 502 . In some embodiments, device 500 may include some or all of the features described with respect to devices 100 and 300 (eg, Figures 1A-4B). In some embodiments, device 500 has a touch-sensitive display 504, referred to below as touch screen 504. As an alternative to or in addition to touch screen 504, device 500 has a display and a touch-sensitive surface. As is the case with devices 100 and 300 , in some embodiments, touch screen 504 (or touch-sensitive surface) optionally includes one or more intensity sensors for detecting the intensity of an applied contact (eg, touch). One or more intensity sensors of the touch screen 504 (or touch-sensitive surface) may provide output data representative of the intensity of the touch. The user interface of device 500 can respond to touches based on the intensity of the touch, which means that touches of different strengths can invoke different user interface operations on device 500 .

[0244] Exemplary techniques for detecting and processing touch intensity are found, for example, in the following related patent application: Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Displaying User Interface Objects Corresponding to an Application, filed May 8, 2013 International patent application serial number PCT/US2013/040061, published as WIPO patent publication number WO/2013/169849; and filed on November 11, 2013 as Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Transitioning Between Touch Input to Display Output Relationships' International Patent Application Serial Number PCT/US2013/069483, issued as WIPO Patent Publication No. WO/2014/105276, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

[0245] In some embodiments, device 500 has one or more input mechanisms 506 and 508. Input mechanisms 506 and 508 (if included) may be in physical form. Examples of physical input mechanisms include push buttons and rotatable mechanisms. In some embodiments, device 500 has one or more attachment mechanisms. Such attachment mechanisms, if included, may allow device 500 to be attached to, for example, a hat, glasses, earrings, necklace, shirt, jacket, bracelet, watch strap, bracelet, pants, belt, shoes,

Wallet, backpack, etc. attached. These attachment mechanisms allow the user to wear device 500.

[0246] Figure 5B depicts an exemplary personal electronic device 500. In some embodiments, device 500 may include some or all of the components described with reference to Figures 1A, 1B, and 3. Device 500 has bus 512 operatively coupling I/O portion 514 with one or more computer processors 516 and memory 518. I/O portion 514 may be connected to a display 504, which may have a touch-sensitive component 522 and optionally an intensity sensor 524 (eg, a contact intensity sensor). Additionally, I/O portion 514 may interface with communication unit 530 for receiving application and operating system data using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, near field communication (NFC), cellular and/or other wireless communication technologies. Device 500 may include input mechanisms 506 and/or 508 . For example, the input mechanism 506 optionally is a rotatable input device or a depressible input device as well as a rotatable input device. In some examples, input mechanism 508 optionally is a button.

[0247] In some examples, input mechanism 508 optionally is a microphone. Personal electronic device 500 optionally includes various sensors, such as a GPS sensor 532, an accelerometer 534, an orientation sensor 540 (e.g., a compass), a gyroscope 536, a motion sensor 538, and/or combinations thereof, all of which are operative to Connected to I/O section 514.

[0248] Memory 518 of personal electronic device 500 may include one or more non-transitory computer-readable storage media for storing computer-executable instructions, which when executed by one or more computer processors 516 For example, a computer processor may be caused to perform the techniques described below, including processes 700, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000, and 2200 (corresponding to Figures 7, 8, 10, 12, and 14 respectively , Figure 16, Figure 18, Figure 20, Figure 22). Computer-readable storage media may be any medium that can tangibly contain or store computer-executable instructions for use by or in connection with instruction execution systems, apparatus and devices. In some examples, the storage medium is a transitory computer-readable storage medium. In some examples, the storage medium is non-transitory computer-readable storage medium. Non-transitory computer-readable storage media may include, but are not limited to, magnetic storage devices, optical storage devices, and/or semiconductor storage devices. Examples of such storage devices include magnetic disks, optical disks based on CD, DVD or Blu-ray technology, and persistent solid state memories such as flash memory, solid state drives, and the like. Personal electronic device 500 is not limited to the components and configuration of Figure 5B, but may include other components or additional components in a variety of configurations. [0249] As used herein, the term "affordance representation" refers to a device 100, 300, and/or 500 (FIG. 1A, FIG. 3, and FIG. 5A to 5B), a user-interactive graphical user interface object displayed on the display screen. For example, images (eg, icons), buttons, and text (eg, hyperlinks) optionally each constitute an affordance representation.

[0250] As used herein, the term "focus selector" refers to an input element used to indicate the current portion of the user interface with which the user is interacting. In some implementations that include a cursor or other position marker, the cursor acts as a "focus selector" such that when the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the cursor Where input (eg, press input) is detected on a surface (eg, touchpad 355 in Figure 3 or touch-sensitive surface 451 in Figure 4B), that particular user interface element is adjusted based on the detected input. In some implementations that include a touch screen display that enables direct interaction with user interface elements on the touch screen display (eg, touch-sensitive display system 112 in FIG. 1A or touch screen 112 in FIG. 4A), the A contact acts as a "focus selector" such that when input (e.g., a press by the contact) is detected on the touch screen display at the location of a specific user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element) input), that particular user interface element is adjusted based on the detected input. In some implementations, focus moves from one area of the user interface to another area of the user interface without corresponding movement of the cursor or movement of contacts on the touch screen display (e.g., by using the tab keys or arrow keys to move the focus from one button to another); in these implementations, the focus selector moves based on movement of focus between different areas of the user interface. Regardless of the specific form the focus selector takes, the focus selector is typically controlled by the user in order to deliver the user's intended interaction with the user interface (e.g., by providing

A device indicates a user interface element (or contact on a touch screen display) with which the user expects to interact. For example, when press input is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen), the position of the focus selector (e.g., cursor, contact, or selection box) above the corresponding button will indicate that the user expects the corresponding button to be activated (instead of other user interface elements shown on the device display).

[0251] As used in the claims, the term "characteristic intensity" of a contact refers to characteristics of the contact based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is based on multiple intensity samples. Feature intensity is optionally based on relative to predefined events (e.g., after contact is detected, before contact lift-off is detected, before or after contact begins to move, before contact ends is detected, before contact is detected, before or after an increase in intensity and/or before or after a decrease in intensity of contact is detected) within a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.05 seconds, 0.1 seconds, 0.2 seconds, 0.5 seconds, 1 second, 2 seconds, A predefined number or set of intensity samples taken during 5 seconds, 10 seconds). The characteristic intensity of a contact is optionally based on one or more of the following: the maximum value of the intensity of the contact, the mean intensity of the contact, the average intensity of the contact, the value at the top 10% of the intensity of the contact, Half maximum value of contact intensity, 90% maximum value of contact intensity, etc. In some embodiments, the duration of contact is used in determining the characteristic intensity (eg, when the characteristic intensity is the average of the intensity of the contact over time). In some embodiments, feature intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether the user has performed an action. For example, the set of one or more intensity thresholds optionally includes a first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold. In this example, a contact with a characteristic intensity that does not exceed a first threshold results in a first action, a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the first intensity threshold but does not exceed a second intensity threshold results in a second action, and a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the second threshold results in The third operation. In some embodiments, a comparison between feature intensity and one or more thresholds is used to determine whether to perform one or more operations (eg, whether to perform the corresponding operation or to abandon performing the corresponding operation) rather than to determine whether to perform the first operation. The operation is still the second operation.

[0252] Attention now turns to embodiments of a user interface "UI" implemented on an electronic device (such as portable multifunction device 100, device 300, or device 500) and associated processes.

[0253] Figures 6A-6L illustrate an exemplary user interface for initiating communications when a computer system cannot reach a terrestrial wireless communications network, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in FIGS. 7 and 8 .

[0254] In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 610A, 610B, 610C, 610D, 606G, 610I, 612M, 610M, 613M, 616M, 618M, 622M, 624M, 608N, 616M , 6080, 6100, 608P, 608Q, 604R, 604S and/or 610S) is or includes touch input (e.g., tap gestures and/or swipe gestures). In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (eg, inputs 610A, 610B, 610C. 610D, 606G. 610I. 612M, 610M, 613M, 616M, 618M, 622M, 624M, 608N, 616M, 6080, 6100, 608P, 608Q, 604R, 604S and/or 610S) is or includes speech input (e.g., to select user interface elements or use Voice commands to activate features or perform functions (such as features or functions associated with user interface elements). In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 610A, 610B, 610C, 610D, 606G, 610I, 612M, 610M, 613M, 616M, 618M, 622M, 624M, 608N, 616M, 6080, 6100, 608P, 608Q, 604R, 604S, and/or 610S) are or include air gestures (e.g., to select a user interface element or to activate a feature or perform a function (such as a feature or function associated with a user interface element) air gestures). In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 610A, 610B, 610C, 610D, 606G, 610I, 612M, 610M, 613M, 616M, 618M, 622M, 624M, 608N, 616M, 6080, 6100, 608P, 608Q, 604R, 604S, and/or 610S) are or include hardware devices (e.g., buttons, rotatable input mechanisms, rotatable depressible input mechanisms, mouse buttons, remote control buttons, and/or joysticks) activation (e.g., pressing, twisting

turn and/or move). In some embodiments, any of the user interface elements described herein (e.g., icons, affordances, buttons, and/or selectable options) are selected by selecting , bolded, outlined, visually distinguished from other user interface elements, and/or located at or near the cursor) is selected when the hardware device is activated.

[0255] Figures 6A-6D illustrate exemplary interfaces for initiating communications (eg, audio calls and/or text messages). Figures 6A and 6c include interfaces for initiating a call to emergency services (eg, 911). Figures 6B and 6D include interfaces for initiating calls to non-emergency services.

[0256] Figures 6A and 6B illustrate a process for attempting to initiate calls to emergency services and non-emergency entities. Figures 6A and 6B show a computer system 600 having a touch-sensitive display 601. In Figures 6A and 6B, computer system 600 displays call interfaces 602A and 602B, respectively, for initiating calls. Call interfaces 602A and 602B include (respectively) keypads 604A and 604B, text area 608, (respectively) call buttons 606A and 606B, and network indicator 607. In some embodiments, in response to receiving a selection of a phone application affordance (eg, on a home screen), computer system 600 displays call interface 602A and call interface 602B.

[0257] Network indicator 607 displays the availability of computer system 600 to communicate with terrestrial wireless communications to send communications (eg, initiate calls). In some embodiments, the terrestrial wireless communications network is a cellular network and/or an Internet network (e.g., Internet of Things). Computer system 600 determines the availability of the cellular network based on the strength and consistency of the cellular network's communications with computer system 600 In Figures 6A-6B, network indicator 607 shows that a cellular network is available for initiating calls. However, in some embodiments, computer system 600 receives requests to initiate calls when the cellular network is unavailable.

[0258] In FIG. 6A, computer system 600 detects one or more inputs on keypad 604 and input 610A on call button 606A (eg, a tap gesture or other selection input) to dial a number for emergency services. Computer system 600 displays emergency services as 911 in text area 608. Other emergency services can be contacted as follows; for example: 999 in the UK, 110 and/or 119 in Japan, 000 in Australia.

[0259] In response to detecting input 610A on call button 606A, computer system 600 attempts to initiate a call to emergency services and displays call interface 602E shown in Figure 6E, discussed below.

[0260] In FIG. 6B, computer system 600 detects one or more inputs on keypad 604B and input 610B on call button 606B (eg, a tap gesture or other selection input) to dial a non-emergency entity. Computer system 600 displays the non-emergency entity as 123-456-7890. In some embodiments, the non-emergency entity is a contactable entity or phone number that is not associated with emergency services, such as a friend or a store.

[0261] In response to detecting input 610B on call button 606B, computer system 600 attempts to initiate a call and connect to the non-emergency entity and displays call interface 602F shown in Figure 6F, described below.

[0262] Figures 6c and 6D illustrate alternative procedures from Figures 6A and 6B for attempting to initiate calls to emergency services and non-emergency entities. Figures 6c and 6D show an exemplary user interface for initiating a call using an external computer system 620 with a touch-sensitive display 621. In Figures 6c and 6D, external computer system 620 displays watch interfaces 602C and 602D for initiating calls.

[0263] In FIG. 6C, the watch interface 602C includes a shutdown slider 604C, a medical ID slider 606C, and an emergency SOS slider 608C. In response to detecting input on shutdown slider 604C, external computer system 620 shuts down. In response to detecting input on medical ID slider 606C, external computer system 620 displays medical identification information about the user of external computer system 620 . In some embodiments, external computer system 620 displays the watch in response to external computer system 620 detecting an input (eg, input on button 622 (eg, press and hold) or a voice command (eg, "show power options")).

Interface 602C.

[0264] In response to detecting input 610C on emergency SOS slider 608C, external computer system 620 attempts to initiate a call and connect to emergency services. In some embodiments, the external computer system 620 may initiate the call by sending a request to dial emergency services to the paired computer system 600 and display the call interface 602F on the computer device 600 of FIG. 6F described below.

[0265] In FIG. 6D, watch interface 602D includes keypad 604D, end call button 606D, and text area 612D. External computer system 620 detects one or more inputs (eg, a tap gesture or other selection input) on keypad 604D to dial the non-emergency number "123-456-7890." External computer system 620 displays watch interface 602D in response to one or more inputs selecting a phone affordance for initiating communication.

[0266] In response to receiving input 610D on call button 606D, external computer system 620 attempts to initiate a call and connect to the non-emergency number and displays call interface 602F of FIG. 6F described below. In some embodiments, one or more inputs on keypad 604D dials an emergency number (eg, "911"), and in response to receiving input 610D on call button 606D, external computer system 620 attempts to initiate the call and connects to Emergency Services, thereby displaying the call interface 602E of Figure 6E described below.

[0267] In FIGS. 6E-6J, computer system 600 displays an interface for managing communications when no cellular service is available. Figures 6E, 6G, and 6I include interfaces for managing calls to emergency services, and Figures 6F, 6H, and 6J include interfaces for managing calls to non-emergency services. In Figures 6E-6J, computer system 600 updates (eg, replaces) network indicator 607 to indicate that no terrestrial wireless communications network is available to initiate the call. In some embodiments, determining that no terrestrial wireless communication network is available includes trying another carrier cellular network (eg, telephony SIM or eSIM) in addition to the network associated with computer system 600 . The connection indicator 605 may initially display, for example, "Calling Now" when attempting to initiate a call, and then display, for example, "No Connection" to indicate that no terrestrial wireless communications network is available to connect the call.

[0268] End call button 609 is a selectable button for ending the call or stopping attempts to initiate the call. In response to receiving a selection of the end call button 609, the computer system 600 displays the call interface 602A depicted in Figure 6A.

[0269] In Figures 6E-6J, computer system 600 displays call management button 603 (eg, as shown and further described in Figures 6K-6L). Call management buttons 603 are various selectable buttons that provide functionality for managing calls. In some embodiments, in response to determining that no cellular service is available, computer system 600 displays call management button 603 as unselectable (eg, grayed out). In some embodiments, computer system 600 aborts display of call management button 603 in Figures 6E-6J in response to determining that no cellular service is available.

[0270] Figures 6E and 6F illustrate the continuation of the process of Figures 6A and 6c and Figures 6B and 6D, respectively, attempting to initiate calls to emergency services and non-emergency entities. In Figures 6E and 6F, computer system 600 displays call management interfaces 602E and 602F, respectively, for managing calls.

[0271] In FIG. 6E, call management interface 602E displays a call to 911 in text area 608 to indicate that a call to emergency services has been initiated. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays call management interface 602E in response to detecting input 610A on call button 606 of Figure 6A that attempts to initiate a call to emergency services. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays management interface 602E in response to detecting input 610C on emergency SOS slider 608C of Figure 6c. After displaying call management interface 602E for a threshold amount of time without successfully initiating a call, computer system 600 displays call management interface 602G, described below in Figure 6G.

[0272] In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays an animated transition from call management interface 602E to call management interface 602G, the transition including end call button 609 moving (e.g., sliding) to the left over time (e.g., as

6F1 ) then displays an animation of the Send SMS via Satellite Communications button 604G (eg, as shown in FIG. 6F2 ). In some embodiments, as shown in Figures 6F1, 6F2, and 6G, when display of the Send SMS Via Satellite Communications button 604G is initiated (eg, in Figure 6F1) and/or when the Send SMS Via Satellite Communications button 604G is displayed (eg, in Figure 6F2 and/or Figure 6G), computer system 600 outputs haptic output 619 and/or audio output 650. Outputting non-visual output (eg, tactile output 619 and/or audio output 650) notifies the user that if the user is not looking at display 601 (eg, if computer system 600 is against the user's ear), a text message via satellite option is available.

[0273] In FIG. 6F, computer system 600 displays call management interface 602F while attempting to initiate a call to non-emergency number 123-456-7890. In response to detecting input 610B on call button 606 of Figure 6B or in response to receiving input 610D on call button 606D of Figure 6D described above, computer system 600 displays call management interface 602F.

[0274] Figures 6G and 6H illustrate the continuation of the process of Figures 6E (or Figure 6F2) and Figure 6F, respectively, of attempting to initiate calls to emergency services and non-emergency entities.

[0275] In FIG. 6G, because computer system 600 is attempting to initiate a call to emergency services when no terrestrial wireless communications network is reachable, computer system 600 displays no connection in connection indicator 605 and in call management interface 602G A Send SMS via satellite communication button 604G is shown.

[0276] In some embodiments, in response to determining that no terrestrial wireless communications network is reachable, computer system 600 displays a call back option 611 (eg, as shown and described with respect to Figure 6H). In response to receiving input on the call back option 611, computer system 600 attempts to initiate the call again via the terrestrial wireless communications network. In some embodiments, computer system 600 replaces the call back option with a text message via satellite communications button 604G when no terrestrial wireless communications network is reachable (eg, after a predetermined amount of time). In some embodiments, when an attempt to call an emergency service or number fails (e.g., because no terrestrial wireless communications network is reachable), computer system 600 continues to attempt to initiate a call to the emergency service or number via the terrestrial wireless communications network (e.g., because no terrestrial wireless communications network is reachable). , as a background process).

[0277] In response to detecting input 606G on the Send SMS Via Satellite Communications button 604G, the computer system 600 initiates a process for sending the text message via one or more satellites and displays the reporting interface 602M shown in Figure 6M discussed below. . In some embodiments, computer system 600 continues to attempt to initiate the call via the terrestrial wireless communications network while displaying the Send SMS Via Satellite Communications button 604G. After displaying the call management interface 602G without receiving user input for a threshold amount of time (eg, 3 seconds, 5 seconds, or 10 seconds), the computer system 600 displays a countdown in the Send SMS Via Satellite Communications button 604G in the call management interface 602I, As described below in Figure 6I.

[0278] In FIG. 6H, a call management interface 602H for calling a non-emergency entity is displayed at a point in time during call initiation similar to the call management interface 602F for calling emergency services in FIG. 6G. For example, computer system 600 displays call management interface 602H in response to displaying call management interface 602F (eg, as described in Figure 6F) for a threshold amount of time without receiving input. In Figure 6H, the connection indicator shows (eg, updated to display) that the call has failed. In contrast to call management interface 602G for calling emergency services, because the call in FIG. 6H is to a non-emergency entity, computer system 600 displays a call back button 611 rather than displaying an option to send a text message (e.g., a send text message via satellite communications button 604G). For example, for communications to non-emergency contacts, computer system 600 foregoes display of the Send SMS via Satellite Communications button. In some embodiments, the computer system 600 may display a text message via satellite option for non-emergency communications and, in response to receiving input on the text message via satellite button, display the reporting interface 602M shown in Figure 6M discussed below.

[0279] Figures 6I and 6J illustrate the continuation of the process of Figures 6G and 6H, respectively, of attempting to initiate calls to emergency services and non-emergency entities. In Figure 6I, call management interface 602I sends a short message via satellite communication indicating a countdown of remaining time.

Call management interface 602G is replaced by message button 604I. In some embodiments, the countdown indicates the time remaining until a message (eg, an emergency SOS message) is automatically sent via satellite communications. In some embodiments, this countdown indicates the time remaining until computer system 600 enters a mode for generating and sending emergency communications via satellite communications (eg, Figure 6L1 or Figure 6M). In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 6I, computer system 600 outputs haptic output 619 and/or audio output 650 when the countdown is initiated. Outputting non-visual output (e.g., tactile output 619 and/or audio output 650) notifies the user if the user is not looking at display 601 (e.g., if computer system 600 or a display generating component of computer system 600 is against the user's ear) , the countdown has begun.

[0280] In Figure 61, before the countdown period expires, computer system 600 detects input 6061 on the Send SMS Via Satellite Communications button 604I. In response to detecting input 6061 on the Send text message via satellite communications button 604I, computer system 600 initiates a process for sending text messages via one or more satellites and displays an information interface 602L1 (e.g., as shown in FIG. 6L1 ) or an administrative interface 602M (e.g., as shown in Figure 6M).

[0281] In Figure 6J, management interface 602J is similar to management interfaces 602F and 602H of Figures 6F and 6H, respectively. Management interface 602J does not include a Send SMS via satellite communications button 604I, nor does it include a countdown of the time remaining until the message is automatically sent. In some embodiments, non-emergency communications may display a text message via satellite option and/or the amount of time remaining, and in response to receiving input on the text message via satellite button, computer system 600 displays the text message via satellite button shown in FIG. 6M discussed below. Management interface 602M.

[0282] Figures 6K and 6L illustrate a continuation of the process of Figures 6I and 6J for attempting to initiate calls to emergency services and non-emergency entities. Figures 6K and 6L show computer system 600 having an interface for managing communications when cellular service is available. Call interfaces 602K (in Figure 6K) and 602L (in Figure 6L) are similar to call interfaces 602E (in Figure 6E) and 602F (in Figure 6F), respectively, except that cellular service is available. In Figures 6K-6L, network indicator 607 indicates that cellular service is available to initiate the call.

[0283] FIGS. 6K and 6L show computer system 600 having call management button 603. Call management button 603 is a selectable button that provides functionality for managing calls. Call management buttons include mute button, keypad button, speaker button, add call button, video call button and contact button. In Figures 6K and 6L, when computer system 600 initiates a call, computer system 600 displays the Add Call button and the Video Call button as unselectable (eg, grayed out). In some embodiments, the call button and the video call button are indicated as selectable (eg, not grayed out) in response to computer system 600 connecting the call with the recipient.

[0284] In FIG. 6K, computer system 600 displays call management interface 602K in response to detecting input 610A on call button 606 of FIG. 6A that attempts to initiate a call to emergency services. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays call management interface 602E in response to detecting input 610C on emergency SOS slider 608C of Figure 6c. In contrast to call management interface 602E, connection indicator 605 in call management interface 602K indicates that a call to emergency services is active (eg, as opposed to no connection in call management interface 602E).

[0285] In FIG. 6L, computer system 600 displays management interface 602L in response to detecting input 610B on call button 606 of FIG. 6B that attempts to initiate a call to a non-emergency entity. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays call management interface 602L in response to detecting input 610D on call button 606D of Figure 6D. In contrast to call management interface 602F, connection indicator 605 in call management interface 602L shows that a call to a non-emergency service is active (eg, as opposed to "call failed" in call management interface 602J).

[0286] Figures 6L1-6X4 illustrate an exemplary user interface for communicating in a low-bandwidth communication mode, in accordance with some embodiments. In Figures 6L1-6W, computer system 600 determines that no terrestrial wireless communications network is available to send the communication.

letter. For some communications, such as emergency messages, it is desirable to send messages even though no terrestrial wireless communications network is available. In such cases, the message may be sent via an alternative communications network with limited bandwidth, such as via satellite or peer-to-peer network. In some embodiments, a limited bandwidth message (eg, a "low bandwidth message") is a compressed message with limited data for transmission.

[0287] In FIG. 6L1, computer system 600 displays an information interface 602L1 that provides information to a user regarding the process of sending a message via an alternative communications network. In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 6L1, computer system 600 outputs haptic output 619 and/or audio output 650 while displaying information interface 602L1. Outputting non-visual output (e.g., tactile output 619 and/or audio output 650) notifies the user if the user is not looking at display 601 (e.g., if computer system 600 or a display generating component of computer system 600 is against the user's ear) , then the computer system 600 is already in the process of sending the message via the alternative communication network.

[0288] Information interface 602L1 includes graphical instructions 604L1, text instructions 606L1, notifications 608L1, text instructions 610L1, information sharing notifications 612L1, and selectable continue options 614L1. Graphical instructions 604L1 include a graphical representation of a satellite and a graphical representation of a user's hand holding a computer system (eg, a smartphone and/or computer system 600 ) to graphically illustrate that computer system 600 may be used to communicate via satellite communications. In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 6L1, the graphics instructions 604L1 includes an animation showing the satellite moving along a path (e.g., a curved path represented by small dots) and/or the user's hands and/or computer system moving (e.g., left and right) to follow the satellite in order to demonstrate how the user can Computer system 600 is (or must be) moved to align with the satellite. Text instruction 606L1 instructs the user to go outside to obtain a connection between computer system 600 and the satellite. Notification 608L1 informs the user that messages sent via an alternative communication network (eg, via satellite communications) will take longer to send than messages sent via a terrestrial network (eg, a cellular network). Text instruction 610L1 instructs the user to answer the question to obtain a faster response. Information sharing notification 612L1 notifies the user that the user's location and medical information may be shared in the process of sending communications via satellite. Selectable continue option 614L1 may be selected (eg, via an input such as a tap or other selection input) to continue the process of sending communications via satellite to emergency services. In response to detecting selection 61611 in Figure 6L1, computer system 600 displays reporting interface 602M discussed with reference to Figure 6M.

[0289] In FIGS. 6M to 6Q, computer system 600 displays report interfaces 602M, 602N, 6020, 602P and 602Q. These report interfaces respectively include a first set of options 604M, a second set of options 604N, a third set of options 6040, A fourth set of options 604P and a fifth set of options 604Q (Emergency Options). Selection of the emergency options is included in a low-bandwidth message that includes an emergency report. In some implementations, this set of options only It can be used to transmit emergency reports when no terrestrial wireless communication network is available.

[0290] In some embodiments, computer system 600 connects to one or more satellites when no terrestrial wireless communications network is available to place the call. In the event that the connection to the satellite is interrupted and computer system 600 is unable to communicate with the satellite, computer system 600 may maintain display of reporting interfaces 602M, 602N, 6020, 602P, and/or 602Q and may continue to receive selections of emergency options.

[0291] Emergency options display options corresponding to information about emergency reports. In response to input on the emergency option, computer system 600 generates an emergency report without displaying the software keyboard. In some embodiments, options provided by computer system 600 enable the generation of messages that can be sent by low-bandwidth communications. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays emergency options without displaying a messaging user interface that includes a messaging dialog and/or message history.

[0292] In Figure 6M, computer system 600 displays reporting interface 602M. Reporting interface 602M includes an interface for receiving a selection of a class of emergency options via selection of an option in a first set of options 604M. The first set of options 604M package

Includes selectable options for various types of emergencies (for example, medical, police, fire, automobile or vehicle, and search and rescue). In response to receiving a selection of an emergency type (eg, an option in the first set of options 604M), the emergency type is included in an emergency report to be submitted to emergency services. For example, the first set of options 604M includes a medical option 606M and an automobile or vehicle option 608M. In response to receiving input 616M on medical option 606M, computer system 600 displays reporting interface 6020 of Figure 6O, as described below. In response to receiving input 612M on car or vehicle option 608M, computer system 600 displays reporting interface 602N of FIG. 6N.

[0293] In FIG. 6M, skip button 616 indicates that selection of one of the options in the first set of options 604M can be skipped. In response to receiving input 613M on skip option 616, computer system 600 displays user interface 602P depicted in Figure 6P. Although computer system 600 displays skip button 616 as selectable in reporting interface 602M, in some implementations, first set of options 604M are not skippable. Skippable Emergency Options A skip button 616 is displayed to advance to a later set (eg, the next set) of emergency options. If a set of options is not skippable, computer system 600 forgoes displaying skip button 616 (eg, displays the user interface without displaying skip button 616). In some implementations, skip button 616 is grayed out to indicate that skip button 616 is unselectable.

[0294] In FIGS. 6N-60, computer system 600 displays reporting interfaces 602N and 6020, which include follow-up questions in response to selection of car or vehicle emergency option 608M and medical option 606M, respectively.

[0295] In FIG. 6N, reporting interface 602N includes a second set of options 604N and a skip option 616. The second set of options 604N includes selectable follow-up options related to the car or vehicle emergency option 608M of Figure 6M. In response to receiving a selection of an automobile or vehicle emergency type (eg, an option in the second set of options 604N), the automobile or vehicle emergency type is included in an emergency report to be submitted to emergency services. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays second set of options 602N based on the emergency type selected from first set of options 604M. In some embodiments, the second set of options 602N are follow-up questions based on the emergency type selected from the first set of options 604M.

[0296] The second set of options 604N includes a vehicle collision option 606N and other options 618N. In response to receiving input 608N on vehicle collision option 606N, computer system 600 displays reporting interface 602P of FIG. 6P, as described below. In some embodiments, electronic computer system 600 displays summary interface 602R in response to receiving input 608 on vehicle collision option 606N. In response to receiving input on other options 618N, computer system 600 displays reporting interface 602V of Figure 6V.

[0297] In FIG. 60, reporting interface 6020 includes a third set of options 6040, including a plurality of selectable follow-up options related to who needs help for the medical emergency selected by input 616M in FIG. 6M. In response to receiving a selection of who needs assistance (eg, the selections of the third set of options 6040), the selection is included in an emergency report to be submitted to emergency services. In response to receiving input 6080 on the who needs help option 6060 (eg, "Me"), computer system 600 displays reporting interface 602Q of Figure 6Q, as described below. In some embodiments, in response to receiving input 6080 on who needs help option 6060, computer system 600 displays summary interface 602S.

[0298] In FIGS. 6P-6Q, computer system 600 displays reporting interfaces 602P and 602Q, which include follow-up questions for selecting a vehicle collision option 606N and a who needs help option 6060, respectively. In Figure 6P, reporting interface 602P displays an interface for receiving selections via a fourth set of options 604P indicating whether the user was involved in a vehicle collision. The fourth set of options 604P includes a plurality of selectable follow-up options related to whether the user was in an accident. In response to receiving a selection indicating whether the user was involved in an incident (eg, the selections of the fourth set of options 604P), the selection is included in an emergency report to be submitted to emergency services. In Figure 6P, computer system 600 detects input 608P on "yes" option 606P (eg, indicating that the user is in an incident location). In response to receiving input 608P on "Yes" option 606P, computer system 600 displays summary interface 602R of Figure 6R.

[0299] In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays additional reporting interfaces and selectable follow-up options specific to the selected car or vehicle option 604M, vehicle collision option 606N, and/or generally included for emergency situations. For example, the additional reporting interface includes multiple selectable follow-up questions regarding the individual's status and who needs assistance.

[0300] In some embodiments, in response to receiving input on the emergency option, computer system 600 displays the send option. In response to receiving input 608P on "Yes" option 606P, computer system 600 displays alignment interface 902C, described below in Figure 9c, or messaging interface 602T, described in Figure 6T.

[0301] In Figure 6Q, reporting interface 602Q displays an interface for selecting options that best describe the emergency situation. Reporting interface 602Q includes a fifth set of options 604Q. The fifth set of options 604Q does not include the skip option 616 because the reporting interface 602Q cannot be skipped based on the medical option 606M and/or the who needs help option 606O. In response to receiving a selection of an option in the fifth set of options 604Q, the selection is included in an emergency report to be submitted to the emergency services. A fifth set of options 604Q is specific to the Who Needs Help option 6060 of Figure 6O. The fifth set of options 604Q includes chest pain option 606Q. In response to receiving input 608Q on chest pain option 606Q, computer system 600 displays summary interface 602S of Figure 6s.

[0302] In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays options specific to medical care 606M, who needs help options 6060, and/or additional reporting interfaces and selectable follow-up options that are generally included for most emergency situations. For example, the additional reporting interface includes multiple selectable follow-up questions related to the individual's status and whether they are conscious.

[0303] In some embodiments, in response to receiving input 608Q on chest pain option 606Q, computer system 600 displays alignment interface 902C, described below in Figure 9c, or reporting interface 602U, described in Figure 6U.

[0304] In Figures 6R and 6s, computer system 600 displays summary interfaces 602R and 602S, respectively. Computer system 600 displays summary interfaces 602R and 602S in response to receiving a selection of the emergency option described above. In some embodiments, the computer system displays summary interfaces 602R and 602S in response to receiving input on the additional reporting interface, as described above. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays summary interfaces 602R and 602S in response to receiving input at the reporting interface related to the type of emergency and/or follow-up questions.

[0305] Summary interfaces 602R and 602S include send options 606R and 606S, do not send options 608R and 608S, respectively, and timers 610R and 610S. In response to receiving input 604R on send option 606R and input 6105 on send option 606S, computer system 600 sends an emergency report to emergency services. In response to receiving input on the do not send options 608R and 608S, computer system 600 displays corresponding previous reporting interfaces 602N and 6020. In some embodiments, in response to receiving input on the do not send options 608R and 608S, computer system 600 displays previously displayed reporting interfaces 602P and 602Q, respectively, and/or the home screen of computer system 600. Timer 610R indicates the amount of time (eg, in seconds) remaining before the computer system automatically sends an emergency report including the displayed information. In some embodiments, in response to not receiving input 604R and 604S on send options 608R and 608S, respectively, within a predetermined period of time (eg, 5 seconds, 10 seconds, 30 seconds, or 1 minute) or in not sending With input on options 606R and 606S, computer system 600 automatically sends an emergency report. In response to receiving inputs 604R and 604S on send options 606R and 606S before the timer expires, computer system 600 sends an emergency report.

[0306] In Figure 6R, summary interface 602R displays a description of the information in the emergency report to be submitted. The information in the emergency report is included in each of reporting interface 602M (eg, car or vehicle option 608M), reporting interface 602N (eg, vehicle collision option 606N), and reporting interface 606P (eg, incident location option 606P) choose. Information in the emergency report also includes information that was not present in the previously displayed reporting interface, such as the location of the computer system 600 .

[0307] In response to receiving input 604R on send option 606R, computer system 600 displays messaging interface 602T. In response to not receiving input on send option 606R within a predetermined period of time, computer system 600 displays

The message transmission interface 602T is displayed.

[0308] In Figure 6s, summary interface 602S displays a description of the information in the emergency report to be submitted. Information in the emergency report includes selections received in each of reporting interface 602M (eg, medical option 606M), reporting interface 606P (eg, who needs help option 606O), and reporting interface 602Q (eg, chest pain option 606Q). Information in the emergency report also includes information not previously displayed in the reporting interface, such as the location of computer system 600 and medical ID information about the user stored on computer system 600 (shown as blood type and previous medical history). The medical ID is included in summary interface 602S because computer system 600 determines information related to the type of emergency.

[0309] In response to receiving input 604R on send option 606R and input 604S on send option 606S, computer system 600 displays an alignment interface. An alignment interface is used to align computer system 600 with satellites, similar to alignment interface 902C depicted in Figure 9c. In some embodiments, computer system 600 needs to be properly aligned with satellites to communicate via satellite communications.

[0310] In some embodiments, after displaying the reporting interface 602M, 602N, 602O, 602P, or 602Q described above, the touch-sensitive display 601 turns off. In some embodiments, in response to receiving an indication that touch-sensitive display 601 is turned off for a threshold period of time (eg, 10 seconds, 30 seconds, or one minute), computer system 600 turns on the touch-sensitive display without receiving an indication on computer system 600 enter.

[0311] The above-described report and/or summary interfaces 602M, 602N, 602O, 602P, 602Q, 602R, and 602S include an end button 614, which is a selectable button for ending the display of the corresponding interface. In FIG. 6M , computer system 600 displays a confirmation prompt 620M in response to detecting input 618M on end button 614 (e.g., computer system 600 does not immediately dismiss reporting interface 60 2M in response to detecting selection of end button 614 ( For example, ending an emergency communication session)). In Figure 6M1, confirmation prompt 620M is displayed on top of user interface 602M (eg, as a pop-up menu), and user interface 602M is obscured (eg, grayed out or blurred). Confirmation prompt 620M includes text 620M1 describing that the user is ending the emergency communication session, a confirmation option 620M2, and a cancel option 620M3. In response to detecting input 622M on confirmation option 620M2, computer system 600 ends the emergency communications session. In response to detecting input 624M on cancel option 620M3, computer system 600 returns to user interface 602M as shown in Figure 6M (eg, stops displaying confirmation prompt 620M and displays unobstructed user interface 602M). Similarly, in response to detecting input 6100 on end button 614 in Figure 6O, the computer system 600 displays a confirmation prompt (eg, confirmation prompt 620M of FIG. 6M1 (eg, computer system 600 does not immediately dismiss reporting interface 602O (eg, end the emergency communications session) in response to detecting selection of end button 614)).

[0312] In some embodiments, in response to receiving a selection of end button 614, computer system 600 displays call interface 602G of Figure 6G or call interface 602A of Figure 6A. In some implementations, in response to receiving a selection of end button 614, computer system 600 displays the home screen. The report and/or summary interfaces 602M, 602N, 602O, 602P, 602Q, 602R, and 602S include a return button 615, which is a selectable button for returning the computer system 600 to display of the previously displayed interface. For example, in response to receiving input 610M on return button 615, computer system 600 displays call interface 602G of Figure 6G or call interface 602A of Figure 6A.

[0313] Turning to Figures 6T and 6U, computer system 600 displays messaging interfaces 602T and 602U. Messaging interfaces 602T and 602U display low-bandwidth messages sent via satellite communications, including emergency reports from summary interfaces 602R and 602S. Message interfaces 602T and 602U respectively include return button 615, connection assistants 610T and 610U, sharing summaries 614T and 614U, stop sharing buttons 612T and 612U, message method indicators 622T and 622U, messages 620T and 620U, status indicators 624T and 624U, Text boxes 616T and 616U, and send buttons 618T and 618U. Messaging interfaces 602T and 602U are messaging threads with emergency services.

[0314] Connection assistants 610T and 610U are selectable indicators for satellite communications. In response to sending messages 620T and 620U via satellite communications, computer system 600 displays connection assistants 610T and 610U. Connection assistants 610T and 610U provide a visual indication to computer system 600 of the current connection status to the satellite used for communication. In response to receiving a selection of connection assistants 610T and 610U, computer system 600 displays alignment interface 902F of Figure 9F, as described below. In some embodiments, connection assistants 610T and 610U remain between other user interfaces (such as note-taking interfaces and/or browser interfaces) as a visual indication that computer system 600 is connected via satellite communications.

[0315] In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays the banner simultaneously with messaging interfaces 602T and 602U. The banner includes a real-time indication of the connection status of computer system 600. The real-time indication on this banner includes a connection assistant, similar to banner 926 of messaging interface 902M of Figure 9M, as described below. The banner may include an indication that messages 620T and 620U are being sent via satellite, similar to messaging interface 902K of Figure 9K below. In response to receiving a selection of the banner, computer system 600 displays a connection assistant user interface that is larger than the banner, similar to alignment interface 902G of Figure 9G. In response to receiving input to display a different user interface (such as a note interface and/or a browser interface), the banner may be replaced with connection assistants 610T and 610U as described above, or similar to the messaging interface of Figure 9M as described below Banner 926 of 902M.

[0316] Messages 620T and 620U show messages that have been transmitted to emergency services. Status indicators 624T and 624U indicate the status of messages 620T and 620U, respectively, as sent. Message method indicators 622T and 622U describe the method of the sent message as "via satellite."

[0317] Shared profiles 614T and 614U indicate additional recipients of messages 620T and 620U, respectively. Sharing summaries 614T and 614U display additional recipients as "Emergency Contacts," however, as described below, in some embodiments, additional recipients may be selected as described in query user interface 1102 of Figure 11A. Additional recipients receive messages 620T and 620U in real time, but the additional recipients cannot interact with emergency services or senders in the same thread that reported the emergency message, as described in messaging user interface 1114 of Figure 11H.

[0318] In FIG. 6T, message 620T includes a summary of an emergency report sent to emergency services based on information included in summary interface 602R depicted in FIG. 6R. In some embodiments, as message 620T is sent via satellite, graphical elements show that the message is being sent and the progress of the message in a banner similar to banner 926 depicted in messaging interface 902K of Figure 9K.

[0319] In Figure 6U, message 620U includes a summary of an emergency report sent to emergency services based on information in summary interface 602S depicted in Figure 6s. In some embodiments, as message 620U is sent via satellite, a graphical element shows that the message is being sent and the progress of the message, a banner similar to banner 926 depicted in messaging interface 902K of Figure 9K.

[0320] In Figure 6V, computer system 600 displays reporting interface 602V. Reporting interface 602V includes a text box 609V describing the emergency, continue options 604V, advisory text 606V, and keyboard 608V. In response to input on keyboard 608V and/or advisory text 606V, computer system 600 displays the message to be included in the emergency report. In some implementations, a maximum amount of text and/or characters (eg, 50, 100, or 200 characters) may be added in text box 609V of report interface 602V. In Figure 6V1, as more text is entered into text box 609V, computer system 600 displays a text limit indicator 610V that includes the number of characters that have been entered into text box 609V (eg, 17) and or a numerical indication of the maximum number of characters (eg, 50) that can be added to the text box 609V. In some embodiments, the computer system displays text limit indicator 610V (eg, text limit 7/50) in report interface 602V in Figure 6V. In Figure 6V1, text limit indicator 610V indicates that the amount of text in text box 609V is approaching the maximum amount. In some embodiments, when the text box

When the amount of text in 609V reaches a threshold amount (eg, 10 or 15 characters), computer system 600 displays text limit indicator 610V. In some embodiments, computer system 600 updates the numeric portion of text limit indicator 610V as text is added to text box 609Ya (e.g., as one or more characters are added, such as from 17/50 to 18/ 50 to 19/50 etc.). When the amount of text in text box 609V reaches the maximum amount, computer system 600 updates text limit indicator 610V to indicate that the maximum amount has been reached (eg, displays an exclamation mark along with the text "Message too long"), as shown in Figure 6V2.

[0321] In response to receiving the input at 604V, the computer system 600 displays the report interface 602P of FIG. 6P, the summary interface 602R of FIG. 6R, or additional follow-up questions specific to the car or vehicle option 604M and/or the vehicle collision option 606N and Follow-up options are available.

[0322] In Figure 6W, the computer system displays summary interface 602W. Summary interface 602W displays a summary of received selections for emergency options until computer system 600 determines that the user is unresponsive. Summary interface 602W includes emergency report summary 604W, timer 610W, notification 606W, and do not send button 608W. In response to receiving no input at reporting interface 602Q within the standby period (eg, 10 seconds, 30 seconds, or 1 minute), computer system 600 determines that the user is unresponsive and prepares what information has been answered for submission to emergency services. Notification 606W indicates that the computer system has determined that the user is unresponsive.

[0323] In response to receiving input on the Do Not Send button 608W, the computer system 600 displays the summary interface 602W. However, in response to not receiving input on the do not send button 608W or the end button 614 within the time limit of timer 610W (e.g., in seconds), computer system 600 sends an emergency report to emergency services even though the emergency report undone. In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 6W, computer system 600 outputs haptic output 619 and/or audio output 650 when timer 610W is started, when timer 610W expires, and/or when an emergency report is sent. Outputting non-visual output (e.g., tactile output 619 and/or audio output 650) notifies the user of timer 610W, and/or: if the user is not looking at display 601 (e.g., if computer system 600 or a display of computer system 600 generates part against the user's ear), the report has been sent.

[0324] In some embodiments, in response to the report and/or summary interface 602M, 602O, 602Q, 602N, 602P, 602Q not being displayed within a predetermined standby time limit (e.g., 10 seconds, 30 seconds, or 1 minute) , 602R and/or 602S, the computer system 600 displays a summary interface 602W, in which the emergency report summary 604W shows the previously received corresponding message from C.

[0325] FIGS. 6X-6X4 illustrate an embodiment of the network indicator 607 and/or the status portion 562a of the user interface (eg, a status bar and/or a condensed status area) within area 654 of FIG. 6X. In Figures 6X1 to 6X4, network indicators 607 include a cellular status indicator 607a and a Wi-Fi status indicator 607b. When computer system 600 has cellular service, cellular status indicator 607a includes a series of vertical bars indicating the strength of the cellular signal, as shown in Figure 6X1. When the computer system has the Wi-Fi capability turned on, the Wi-Fi status indicator 607b includes a series of sector bars indicating the strength of the Wi-Fi signal, as shown in Figure 6X1.

[0326] In Figure 6X2, computer system 600 has Wi-Fi capabilities turned on and does not have cellular service from a corresponding (eg, primary) cellular network, but is able to communicate with emergency services (eg, 911) via an alternate cellular network. When computer system 600 does not have cellular service from the corresponding cellular network, cellular status indicator 607a includes emergency indicator 607a1 and corresponding cellular network indicator 607a2. In Figure 6X2, emergency indicator 607a1 is visually distinguished (eg, emphasized) relative to corresponding cellular network indicator 607a2 (eg, emergency indicator 607a1 is bold and/or the corresponding cellular network indicator 607a2 is grayed out or dimmed relative to the emergency indicator 607a1).

[0327] In FIG. 6X3, computer system 600 has Wi-Fi capabilities turned on, does not have cellular service from a corresponding (eg, primary) cellular network, and is unable to communicate with emergency services via an alternate cellular network. Because computer system 600 is not capable of communicating with emergency services via the alternative cellular network, emergency indicator 607a1 is not visually distinguishable relative to corresponding cellular network indicator 607a2 (e.g., both emergency indicator 607a1 and corresponding cellular network indicator 607a2 grayed out, darkened, or displayed with the same appearance).

[0328] In FIG. 6X4, computer system 600 has Wi-Fi capabilities turned off, has no cellular service from a corresponding (eg, primary) cellular network, and is unable to communicate with emergency services via an alternate cellular network. Because computer system 600 is unable to communicate with emergency services via the alternative cellular network, emergency indicator 607a1 is not visually distinguishable relative to corresponding cellular network indicator 607a2 (eg, the same as cellular status indicator 607a in Figure 6X3) . Because Wi-Fi capabilities are turned off and computer system 600 is able to communicate via the satellite communications network, computer system 600 displays satellite status indicators 607c (eg, glyphs, icons, thumbnails, and/or images of satellites). In some implementations, satellite status indicator 607c is displayed in place of Wi-Fi status indicator 607b and/or at the same location where Wi-Fi status indicator 607b is displayed. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays network indicator 607 without displaying Wi-Fi when the computer system has Wi-Fi capabilities turned off, is unable to communicate via a satellite communications network, and does not have cellular service for any purpose. status indicator 607b and satellite status indicator 607c is not displayed. In some embodiments, if computer system 600 is turned on Wi-Fi capable, network indicator 607 includes Wi-Fi status indicator 607b (eg, not displayed or in place of satellite status indicator 607c), regardless of whether computer system 600 is capable of communicating via a satellite communications network.

[0329] In Figure 6y, computer system 600 displays a user interface 602Y that includes a status portion 652b (eg, an extended status area). Status portion 652b is larger than status portion 652a. Because status portion 652b is larger than status portion 652a, network indicator 607 is displayed differently than in, for example, Figures 6X-6X4. In Figure 6y, computer system 600 has Wi-Fi capabilities turned on, does not have cellular service from a corresponding cellular network, is able to communicate with emergency services via an alternative cellular network, and is able to communicate via a satellite communications network. Accordingly, emergency indicator 607a1 and corresponding cellular network indicator 607a2 are displayed side by side (e.g., emergency indicator 607a1 is to the right of corresponding cellular network indicator 607a2), and emergency indicator 607a1 includes additional information (e.g., expanded and/or Include additional text, such as "SOS only" instead of "SOS only"). Additionally, computer system 600 displays both satellite status indicator 607c and Wi-Fi status indicator 607b (e.g., a Wi-Fi status indicator that includes the text "WiFi" Extended version of character 607b).

[0330] In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays user interface 602Y (and/or expanded status area 652b) in response to detecting input 602X in FIG. 6X (e.g., regardless of the status of computer system 600 and/or status portion 652a What is the status of cellular, Wi-Fi and/or satellite capabilities). In some implementations, computer system 600 may display status indicators in status portion 652b for any of the cellular, Wi-Fi, and/or satellite capability statuses represented in Figures 6X-6X4 (e.g., The expanded state portion 652b is equivalent to the compressed state portion 652a in Figures 6X, 6X1, 6X2, 6X3, or 6X4). [0331] In some embodiments, user interface 602y is a control user interface (e.g., a control center) that includes selectable options for controlling various functions of computer system 600 and/or setting parameters for features of computer system 600. Controls and/or options (e.g., 604Y). For example, in Figure 6y, controls 604y include controls for airplane mode, turning Wi-Fi on and off, Turn Bluetooth on and off, turn cellular on and off, control media playback (e.g., play, pause, and/or skip), lock and unlock display orientation, turn flash function on and off, open alarm and/or timer apps, open computing the browser application, open the camera application, set the display brightness, set the audio volume level, and/or open the option to control the application for the remote accessory.

[0332] Figure 7 is a diagram illustrating a method for initiating communications when a terrestrial wireless communications network is unreachable, according to some embodiments.

Flowchart of the method. In some embodiments, the method includes displaying an emergency message button if cell service is unreachable when a call is attempted. In some embodiments, the method may be implemented using the device and user interface shown in Figures 6A-6y. The method operates on a computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, or 600; e.g., a smartphone, tablet, desktop computer, laptop, smart watch, or head-mounted device (e.g., head-mounted augmented reality and/or (e.g., a display controller, a touch-sensitive display system, and/or a head-mounted display system) and one or more input devices (e.g., 601 ; touch-sensitive surfaces, touch screens, buttons and/or microphones) communications. Some operations are optionally combined, the order of some operations is optionally changed, and some operations are optionally omitted.

[0333] As described below, method 700 provides an intuitive way to initiate communications using a computer system when a terrestrial wireless communications network is unreachable. This approach reduces the cognitive load on users using computer systems to initiate communications when terrestrial wireless communications networks are unreachable, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-powered computing devices, enabling users to initiate communications faster and more efficiently when terrestrial wireless communications networks are unreachable saves power and increases the time between battery charges.

[0334] The computer system detects (702) a user input (e.g., at input 610A in Figure 6A) corresponding to a request to initiate a communication (e.g., a phone call, a video conference, and/or a text message) via the one or more input devices. as seen) (in some embodiments, detecting a voice command that initiates a call (eg, an audio call) and/or input corresponding to a selection of an affordance that, when selected, causes the computer system to initiate the call) .

[0335] In response to detecting the user input, the computer system displays (704) a first user interface (e.g., as seen in Figure 6G, at call management interface 602G; e.g., a telephone call user interface; a text message) via the display generation component transmission interface; and/or video conferencing interface). Displaying the first user interface includes: based on a determination that the computer system cannot reach the terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., the computer system cannot connect to the cellular network; and/or the computer system does not receive signals with sufficient strength and/or consistency to perform (e.g., to cellular signal for emergency services) calls (in some embodiments, the terrestrial wireless communications network is the cellular network associated with the computer system (e.g., provided by the user's cellular service provider) or another cellular network (e.g., provided by another provided by a cellular service provider) (In some embodiments, for emergency calls, the computer system may use a network provided by a network provider different from the provider associated with the computer system)) (In some embodiments, according to Based on a determination that the computer system is unable to conduct the call using a predetermined type of communication protocol (e.g., cellular communications) and/or based on a determination that the computer system is unable to communicate via a predetermined type of signal (e.g., no signal of a predetermined type is received at a threshold (e.g., sufficient) level), the computer system displays selectable communication options)), displaying (706) a corresponding selectable communication option (e.g., 604G; e.g., indicating representations, buttons, graphical elements, graphical objects, and/or icons) that, when selected via the one or more input devices, are initiated for use via a non-terrestrial wireless communications network (e.g., via a communications protocol that does not require cellular service and/or low-bandwidth communication modes) (e.g., via phone calls, text messages, and/or video conferencing) (in some embodiments, the communication is real-time (e.g., full-duplex real-time) communication). Displaying the first user interface includes determining that the computer system is capable of reaching a corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., the computer system is capable of connecting to a cellular network; and/or that the computer system is receiving signals with sufficient strength and/or consistency to perform (e.g., to an emergency cellular signal of a call), initiating (708) a process for communicating (eg, initiating a call, text message, and/or video conference) via a corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network without displaying a corresponding selectable communication option. Respective selectable communication options that, when selected, initiate a process for communicating via a non-terrestrial wireless communication network or initiate a process for communicating via a respective terrestrial wireless communication network are displayed depending on whether the computer system is able to reach the respective terrestrial wireless communication network. without displaying the corresponding selectable communication options to the user

Provides visual feedback as to whether the computer system can reach the corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network, and provides an alternative communication method when the computer system cannot reach the corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network, doing so provides improved visual feedback and when a certain Group conditions to perform actions without requiring further user input.

[0336] In some embodiments, the computer system attempts (e.g., continues to attempt) (e.g., continues to attempt) (e.g., continues to attempt) (e.g., continues to attempt) (e.g., continues to attempt) (e.g., as described with reference to FIGS. The process of communicating over a wireless communications network; and detecting selection of a corresponding selectable communication option via the one or more input devices (e.g., 606G). In response to detecting selection of the corresponding selectable communication option, the computer system ceases attempting to initiate a process for communicating via the terrestrial wireless communication network. Initiating a process for communicating via a terrestrial wireless communication network in response to detecting selection of a corresponding selectable communication option Automatically stopping attempts to communicate via the original method when the user selects an option for communicating via a different method No further user input is required, which reduces the amount of input required to perform an operation.

[0337] In some embodiments, the first user interface (e.g., 602G) includes displaying (e.g., initially displaying) a cancel communication option (e.g., 609; "End Call" affordance, button, or icon), this option, when selected via the one or more input devices, initiates the process of ceasing attempts to initiate communications. In some embodiments, the first user interface includes a cancel communication option regardless of whether the terrestrial wireless communication network is determined to be reachable or unreachable. In some embodiments, the computer system displays a cancel communication option in the user interface before displaying the corresponding selectable communication option (e.g., initially displaying the cancel communication option in response to detecting user input and subsequently upon determining that the terrestrial wireless communication network is unavailable). The corresponding selectable communication options will be displayed later after arrival). In some embodiments, displaying the corresponding selectable communication options includes moving to cancel the communication option. The Cancel Communication option, which displays a process that, when selected, initiates the process of ceasing attempts to initiate communications, provides an efficient way of ceasing attempts to initiate communications regardless of whether the computer system is able to reach the corresponding terrestrial wireless communications network, which reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.

[0338] In some embodiments, upon displaying a corresponding selectable communication option (e.g., 604G), the computer system attempts (e.g., as described with reference to Figures 6c and 6D) (e.g., continues to attempt) to initiate a request for communication via the corresponding The process of communicating through terrestrial wireless communication networks. Attempting to initiate a process for communicating via a corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network when a corresponding selectable communication option is displayed allows the computer system to continue to attempt one communication method (e.g., a potentially superior communication method) without further user input while providing the user with Provides the option to communicate via another method, which reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation.

[0339] In some embodiments, displaying the corresponding selectable communication option (e.g., 604G) is based on a determination that the terrestrial wireless communication network is unreachable and the communication is an emergency communication (e.g., as described with reference to Figure 6G; e.g., with emergency services communication) occurs. Displaying corresponding selectable communication options based on a determination that the terrestrial wireless communication network is unreachable and that the communication is an emergency communication provides an alternative communication method to the user and indicates to the user that the terrestrial wireless communication network is unreachable, which is performed when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input and providing improved visual feedback.

[0340] In some embodiments, determining that the computer system cannot reach the terrestrial wireless communication network includes determining that the computer system cannot reach a first terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., not previously associated with the computer system) that is not associated with the computer system (e.g., not previously associated with the computer system). network band to which the operator is not associated) (eg, the computer system attempts other operator cellular networks as described with reference to Figures 6E-6J). In some embodiments, determining that the computer system can reach the corresponding terrestrial wireless communications network includes determining that the computer system can reach a first terrestrial wireless communications network that is not associated with the computer system. In some embodiments, the computer system attempts to initiate communication via two or more terrestrial wireless communication networks (eg, multiple or all networks with which the computer system is capable of communicating when reachable) and determines that the computer system cannot reach the two

or any of more terrestrial wireless communication networks. In some embodiments, a computer system is associated with a terrestrial wireless communications network if the network is the computer system's home network or the computer system is registered to or associated with a subscriber account of the network. Including determining that the computer system cannot reach a first terrestrial wireless communications network that is not associated with the computer system when determining that the computer system cannot reach the terrestrial wireless communications network allows for consideration of terrestrial wireless communications that are not associated with the computer system when determining whether to display a corresponding selectable communications option. Reachability of a communication network, which performs an action when a set of conditions has been met without further user input.

[0341] In some embodiments, the first user interface (e.g., 602G) includes a plurality of selectable phone call options (e.g., 603; e.g., options to control the phone call (e.g., speaker, mute, keypad, contacts ). In some embodiments, displaying the first user interface includes simultaneously displaying the plurality of selectable phone call options and corresponding selectable communication options (eg, 604G). In some embodiments, the first user interface is a phone call application. User interface of the program. Including a plurality of selectable telephone call options and corresponding selectable communication options in the first user interface allows the user to initiate the process of communicating via a non-terrestrial wireless communication network from the call user interface without requiring additional input. Navigate away from the call user interface, which reduces the amount of input required to perform an action.

[0342] In some embodiments, the user input corresponding to the request to initiate communication includes one or more inputs directed to the second user interface (e.g., 902A; e.g., input of a phone number (e.g., 911) and optionally , selection of the Call button in the keypad on the phone number entry user interface and/or selection of a contactable entity (e.g., person or service) in the Contacts user interface). A request to initiate communication is a request to initiate communication with emergency services (eg, an attempt to call 911). In response to detecting a request to initiate communication with the emergency services, displaying a first user interface including corresponding selectable communication options based on the determination that the terrestrial wireless communication network is unreachable indicates to the user that alternative communication methods are available in the emergency and provides access via This alternative communication method is an efficient way to initiate communication without requiring additional user input, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform an operation.

[0343] In some embodiments, the computer system detects, via the one or more input devices, corresponding to a selection of a corresponding selectable communication option (e.g., 604G; e.g., a tap gesture or other selection on the corresponding selectable communication option). Select input) input (for example, 606G). In response to detecting an input corresponding to a selection of a corresponding selectable communication option, the computer system initiates a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., via text messaging) (e.g., initiating the use of a low-bandwidth communication mode (e.g., A mode for communicating using a compressed message format) The process of communicating). Initiating a process for communicating via a non-terrestrial wireless communication network in response to detecting an input corresponding to a selection of a corresponding selectable communication option provides an efficient and intuitive technique for initiating communication via a non-terrestrial wireless communication network without Append user input, which reduces the amount of input required to perform an action.

[0344] In some embodiments, based on determining that the terrestrial wireless communication network is unreachable and that a predetermined time has elapsed since an input corresponding to a request to initiate communication is detected (or alternatively, since a corresponding selectable communication option has been displayed) A determined period of time (e.g., as described with reference to FIG. 6I ; e.g., a non-zero amount of time, 3 seconds, 5 seconds, and/or 10 seconds), the computer system initiates a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communications network (e.g., , automatically selecting the corresponding selectable communication option after a predetermined amount of time (without user input)). In some embodiments, the computer system initiates (eg, after a predetermined amount of time) after detecting input corresponding to a request to initiate communication without detecting further input via the one or more input devices. A process for communicating over non-terrestrial wireless communications networks. The process for initiating communications via a non-terrestrial wireless communications network will automatically be initiated upon a determination that the terrestrial wireless communications network is unreachable and that a predetermined period of time has elapsed since detection of an input corresponding to a request to initiate communication. The process by which terrestrial wireless communication networks communicate without additional user input, as described in

Performs an action when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input and reduces the amount of input required to perform the action.

[0345] In some embodiments, the computer system displays a visual indication of a countdown of time remaining before the expiration of a predetermined period of time (e.g., as described with reference to Figure 6I, satellite communications button 604I indicating a countdown of time remaining) ( e.g. text, graphics, colors and/or animation). In some implementations, the computer system replaces the corresponding selectable communication option (eg, 604G) with the visual indication of the countdown, or modifies the corresponding selectable communication option to include the visual indication of the countdown. In some embodiments, the computer system switches from a first user interface (eg, 602G) (eg, a call user interface) to a countdown user interface (eg, 602I) that includes a visual indication of the countdown (eg, replaced with a countdown user interface first user interface). A visual indication displaying a countdown of the time remaining before expiration of the predetermined time period provides notification to the user when the process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network is to be initiated, which provides improved visual feedback.

[0346] In some embodiments, the process for communicating via a non-terrestrial wireless communication network includes (e.g., in response to detecting selection of a corresponding selectable communication option (e.g., 604G) and/or determining that a predetermined time criteria) display a second user interface (e.g., 604M) that is different from the first user interface (e.g., 602G) (e.g., a low-bandwidth communication mode user interface and/or an emergency reporting user interface) (e.g., stop displaying the first user interface, and optionally, replacing the first user interface with a second user interface). In some embodiments, the second user interface includes a series of questions and/or selectable options and/or text input fields (eg, 604M) for generating a message, rather than, for example, opening an audio channel. Displaying a second user interface different from the first user interface as part of the process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communications network allows the computer system to provide additional options and guide the user through the process for communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communications network , which provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface, as well as improved visual feedback.

[0347] In some embodiments, communicating via a non-terrestrial wireless communications network includes communicating via text messages or audio calls (eg, as described with reference to Figure 6A). Including communications via text messages or audio calls provides users with low-bandwidth options for communicating via non-terrestrial wireless communications networks, which provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface.

[0348] In some embodiments, communicating via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network includes initiating a communication session via (or at least in part via) the non-terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., by selecting satellite communication button 604G, 604I, 904A, 1520B5 or 1534C6). In some embodiments, after initiating the communication session activity via the non-terrestrial wireless communication network (Or, optionally, when a communication session is active via a non-terrestrial wireless communication network), the computer system: detects user input (e.g., 618M) corresponding to a request to end the communication session (e.g., selection of end button 614) (e.g., , detecting a voice command and/or touch gesture corresponding to a selection of a selectable user interface element); and in response to detecting user input corresponding to a request to end the communication session, providing (e.g., displaying) confirmation to end the communication A requested prompt for the session (e.g., 620M2 in Figure 6M1) (e.g., button, notification, affordance, selectable confirmation option, and/or selectable graphical element). In some embodiments, in response to detecting user input selecting a prompt to confirm a request to end the communication session, the computer system causes the communication session to end. In some embodiments, in response to detecting user input corresponding to a request to end the communication session, the computer system does not cause (e.g., abandons) the communication session to end, such as until receiving an option to confirm the request to end the communication session. until prompted for user input. Providing a prompt to confirm the request to end the communication session provides feedback that the user has requested to end the communication session and may prevent the user from inadvertently ending the communication session through unintentional input, which provides improved visual feedback. Prevents users from inadvertently ending communication sessions by avoiding re-establishment

Additional time for communication sessions and user input, which enables users to operate computer systems with fewer errors and reduces the amount of input required to perform operations.

[0349] In some embodiments, based on (or, in some embodiments, in response to) determining that the computer system is unreachable to a first corresponding terrestrial wireless communications network (e.g., a primary cellular network, a cellular network associated with the computer system, and /or a service provider's cellular network associated with the computer system), the computer system displays an indication of the communication capabilities of the computer system via a display generation component (e.g., 607, 607a1, 607c, graphical indications, icons, colors, fonts, text, animations, symbols, thumbnails, images and/or glyphs) (e.g., an indication of a computer system's ability to communicate with a corresponding number or entity (such as an emergency number or emergency service)); and based on a determination that the computer system is able to reach the first corresponding In a terrestrial wireless communication network, the computer system gives up an indication showing the communication capability status of the computer system. In some embodiments, an indication of the communication capabilities of the computer system is displayed in a portion of the user interface that includes the status of the computer system (e.g., cellular status, Wi-Fi status, time, short range communication status, and/or battery One or more indicators of battery power). In some embodiments, an indication of the computer system's communication capabilities is displayed somewhere on the display and/or user interface, The cellular status indicator displays there when cellular service is available. An indication of the computer system's communication capabilities based on whether the computer system is able to reach the corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network automatically provides the user with clear feedback regarding the computer system's communication capabilities when the computer system's communication capabilities are limited, without requiring the user to navigate a user interface To determine this communication capability, this provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the amount of input required to perform an action, and performs an action without requiring further user input when a set of conditions has been met.

[0350] In some embodiments, displaying an indication of the communication capabilities of the computer system includes displaying a first communication status indicator (e.g., 607a1, graphical indication, icon, color, font, text, animation, symbol, thumbnail, image, and or glyph), the first communication status indicator indicating that the computer system is via a terrestrial wireless communications network that is different from the first corresponding terrestrial wireless communications network (e.g., a cellular network that is different from the cellular network associated with the computer system) ( For example, the ability to communicate with a corresponding number or entity, such as an emergency number or emergency service. Displaying a first communication status indicator indicating the computer system's ability to communicate via a terrestrial wireless communication network different from the first corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network automatically notifies the user via the terrestrial wireless communication network when the first corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network is unreachable (This network can be faster and consume less energy than non-terrestrial communication networks) The ability to communicate without requiring the user to navigate a user interface to determine the communication capabilities of the computer system provides improved visual feedback to the user and reduces execution The number of inputs required for the operation.

[0351] In some embodiments, displaying the first communication status indicator includes displaying a first appearance (e.g., A first communication status indicator with a solid line, with a black line, a first color, a first brightness, highlighted, accentuated, and/or not grayed out; eg, 607a1 in Figure 6X2). Displaying a first communication status indicator having a first appearance based on a determination that the computer system is capable of reaching a second corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network automatically notifies the user of another terrestrial wireless communication network (which may be faster and less consuming than the non-terrestrial communication network) energy) is reachable even if the first corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network is not reachable, without requiring the user to navigate a user interface to determine the communication capabilities of the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback to the user and reduces the number of inputs required to perform operations , and performs an action when a set of conditions has been met without further user input.

[0352] In some embodiments, displaying the first communication status indicator includes: based on determining that the computer system is unable to reach any terrestrial wireless communication network, displaying the first communication status indicator having a second appearance (e.g., having a dashed line, having a gray Line, second color different from the first color, second brightness darker than the first brightness, not prominent relative to the first appearance

shown, deemphasized relative to the first appearance, and/or grayed out; for example, 607a1 in Figure 6X3, Figure 6X4, or Figure 6X5), the second appearance is different from the first appearance of the first communication status indicator. displaying the first communication status indicator having a second appearance upon determining that the computer system is unreachable to any terrestrial wireless communication network automatically informs the user that no other terrestrial wireless communication network is reachable when the first corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network is unreachable, and The user is not required to navigate a user interface to determine the communication capabilities of the computer system and indicates to the user that alternative means of communication may be required (e.g., via a user interface for satellite communications), which provides improved visual feedback to the user and reduces execution time The amount of input required for an operation, and performs the operation without further user input when a set of conditions have been met.

[0353] In some embodiments, displaying an indication of the communication capabilities of the computer system includes: upon a determination (or, in some embodiments, in response to a determination) that the computer system is able to reach a non-terrestrial wireless communication network (and optionally, via Communication with the Wi-Fi network is unavailable to the computer system and/or the computer system's Wi-Fi capabilities are turned off), displaying a second communication status indicator that is different from the first communication status indicator (e.g., 607c, graphical indication, icon , colours, fonts, text, animations, symbols, thumbnails, images and/or glyphs; satellite images and/or icons). In some embodiments, the second communication status indicator is displayed based on a determination that the computer system is capable of reaching the non-terrestrial wireless communication network and the computer system's Wi-Fi capabilities are disabled (eg, turned off). In some embodiments, upon determining that the computer system is capable of reaching the non-terrestrial wireless communication network and that the computer system's Wi-Fi capabilities are enabled (e.g., turned on), the computer system forgoes displaying the second communication status indicator (e.g., if Wi-Fi -Fi is turned on, the second communication status indicator is not displayed). In some embodiments, the computer system is in an extended status bar (e.g., in a control user interface (such as Control Center) that includes selectable options for controlling features of the computer system) but not in a non-extended status bar (e.g., The second communication status indicator is displayed in a user interface other than a control user interface, such as a home screen, a wake screen, a lock screen, or an application user interface. Displaying the second communication status indicator upon determining that the non-terrestrial wireless communication network is reachable by the computer system automatically notifies the user that the first corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network is unreachable when another terrestrial wireless communication network is reachable, without requiring the user to navigate the user interface. Determines the communication capabilities of a computer system, which provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the amount of input required to perform an action, and performs an action without requiring further user input when a set of conditions has been met.

[0354] In some embodiments, the computer system combines an indication of the computer system's communication capabilities with an indication of Wi-Fi connectivity (e.g., 607b, graphical indication, icon, color, font, text, animation, symbol, thumbnail, Images and/or glyphs) (for example, an indication of whether a computer system is connected to a Wi-Fi network) are displayed simultaneously. In some embodiments, displaying the indication of Wi-Fi connectivity is performed upon a determination (or, in some embodiments, in response to a determination) that communication via the Wi-Fi network is available to the computer system. In some implementations, the computer system displays an indication of Wi-Fi connectivity in response to detecting a request to enable Wi-Fi connectivity (eg, user input selecting a button to enable Wi-Fi connectivity). Displaying an indication of Wi-Fi connectivity simultaneously with an indication of the computer system's communication capabilities informs the user of the computer system's ability to communicate via Wi-Fi connectivity when the first corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network is unreachable, without requiring user navigation user interface to determine a computer system's Wi-Fi connectivity, which provides improved visual feedback to the user and reduces the amount of input required to perform operations.

[0355] In some embodiments, displaying the indication of Wi-Fi connectivity (e.g., 607b) includes displaying the indication of Wi-Fi connectivity without displaying that the computer system is able to reach the non-terrestrial wireless communications network (or in some embodiments , an indication (e.g., 607c, second communication status indicator, graphical indication, icon, color, font, text, animation, symbol, thumbnail, image, and/or diagram) that the computer system is capable of communicating via a non-terrestrial wireless communication network. indicator). In some embodiments, it is determined that communication via the Wi-Fi network is available to the computer system and that the computer system is capable of reaching the non-terrestrial wireless network.

In the wireless communication network, the computer system displays the indication of Wi-Fi connectivity in place of (eg, does not display) the second communication status indicator, and/or replaces the second communication status indicator with the indication of Wi-Fi connectivity. Displaying an indication of Wi-Fi connectivity without displaying an indication that the computer system is able to reach non-terrestrial wireless communication networks Informs the user of the computer system's ability to communicate via WiFi connectivity, which can be faster and more reliable than non-terrestrial wireless communication networks Easily connects and/or is more reliable without requiring the user to navigate a user interface to determine a computer system's Wi-Fi connectivity, which provides improved visual feedback to the user and reduces the amount of input required to perform an operation.

[0356] In some embodiments, displaying the first user interface includes displaying the first user interface without the corresponding selectable communication option (e.g., 602E) (e.g., displaying without the corresponding selectable communication option 604G) before displaying the corresponding selectable communication option. 602E), and wherein displaying the corresponding communication option based on a determination that the computer system cannot reach the terrestrial wireless communication network is after (e.g., the computer system's) attempt to initiate communication (e.g., a telephone call) via the corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network has failed (e.g., , performed after the call in Figure 6E has failed (and, in some embodiments, upon or in response to determining such failure). Abstaining from displaying a corresponding selectable communication option until an attempt to initiate communication via a corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network has failed enables the computer system to attempt via a faster and/or more reliable network before providing the option to communicate via a non-terrestrial wireless communication network. communicate and indicate to the user that an attempt to initiate communication via the corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network has failed, which provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation, and provides additional control options without the overhead of additional Clutter the user interface by displaying controls and performing actions when a set of conditions have been met without requiring further user input.

[0357] In some embodiments, displaying the first user interface includes in a first position in the first user interface (e.g., 609) in Figure 6F shows an end call button (eg, 609), which, when selected, causes the computer system to stop attempting to initiate communications via the corresponding terrestrial wireless communications network. In some embodiments, upon a determination that the computer system is unable to reach the terrestrial wireless communications network (and, in some embodiments, after an attempt to initiate communication via the corresponding terrestrial wireless communications network has failed (or upon the determination or in response to the determination that the failure) , the computer system displays an end call button in the first user interface at a second location that is different from the first location in the first user interface (eg, 609 in Figure 6F1 or 6F2). The end call button is moved or slid to a second position (e.g., via animation over time) and a corresponding selectable communication option is displayed at or near the first position in the first user interface based on the determination that the computer system cannot reach the terrestrial wireless communications network. to change the position of the end call button to make room on the user interface for the corresponding selectable communication option, and to notify the user that the terrestrial wireless communication network is unreachable and/or that attempts to initiate communication via the corresponding terrestrial wireless communication network have failed, which is Users are provided with improved visual feedback, additional control options are provided without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls, and actions are performed without further user input when a set of conditions has been met.

[0358] In some embodiments, upon determining (or, in some embodiments, in response to a determination) that the computer system cannot reach the terrestrial wireless communications network, the computer system provides (e.g., outputs and/or generates) a non-visible output ( For example, 619, 650, tactile and/or audio output) (eg, provided concurrently with displaying corresponding selectable communication options) (eg, 619 and/or 650 in Figure 6F2). Provide a non-visual output to notify the user based on a determination that the computer system cannot reach the terrestrial wireless communications network: even if the user is not looking at the computer system's display (e.g., if the computer system is against the user's ear when attempting to call emergency services) or if the computer system The display dims or becomes inactive and cannot be reached by terrestrial wireless communication networks, which provides improved feedback and performs actions when a set of conditions have been met without requiring further user input. Feedback regarding the communication status of the computer system enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where users are responding to emergency or stressful situations.

[0359] Note that the details of the process described above with respect to method 700 may also apply in a similar manner to the method described below. For example, methods 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000, and/or 2200 optionally include one or more features of the various methods described above with reference to method 700. For example, method 700 may be performed as part of a process for initiating communications according to method 800. For example, method 700 optionally includes providing alignment elements according to method 1000 . For example, method 700 may include selecting a second recipient of the communication according to method 1200 . For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated below.

[0360] FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating a method described in accordance with some embodiments for initiating communications when a terrestrial wireless communications network is unreachable. In some embodiments, the method includes, while in the emergency reporting mode, displaying options for emergency reporting, receiving the options, and sending the emergency report with the received options. In some embodiments, the method may be implemented using the device and user interface shown in Figures 6A-6y. The method is performed on a computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, or 600; e.g., a smartphone, tablet, laptop, desktop computer, smart watch, or head-mounted device (e.g., head-mounted augmented reality and/or (e.g., a display controller, a touch-sensitive display system, and/or a head-mounted display system) and one or more input devices (e.g., 601 ; touch-sensitive surfaces, touch screens, buttons and/or microphones) communications. Some operations are optionally combined, the order of some operations is optionally changed, and some operations are optionally omitted.

[0361] As described below, method 800 provides an intuitive way to communicate in a low bandwidth mode. This approach reduces the cognitive load on the user to communicate in a low-bandwidth mode, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-powered computing devices, enabling users to communicate faster and more efficiently in low-bandwidth modes saves power and increases the time between battery charges.

[0362] When the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode (802) (in some embodiments, a mode that communicates using a compressed message format (e.g., a format with limited data for transmission via non-terrestrial wireless communications)). In In some embodiments, the computer system enters the low-bandwidth communication mode in response to receiving a request to enter the low-bandwidth communication mode (eg, in response to receiving a request to communicate via non-terrestrial wireless communications), the computer system displays via the display generation component (804) A first set of selectable communication content options (e.g., 604M; e.g., affordances, buttons, graphical elements) corresponding to corresponding content for the communication (e.g., information selectable by a user to be included in a report) , graphical objects, and/or icons), wherein the first set of selectable communication content options are specific to the low-bandwidth communication mode (e.g., these options are only available and/or presented for the low-bandwidth communication mode) (in some embodiments, these Options are not rendered in the messaging user interface of a messaging application that displays message conversations and/or fields used to compose messages for that messaging conversation);

[0363] When the computer system is in the low bandwidth communication mode, the computer system detects (806) via the one or more input devices a response to a first communication content option in the first set of selectable communication content options (e.g., 606M or 608M) to select the first set of one or more inputs (e.g., 610M or 612M; e.g., touch input).

[0364] When the computer system is in the low bandwidth communication mode and after (e.g., in response to) detecting the first set of one or more inputs, the computer system displays (808) via the display generation component corresponding content corresponding to the communication. A second set of selectable communication content options (e.g., 604N or 604O) (e.g., information that may be selected by the user to include in the report); e.g., affordances, buttons, graphical elements, graphical objects, and/or icons (in some cases In embodiments, the second set of selectable communication content options is different from the first set of selectable communication content options)) (e.g., and ceasing to display the first set of two or more selectable communication content options, optionally including ceasing displaying a representation of a selected communication content option from a first set of two or more selectable communication content options), wherein a second set of selectable communication content options is specific to low-bandwidth communication

100

letter mode. Displaying multiple sets (eg, a first set and a second set) of selectable communication content options that are specific to a low-bandwidth communication mode and correspond to respective content for communication allows the computer system to provide feedback that assists the user when bandwidth is constrained Provide concise information in communications, which provides improved visual feedback and additional control options without cluttering the user interface.

[0365] When the computer system is in the low bandwidth communication mode, the computer system detects (810) via the one or more input devices a response to a second communication content option in the second set of selectable communication content options (e.g., 606N or 6080) to select a second set of one or more inputs (e.g., 608N or 6080; e.g., touch input).

[0366] When the computer system is in the low-bandwidth communication mode, the computer system detects (812) an input corresponding to a request to send a communication including content corresponding to a selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option (e.g., , 604R or 604S) (e.g., in sending touch input (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input) on an affordance representation (e.g., 606R or 606S) and/or in sending a voice command and/or in a sequence of communication content options selection of final communication content options).

[0367] In response to receiving an input corresponding to a request to send the communication, the computer system (e.g., via non-terrestrial wireless communication) sends (814) an input including an input from the first set of one or more inputs and a second set of one or more Communication of content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the selection of the second communication content option.

[0368] In some embodiments, the first set of selectable communication content options includes three or more selectable communication content options specific to a low-bandwidth communication mode (e.g., as described with reference to FIG. 6M; e.g., by The first set of one or more input-selected communication content options is one of the three or more selectable communication content options in the first set of selectable communication content options). In some embodiments, the second set of selectable communication content options includes three or more selectable communication content options specific to a low bandwidth communication mode (e.g., as described with reference to FIG. 6M; e.g., one from the second set of The second communication content option selected by the input(s) is one of the three or more selectable communication content options in the second set of selectable communication content options). Including three or more selectable communication content options specific to the low-bandwidth communication mode in the first set of selectable communication content options and the second set of selectable communication content options provides the user with the opportunity to select in an organized manner. Various options, which provide improved visual feedback and additional control options without cluttering the user interface.

[0369] In some embodiments, the second set of communication content options is based on selection of the first communication content option (e.g., displayed based on the selection, related to the selection, selected in accordance with the selection and/or specific to the selection) (e.g., second set of options 604N and/or third set of options as described with reference to FIGS. 6M-60 6040 is specific to the selected car or vehicle option 604M, vehicle collision option 606N). In some embodiments, the second set of communication content options is selected (eg, by the computer system) from the set of available communication content options based on the first communication content option selected by the user. In some embodiments, a first set of selectable communication content options provides options corresponding to different types of emergencies (e.g., fire, medical, or police), and a second set of selectable communication content options provides options corresponding to those selected by the user. The first communication content option is the emergency type related option. For example, if a first communication content option selected by the user corresponds to a first type of emergency (e.g., a medical emergency), then a second set of selectable communication content options includes information related to the first type of emergency (e.g., a medical emergency). situation); and if the first communication content option selected by the user corresponds to a second type of emergency that is different from the first type of emergency (for example, a fire emergency), the second group may Selecting communication content options includes a second (eg, different) set of options related to a second type of emergency (eg, a fire emergency). Basing the second set of communication content options on the selection of the first communication content option allows the computer system to select and display user-relevant options for the second set of communication content options, which provides improved visual feedback.

101

[0370] In some embodiments, the first set of communication content options and the second set of communication content options are displayed without displaying a software keyboard (e.g., EMOJI keyboard and/or QWERTY keyboard) (e.g., as shown with reference to Figure 6M 60 and 6V, the first set of options 604M, the second set of options 604N, and/or the third set of options 6040 are displayed without the keyboard 608V; not simultaneously displayed with the software keyboard). Displaying the first set of communication content options and the second set of communication content options without displaying the software keyboard allows the computer system to provide the user with relevant options that can be quickly and easily selected without being more time consuming and bandwidth intensive. This improves visual feedback, reduces the amount of input required to perform an action, and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface.

[0371] In some embodiments, the first set of communication content options occupies more than half of the display area (e.g., as described with reference to Figure 6M, the first set of options 604M occupies the reporting interface 602M; of the display, user interface, or application window more than half); and the second group of communication content options occupies more than half of the display area (for example, as described with reference to FIGS. 6N to 6O , the second group of options 604N and/or the third group of options 604O occupy the report interface 602N and the report respectively. More than half of the interface 602O). In some implementations, one or more objects other than the first or second set of communication content options occupy less than half of the display area (eg, messaging UI). Having the first set of communication content options occupy more than half of the display area and the second set of communication content options occupying more than half of the display area directs the user's attention to the communication content options and makes these options easier to view and select, which provides Improved visual feedback.

[0372] In some embodiments, displaying the first set of selectable communication content options includes displaying the first set of selectable communication content options without displaying (e.g., not concurrently with) the messaging user interface (e.g., as shown in reference to FIG. 6M to 6O and 6T to 6U, displaying the first set of options 604M, the second set of options 604N, and/or the third set of options 604O without displaying the reporting interface 602; for example, including messaging conversations and/or history. user interface) (in some embodiments, displaying the first set of selectable communication content options includes ceasing to display the messaging user interface). In some embodiments, displaying the second set of selectable communication content options includes displaying the first set of selectable communication content options without displaying the messaging user interface (in some embodiments, displaying the second set of selectable communication content options includes stopping Shows the messaging user interface). Displaying the first set of selectable communication content options and the second set of selectable communication content options without displaying the messaging user interface provides the user with the ability to generate content for communication without requiring additional input of navigation to operate the messaging user interface. , which reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation.

[0373] In some embodiments, in response to determining that the computer system cannot reach the terrestrial wireless communications network, the computer system enters a low bandwidth communications mode. In some embodiments, the low-bandwidth communication mode is only available (eg, entered into this mode) when the computer system cannot reach the terrestrial wireless communication network (eg, as described with reference to Figures 6M-6s). In some embodiments, the first set of selectable communication content options and/or the second set of selectable communication content are not provided if the computer system is capable of reaching the terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., if the computer system is not in a low bandwidth communication mode) options. In some embodiments, the first set of selectable communication content options and/or the second set of selectable communications are provided only when the computer system is unable to reach the terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., only when the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode) Content options. Entering the low-bandwidth communication mode in response to a determination that the computer system cannot reach the terrestrial wireless communication network provides the user with a low-bandwidth communication mode without additional input, which performs operations when a set of conditions have been met without further user input.

[0374] In some embodiments, the first set of communication content options and/or the second set of communication content options include one or more options identifying a type of emergency (e.g., as described with reference to Figure 6M; e.g., fire, medical and/or police). In some embodiments, the first and/or second set of communication content options allow the user to select a type of emergency from an enumerated set of emergencies (eg, the computer system displays different options corresponding to different types of emergencies). In the first group pass

102

Including one or more options identifying the type of emergency in the message content options and/or the second set of communication content options provides the user with a quick and efficient technique for specifying the type of emergency in the communication without additional input, which Provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform actions.

[0375] In some embodiments, the first set of communication content options and/or the second set of communication content options include one or more options that identify a person (e.g., as described with reference to Figure 60; e.g., for an emergency, who name of the person who needs help and/or is in need). Including one or more options to identify the person in the first set of communication content options and/or the second set of communication content options provides the user with a quick and efficient technique for specifying the person in the communication without additional input, which Provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform actions.

[0376] In some embodiments, the first set of communication content options and/or the second set of communication content options include one or more options indicating a status of the person (e.g., as described with reference to Figure 6Q; e.g., injured, lost , danger, physical condition and/or medical condition). Including one or more options indicating a person's status in the first set of communication content options and/or the second set of communication content options provides a user with a quick and efficient way to specify a person's status in a communication without additional input. technology, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform actions.

[0377] In some embodiments, the first set of communication content options and/or the second set of communication content options include an option to alert emergency contacts (e.g., notification affordance 1102E; e.g., with a predefined set of contactable options for entity communication). In some embodiments, the computer system provides the ability (eg, user interface, menu, and/or selectable options) for a user to select a list of persons to be recipients of communications. Including the option to alert emergency contacts in the first set of communication content options and/or the second set of communication content options provides the user with the ability to select recipients of the communication without additional input (e.g., navigating to a Contacts application) Fast and efficient technology that provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform operations.

[0378] In some embodiments, displaying the first set of selectable communication content options and/or the second set of selectable communication content options includes displaying selectable options for including text in the communication (e.g., 618N; e.g., using "Other" option for inserting narrative responses) that, when selected, displays a keyboard (e.g., 608V; e.g., a soft keyboard and/or a keyboard that is not displayed until the option to include text in communications is selected) (For example, to initiate the display of the keyboard). In some embodiments, the option to include text in the communication limits the amount of text and/or characters that can be selected for inclusion in the communication (eg, limited to 50, 100, or 200 characters). Displaying a selectable option for including text in a communication (which, when selected, displays the keyboard) provides the user with a quick and efficient technique for typing text for inclusion in the communication without the need for additional (eg, display of a keyboard) Input, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform actions.

[0379] In some embodiments, when the computer system is in a low-bandwidth communication mode and sending includes a first communication content option and a second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs. Before the communication of content corresponding to the selection of the two communication content options: the computer system displays a third group of selectable communication content options (for example, 604P or 604Q) via the display generation component, wherein the third group of selectable communication content options is one or A plurality of selectable communication content options need to be selected in order to send the communication; and the computer system displays a fourth set of selectable communication content options via the display generation component, wherein the communication is sent without selecting any of the fourth set of selectable communication content options. Occurs when communication content options can be selected. A third set of selectable communication content options is displayed, wherein selection of one or more selectable communication content options of the third set of selectable communication content options is required in order to send the communication, and a fourth set of selectable communication content options is displayed, wherein sending The communication occurs without selecting any of the selectable communication content options in the fourth set of selectable communication content options. Doing so allows the computer system to indicate to the user that selection of certain options is considered

103

It is critical for this communication and providing the user with the ability to opt out of potentially less critical options provides improved visual feedback.

[0380] In some embodiments, upon determining that a first set of selectable communication content options may be skipped (e.g., not required to advance to a next communication content option (e.g., proceed from the set of selectable communication content options) Selected content is not required)), the first set of selectable communication content options includes a skip option (e.g., as seen at 616 in Figure 6M; no selectable affordances are provided for the content sent via the communication (In some embodiments, selection of the skip option will display the next communication content option)). In some embodiments, the first set of selectable communication content options is displayed without displaying the skip option upon determining that the first set of selectable communication content options cannot be skipped (e.g., as needed to advance to the next communication content option). . In some embodiments, upon determination, the second set of selectable communication content options may be skipped, A second set of selectable communication content options includes skip options (eg, as seen at 616 in Figures 6N-6O). In some embodiments, upon determining that the second set of selectable communication content options cannot be skipped, the second set of selectable communication content options is displayed without displaying the skip option. Displaying a set of selectable communication content options with or without displaying skip options based on whether the set of selectable communication content options can be skipped allows the computer system to indicate to the user that selection of certain options is skippable. deemed critical to that communication and providing the user with the ability to opt out of potentially less critical options, which provides improved visual feedback and performs actions when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input .

[0381] In some embodiments, in response to detecting a first set of one or more inputs corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option and based on determining that the first communication content option is a first type of communication content option (e.g., , a medical affordance representation for a medical type emergency and/or a type requiring follow-up questions related to that selection), the computer system displays a fifth set of selectable communication content options corresponding to the corresponding content for that communication (e.g. , as described with reference to Figures 6M-6s; e.g., affordances, buttons, graphical elements, graphical objects, and/or icons). In some embodiments, the fifth set of selectable communication content options is different from the first and second sets of selectable communication content options (e.g., the fifth set of selectable communication content options is specific to the first type (e.g., related to the medical type Emergency related options such as who was injured and/ Or what their status is)). In some embodiments, in response to detecting a first set of one or more inputs corresponding to a selection of a first communication content option and based on determining that the first communication content option is a second type of communication content that is different from the first type option (e.g., of a type that does not require follow-up questions related to that selection), the computer system abandons display of the fifth set of selectable communication content options. Displaying or forgoing display of a fifth set of selectable communication content options corresponding to corresponding content for that communication based on the communication content option type selected for the first communication content option automatically provides the user with relevant subsequent options based on the previous input (or These subsequent options are not provided), doing so provides improved visual feedback and performs actions when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input.

[0382] In some embodiments, after detecting the second set of one or more inputs and before transmitting the content of the first communication selected from the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs Prior to communication of content corresponding to the selection of the option and the second communication content option, the computer system displays, via the display generation component, the first communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs. A representation (eg, a summary or preview) of at least a portion of the content corresponding to the selection of the second communication content option (eg, as described with reference to Figures 6R-6s). Displaying the first communication content option and the second communication content selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs after detecting the second set of one or more inputs and before sending the communication The representation of at least a portion of the content corresponding to selection of an option provides the user with an overview of the content to be included in the communication, which provides improved visual feedback.

104

[0383] In some embodiments, after detecting (e.g., in response to the detection) a second set of one or more inputs (e.g., including detecting that a selectable communication content option (e.g., multiple or All selectable communication content options have been selected)): The computer system displays the send option via the display generation component (e.g., 606R or 606S); and the computer system detects selection of the send option (e.g., input on the send affordance (touch Input (e.g., tap gesture or other selection input) or selection of the final communication content option in a sequence of communication content options)). In response to detecting selection of the send option, the computer system initiates a process that includes sending the communication including content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option. In some embodiments, the computer system sends, in response to detecting a selection of a send option (e.g., automatically or without detecting further input), a message including information related to the first communication content option and the second communication content option. Select the communication corresponding to the content. Displaying the send option after detecting the second set of one or more inputs indicates to the user that the communication can be sent and/or that no additional options need to be selected to send the communication, and provides an efficient technique for sending the communication, which Provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform actions.

[0384] In some embodiments, the computer system displays (e.g., in response to selection of the final communication content option, in response to detecting selection of the send option, and/or in conjunction with the send option via the display generation component (e.g., 601) (e.g., 610R or 610S; e.g., include numbers) or a timer for the remaining time of the picture); and in response to determining that the predetermined period of time has elapsed without detecting a selection of the send option, the computer system sends an input including an input from the first set of one or more inputs and a second set of or multiple communications inputting content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the selection of the second communication content option (eg, the communication is automatically sent once a countdown has expired). Displaying a visual indication of the countdown to the predetermined period of time and sending the communication in response to determining that the predetermined period of time has elapsed without detecting selection of the send option provides a visual indication to the user that the communication will be sent, and allows The computer system sends this communication without further user input, which provides improved visual feedback, and performs actions without further user input when a set of conditions has been met.

[0385] In some embodiments, in response to determining that a threshold time has elapsed after displaying a corresponding selectable communication content option (e.g., a first set of communication content options, a second set of communication content options, or a different set of communication content options) segment without detecting a selection of a corresponding selectable communication content option via one or more input devices (e.g., if a selection of a second communication content option is received but no selection of a third communication content option is received), the computer system ( For example, 100, 300, 500, or 600) transmit a communication including content corresponding to the detected selection of a communication content option (e.g., as described with reference to FIG. 6W; a first communication content option and a second communication content option) . responsive to determining that a threshold period of time has elapsed after displaying the corresponding selectable communication content option without detecting a selection of the corresponding selectable communication content option, sending a communication including content corresponding to the detected selection of the communication content option, Doing so allows the computer system to automatically send communications based on previously selected options if the user has stopped making a selection for a threshold amount of time, which reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation and performs the operation when a set of conditions has been met without Further user input is required.

[0386] In some embodiments, the computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, or 600) displays a visual indication of a countdown (e.g., , 610W), the countdown indicating the remaining time until a communication including content corresponding to the detected selection of the communication content option will be sent (eg, without further user input). Displaying a visual indication of a countdown indicating the remaining time until the communication will be sent provides notification to the user that the communication will be sent automatically without further input,

105

This provides improved visual feedback.

[0387] In some embodiments, prior to sending the communication that includes content corresponding to the detected selection of the communication content option (e.g., after displaying the indication until including the detected selection of the communication content option) At the same time as a visual indication (e.g., text, graphics, color, and/or animation) of the countdown of time remaining until the content communication will be sent), the computer system displays a selectable Cancel Send option (e.g., 608W) when selected , this option causes the computer system to forego sending communications that include content corresponding to the detected selection of the communications content option. In some embodiments, the Cancel Send option, when selected, causes the computer system to stop the countdown (eg, stop displaying a visual indication of the countdown). Displaying a selectable unsend option before sending the communication provides the user with an indication that sending the communication can be canceled and provides an efficient technique for canceling the sending of the communication, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces execution The number of inputs required for the operation.

[0388] In some embodiments, after displaying selectable communication content options, the display generation component is deactivated (e.g., as described with reference to Figure 6M, Figure 6N, Figure 60, Figure 6P, or Figure 6Q, and as shown in Figure 6M, Figure 6N, Figure 60, Figure 6P, or Figure 6Q shown and described in 11B; for example, turned off, dimmed, in hibernation and/or in a low power state). In some embodiments, in response to determining that a threshold period of time has elapsed without detecting a selection of a corresponding selectable communication content option, the computer system activates the display generation component. activating the display generation component in response to determining that the threshold time period has elapsed without detecting selection of the corresponding selectable communication content option, bringing the user's attention to the display generation component and prompting the user to provide input, which provides improved visual feedback, and Performs an action when a set of conditions has been met without further user input.

[0389] In some embodiments, the communication includes emergency information (e.g., medical ID) and the location of the computer system (e.g., as described with reference to FIGS. 6T-6U; except with the one or more inputs provided by the first set and The second set of one or more inputs corresponds to the selection of the first communication content option and the selection of the second communication content option, in addition to content corresponding to any other communication content option selected or question answered). Including emergency information and the location of the computer system in the communication automatically provides relevant information in the communication without requiring additional user input, which reduces the amount of input required to perform an action.

[0390] In some embodiments, in response to receiving input corresponding to a request to send the communication, the computer system displays a user interface of the messaging application (eg, 602T or 602U). In some embodiments, the user interface of the messaging application includes a message conversation, wherein the message conversation includes a message (eg, 620T or 620U) in the conversation (eg, conversation transcript) that includes emergency information, the location of the computer system , and content corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs, and any other communication content selected The content corresponding to the options or answers to the questions. Displaying the user interface of the messaging application in response to receiving input corresponding to a request to send the communication automatically provides the user with the messaging application when the communication is sent, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the time required to perform operations. required input quantity.

[0391] In some embodiments, the user interface of the messaging application includes a message composition field (eg, 616T or 616U; eg, for composing additional messages for a messaging conversation). Including a message composition field in a messaging application's user interface provides users with an efficient technique for sending subsequent communications after that communication has been sent, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform an action.

[0392] In some embodiments, after sending the communication (e.g., in response to the sending), the computer system displays the alignment element in the first size (e.g., 930; e.g., a "fan" graphic and/or causes the computer system to Indicator of direction of orientation) (In some embodiments, the alignment element includes an arrow pointing in the direction of rotation of the computer system, and/or relative to

106

a picture of a satellite shown in space by the computer system); and after displaying the alignment element in the first size, the computer system stops displaying the alignment element in the first size and displays the alignment element in a second size that is smaller than the first size (e.g., within the top third of the display or less and/or as a banner). Displaying the alignment element in a first size after sending the communication and displaying the alignment element in a second size less than the first size after displaying the alignment element in the first size provides the user with alignment information subsequent to the communication and The salience of this information is reduced over time, which provides improved visual feedback.

[0393] In some embodiments, the computer system will align elements (e.g., in a banner) with the delivery status of the communication (e.g., the delivery status bar of Figure 9K; e.g., graphics and/or text, its content and/or or visual indications (e.g., text, graphics, colors, and/or animations) that appear at the same time or whose appearance depends on the status of the communication being sent (e.g., "Sending" or "Sent"). In some embodiments, the targeting element and/or the visual indication of the transmission status of the communication includes or is included in a selectable user interface element (e.g., 926) that, when selected, User interface elements may be selected to display the alignment interface (e.g., 902C). Displaying a visual indication of the delivery status of the communication simultaneously with the alignment element provides the user with relevant information regarding the delivery status of the communication, which provides improved visual feedback.

[0394] In some embodiments, the computer system will align the element (e.g., in the banner) with the computer system and a communication system (e.g., 929; e.g., non-terrestrial wireless communications) for sending the communication via a low bandwidth communication mode system and/or satellite communications system) (e.g., text, graphics, color, and/or animation) (e.g., as described with reference to Figures 9K through 9M; e.g., graphics and/or text, the content thereof and/or the appearance depends on the computer's connection status (e.g., "Connected" or "Not Connected")) shown simultaneously. In some embodiments, the alignment element and/or the visual indication of the connection status of the communication includes or is included in a selectable user interface element that, when selected, Display the alignment interface (e.g., 902C). Concurrently displaying a visual indication of the connection status of the computer system and the communication system used to send the communication via the low-bandwidth communication mode with the alignment element provides the user with relevant information regarding the connection status of the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback .

[0395] In some embodiments, prior to sending the communication and upon determining that the computer system is not properly aligned for sending the communication via a low bandwidth communication mode (e.g., via non-terrestrial and/or satellite communications) (e.g., The computer system is not aligned with one or more satellites), the computer system displays an alignment element (e.g., a "fan" graphic and/or an indicator of the direction in which the computer system is oriented) (in some embodiments, the alignment element includes An arrow pointing in the direction of the computer system's rotation, and/or a picture of the satellite shown in space relative to the computer system). Displaying an alignment element (e.g., 930 ) upon determining that the computer system is not properly aligned for sending the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode automatically provides the user with a notification that the computer system is not properly aligned for sending the communication. Visual indications and can assist users in aligning computer systems, which provide improved visual feedback and perform actions when a set of conditions have been met without requiring further user input.

[0396] In some embodiments, the computer system (e.g., in a banner) displays the computer system communicating with a communication system (e.g., 929) for transmitting the communication via a low bandwidth communication mode; e.g., communicating with non-terrestrial and/or satellite a visual indication (e.g., text, graphics, color, and/or animation) of the connection status of the system); and upon determining that the computer system is not connected to the communication system for sending the communication via the low-bandwidth communication mode, the computer system (e.g., in Display a visual indication (e.g., text, graphics, color, and/or animation) of an error condition in a banner and/or concurrently with a visual indication of the connection status of the computer system (e.g., as described with reference to Figures 9c-9J; e.g. , an indication of why the computer system is currently unable to communicate with that satellite or satellites). Displaying a visual indication of the computer system's connection status to the communication system used to send the communication via the low-bandwidth communication mode provides the user with information about the connection status, which provides improved visual feedback.

107

Feedback. Automatically provide a user with a visual indication of an error condition based on a determination that the computer system is not connected to the communication system for sending the communication via the low-bandwidth communication mode. Indication, which provides improved visual feedback and performs actions when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input.

[0397] In some embodiments, the visual indication of the computer system's connection status to the communication system for sending the communication via the low-bandwidth communication mode includes a selectable connection assistant option (e.g., 926; e.g., banner, icon, button , affordance representations and/or graphical elements) (or be included in this option). In some embodiments, the computer system detects a selection of the Connect Assistant option (eg, a tap gesture or other selection input on the Connect Assistant option); and in response to detecting the selection of the Connect Assistant element, the computer system displays for Instructions (e.g., 908F; e.g., textual and/or graphical indicators, such as arrows) that cause a computer system to interface with a communication system for transmitting such communications via a low-bandwidth communication mode (e.g., an alignment element (e.g., a "sector" Graphics and/or indicators of directions in which the computer system is oriented)) (In some embodiments, alignment elements include arrows pointing in the direction of rotation of the computer system, and/or of satellites shown in space relative to the computer system. picture). Displaying instructions for connecting the computer system to the communication system for sending the communication via the low-bandwidth communication mode in response to detecting selection of the connection assistant element provides the user with means to obtain instructions for connecting the computer system to the communication system for sending the communication via the low-bandwidth communication mode. Low-bandwidth communication mode is an efficient technique for sending instructions connected to a communication system without requiring additional input, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation.

[0398] In some embodiments, displaying a visual indication of the error condition includes (e.g., in a banner and/or concurrently with a visual indication of the computer system's connection status) displaying a link between the computer system and the computer system for communicating via low bandwidth. The mode sends instructions (eg, textual and/or graphical indicators, such as arrows) of the communication system connection for the communication (eg, as described with reference to Figure 9M). Displaying instructions for connecting the computer system with the communication system for sending the communication via the low-bandwidth communication mode as part of a visual indication of the error condition provides the user with convenient access to the instructions without requiring additional input, which Provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform actions.

[0399] In some embodiments, in response to detecting a position of the computer system (or a predetermined portion of the computer system (e.g., an antenna)) relative to a communication system for transmitting the communication via a low-bandwidth communication mode (e.g., positioning and/or orientation) change, the computer system changes the appearance of an element indicating the location of the computer system (e.g., 931) (or a predetermined portion of the computer system) relative to the communication system used to send the communication via the low-bandwidth communication mode (e.g., animate it) (e.g., a figure of a satellite moving rotationally around a graphical representation of a computer system). Changing the appearance of an element indicating the location of the computer system relative to the communication system for sending the communication via the low-bandwidth communication mode in response to detecting a change in the location of the computer system relative to the communication system for sending the communication via the low-bandwidth communication mode Feedback is provided to the user regarding the position of the computer system relative to the communication system as the relative position of the computer system changes, which provides improved visual feedback.

[0400] In some embodiments, when displaying a visual indication of the computer system's connection status to a communication system for sending the communication via the low-bandwidth communication mode, the computer system detects that an open application (e.g., not used for sending the communication via the low-bandwidth communication mode The communication mode sends the request for the communication application). In response to detecting a request to open the application: the computer system ceases to display at least a portion of a visual indication of the computer system's connection status to the communication system for sending the communication via the low-bandwidth communication mode (e.g., minimize, hide, and/or stop displaying a banner that includes this visual indication); and display a selectable graphical element (e.g., 610T, 610U; e.g., pill) that, when selected, causes the computer system to display (e.g., redisplay, unhide, and/or or maximized display) a visual indication of the status of the computer system's connection to the communication system used to send the communication via a low-bandwidth communication mode. In some embodiments, the selectable graphics element

108

Cellular status indicator (e.g., 607). Responsive to detecting a request to open an application, ceasing to display at least a portion of the visual indication of a connection status of the computer system to the communication system for sending the communication via the low-bandwidth communication mode and displaying a selectable graphical element that, when selected, This element causes the computer system to display a visual indication of the computer system's connection status to the communication system used to send the communication via a low-bandwidth communication mode) allows the computer system to display the application while providing the user with a means to obtain information about the connection status. Efficiently, this provides improved visual feedback, reduces the amount of input required to perform actions, and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface.

[0401] In some embodiments, in response to receiving input corresponding to a request to send the communication, the computer system displays a send status element (e.g., the send status bar in FIG. 9K; e.g., via a graphic or textual representation of sending the communication A graphical element for the status of a communication (e.g., "Sending" or "Sent"), and/or a status bar, where the fill of the bar is proportional to the completion status of sending that communication), where the appearance of the sending status element is based on The progress of sending this communication. In some embodiments, as message transmission proceeds, the computer system updates the appearance of the transmission status element. displaying a send status element in response to receiving input corresponding to a request to send a communication, wherein the appearance of the send status element is based on the sending progress of the communication, and doing so provides the user with information regarding the sending progress of the communication without further input, This provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform actions.

[0402] In some embodiments, transmitting includes content corresponding to selections of the first communication content option and the second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs. After the communication, the computer system displays a second communication (e.g., 928M; e.g., follow-up message) to one or more recipients of that communication. a user interface (e.g., 902K; e.g., a user interface of a messaging application, a message composition field, and/or a third set of selectable communication content options) that includes communication with one or more inputs from a first set and a second set of Contents corresponding to the selection of the first communication content option and the selection of the second communication content option are grouped into one or more inputs. While displaying the user interface for sending the second communication, the computer system detects a third set of one or more inputs corresponding to a selection of content for the second communication and a request to send the second communication. In response to detecting the third set of one or more inputs, the computer system sends a second communication including content selected by the third set of one or more inputs. In some embodiments, the second communication is included (e.g., displayed in a messaging application) with the first communication content option selected from the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs. In a message conversation with content corresponding to the selection of the second communication content option. Display a user interface for sending a second communication to one or more recipients of the communication and, in response to detecting the third set of one or more inputs, end a third communication including content selected by the third set of one or more inputs. Two communications allow users to send follow-up messages after sending that communication, which provides improved visual feedback.

[0403] In some embodiments, the user interface of the messaging application includes a message composition field (eg, 912K; eg, for drafting additional messages for a messaging conversation) and an optional sending affordance representation (eg, 916K). Including a message composition field in the user interface of a messaging application provides the user with an efficient technique for composing and/or sending secondary communications, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation.

[0404] In some embodiments, the computer system displays the first set of communication content options and/or the second set of communication content options concurrently with the end option (e.g., 914) when selected (e.g., via user input 934L) , the end option causes the computer system to exit the low-bandwidth communication mode (e.g., and/or cease displaying the first set of selectable communication content options and/or the second set of selectable communication content options), or optionally display a confirmation prompt (e.g., , 620M). Displaying the first set of communication content options and/or the second set of communication content options concurrently with an end option that, when selected, causes the computer system to exit the low-bandwidth communication mode provides an indication to the user that the low-bandwidth communication mode may be exited and a method for exiting. Low bandwidth communication mode

109

Convenient and easy technology that provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform operations. [0405] In some embodiments, the first set of communication content options and/or the second set of communication content options are displayed when the computer system is not connected to a system for sending the communication via the low bandwidth communication mode. In some embodiments, in response to determining that the computer system is not connected to a system for sending the communication via the low-bandwidth communication mode (e.g., has lost connection with the system), the computer system maintains the first set of communication content options and/or Display of a second set of communication content options (eg, as described with reference to Figures 6M, 6N, 60, 6P, and 6Q). Displaying the first set of communication content options and/or the second set of communication content options when the computer system is not connected to a system for sending the communication via the low-bandwidth communication mode provides the user with a way to continue even if the connection is (e.g., temporarily) interrupted. The ability to generate content for communication, which provides improved visual feedback.

[0406] In some embodiments, sending includes content corresponding to selections of the first communication content option and the second communication content option selected by the first set of one or more inputs and the second set of one or more inputs. Communication also includes: sending one or more additional communications (e.g., as described with reference to FIGS. 6T-6U and 9M-90; e.g., transmitting additional, subsequently received (e.g., from emergency services) and/or the message sent and/or the content of the message; in some embodiments, transmitting the additional message is sent periodically (e.g., live; in real time); and wherein the communication is sent to a first recipient and a second Receiver Send; abandons delivery to both the sender and the first recipient of a communication received from a second recipient of that communication (e.g., if both the sender and the first recipient are in the same thread, the message is not delivered). Forgoing transmission of communications received from a second recipient of that communication to both the sender and the first recipient allows limiting the sender of the message to the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback.

[0407] In some embodiments, when the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode: the computer system displays communications performed via a low bandwidth communication mode (e.g., communications performed via satellite communications and/or when the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode communications performed when the computer system is not in a low-bandwidth communication mode (e.g., communications performed when the computer system is not in a low-bandwidth communication mode; via a terrestrial wireless communication network, Wi -communications performed by Fi networks and/or cellular networks) are slower (e.g., use lower bandwidth) indications (e.g., 608L1, graphical indications, icons, colors, fonts, text, animations, symbols, thumbnails, images, and /or glyph). In some embodiments, the computer system displays an indication that communications performed via the low bandwidth communication mode are slower than communications not performed via the low bandwidth communication mode before displaying the first set of selectable communication content options. Displaying an indication that communication performed via a low-bandwidth communication mode is slower than communication performed not via a low-bandwidth communication mode prepares the user for potentially slower communication such that the user does not perceive the presence when communication is slower than what the user is accustomed to. Errors, which provides improved visual feedback to the user.

[0408] In some embodiments, the first set of selectable communication content options and/or the second set of selectable communication content options include indicating that two or more individuals need assistance (e.g., two or more individuals need assistance and /or participate in an event) (e.g., the "multiplayer" option in 1716a1 and/or option 6040). Including the option to instruct two or more people enables users to quickly and efficiently instruct multiple people to participate in an event using a single selection without having to instruct each person individually (e.g., repeating the instruction process for each person), which reduces execution The number of inputs required reduces power usage, extends battery life, and/or provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls.

[0409] In some embodiments, when the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode: before sending a communication, the computer system displays a display for entering text (or, in some embodiments, other content) to be included in the communication. ) fields (e.g., 609V, message composition fields, and/or text input fields), including limiting the amount of text that can be included in the field (e.g., the number of characters, or in some embodiments, the amount of content) (For example, the computer system prevents the word

110

The amount of characters in the segment exceeds a threshold number of characters; for example, 610V instructs computer system 600 to limit the amount of text). In some embodiments, the computer system displays text in the field in response to detecting input corresponding to text (eg, selection of a key on a keyboard and/or a voice command). In some embodiments, the communication includes text displayed in this field. Displaying a field for entering text to be included in the communication and limiting the amount of text that can be included in the field enables the user to customize the content of the message while maintaining the communication when the computer system is in a low-bandwidth communication mode The size can be sent quickly, which provides improved visual feedback to the user and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls.

[0410] In some embodiments, when the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode: when the first set of selectable communication content options (e.g., 604M) is displayed, the computer system displays an end option (e.g., 614, selectable options, icon, button, affordance, and/or user interaction graphical user interface object) that, when selected, initiates the process of exiting the low-bandwidth communication mode: and when a second set of selectable communication content options is displayed (e.g., 604N ) when the computer system displays the end option (e.g., when the computer system is in a low-bandwidth communication mode, the computer system consistently displays and/or maintains the display of the end option). Displaying the end option when the first set of selectable communication content options is displayed and the end option when the second set of selectable communication content options are displayed enable the user to quickly exit the low-bandwidth communication mode in multiple stages, which provides the user with an improved Visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform an action.

[0411] In some embodiments, when the computer system is in the low bandwidth communication mode: in response to detecting a second set of one or more communication content options corresponding to a selection of a second communication content option in the second set of selectable communication content options. Input: Based on determining that the selected second communication content option is the first option in the second set of selectable communication content options (e.g., "stroke" or "drowning" in 604Q), the computer system displays the user via the display generation component options for sending the communication (e.g., 606S, selectable options, icons, buttons, affordances, and/or user interaction graphical user interface objects); and based on determining that the selected second communication content option is a second set of selectable A second option in the communication content options that is different from the first option in the second set of selectable communication content options (e.g., "sick" in 604Q), the computer system displays, via the display generation component, corresponding content corresponding to the communication A third group may select communication content options (e.g., 6040) without displaying options for sending the communication (e.g., at 6020, no sending options such as 606R or 606S), wherein the third group may select communication content options Specific to low-bandwidth communication modes. Displaying options for sending the communication based on what communication content option is selected or a set of selectable communication content options corresponding to corresponding content for the communication without displaying options for sending the communication enables the user to Send communications faster in particularly urgent situations (e.g. leveraging less user input) while allowing the user to provide additional information when the environment is deemed not to be particularly urgent. This provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the amount of input required to perform an action, and allows the user to provide additional information when a set of conditions have been met. The action is performed without further user input.

[0412] Note that the details of the process described above with respect to method 800 may also apply in a similar manner to the methods described above and below. For example, methods 700, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000, and/or 2200 optionally include one or more features of the various methods described above with reference to method 800. For example, method 800 optionally may be performed as part of a process for initiating communications according to method 700. For example, method 800 optionally includes providing alignment elements according to method 1000 . For example, method 800 may include selecting a second recipient of the communication according to method 1200 . For example, method 1800 may initiate method 800 from a messaging application. For example, multiple sets of options as described in method 800 may be displayed in an alternative communications network test mode in method 2000 . For example, method 800 may be a process corresponding to the user interface object in method 2200. For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated below.

9A-9U illustrate methods for pairing a computer system with one or more satellites in accordance with some embodiments.

111

Standard sample user interface. The user interface in these figures is used to illustrate the process described below, including the process in Figure 10.

[0414] FIGS. 9A-9P include a computer system 900 having a touch-sensitive display 901. In Figures 9A and 9B, computer system 900 displays an interface for receiving communication requests. In FIG. 9A , computer system 900 displays call interface 902A including a call to 911 in text area 908 . Call interface 902A includes an end call button 917, a connection indicator 905, a plurality of call management buttons 903, and a satellite communications button 904A. Network indicator 907 indicates that the terrestrial wireless communications network is not available to complete the 911 call. Computer system 900 also displays "No Connection" at connection indicator 905 to indicate that the terrestrial wireless communications network is not available to complete the 911 call. In some embodiments, computer system 900 includes one or more elements of devices 100, 300, and/or 500. In some embodiments, computer system 900 is substantially similar to computer system 600 and includes some or all elements of computer system 900 and can perform some or all of the functions of computer system 900 .

[0415] In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 906A, 906B, 904K, 927K, 922L, 927M, 927M1, and/or 927N) is or includes a touch input (e.g., a tap gesture and/or swipe gestures). In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 906A, 906B, 904K, 927K, 922L, 927M, 927M1, and/or 927N) is or includes speech input (e.g., to select a user interface element or voice commands to activate features or perform functions (such as those associated with user interface elements). In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 906A, 906B, 904K, 927K, 922L, 927M, 927M1, and/or 927N) is or includes an air gesture (eg, an air gesture to select a user interface element or to activate a feature or perform a function (such as a feature or function associated with a user interface element)). In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (eg, inputs 906A, 906B, 904K, 927K, 922L, 927M, 927M1, and/or 927N) are or include hardware devices (eg, buttons, rotatable input mechanisms , activation (e.g., pressing, rotating, and/or moving) of a rotatable, pressable input mechanism, mouse button, remote control button, and/or joystick). In some embodiments, any of the user interface elements described herein as being selected (e.g., icons, affordances, buttons, and/or selectable options) are displayed when the user interface element is in focus (e.g., highlighted , bolded, outlined, visually distinguished from other user interface elements, and/or located at or near the cursor) is selected when the hardware device is activated.

[0416] In response to determining that no terrestrial wireless communications network is available to complete the call to 911, call management button 903 is gray, indicating that call management button 903 is not interactive (eg, unselectable or disabled) because the call cannot be connected. In response to receiving input 9064 on satellite communication button 904A, computer system 900 displays a plurality of options for selecting content to submit in the emergency report. In some embodiments, emergency reporting is a low bandwidth communication where the maximum amount of data used for communication is limited. An exemplary interface for options to submit in an emergency report is shown and discussed in Figures 6M-6Q. In some embodiments, call interface 602A of Figure 9A is similar to the features described in call interface 602G of Figure 6G, as described above.

[0417] In FIG. 9B, computer system 900 displays summary interface 902B that includes an emergency report summarizing selections made among the plurality of options. Summary interface 902B includes a return button 915, a timer 910B, a send option 904B, and a do not send option 908B. In response to receiving input 906B, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902C of Figure 9c. In some embodiments, timer 910B indicates the amount of time (eg, in seconds) remaining before computer system 900 automatically sends an emergency report including the displayed summary, and computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902C of Figure 9c. In some embodiments, summary interface 902B is similar to the features described in summary interface 602S in Figure 6s, described above.

[0418] In some embodiments, non-terrestrial wireless communication networks (e.g., satellite networks) may not be used to send emergency alerts.

112

tell. In response to receiving a communication request, such as input 906B of Figure 9B, computer system 900 displays an alignment interface for transmitting emergency reports via satellite (eg, alignment interface 902C of Figure 9c). As described herein, computer system 900 has a communication window 930 for communicating with satellites. In response to receiving an indication that computer system 900 is directed to align communication window 930 with a satellite, computer system 900 sends an emergency report. The orientation of computer system 900 aligned with the satellite is called the alignment position. In some embodiments, the alignment location is the center of communication window 930, as depicted in alignment interface 902J in Figure 9J.

[0419] In some embodiments, computer system 900 includes a database (eg, memory) of satellite orbits for communication. In some embodiments, the orbit includes the satellite's known position in time. Computer system 900 determines that the satellite is within communication range of the satellite based on the location of the satellite at the time the message is initiated and the location of computer system 900 (eg, GPS location). Embodiments of the present invention describe one satellite for communication, however additional satellites may be aligned with computer system 900 to send emergency reports (eg, two satellites may be located within the communication window).

[0420] In Figures 9c-9J, computer system 900 displays an alignment interface (e.g., 902C, 902D, 902E, 902F, 902G, 902H, 902I, 902J, 9020, and 902P) having an end button 914 and an alignment element 909 ). User 950 indicates the elevation angle of computer system 900 . Minimap 940 indicates the spatial location of computer system 900 in 2D space. Minimap 940 includes an exemplary user 942C, with an arrow indicating the azimuth (eg, rotational direction) of computer system 900 toward communication window 930, as described below.

[0421] End button 914 is a selectable button for ending the display of the corresponding alignment interface (902C, 902D, 902E, 902F, 902G, 902H, 902I, 902J, 902O, or 902P). In response to receiving a selection of the end button 914, the computer system 900 displays the previously displayed interface, namely the call interface 902A of Figure 9A or the summary interface 902B of Figure 9B. In some implementations, in response to receiving a selection of end button 914, computer system 900 displays the home screen.

[0422] In Figure 9c, computer system 900 displays an alignment interface 902C that displays both an end button 914 and an alignment element 909. In some embodiments, in response to determining that the position of computer system 900 (eg, relative to a satellite) is undeterminable, computer system 900 displays alignment element 902C. In some implementations, if the location of computer system 900 can be determined, computer system 900 foregoes display of alignment interface 902C and displays alignment interface 902D.

[0423] Alignment element 909 displays instructions for aligning computer system 900 with a satellite. Alignment elements 909 include graphic elements 931 and text elements 908C. Graphical element 931 includes communication window 930 . Communication window 930 is an exemplary range of orientations in which computer system 900 is capable of communicating with satellites. In some embodiments, computer system 900 displays a graphical indication of a satellite (eg, satellite representation 929 described below) within communication window 930 to indicate that computer system 900 is aligned to communicate with the satellite. When computer system 900 is oriented to align with the satellite, graphical element 931 is updated.

[0424] Graphical element 931 includes computer system 932 representing computer system 900 as an origin of communication window 930 . As described herein, the orientation of computer system 900 includes azimuth and elevation angles used to align computer system 900 with satellites. Azimuth is the direction or rotation of computer system 900. Elevation is the slope or angle at which computer system 900 is facing (eg, pointing upward or downward).

[0425] Minimap 940 depicts the azimuth of computer system 900 as indicated by user 942C's arrow. The arrow indicates the direction in which computer system 900 is facing (eg, the azimuthal orientation of computer system 900). In some embodiments, the direction in which computer system 900 is facing (eg, the azimuth angle of computer system 900) is the direction in which communication window 930 is oriented. In Figure 9c, computer system 900 faces south.

[0426] In Figure 9c, user 950 orients the elevation of computer system 900 slightly downward. Alignment element 909 indicates that computer system 900 cannot connect to the satellite. In response to determining that computer system 900 cannot connect to the satellite, graphical element 931 is placed

113

The display of the satellite representation 929 is abandoned, and the communication window 930 is displayed. In some embodiments, computer system 900 displays satellite representation 929 with a dim (eg, translucent) appearance, indicating that computer system 900 is unable to connect to the satellite.

[0427] Text element 908C indicates that computer system 900 cannot connect to the satellite. Text element 908C includes text prompts that may appear once, in groups, or individually. Text prompt 908C may be replaced after a threshold period of time for which the text prompt is displayed (eg, after 3, 5, or 10 seconds of displaying "Bad Connection," the text is replaced with "Cannot Connect"). Communications window 930 includes an empty appearance, indicating that computer system 900 is not connected to or directed to the satellite. In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 9c, computer system 900 outputs tactile output 619 and/or audio output 650 to indicate that computer system 900 has a poor connection.

[0428] In response to computer system 900 determining the location of computer system 900 and computer system 900 being blocked from communicating with the satellite, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902D shown in Figure 9D. In Figure 9D, computer system 900 displays an alignment interface 902D that displays both an end button 914 and an alignment element 909. Alignment elements 909 include graphic elements 931 and text elements 908D. In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 9D, computer system 900 outputs haptic output 619 and/or audio output 650 to indicate that the connection status of computer system 900 has changed (eg, from poor connection/no connection to looking for satellites).

[0429] In Figure 9D, computer system 900 displays the same elevation angle as described in Figure 9c. Minimap 940 also shows user 942D facing the same direction as described in Figure 9c. In response to computer system 900 determining the location of computer system 900 and computer system 900 being blocked from communicating with the satellite, computer system 900 updates the display of alignment element 909 to indicate the presence of an obstruction.

[0430] In Figure 9D, text element 908D replaces text element 908C. Text element 908D includes a notice to ensure that computer system 900 is outside. Obstacles (such as indoors) may block communications with satellites. Text element 908D indicates that computer system 900 is not connected and the satellite has not been found. In some embodiments, the computer system 900 displays (eg, continues to display) a satellite representation 929 with a dim (eg, translucent) appearance in the alignment interface 902D, indicating that the computer system is unable to connect to the satellite. Communications window 930 shows (eg, continues to have) an empty appearance, indicating that computer system 900 is not connected to or directed to the satellite.

[0431] In response to determining that computer system 900 is not blocked (eg, is no longer blocked), computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902E of FIG. 9E. In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 9E, computer system 900 outputs tactile output 619 and/or audio output 650 to indicate that the connection status of computer system 900 has changed (e.g., from looking for satellite to not connected/satellite at 4 minutes available later). If computer system 900 determines that the satellite is available for communications, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902F, described further below with reference to Figure 9F.

[0432] In FIG. 9E, computer system 900 is shown at the same elevation angle as described in FIG. 9D. Minimap 940 shows that user 942D has changed location and is outside building 1 . Minimap 940 shows that the azimuth of computer system 900 has changed and that computer system 900 is facing north. In some embodiments, the computer system 900 displays (eg, continues to display) a satellite representation 929 with a dim (eg, translucent) appearance in the alignment interface 902E, indicating that the satellite is not yet available.

[0433] In Figure 9E, alignment element 909 indicates that an interrupt is in progress. Computer system 900 determines that an outage exists when a satellite is unavailable for communications based on computer system 900's location and satellite orbit database. Computer system 900 may determine a time period until the satellite is available based on computer system 900's location and satellite orbit database. In some embodiments, a satellite is available when the satellite is within range of the communication window 930 . Text element 908E includes notification of the time period (four minutes) until the satellite is available. In some implementations, text element 908E is updated by computer system 900 as the time period elapses.

114

[0434] In response to computer system 900 determining that the time period has elapsed and/or that the satellite is available for communications, computer system 900 displays alignment element 902F of Figure 9F. In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 9F, computer system 900 outputs haptic output 619 and/or audio output 650 to indicate that the connection status of computer system 900 has changed (eg, from satellite unavailable to satellite available). In Figure 9F, computer system 900 is shown at the same elevation angle as described in Figure 9E. Minimap 940 shows that user 942D has not changed location compared to Figure 9E. Minimap 940 also shows that the azimuth of computer system 900 has not changed.

[0435] In response to the computer system 900 determining that the satellite is available, the computer system 900 updates the display of alignment element 909 in Figure 9F. Alignment element 909 indicates that the satellite is available, but computer system 900 is not connected. Computer system 900 determines the position where computer system 900 must change its orientation to achieve alignment based on the orientation of computer system 900 and the satellite orbit database.

[0436] In response to determining that computer system 900 must change its orientation to achieve an aligned position, computer system 900 updates alignment element 909 to indicate instructions for aligning computer system 900. Computer system 900 displays satellite representation 929 at a position relative to computer system 932, and graphical element 931 includes an indicator of the direction in which computer system 932 should be rotated to align the azimuth with the satellite. Computer system 900 displays this indication as an arrow starting from the alignment position above computer system 932 . Computer system 900 displays the magnitude of the arrow based on the amount of correction required to place satellite representation 929 in the aligned position.

[0437] Text element 908F includes notification of the connection status of computer system 900 (eg, not connected), as well as notification of how to set computer system 900 in the aligned position. Computer system 900 updates text element 908F based on the magnitude of the change required to place computer system 900 into the aligned position. In Figure 9F, computer system 900 displays text element 908F as "Turn far left to find satellites" for a large change in magnitude to place satellite representation 929 into alignment.

[0438] In response to the change in the azimuth angle of computer system 900, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902G of Figure 9G. In Figure 9G, computer system 900 is at the same elevation angle as described in Figure 9F. Minimap 940 shows that user 942D has changed the azimuth of computer system 900 so that computer system 900 is facing west, but in the same position as depicted in Figure 9F.

[0439] In response to the change in azimuth of computer system 900, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902G. In alignment interface 902G, alignment element 909 has been updated to reflect the updated azimuth of computer system 900. In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 9G, computer system 900 outputs haptic output 619 and/or audio output 650 to indicate an updated azimuth (eg, the alignment of computer system 900 has improved). Alignment element 909 continues to indicate that the satellite is available, but computer system 900 is not connected. Based on the change in azimuth of computer system 900 , computer system 900 updates alignment element 909 with updated instructions for aligning computer system 932 and displays satellite representation 929 in an updated position relative to computer system 900 , closer to communication window 930. The magnitude of the arrows in graphical element 931 in Figure 9G is smaller than the magnitude of the arrows in Figure 9F based on the amount of correction required to place satellite representation 929 in the aligned position, as described above. In some implementations, graphical element 931 updates dynamically (or gradually) based on the direction in which the orientation of computer system 900 changes. In some embodiments, the communication window dynamically updates the communication window with an alignment indication (eg, shading or color) as the azimuth angle of the computer system 900 changes closer to the satellite.

[0440] Computer system 900 updates text element 908G based on the smaller magnitude of the change required to place computer system 900 in the aligned position compared to the magnitude required in alignment interface 902F of FIG. 9F. In Figure 9G, computer system 900 updates text element 908F to "Turn left to find satellites" for a smaller change in placing satellite representation 929 into alignment. In some implementations, updating text element 908F occurs automatically when computer system 900 reaches a threshold magnitude that aligns computer system 900 with satellites.

115

[0441] In some embodiments, the satellite moves relative to the computer system 900 (eg, the satellite is not in geosynchronous orbit). In response to determining that the satellite has moved relative to computer system 900, computer system 900 automatically updates the display of satellite representation 929 in alignment interface 902G. In response to determining that the satellite is moving out of range of computer system 900, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 9020 of Figure 9O, as described below. As described herein, a satellite moving out of range is an indication that the computer system 900 and the satellite are unable to communicate with each other. For example, a satellite moving out of range is an indication that the satellite is moving away from the horizon of computer system 900 and is blocked from communicating with computer system 900 by ground objects (eg, land, trees, buildings, mountains, and/or the atmosphere).

[0442] In response to further changes in the azimuth angle of computer system 900, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902H of Figure 9H. In Figure 9H, computer system 900 is shown at the same elevation angle as described in Figure 9F. Minimap 940 shows that user 942D has changed the azimuth of computer system 900 (computer system 900 is facing southwest), but computer system 900 is in the same position as depicted in Figure 9F.

[0443] In response to further changes in the azimuth of computer system 900, computer system 900 updates alignment interface 902H to reflect the updated azimuth of computer system 900. Computer system 900 determines that computer system 900 is already aligned in azimuth but must continue to change its orientation to achieve the aligned position (eg, change elevation) based on computer system 900's updated azimuth and satellite orbit databases. In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 9H, computer system 900 outputs tactile output 619 and/or audio output 650 to indicate that computer system 900 is aligned in the azimuthal direction. Computer system 900 updates alignment element 909 to indicate instructions for aligning the elevation of computer system 900 and displays satellite representation 929 in an updated position relative to computer system 932 where satellite representation 929 is in communication window 930 . Computer system 900 also updates the size of alignment element 909 to indicate that satellite representation 929 has become larger (e.g., compared to satellite representation 929 in Figures 9E-9G) and computer system 932 has become larger (e.g., compared to Figures 9c-9G (compared to Computer System 932).

[0444] In some embodiments, after displaying the alignment interface 902H, the computer system 900 determines that the computer system 900 is misaligned with the satellite 932 based on the updated orientation of the computer system 900 and the satellite orbit database. In response, computer system 900 updates alignment element 909 to display computer system 932 with satellite representation 929 outside communication window 930 . Computer system 900 also updates the size of alignment element 909 to indicate that satellite representation 929 has become smaller (eg, compared to Figure 9H) and computer system 932 has become smaller (eg, compared to Figure 9H).

[0445] Graphical element 931 includes an indicator of the direction in which computer system 932 should be raised to align the azimuth with the satellite. Computer system 900 displays an indicator of the magnitude of the elevation angle used to place satellite representation 929 in the alignment position. In some implementations, graphical element 931 updates dynamically (or gradually) based on the direction of change in device elevation. The computer system 900 displays the communication window 930 with an updated appearance (eg, a dark shading or color) indicating that the computer system 900 is aligned in the azimuth direction and not in the elevation direction.

[0446] In some embodiments, the computer system dynamically updates the appearance of the communication window as the azimuth angle of the computer system 900 changes to align with the satellite. In some embodiments, when the azimuth angle of the computer system 900 changes to align with the satellite, the computer system 900 provides a haptic 619 to indicate the azimuth alignment. In Figure 9H, computer system 900 updates graphical element 931 to display computer system 932 in a larger size than computer system 932 of Figure 9F (eg, enlarges graphical element 931). The increase in size of computer system 932 provides visual notification of the computer system's azimuth alignment with the satellites.

[0447] In FIG. 9H, computer system 900 updates text element 908L based on azimuth and satellite alignment. Computer system 900 updates text element 908H to display instructions for correcting the elevation of computer system 932 (e.g., "Point the phone up"). ). In some implementations, updating the text element 908H occurs automatically.

116

[0448] In response to detecting a change in the elevation angle of computer system 900, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 9021 of Figure 91. In Figure 9I, computer system 900 is shown at an updated elevation angle, now slightly upward and being held by user 950. Minimap 940 shows user 9421 with the same bearing and location as described in 9H.

[0449] As shown in FIG. 9I , in response to detecting a change in the elevation angle of computer system 900 , computer system 900 updates alignment element 909 to reflect the updated elevation angle of computer system 900 . In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 9I, computer system 900 outputs haptic output 619 and/or audio output 650 to indicate that the elevation alignment of computer system 900 has changed (eg, improved). Computer system 900 determines that the elevation angle of computer system 900 must be further adjusted to achieve an aligned position based on the updated azimuth and satellite orbit database of computer system 900 and updates alignment element 909 to indicate instructions for further aligning computer system 900 . Computer system 900 displays satellite representation 929 in a newer position relative to computer system 932 , closer to computer system 900 (eg, moved vertically toward the center of communication window 930 on touch-sensitive display 901 ).

[0450] Graphical element 931 includes an indicator of the direction in which computer system 900 should be raised to align the elevation angle with the satellite. In some implementations, graphical element 931 updates dynamically (or gradually) based on the direction of change in device elevation.

[0451] Computer system 900 displays communications window 930 indicating azimuth and satellite alignment using the same appearance as described in 9H. In some embodiments, the communication window dynamically updates the communication window with an alignment indication as the elevation angle of the computer system 900 changes closer to the satellite (eg, the shading or color becomes darker than shown in Figure 9H).

[0452] Computer system 900 updates text element 908I based on the smaller magnitude of the change required to place computer system 900 in the aligned position compared to the magnitude required in alignment interface 902I of FIG. 9I . For example, text element 908I may be updated from "make phone point up" to "make phone point up" in response to a threshold change magnitude for placing satellite representation 929 in the alignment position.

[0453] In response to detecting the updated change in the elevation angle of computer system 900, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902J of Figure 9J. In Figure 9J, computer system 900 is shown at an updated elevation angle, now slightly higher than in Figure 9I and being held by user 950. Minimap 940 shows user 942 having the same azimuth and location as described in Figure 9I. In response to detecting a change in the elevation angle of computer system 900 , computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902 showing that alignment element 909 has been updated to reflect the updated elevation angle of computer system 900 .

[0454] In Figure 9J, computer system 900 has reached the alignment position. In some embodiments, the elevation of the computer system 900 changes to align with the satellite, and the computer system 900 provides a haptic 619 and/or audio output 650 to indicate the elevation alignment and/or connection status change (e.g., from unconnected to connected). connect). Satellite representation 929 is displayed in an updated position relative to computer system 932 , closer to computer system 900 and in an aligned position (eg, moved vertically toward the center of communication window 930 ). Computer system 900 displays communications window 930 with an updated appearance, indicating azimuth and elevation alignment with the satellite (eg, a very dark shading or color). Text element 908J includes notification of the connection status of computer system 900 (eg, connected) and indicates that the satellite has been found.

[0455] In response to determining that computer system 900 is properly aligned, computer system 900 automatically begins sending emergency reports. Text element 908J indicates that the message is being sent. Messaging option 910J indicates that the messaging user interface is being opened to show that the message is being sent.

[0456] In some embodiments, in response to aligning satellite representation 929 at the alignment location, computer system 900 displays messaging interface 902K of FIG. 9K. In some embodiments, computer system 900 displays messaging interface 902K in response to the elapse of a threshold period of time after displaying alignment interface 902J. In some embodiments, computer system 900 displays messaging interface 902K in response to detecting selection 912L of messaging option 910J.

117

[0457] Although the above embodiment describes the computer system 900 providing notifications to correct for any obstructions and aligning the azimuth and then the elevation of the computer system 900, the order of each of these features may be reversed, rearranged, or Modified in other ways. In some embodiments, computer system 900 provides an interface for fixing both elevation and alignment simultaneously.

[0458] In FIG. 9K, computer system 900 displays a messaging interface 902K showing that a message is being sent via satellite communications. As described above, in response to aligning the computer system 900 with the satellite, the computer system 900 automatically sends the emergency communication and displays the messaging interface 902K. Messaging interface 902K shows the perspective of the sender of the emergency report. In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 9K, computer system 900 outputs tactile output 619 and/or audio output 650 to indicate that computer system 900 is sending the message.

[0459] Banner 926 includes graphical element 931 that displays the status of computer system 900's connection to the satellite. In some embodiments, graphical element 931 is a smaller view of alignment element 909 of Figures 9c-9J. In response to computer system 900 receiving input that changes the orientation of computer system 900 , computer system 900 automatically (eg, dynamically) updates graphical element 931 on the banner to indicate the connection status and, in some embodiments, how to connect the computer system 900 aligned with satellite. Banner 926 includes instructions to remain pointed at the satellite to send and receive messages. Banner 926 includes a sending status bar indicating the message status as sending. The sending status bar dynamically updates to show the progress of the message being sent.

[0460] In response to computer system 900 receiving input on banner 926 927 computer system 900 displays a queue of messages to be sent via satellite communications. In some embodiments, several messages are queued for transmission, and in response to receiving input 927K on banner 926, computer system 900 updates messaging interface 902K to display the queued number of messages and additional messages 906K, as described below.

[0461] In Figure 9K, messaging interface 902K includes messaging header 908K, message 906K, text box 912K, and send affordance 916K. Messaging header 908K indicates the method used by computer system 900 to send message 906K. Message 906K includes a summary of the emergency information included in the content of summary interface 902B. In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 9K, message 906K includes a graphical representation of the emergency specified by message 906K or other content of message 906K (eg, 656).

[0462] In response to receiving input 904K in text box 912K in messaging interface 902K, computer system 900 displays messaging interface 902L shown in FIG. 9L. In Figure 9L, messaging interface 902L includes banner 926 and graphical element 931 indicating that computer system 900 is still connected to the satellite. Messaging interface 902L displays message 906L as being sent via satellite, as indicated by messaging header 908L. In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 9L, computer system 900 outputs tactile output 619 and/or audio output 650 to indicate that the message has been successfully sent. Because the message has been sent but the return message has not yet been received, banner 926 displays the message status "Waiting to Receive" (eg, instead of the Send status bar and the "Sending" status shown in Figure 9K). Banner 926 also holds instructions to keep pointing at satellites to send and receive messages.

[0463] In FIG. 9L, computer system 900 detects a request 936L to remove banner 926. In some implementations, computer system 900 stops display of banner 926 in response to detecting request 936L. In some implementations, computer system 900 displays minimize banner 926a in response to detecting request 936L, as shown in Figure 9L1. Minimize banner 926a includes minimized graphical element 931a and status indicator 926b. In contrast to banner 926, minimized banner 926a does not include detailed textual user interface elements (eg, "Connected," "Keep pointing to satellite to send and receive," and/or "Waiting to receive").

[0464] Figures 9L1A-9L1D illustrate embodiments of minimized banner 926a in various states.

[0465] Figure 9L1A shows minimized banner 926a when computer system 900 is connected to a satellite and is sending a message

118

state (eg, the same state represented by banner 926 in Figure 9K). The window portion of minimized graphical element 931a is shaded to indicate that computer system 900 is connected to a satellite, and status indicator 926a shows a partially filled ring to indicate that a message is being sent.

[0466] Figure 9L1B illustrates the state of minimizing banner 926a when computer system 900 is connected to a satellite, a message has been sent, and computer system 900 is waiting to receive a response (e.g., the same state represented by banner 926 in Figure 9L) . The window portion of minimized graphical element 931a is shaded to indicate that computer system 900 is connected to the satellite, and status indicator 926a shows a fully filled ring to indicate that the message has been sent.

[0467] FIG. 9L1C illustrates a state in which banner 926a is minimized when computer system 900 has a poor connection to a satellite (eg, the same state represented by banner 926 in FIG. 9M described below). Minimized graphical element 931a shows a point on the left side of the circle to indicate that computer system 900 has become misaligned with the satellite, and status indicator 926a is absent.

[0468] Figure 9L1D illustrates when the computer system 900 is not connected to the satellite (e.g., the same state represented by banner 926 in Figure 9M1) and/or no satellite is available (e.g., the state represented by 2106 in Figure 21J) When minimizing the state of banner 926a. Similar to the minimized graphical element 931a in Figure 9L1C, the minimized graphical element 931a in Figure 9L1D shows a dot to the left of the circle to indicate that the computer system 900 is not connected to the satellite (but has a different fill color or effect to distinguish it from bad connection status), and status indicator 926a includes a symbol (eg, an exclamation point in an octagon) to indicate that computer system 900 is not connected to the satellite (eg, as opposed to having a bad connection).

[0469] In response to receiving one or more inputs (eg, taps) on keyboard 920L in Figure 9L1, computer system 900 displays a written message in text box 912L. In response to receiving a selection to send affordance 916L (eg, input 922L), computer system 900 (eg, via satellite communications) sends the written message in text box 912L and displays messaging interface 902M. In some embodiments, computer system 900 attempts to send the written message via a terrestrial wireless communications network and, if a terrestrial wireless communications network is available, sends the written message via a terrestrial wireless communications network (eg, instead of via satellite communications).

[0470] In FIG. 9M, computer system 900 displays a messaging interface 902M that includes a banner 926 and graphical element 931 indicating that computer system 900 has a poor connection to a satellite. Banner 926 includes instructions for aligning computer system 900 to remain connected to the satellite ("turn left"), and displays (eg, maintains) a "waiting to receive" message status because a response has not yet been received. Messaging interface 902M displays message 928M as being sent via text message, along with a text box 912M, a send affordance 916M, and a keyboard 920M. In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 9M, computer system 900 outputs haptic output 619 and/or audio output 650 to indicate that computer system 900's connection status with the satellite has changed (eg, from connected to poor connection).

[0471] In FIG. 9M1, computer system 900 displays a messaging interface 902M that includes a banner 926 and graphical element 931 indicating that computer system 900 is not connected to a satellite. In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 9M1 , computer system 900 outputs haptic output 619 and/or audio output 650 to indicate that computer system 900's connection status with the satellite has changed (eg, from poor connection to not connected). Messaging interface 902M displays message 906M as being sent via satellite, as indicated by messaging header 908M. Messaging interface 902M also displays message 928M as being sent via text message. As described above, in response to determining that the terrestrial wireless communication network is available, computer system 900 may send a message via the terrestrial wireless communication network.^。

[0472] Between Figure 9L1 and Figure 9M, computer system 900 changes orientation relative to the satellite. In response to a determination that alignment between the satellites of computer system 900 has deteriorated, computer system 900 updates (eg, expands) banner 926 to display that computer system 900 has a poor connection to the satellites and to display information for aligning computer system 900 to Stay connected to Guardian

119

Star's command ("turn left"). In some embodiments, in response to determining that computer system 900 is moving into azimuth and/or elevation misalignment, computer system 900 outputs haptics 619 and/or audio output 650. In Figure 9M, in response to receiving input 927M on banner 926, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902G, such as Figure 9G, in which a larger view of graphical element 931 is displayed.

[0473] Between Figure 9M and Figure 9M1, the computer system 900 changes orientation relative to the satellite, or the poor connection persists for a predetermined amount of time. In response to a determination that computer system 900 is not aligned with the satellite or that the poor connection has persisted for a predetermined amount of time, computer system 900 updates banner 926 to display that computer system 900 is not connected to the satellite and updates instructions to find the satellite. In some embodiments, in response to determining that computer system 900 is moving into azimuth and/or elevation misalignment, computer system 900 outputs haptics 619 and/or audio output 650. In Figure 9M1, in response to receiving input 927M1 on banner 926, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902G, such as Figure 9G, in which a larger view of graphical element 931 is displayed.

[0474] In response to determining that the terrestrial wireless communications network is available, the computer system 900 displays the messaging user interface 906N shown in FIG. 9N and optionally outputs a haptic output 619 and/or an audio output 650 to indicate that the terrestrial wireless communications network is available. Messaging interface 902N shows that message 906N was sent, and messaging header 908N indicates that message 906N was sent via satellite communications. In some implementations, the messaging interface 902N displays a text input field 912N and a sending affordance 916N.

[0475] Messaging interface 902N includes banner 926 and network indicator 907. In response to determining that the terrestrial wireless communications network is available, computer system 900 displays network indicator 907 having an appearance indicating that the terrestrial wireless communications network is available. Banner 926 includes an indication that a terrestrial wireless communications network is available. In some embodiments, computer system 900 determines that the call is available for communication with the emergency services being contacted. In response to determining that the call is available, banner 926 displays that the call is available for emergency services.

[0476] In response to computer system 900 receiving selection of banner 926 in FIG. 9N (eg, via input 927N), computer system 900 calls emergency services (eg, 911 ) that is the recipient of message 906N. In some embodiments, in response to determining that the terrestrial wireless communications network is available, computer system 900 updates banner 926 to abandon display of graphical element 931 and displays an indication that the terrestrial wireless communications network is available.

[0477] Although FIG. 9N is described with reference to sending message 906N, in some embodiments, message 906N is sent via terrestrial wireless communications in response to computer system 900 determining that terrestrial wireless communications are available. In some embodiments, banner 926 of Figure 9N replaces banner 926 of Figure 9K when the message is sent.

[0478] In response to determining that the Wi-Fi network is available, computer system 900 displays messaging interface 902N1 shown in FIG. 9N1 and optionally outputs tactile output 619 and/or audio output 650 to indicate that the Wi-Fi network is available. Messaging interface 902N1 includes banner 926. Banner 926 includes an indication that the Wi-Fi network is available. In some embodiments, computer system 900 determines that the call may be communicated via the Wi-Fi network to the emergency services being contacted. In response to determining that the call is available, banner 926 displays that the call is available for emergency services. In some implementations, in response to determining that the Wi-Fi network is available, computer system 900 updates banner 926 to abandon display of graphical element 931 and displays an indication that the Wi-Fi network is available.

[0479] In response to determining that the Wi-Fi network is available, computer system 900 displays notification 918N1 and call option 920N1, which notification informs the user that the call may help the user get help faster. In response to computer system 900 receiving selection 928N of call option 920N1 in FIG. 9N1 , computer system 900 calls emergency services (eg, 911 ) that is the recipient of message 906N.

[0480] Turning to Figure 90, the satellite is moving out of communication range with computer system 900. In some embodiments, computer system 900 determines that the satellite is moving (or has moved) based on the orbit of the satellite and the position of computer system 900

120

move) out of range. In Figure 9O, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 9020.

[0481] In response to determining that the satellite is moving out of range, computer system 900 updates alignment elements 909, including graphical element 931 and text element 9080, and optionally outputs tactile output 619 and/or audio output 650 to indicate that the satellite is moving Move out of range. Graphical element 931 shows the satellite moving away from computer system 900 and indicates the direction in which the satellite is moving relative to computer system 900 . Computer system 900 displays graphical element 931 with an indication of the orientation changes required to improve the alignment of computer system 900 with the satellite, as shown by the arrows. Text element 9080 includes an indication that the satellite is moving out of range. In some embodiments, computer system 900 determines the amount of time until the satellite will be out of range based on computer system 900's location and satellite orbit database. In some embodiments, computer system 900 updates text element 9080 to display the amount of time until the satellite will be out of range.

[0482] Turning to Figure 901, the satellite has moved out of communication range with computer system 900. In some embodiments, computer system 900 determines that the satellite has moved out of range based on the satellite's orbit and the location of computer system 900 . In diagram 901, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 90201.

[0483] In response to determining that the satellite is out of range, computer system 900 updates alignment elements 909, including graphical element 931 and text element 90801, and optionally outputs tactile output 619 and/or audio output 650 to indicate that the satellite is within range. outside. Graphical element 931 shows that the satellite is outside the range of computer system 900 . Text element 90801 includes an indication that the satellite is out of range. In some embodiments, computer system 900 determines the amount of time until a satellite will be available based on computer system 900's location and satellite orbit database. In some implementations, computer system 900 updates text element 908P to display the amount of time until the next satellite will be available.

[0484] In some embodiments, computer system 900 ceases satellite representation in response to determining that the satellite has reached a threshold distance from computer system 900 (e.g., computer system 900 cannot be directed to communicate with the satellite due to the distance between them) 929 is displayed, and the alignment interface 902E of FIG. 9E is displayed as described above. In response to the new satellite being available for communications and/or time passing until the new satellite is available to the computer system 900, the computer system 900 displays the alignment element 902P of Figure 9P.

[0485] In some embodiments, when the computer system 900 determines that the satellite is moving out of range based on the satellite's orbit and position, the computer system 900 displays an amount of time until the satellite will be out of range (e.g., a non-zero indication of the time ; 10 seconds; one minute).

[0486] In FIG. 9P, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902P indicating that computer system 900 is not connected to the satellite. Alignment interface 902P displays an indication that computer system 900 has found a new satellite. Satellite representation 929 indicates a new satellite. In response to computer system 900 determining that the satellite is available for communications, computer system 900 updates alignment elements 909 , including graphical element 931 and text element 908P, and optionally outputs tactile output 619 and/or audio output 650 to indicate that the satellite is available for communications. Graphical element 931 shows that the satellite has been found and is shown in position relative to computer system 900 . Computer system 900 displays graphical element 931 with an indication of the orientation changes required to align computer system 900 with the satellite, as shown by the arrows. Text element 908P includes an indication that new satellites are available. In response to determining that the new satellite is available, computer system 900 updates text element 908P to show that the new satellite has been found.

[0487] In response to receiving an orientation change of computer system 900 while displaying interface 902P, alignment interface 902P is updated relative to the orientation change of computer system 900. In some embodiments, in response to computer system 900 receiving an orientation change to align computer system 900 with a satellite, computer system 900 displays alignment interface 902J of Figure 9J.

[0488] Turning to Figure 9Q, an exemplary external computer system 950 is shown. External computer system 950 is an exemplary device that receives message 906L depicted in Figure 9L. External computer system 950 displays a messaging interface 902Q that includes a message

121

message 906Q, location 914Q, message header 912Q, message information 908Q, sender information 913Q, return button 915, message icon 907Q, and connection indicator 907. Connection indicator 907 indicates that external computer system 950 is connected to the terrestrial wireless communications network. In response to external computer system 950 receiving message 906Q via the terrestrial wireless communications network, computer system 950 displays messaging interface 902Q.

[0489] Message 906Q includes information from message 906L depicted in Figure 9L. Location 914Q indicates the location of computer system 900 (eg, as described in Figure 9L) associated with message 906Q (eg, the location where message 906Q was sent). In some implementations, location 914Q is displayed in the same message as message 906L. In some embodiments, location 914Q is sent as a separate message, as coordinates or as an address. Message header 912Q includes an indication of the device (eg, computer system 900 described in 9L) that sent message 906Q and the location of the sending device 914Q. Message information 908Q provides notification that sender Jane has shared message 906Q with external computer system 950 and indicates that Jane sent the message via satellite and therefore cannot receive the call. In response to receiving input on the back button 915, the external computer system 950 displays a series of message threads and/or a home screen.

[0490] In some embodiments, Figure 9Q is similar to the messaging user interface 1114 of Figure 11F.

[0491] Figures 9R-9U illustrate animation of graphic element 931. In some embodiments, graphical element 931 includes animation as shown and described with reference to Figures 9R-9U. In some embodiments, graphical element 931 includes the animation in Figures 9R-9U when computer system 900 is connected to a satellite as indicated by communications window 930 being filled. As detailed below, satellite representation 929 rotates back and forth between the two orientations (eg, such that satellite representation 929 is always pointed downward at computer system 932 ), and signal 933 moves back and forth between computer system 932 and satellite representation 929 .

[0492] Figure 9R shows the first state of the animation. In Figure 9R, satellite representation 929 has a first orientation, and signal 933 has a first appearance (eg, solid line, first brightness, first curvature, and/or first color) and a first location (eg, within the communication window 930). A first appearance of signal 933 indicates that signal 933 is moving from computer system 932 to satellite representation 929 . For example, signal 933 curves upward to indicate that signal 933 is moving upward from computer system 932 to satellite representation 929 . The arrow next to satellite representation 929 indicates that satellite representation 929 rotates over time (eg, changes orientation and/or rotates clockwise) while maintaining the same position (eg, at the top of communication window 930 ).

[0493] Figure 9s shows the second state of the animation. In Figure 9s, satellite representation 929 has a second orientation (eg, rotated clockwise relative to the first orientation) and signal 933 has a first appearance and a second location (eg, within communication window 930). The second location of signal 933 is closer to satellite representation 929, which provides the effect that signal 933 is moving from computer system 932 to satellite representation 929 (eg, consistent with the first appearance). The arrow next to satellite representation 929 in Figure 9s indicates that satellite representation 929 rotates over time (eg, changes orientation and/or rotates counterclockwise) while maintaining the same position (eg, at the top of communication window 930). In some embodiments, graphical element 931 gradually transitions from the first state of the animation in Figure 9R through an intermediate state to the second state of the animation in Figure 9s.

[0494] Figure 9T shows the third state of the animation. In Figure 9T, satellite representation 929 has a first orientation (eg, the same orientation as in Figure 9R and/or counterclockwise relative to the second orientation), and signal 933 has a second appearance (eg, dashed line, second brightness , second curvature, and/or second color) and a third location (eg, within communication window 930 ). The second appearance of signal 933 indicates that signal 933 is moving from satellite representation 929 to computer system 932 . For example, signal 933 curves downward to indicate that signal 933 is moving downward from satellite representation 929 to computer system 932 . The arrow next to satellite representation 929 indicates that satellite representation 929 rotates over time (eg, changes orientation and/or rotates clockwise) while maintaining the same position (eg, at the top of communication window 930 ). In some embodiments, graphical element 931 gradually transitions from the second state of the animation in Figure 9s through an intermediate state to the third state of the animation in Figure 9T.

122

[0495] Figure 9U shows the fourth state of the animation. In Figure 9U, satellite representation 929 has a second orientation (eg, the same orientation as in Figure 9s and/or rotated clockwise relative to the first orientation), and signal 933 has a second appearance and fourth position (eg, in communication window 930). The fourth location of signal 933 is closer to computer system 932, which provides the effect that signal 933 is moving from satellite representation 929 to computer system 932 (eg, consistent with the second appearance). In some embodiments, graphical element 931 gradually transitions from the third state of the animation in Figure 9T through an intermediate state to the fourth state of the animation in Figure 9U.

[0496] In some embodiments, graphical element 931 transitions from the fourth state to the first state and repeats the animation described in Figures 9R-9U one or more times (eg, continuously repeats and/or loops the animation). In some embodiments, features of the animations described with reference to FIGS. 9R-9U (eg, rotation of satellite representation 929 and/or movement of signal 933) do not correspond to actual signals between computer system 900 and the satellite (eg, electromagnetic signals ) is synchronized with and/or is not based on the status and/or motion position (e.g., orientation) of the satellite. In some embodiments, features of the animation described with reference to FIGS. 9R-9U (eg, rotation of satellite representation 929 and/or movement of signal 933) are consistent with the status of the actual signal between computer system 900 and the satellite and/or satellite. The action position is synchronized with and/or based on the state and/or action position.

[0497] Figure 10 is a flowchart illustrating a method for aligning a computer system with one or more satellites in accordance with some embodiments. The method operates on a computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, 600, or 900; e.g., a smartphone, smart watch, tablet, laptop, desktop computer, or head-mounted device (e.g., head-mounted augmented reality and and/or an extended reality device)), the computer with a display generation component (e.g., 901; e.g., a display controller, a touch-sensitive display system, and/or a head-mounted display system) and one or more input devices (e.g., 901; touch-sensitive surfaces, touch screens, buttons, microphones, gyroscopes and/or accelerometers) communications. Some operations in the method are optionally combined, the order of some operations is optionally changed, and some operations are optionally omitted.

[0498] As described below, method 1000 provides an intuitive means for aligning a computer system with one or more satellites. This approach reduces the cognitive load on the user to align their computer system with one or more satellites, creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-powered computing devices, enabling users to align their computer systems with one or more satellites more quickly and efficiently saves power and increases the time between battery charges.

[0499] The computer system detects (1002) via one or more input devices a request (e.g., receiving User input (e.g., 906A or 906B) for a selection to send an affordance.

[0500] In response to detecting the user input (1004), the computer system displays (1006) via the display generation component an alignment element (e.g., as described at 909 with reference to Figures 9c-9J; e.g., graphical elements, text, and/or or image), including: based on determining a computer system (in some embodiments, based on determining a predetermined portion of the computer system (e.g., a display of the computer system and/or one or more satellite communications antennas of the computer system relative to the satellite system) )) is not properly aligned to communicate with one or more satellites (e.g., in a satellite system) (e.g., for initiating communications, such as telephone calls or sending messages), the computer system appears in the first alignment Display (1008) an alignment element (e.g., a "fan" graphic and/or an indicator of the direction in which the computer system is oriented (in some embodiments, the alignment element includes an arrow pointing in the direction of rotation of the computer system, and/or a relative This first alignment appearance indicates that the computer system is not properly aligned for use with one or Multiple satellites communicate and include graphic indications (e.g., 931 ; e.g., text, graphics, colors, and/or animations) (e.g., a graphical indication of the orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system); and upon displaying the alignment element in the first alignment appearance, the computer system detects (1010) A predetermined part of a computer system (e.g., a display of a computer system

123

changes in the orientation (e.g., azimuth, elevation, and/or rotation) of the display and/or computer system relative to one or more satellite communications antennas of one or more satellites; in response to detecting a predetermined Orientation change of part, the computer system changes (1014) the appearance of the alignment element (e.g., changes the appearance of the graphic indication, changes the color of "Sector" to green to indicate proper alignment, changes text to "Aligned", and/or move the image of the satellite directly above the graphical representation of the computer system). Displaying the alignment element with a first alignment appearance indicating that the computer system is not properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites and upon determining that the computer system is not properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites One or more satellites communicate to include graphical indications, which provides the user with information regarding the alignment of the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback. Changing the appearance of an alignment element in response to detecting a change in the orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system provides the user with updated information regarding the alignment of the computer system when the orientation of the predetermined portion of the computer system changes, which provides Improved visual feedback.

[0501] In some embodiments, in response to detecting user input, the computer system displays a satellite availability element (e.g., 908E, 908O; e.g., graphical elements, text, and/or images), including based on determining that the computer system is relative to a or multiple satellites are in a first availability state (e.g., the satellites are available for communications based on the location of the one or more satellites and the computer system's location and/or orientation), the computer system has a first appearance indicating the first availability state (e.g., , as described with reference to FIG. 9F) (e.g., text and/or graphics indicating satellite availability, such as "available," "connected," etc.) displaying a satellite availability element; and based on determining that the computer system is in a state relative to one or more satellites A second availability state (e.g., based on the location of one or more satellites and the location and/or orientation of the computer system, the satellite is unavailable for sending messages), the computer system with a second appearance indicating the second availability state (e.g., indicating that the satellite Availability text and/or graphics, such as "Not Available", "Not Connected", "Searching", "Attempting to Connect", etc.) display satellite availability elements where the second availability appearance is different from the first availability appearance. Displaying the satellite availability element with an appearance based on the status of the computer system relative to the one or more satellites provides the user with information regarding the availability of the one or more satellites to communicate with the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback.

[0502] According to some embodiments, alignment elements and satellite availability elements are displayed simultaneously (eg, as described with reference to Figures 9F-9J). Displaying the alignment element and the satellite availability element simultaneously provides the user with concurrent information regarding the availability of one or more satellites for communicating with the computer system and the alignment of the computer system with the one or more satellites, which provides improved Visual feedback.

[0503] According to some embodiments, changing the appearance of the alignment element includes: the computer system displaying the alignment element in a second appearance (e.g., as described with reference to FIG. 9H; e.g., changing the appearance of the graphical indication such that the color of the "fan" is Changes to light green to indicate that the orientation change has improved alignment and/or the indicator of the orientation direction has changed; the satellite's figure moves in response to the orientation change), the second appearance is based on the orientation change of a predetermined portion of the computer system, Wherein the second alignment appearance is different from the first alignment appearance. Displaying the alignment element in a second appearance based on the orientation change of a predetermined portion of the computer system provides the user with information about how the orientation change affects the alignment with one or more satellites and enables the user to perform the alignment with one or more satellites with fewer errors. to align computer systems, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform operations.

[0504] According to some embodiments, changing the appearance of the alignment element includes changing (e.g., gradually over time and/or through a plurality of intermediate states) based on the magnitude of a detected change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system. The appearance of the alignment element (e.g., as described with reference to Figure 9F; e.g., the arrow from the satellite is larger for the large magnitude of change required to align the device, when the magnitude of the change is the large magnitude of change required to align the device When the magnitude changes, the fan color is dark gray, and when the magnitude changes enough to align with the device, the text changes from "Turn Left" to "Turn Far Left"). In some embodiments, the outside of the alignment element

124

8 changes as the magnitude and/or direction corresponding to the detected orientation change of the predetermined portion of the computer system changes (eg, gradually over time and/or through a plurality of intermediate states). Changing the appearance of the alignment element based on the magnitude of the detected orientation change of a predetermined portion of the computer system provides the user with information about how the magnitude of the orientation change affects alignment with one or more satellites, which provides Improved visual feedback.

[0505] According to some embodiments, changing the appearance of the alignment element includes changing (e.g., gradually over time and/or through a plurality of intermediate states) the appearance of the alignment element based on a direction of change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system. Appearance (e.g., as described with reference to Figure 9F; e.g., arrows from satellite affordances are automatically shifted to the opposite side to indicate the direction used to align the orientation of the device when the direction of change of orientation is changed , the text automatically changes from "Turn left" to "Turn right"). Altering the appearance of alignment elements based on the direction of the orientation change of a predetermined portion of the computer system provides the user with information about how the direction of the orientation change affects alignment with one or more satellites and enables the user to do so with less errors to align the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform operations.

[0506] According to some embodiments, changing the appearance of the alignment element includes changing the appearance of the alignment element (e.g., gradually and/or over time) based on movement of one or more satellites (e.g., as described with reference to Figure 90) or through multiple intermediate states). In some embodiments, the computer system detects (eg, directly or via data received from an external source) an indication of movement of one or more satellites, and changes alignment elements in response to detecting the indication of movement and in accordance with the movement Appearance. In some embodiments, the appearance of the alignment element changes as one or more satellites move (eg, gradually over time and/or through multiple intermediate states). Changing the appearance of alignment elements based on the movement of one or more satellites provides the user with information about how the movement affects alignment with the one or more satellites and enables the user to align the computer system with fewer errors , which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform operations.

[0507] According to some embodiments, the determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for communicating with one or more satellites is based on a database (e.g., position in orbit or time) of the one or more satellites (e.g., position in orbit or time). , as described with reference to Figures 9c through 9J; e.g., a locally stored database stored on the computer system) and the computer system location (e.g., a GPS location). Determining that the computer system is not properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites based on a database of the positions of the one or more satellites and the position of the computer system provides the user with information regarding alignment with the one or more satellites. provides more accurate information and enables users to align computer systems with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform operations.

[0508] According to some embodiments, determining that the computer system is not properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites includes determining that the computer system is not properly aligned in an azimuth direction (e.g., FIG. 9F) for communicating with the one or more satellites. for communicating with the one or more satellites; and the first alignment appearance of the alignment element includes instructions (e.g., via text or graphical elements) for adjusting (e.g., aligning) the orientation of the computer system in the azimuthal direction to fix the azimuthal orientation). Including instructions for adjusting the orientation of the computer system in the azimuth direction in the first alignment appearance of the alignment element provides the user with more information on how to move the computer system into alignment with the one or more satellites , and enables users to align computer systems with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform operations.

[0509] According to some embodiments, displaying the alignment element includes simultaneously displaying: a graphical representation of the position of the one or more satellites (e.g., 929; e.g., relative to a computer system; a satellite icon relative to a phone icon); and communications A graphical representation of a window (e.g., 930; e.g., the orientation of a computer system with which the computer system is capable of communicating with the one or more satellites

125

A range of angular and/or elevation orientations (e.g., a sector)) (in some embodiments, the graphical position of the one or more satellites is within the graphical communication window based on determining the alignment of the computer system with the one or more satellites) . Simultaneously displaying a graphical representation of the position of the one or more satellites and a graphical representation of the communication window provides the user with more information about how to move the computer system into alignment with the one or more satellites and enables the user to more accurately Align the computer system with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform operations.

[0510] According to some embodiments, changing the appearance of the alignment element includes: based on determining that the computer system is in the communication window (e.g., as described with reference to FIGS. 9G-9H; e.g., centered in the communication window): the computer system The graphical representation of the position of the one or more satellites is enlarged (e.g., the satellite icon is moved within the communication window); and the computer system enlarges the graphical representation of the communication window (in some embodiments, based on determining that the computer system is in contact with the one or more satellites). satellite alignment). In some embodiments, the computer system becomes located within the communication window due to movement of the computer system, movement of the one or more satellites, and/or movement of occlusion relative to the communication window. Zooming in on the graphical representation of the position of the one or more satellites based on determining that the computer system is within the communication window and zooming in on the graphical representation of the communication window provides the user with a visual indication that the computer system is aligned with the one or more satellites and helps prevent the user from This provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform operations by moving the computer system unnecessarily.

[0511] According to some embodiments, changing the appearance of the alignment element includes: based on determining that the computer system is properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites (e.g., connecting with the one or more satellites and/ or communication), change the color of the graphical representation of the communication window (e.g., as described with reference to Figure 9J; change to green). changing the color of the graphical representation of the communication window based on a determination that the computer system is properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites provides a visual indication to the user that the computer system is aligned with the one or more satellites, and Helps prevent users from moving the computer system unnecessarily, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform operations.

[0512] According to some embodiments, instructions for adjusting the orientation of the computer system in the azimuthal direction include textual prompts (eg, 908F, 908G, 908P). Including textual prompts in the instructions for adjusting the orientation of the computer system in the azimuthal direction provides the user with clearer instructions on how to align the computer system with the one or more satellites and enables the user to do so in less time. errors to align the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform operations.

[0513] According to some embodiments, the alignment element includes: a graphical representation (e.g., an icon, a thumbnail, or a glyph) of the one or more satellites (e.g., 929; displayed relative to the graphical representation of the computer system (e.g., , a satellite icon relative to the phone icon)); and changing the appearance of the alignment element includes moving the graphical representation of the one or more satellites. Including the graphical representation of the one or more satellites in the alignment element and moving the graphical representation of the one or more satellites as part of changing the appearance of the alignment element provides the user with how changes in orientation affect the computer system relative to the one or more satellites. or a visual indication of the alignment of multiple satellites, and enables the user to align the computer system with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation.

[0514] According to some embodiments, the alignment element includes: a graphical indication (e.g., text, graphics, color, and/or animation) of the direction of motion of the one or more satellites (e.g., as described with reference to Figure 9G, an arrow; For example, displayed relative to the computer system (e.g., a satellite icon relative to a phone icon)). Including a graphical indication of the direction of motion of the one or more satellites provides the user with a visual indication of the direction of motion of the one or more satellites and enables the user to align the computer system with fewer errors, which provides improved Visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform an action.

[0515] According to some embodiments, determining that the computer system is not properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites includes determining that the computer system is not properly aligned in an elevation direction for communicating with the one or more satellites. satellite

126

communicating (e.g., as described with reference to Figures 9H-9I; and the first alignment appearance of the alignment element includes instructions for adjusting (e.g., aligning) the orientation of the computer system in the elevation direction (e.g., via text or graphical elements to fix the elevation orientation) including instructions for adjusting the orientation of the computer system in the elevation direction in the first alignment appearance of the alignment element provides the user with information on how to move the computer system into alignment with that one. or multiple satellite alignments, and enables users to align computer systems with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform operations.

[0516] According to some embodiments, the instructions for adjusting the orientation of the computer system in the elevation direction include prompts (e.g., pointing) the computer system in the elevation direction (e.g., pointing the phone upward). 908H, 908I; e.g., textual and/or graphical indications (e.g., arrows)). Including prompts for moving the computer system in the elevation direction among the instructions for adjusting the orientation of the computer system in the elevation direction provides the user with more information on how to move the computer system into alignment with the one or more satellites. information and enables users to align computer systems with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform operations.

[0517] According to some embodiments, the change in the orientation of the predetermined portion of the computer system includes a change in the elevation of the predetermined portion of the computer system (e.g., closer to alignment with the one or more satellites); and a change (e.g., more closely aligned with the one or more satellites) , automatically or dynamically) aligning the appearance of the element includes moving (e.g., on a display) a graphical representation (e.g., 929) of the one or more satellites toward a graphical representation of the computer system (e.g., as described with reference to FIG. 9H to Figure 9I at 932) (In some embodiments, the alignment element changes in appearance consistent with a change in elevation of the computer system (e.g., proportional to and/or at the same time as a change in elevation of the computer system) direction). In some embodiments, when the user adjusts the elevation of the phone to be closer to the alignment, the satellite is shown closer to the phone). Moving the graphical representation of the one or more satellites toward the graphical representation of the computer system in response to detecting a change in elevation of the predetermined portion of the computer system provides the user with more information regarding changes in elements of the predetermined portion of the computer system. information and enables users to align computer systems with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform operations.

[0518] According to some embodiments, instructions for adjusting the orientation of the computer system in the elevation direction are displayed based on determining that the computer system is properly aligned in the azimuth direction for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., , as described with reference to FIGS. 9G-9H; for example, after providing a prompt for correcting the azimuth and detecting a predetermined portion of the computer system to align the computer system with the one or more satellites in the azimuth direction. following a change in the azimuth angle.) Display instructions for adjusting the orientation of the computer system in the elevation direction by instructing the user based on determining that the computer system is properly aligned in the azimuth direction for communication with the one or more satellites. Aligning the computer system in one direction at a time simplifies the alignment of the computer system and enables the user to align the computer system with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform operations.

[0519] According to some embodiments, in response to detecting user input and upon determining that there is an obstacle that prevents the computer system from communicating with the one or more satellites (e.g., a wall or building, or the computer system is indoors, and/or the computer system is having difficulty finding the satellite or satellites), the computer system displays prompts for avoiding and/or removing the obstacle (e.g., 908C, 908D; e.g., instructions, text, and/or graphical indicators.) Display for Tips for avoiding and/or removing obstacles that prevent the computer system from communicating with the one or more satellites provide the user with more information on how to move the computer system into alignment with the one or more satellites, and enable Users are able to align computer systems with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform operations.

[0520] According to some embodiments, tips for avoiding and/or removing the obstacle include moving the computer system

127

to the outside text command. Including textual instructions for moving the computer system outside provides the user with clearer instructions on how to align the computer system with the one or more satellites and enables the user to align the computer system with fewer errors , which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform operations.

[0521] According to some embodiments, prompts for avoiding and/or removing the obstacle include a graphical representation of one or more satellites (e.g., 929) that is smaller than the graphical representation of the one or more satellites. Displayed with a brightness that represents the brightness of other graphic elements that are displayed at the same time. In some embodiments, when an obstruction is determined to be present, the computer system dims the graphical representation of the one or more satellites (eg, reduces its brightness over time). In some embodiments, when an obstacle is determined to be present, the graphical representation of the one or more satellites is displayed at a lower brightness than when an obstacle is determined not to be present (e.g., based on a determination that an obstacle is not present, the graphical representation is displayed at a lower brightness than when an obstacle is determined to be present. high brightness to display a graphical representation of the satellite or satellites). Including the graphical representation of the one or more satellites displayed at a lower brightness than other graphical elements displayed concurrently with the graphical representation of the one or more satellites provides a barrier to the user that is preventing the computer system from interacting with the one or more satellites. visual indication of satellite communications and enables users to align computer systems with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform operations.

[0522] According to some embodiments, in response to detecting user input: based on a determination that the computer system is currently not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., no satellites are within communication range of the computer system ), the computer system displays a graphical indication that the computer system is currently unable to be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (in some embodiments, based on a determination that the computer system can be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites to communicate (e.g., the one or more satellites move into range, the computer system abandons a graphical indication that the computer system cannot be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites) (eg, as seen at 931 in Figures 9c through 9D)). Graphical indications showing that the computer system is currently not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites provides the user with more information about the computer system's ability to communicate with the one or more satellites and helps prevent The user eliminates unnecessary attempts to align the computer system with the satellite or satellites, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform operations.

[0523] According to some embodiments, in response to detecting the user input and upon determining that the computer system is not currently properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites, the computer system abandons display of the graphics of the one or more satellites. Represent (e.g., as described with reference to FIGS. 9c-9D; e.g., display a graphical indication (e.g., text, graphics, color, and /or animation) without displaying a graphical representation of the satellite or satellites). In some embodiments, the computer system cannot be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites because the one or more satellites are outside the communication range of the computer system and/or the computer system is indoors or otherwise separated from the sky. The foregoing displaying a graphical representation of the one or more satellites based on a determination that the computer system is currently not properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites provides the user with the information that the computer system is not currently properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites. provides a visual indication of communication with the one or more satellites and helps prevent the user from unnecessarily trying to align the computer system with the one or more satellites, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the time required to perform the operation. Enter the quantity.

[0524] According to some embodiments, in response to detecting the user input and upon determining that the computer system is not currently properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites, the computer system (e.g., the computer system is not currently aligned with the computer system) A graphical indication of proper alignment for communication with the one or more satellites simultaneously) shows an indication of when the computer system will be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g. , text, graphics, colors and/or animations) (e.g., as described with reference to FIG. 9E; e.g., when or how long the one or more satellites will be at

128

within the communication range of the computer system). Displaying an indication of when the computer system will be properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites provides the user with an indication of when the computer system will be properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites. This provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform operations.

[0525] According to some embodiments, upon determining that the computer system will not be properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites for a threshold period of time (e.g., the one or more satellites will be within the computer system's out of range), the computer system displays a graphical indication (e.g., text) that the computer system will not be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., as described with reference to FIG. 9O; e.g., change The appearance of the alignment element to indicate a threshold period of time until the satellite or satellites will be outside the communication range of the computer system). A graphical indication showing that the computer system will not be properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites during a threshold period of time provides the user with an idea of when the computer system will be able to be properly aligned for communicating with the satellite or satellites. more information to communicate with the satellite or satellites and helps prevent the user from unnecessarily trying to align the computer system with the satellite or satellites, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the input required to perform operations quantity.

[0526] According to some embodiments, displaying a graphical indication that the computer system will not be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites includes displaying a graphical representation of the one or more satellites moving away from the computer system ( For example, as described with reference to Figure 9O). Displaying the graphical representation of the one or more satellites moving away from the computer system provides the user with a visual indication of the movement of the one or more satellites relative to the computer system and enables the user to align the computer with fewer errors system, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform actions.

[0527] According to some embodiments, wherein displaying the graphical indication that the computer system will not be properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites includes displaying that the computer system will not be properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites An indication (e.g., text, graphics, color, and/or animation) of the amount of time to communicate with the one or more satellites (e.g., as described at 908P with reference to FIG. 9O; e.g., when the one or more satellites will return into range or when the next communication window will appear). Displaying an indication of the amount of time until the computer system will be able to be properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites provides the user with an indication of when the computer system will be able to be properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites. more information to communicate with one or more satellites and helps prevent the user from unnecessarily trying to align the computer system with that one or more satellites, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform an operation.

[0528] According to some embodiments, after displaying a graphical indication that the computer system will not be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., after the one or more satellites exit the communication of the computer system After range): The computer system detects an indication (e.g., data) that the computer system can be properly aligned for communication with the satellite or satellites (e.g., a new satellite is found, or the satellite or satellites return to within communication range) and displays a graphical indication (e.g., text, graphics, color, and/or animation) that the computer system can be appropriately aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites (e.g., as described with reference to Figure 9P Described). Displaying a graphical indication that the computer system can be properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites provides the user with a visual indication that the computer system can be properly aligned and enables the user to perform the task with fewer errors. Aligned computer systems, this provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform operations.

[0529] According to some embodiments, when the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode (in some embodiments, communicating using a compressed message format (e.g., a format with limited data for transmission via non-terrestrial wireless communications)

129

mode (e.g., as described with reference to Figure 6M). In some embodiments, the computer system enters the low-bandwidth communication mode in response to receiving a request to enter the low-bandwidth communication mode (e.g., in response to receiving a request to communicate via non-terrestrial wireless communications), the computer system enters the low-bandwidth communication mode via the display generation component ( For example, in a banner) that displays a visual indication (e.g., text, graphics, color, and/or animation) of a computer system's connection status to the satellite or satellites. In some embodiments, a visual indication of the computer system's connection status to the one or more satellites is optional. In some embodiments, in response to detecting selection of a visual indication of the computer system's connection status with the one or more satellites, the computer system displays (e.g., redisplays) an alignment element (e.g., utilizing a linkage element for connecting to the one or more satellites). or instructions for multiple satellites to reconnect (e.g., instructions greater than a visual indication of the computer system's connection status to that satellite or satellites). Displaying a visual indication of the computer system's connection status to the one or more satellites while the computer system is in a low-bandwidth communication mode provides the user with an indication of whether the computer system is capable of communicating in the low-bandwidth communication mode, which provides improved visual feedback.

[0530] According to some embodiments, displaying a visual indication of a computer system's connection status to the one or more satellites includes based on a determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (and / or currently cannot be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., the one or more satellites are obscured and/or outside the communication range of the computer system)), (e.g., in Banner Display a visual indication (e.g., text, graphics, color, and/or animation) of an error condition in and/or concurrently with a visual indication of the computer system's connection status to the one or more satellites (e.g., as described with reference to Figure 9F Description; e.g., an indication of why the computer system is currently unable to communicate with the satellite or satellites). In some embodiments, displaying a visual indication of an error condition includes ceasing to display a visual indication that the computer system is properly aligned for communicating with or connecting to the one or more satellites (e.g., connected The visual indication of status changes from Connected to Error status). In some embodiments, upon determining that the computer system is properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites, the computer system stops displaying the visual indication of the error condition and displays (e.g., redisplays) that the computer system is properly aligned. A visual indication of ground alignment for communication with or connection to one or more satellites (e.g., a visual indication of connection status changing from an error condition state to a connected state). In some embodiments, based on a determination that the computer system changes from not properly aligned to properly aligned or from properly aligned to improperly aligned, the computer system outputs an audible and/or tactile output (e.g., a visual change in connection status). before, after and/or simultaneously with the indicated display). Visual indication of an error condition based on a determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites provides the user with more information regarding the alignment of the computer system with the one or more satellites , and enables users to align computer systems with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform operations.

[0531] According to some embodiments, upon detecting user input and upon determining that the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites, the computer system transmits via the one or more satellites (e.g., 9J; e.g., automatically and/or without further user input) message including content corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications. In some embodiments, the message includes content (eg, text and/or location information) provided (eg, input) by the user. After detecting the user input and upon determining that the computer system is properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites, transmitting via the one or more satellites including content corresponding to the request to communicate via satellite communications Messages allow a computer system to automatically send communications without additional input when the computer system becomes properly aligned with the satellite or satellites, which reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation and perform an operation when a set of conditions have been met without requiring further user input.

130

[0532] According to some embodiments, after detecting user input and upon determining that the computer system is properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites, the computer system displays (e.g., automatically and/or without further user input) of the messaging application's user interface (e.g., 902K or 902L). In some embodiments, the user interface of the messaging application includes (eg, displays) a message dialog that includes a message sent via the one or more satellites, the message including a message corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communication. content. In some embodiments, displaying the user interface of the messaging application includes ceasing display of the aligned element (e.g., the user interface of the messaging application replaces the aligned element), or displaying a smaller version of the aligned element (e.g., less small display size). displaying the user interface of the messaging application without additional input after detecting the user input and upon determining that the computer system is properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites; and Provides efficient techniques for sending additional communications (e.g., follow-up communications), which provide improved visual feedback, reduce the number of inputs required to perform an action, and perform actions when a set of conditions are met without requiring further user interaction enter.

[0533] According to some embodiments, the computer system displays (e.g., before detecting user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications, after detecting user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications, in selectable end satellite communication options (e.g., as seen at 914 in Figures 9c-9J; e.g., buttons, icons, affordances, and /or selectable graphical elements), which, when selected, causes the computer system to cease operating in satellite (or low-bandwidth) communications mode (e.g., to cease displaying alignment elements). Displaying a selectable end satellite communication option that causes the computer system to cease operating in the satellite communication mode provides the user with an efficient technique for exiting the satellite communication mode without requiring additional input, which reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.

[0534] According to some embodiments, in response to detecting a change in orientation of a predetermined portion of the computer system and based on determining the change in orientation of the predetermined portion of the computer system, the computer system is appropriately aligned for use with the one or more The satellite communicates, the computer system provides a first haptic output at the computer system (e.g., as seen at 619 in Figures 9J and 9M; e.g., via a haptic feedback component); and when the computer system is properly aligned for While communicating with the one or more satellites, the computer system detects a second orientation change of the predetermined portion of the computer system; and in response to detecting the second orientation change of the predetermined portion of the computer system, based on determining the detected A second change in orientation (azimuth/or attitude) of a predetermined portion of the computer system causes the computer system to move out of alignment and be unable to communicate with the one or more satellites, the computer system provides a second tactile output at the computer system ( For example, via a tactile feedback component). Providing tactile output when the computer system becomes properly aligned with the one or more satellites and when the computer system moves out of alignment with the one or more satellites provides the user with an indication of when these conditions occur without the need for additional input. , which provides improved feedback and performs actions when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input.

[0535] According to some embodiments, after detecting user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications (e.g., while the alignment element is displayed and/or while the computer system is in a low bandwidth communication mode), in response to detecting to terrestrial communications (e.g., cellular service) being available, the computer system displays (e.g., as a banner) selectable terrestrial communications options (e.g., as seen at 926 of Figure 9N); the computer system detects selection of the terrestrial communications options; and in response to detecting the selection of the ground communication option, the computer system initiates a communication (eg, call and/or text) via ground communication (eg, to communicate with emergency services). Displaying the ground communication option in response to detecting that ground communication is available provides the user with a visual indication that ground communication is available and an efficient technique for initiating communications via ground communication, which provides improved visual

131

Feedback, which reduces the amount of input required to perform an action, and performs an action without further user input when a set of conditions has been met.

[0536] According to some embodiments, displaying the terrestrial communication option includes ceasing display of the alignment element (eg, as described with reference to Figure 9N; eg, replacing the alignment element with the terrestrial communication option). Stopping the display of alignment elements provides a visual indication that a satellite connection is no longer required for communications, which provides improved visual feedback.

[0537] According to some embodiments, when terrestrial communication is available, the computer system displays (e.g., remains displayed and/or continues to display) corresponding content for the communication (e.g., information selectable by the user for inclusion in a report) A set of selectable communication content options (e.g., 604M; e.g., affordances, buttons, graphical elements, graphical objects, and/or icons), where the set of selectable communication content options are specific to low-bandwidth communication modes (e.g., these Options are only available and/or presented for low-bandwidth communication modes, even if terrestrial communication is available). In some embodiments, these options are not presented in the messaging user interface of the messaging application that displays fields for a messaging conversation and/or for composing messages for that messaging conversation. Displaying a set of selectable communications content options corresponding to respective content for communications when terrestrial communications are available, wherein the set of selectable communications content options is specific to a low-bandwidth communications mode, and in doing so provides content for selecting low-bandwidth communications The technology provides visual indication of when ground communications are available, which provides improved visual feedback.

According to some embodiments: based on determining (or optionally, in response to determining) that an error condition is met (e.g., the computer system is in a threshold position that is not properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites) The signal strength between the computer system and the one or more satellites is below a threshold level, and/or the computer system has a poor connection to the one or more satellites) (e.g., there is a poor connection between the computer system and the satellite(s)) , as shown in Figure 9M): The computer system provides a prompt (e.g., 926 in Figure 9M) that includes instructions (e.g., text, graphics (such as arrows), colors, and/or animations) for correcting the error condition (e.g., 926 in Figure 9M) ( e.g., display graphical elements, output audio, and/or generate tactile output) (and optionally, display (e.g., simultaneously with providing the prompt) an indication of the error condition, such as "bad connection" or "weak signal") . In some embodiments, the instructions include instructions to properly align the computer system with the one or more satellites. According to some embodiments, after providing a prompt including instructions for correcting the error condition: based on a determination that the error condition has been met for at least a threshold amount of time (e.g., the error condition has not been corrected, the error condition has persisted, and/or the error condition persists) (for example, a non-zero threshold amount of time such as 5 seconds, 30 seconds, 90 seconds, or 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, or 15 minutes), the computer system provides a status indication (e.g., 926 in Figure 9M1) (e.g., a visual indication such as text, graphics, color, and/or animation, or a non-visual indication such as sound and/or Tactile output), the status indication indicates that the computer system is not connected to the one or more satellites (e.g., disconnected from and/or unable to communicate with the one or more satellites). In some embodiments, the threshold amount of time is a predetermined amount of time since it was determined that the error condition has been met or since a prompt including instructions for correcting the error condition was displayed. Upon determining that an error condition has been met and prior to indicating that the computer system is not connected to the one or more satellites, a prompt including instructions for correcting the error condition is provided to notify the user of the error condition and to assist the user in the computer system becoming unconnected from the one or more satellites. Correct this error condition before or multiple satellites disconnect, which performs actions when a set of conditions have been met without requiring further user input, provides improved visual feedback and reduces the need to perform actions (e.g., maintain and/or rebuild with a or the connection of multiple satellites) the number of inputs required.

[0539] According to some embodiments, the computer system transmits via satellite communications (e.g., via the one or more satellites) (e.g., after the computer system has been appropriately aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites) and/or when the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites) message; and after sending the message via satellite communications and before receiving a reply to the message, the computer system displays a reply state element

132

An element (e.g., "Waiting to receive" in banner 926 in Figures 9L and 9M) (e.g., a prompt, notification, graphical indicator, and/or textual indication, such as "Waiting to receive") that indicates that the computer system has sent message and has not received a reply to this message. In some embodiments, the reply status element is displayed concurrently with (or included in) the alignment element. In some embodiments, after displaying the reply status element, upon determining that a reply to the message has been received (or, optionally, in response to receiving a reply to the message), the computer system ceases display (e.g., removes) Reply status elements (for example, a computer system displays an alignment element but not a reply status element). In some embodiments, after displaying the reply status element, upon determining that a reply to the message has been received (or, optionally, in response to receiving a reply to the message), the computer system updates the reply status element to indicate that a reply has been received to the reply to this message. After sending the message via satellite communications and before receiving a reply to the message, an element is displayed indicating that the computer system has sent the message and has not received a reply to the message. In doing so, it provides the user with information as to whether a reply to the message has been received. message replies and helps users avoid trying to send additional messages, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform an action.

[0540] According to some embodiments, after displaying the alignment element (e.g., 931) (or optionally, concurrently with displaying the alignment element): based on determining the terrestrial communications (e.g., terrestrial wireless communications, Wi-Fi and/or or cellular communications) are (or optionally, have become available) (e.g., as shown in Figure 9N or Figure 9N1): the computer system stops displaying the alignment element, and displays a terrestrial communications element (e.g., as shown in Figure 9N Cellular graphic at 926 or Wi-Fi graphic at 926 in Figure 9N1) (e.g., notification and/or prompt), the terrestrial communications element indicates that terrestrial communications are available. In some embodiments, the terrestrial communication element includes a selectable terrestrial communication option that, when selected, causes the computer system to initiate communications via terrestrial communication (e.g., via text messages, phone calls, and/or while in The process of communicating by sending an emergency report when in emergency reporting mode. In some embodiments, the alignment element is displayed in a first position and the terrestrial communication element replaces the alignment element at the first position. Stopping the display of the alignment element and displaying an indication that terrestrial communications are available upon determination that terrestrial communications are available provides a visual indication that a potentially preferred communication method is available, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform an operation.

[0541] According to some embodiments, when the computer system is properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites: it is determined that the computer system will not be properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites within a threshold period of time. The one or more satellites communicate (e.g., the one or more satellites will be out of range and/or out of view of the computer system) (e.g., as shown in Figure 9O), the computer system displays until the computer system will A graphical indication (e.g., 9080) of an amount of time (e.g., an estimated amount of time) that cannot be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., text, graphics, color, and/or animation) . In some embodiments, the computer system will not be able to connect to any satellites for communications based on a determination that no satellites will be available for the computer system to connect to for communications during the threshold period of time (e.g., no satellites will be available for the computer system to communicate; There will be no satellites within range or view of the computer system), and the computer system displays a graphical indication of the amount of time until no satellites will be available to the computer system for communication. In some embodiments, a graphical indication of the amount of time until the computer system will not be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites is displayed concurrently with the alignment element (e.g., upon detection of a signal corresponding to The communication takes place after user input of the communication request). A graphical indication displaying the amount of time until the computer system will be unable to be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites notifies the user that the computer system will lose connection with the one or more satellites, and encourages the user to communicate with the satellite or satellites. Aligning one or more satellites, and/or allowing the user to send messages while the computer system can be properly aligned to communicate, provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform operations.

133

[0542] According to some embodiments, upon a determination that the computer system cannot be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., the one or more satellites are outside the range of the computer system) (e.g., As shown in Figure 9O1), the computer system is displayed until the computer system will be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., until one of the one or more satellites (e.g., below a) The amount of time the satellite will be within range) (e.g., 908O1) a graphical indication (e.g., an estimated amount of time) (e.g., text, textual indication of time, graphics, color, and/or animation). In some embodiments, the computer system is unable to communicate based on a determination that there are no (e.g., there are any) satellites with which the computer system can communicate (e.g., there are no satellites to which the computer system can connect; the computer system cannot connect to one of the one or more satellites). any; no satellites are present within the range or view of the computer system; all of the satellite or satellites are outside the range of the computer system), the computer system displays until the computer system will be able to be properly aligned to The amount of time to communicate with at least one of the one or more satellites (e.g., the amount of time until the computer system will be able to connect with at least one of the one or more satellites; until the one or more satellites A graphical indication of the amount of time at least one of which will be available to the computer system, within the scope of the computer system, and/or within the view of the computer system). In some embodiments, a graphical indication of the amount of time until the computer system will be able to be properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites is displayed concurrently with the alignment element (e.g., upon detection of a signal corresponding to communication via the satellite after user input of the request for communication). Displaying a graphical indication of the amount of time until the computer system will be able to be aligned for communication with the one or more satellites informs the user of the amount of time until the computer system will have an opportunity to connect, helping the user avoid trying to communicate when communication is not feasible Sends a message and enables the user to align the computer system with fewer errors (e.g., by not attempting to align the computer system when proper alignment is not feasible), which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of operations required to perform input quantity.

[0543] In some embodiments, after detecting user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications (e.g., while displaying an alignment element): in response to determining that the predefined action has been successfully performed (e.g., the computer system has successfully connected to one or more satellites, or the message has been successfully sent by satellite communication), the computer system displays a message indicating that the predefined action has been successfully performed (e.g., 614T, 614U, 624T, 624U, 908J, 926 in Figure 9L "Waiting to receive", 908L and/or 908M) indicating that the message has been sent. In some embodiments, the computer system displays the alignment element simultaneously with a message indicating that the predefined action has been successfully performed (eg, the computer system displays the alignment element simultaneously with a message indicating that the predefined action has been successfully performed). Displaying a message indicating that the predefined action has been successfully performed in response to a determination that the predefined action has been successfully performed enables the computer system to notify the user that a particularly relevant action has occurred without distracting the user with notifications regarding non-predefined actions. Attention, which provides improved visual feedback to the user and performs actions when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Feedback on the success of important actions enables computer systems to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where users are responding to emergency or stressful situations.

[0544] In some embodiments, when the alignment element is displayed, the computer system outputs a non-visual (e.g., audio and/or tactile) output (e.g., 619 and/or 650), including: based on determining that the computer system is in a satellite connection status (e.g., connected, connected, not connected, bad connection, aligned, misaligned, satellite out of range, and/or satellite blocked), the output having a first characteristic (e.g., frequency, quantity value and/or mode); and based on determining that the computer system is in a second satellite connection state that is different from the first satellite connection state, output a non-visual output having a second characteristic that is different from the first characteristic (e.g., , the non-visual output has a frequency, magnitude and/or pattern based on the satellite connection status of the computer system). For example, 619 and/or 650 in Figure 9G have different characteristics than 619 and/or 650 in Figure 9J. In some embodiments, the computer system changes the non-visual output in response to detecting a change in the computer system's satellite connection status. base

134

Outputting non-visual output with different characteristics depending on the satellite connection status notifies the user of the status (or status change) of the computer system, even if the user is not looking at the computer system's display, allowing the user to quickly and easily determine the satellite connection status without having to Navigate the user interface and enable the user to align the computer system with fewer errors in response to the state of the computer system, which provides improved feedback to the user, reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation, and allows the user to respond to a set of Performs an action when a condition occurs without requiring further user input. Feedback on important changes in the computer system's connection status enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where users are responding to emergency or stressful situations.

[0545] In some embodiments, the non-visual output is output when the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., when the computer system is tracking one or more satellites; For example, computer system 600 outputs 619 and/or 650 in Figure 9J, Figure 9K, and/or Figure 9L) occurs. In some embodiments, when the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites, the computer system repeats (e.g., at regular or predetermined intervals) the output of the non-visual output (e.g., , non-visual output continues while tracking satellites). Outputting non-visual output when the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites notifies the user of the status of the computer system, even if the user is not looking at the computer system's display, and gives the user that the computer system is Maintaining confidence in alignment with the satellite or satellites without having to navigate the user interface provides improved feedback to the user and reduces the number of inputs required to perform operations.

[0546] In some embodiments, non-visual output is output when the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., when the computer system is not tracking the one or more satellites and/or occurs when the computer system ceases to be properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites; e.g., 619 and/or 650 in Figure 9M and/or Figure 9M1). In some embodiments, when the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites, the computer system repeatedly (eg, at regular or predetermined intervals) outputs the non-visual output. Outputs a non-visual output when the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites to notify the user that the alignment has changed and/or is no longer aligned without having to navigate the user interface, even if the user is not Looking at the computer system's display enables the user to respond to changes in alignment status and enables the user to align the computer system with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback to the user and reduces the input required to perform operations quantity. Feedback on important changes in the alignment status of the computer system enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where the user is responding to an emergency or stressful situation.

[0547] In some embodiments, after detecting user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications (e.g., while displaying an alignment element): according to the determination (or, in some embodiments, in response to the determination ) the computer system is properly aligned for communication with the one or more satellites, the computer system displays that the computer system is connecting to the one or more satellites (e.g., is attempting to connect to the one or more satellites and/or An indication (e.g., graphical indication, icon, color, font, text, animation, symbol, thumbnail, image, and/or glyph) that a connection to it is in the process of being established; e.g., "Keep pointing toward the satellite to Send and Receive" and/or "Connect" at 2106 in Figure 21H) (e.g., "Connect," "Keep pointing toward satellite," and/or "This may take a few minutes"); and when showing that the computer system is connecting to Following the indication of the one or more satellites: upon determining (or, in some embodiments, in response to) determining that the computer system is connected to the one or more satellites, the computer system displays an indication that the computer system is connected to the one or more satellites. Indications (e.g., graphical indications, icons, colors, fonts, text, animations, symbols, thumbnails, images, and/or glyphs) (e.g., "Connect" and/or "remain pointed toward the satellite"; e.g., "Connect" at 2106 in Figure 21I), where the indication that the computer system is connected to the satellite or satellites is different from the indication that the computer system is connecting to the one or more satellites. or multiple satellites

135

Show. Displaying an indication while the computer system is connecting to the one or more satellites and subsequently when actually connecting to the one or more satellites provides the user with progressive feedback throughout the process of establishing a connection to the one or more satellites to emphasize the connection. The process is ongoing and enables users to align computer systems with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback to the user, and performs actions without requiring further user input when a set of conditions has been met.

[0548] In some embodiments, after detecting user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications and while the computer system is connected for communication with the one or more satellites, the computer system communicates via the one or more satellites. A plurality of satellites transmit a message (e.g., 906K), wherein the message includes a graphical (e.g., non-textual) representation (e.g., 656) of at least a portion of the message (e.g., the message includes an image associated with the content of the message, Symbols, thumbnails and/or icons, such as medical ID icons, emergency warning icons, car images to indicate vehicle problems, doctor's bag icons to indicate illness or injury, shield icons to indicate crime, cross symbols to indicate someone is lost or trapped, and/or images of flames indicating fire). Including graphical representations of messages sent via the one or more satellites provides a visual indication of the message content that may allow the user to more quickly and easily determine the message content and/or that appropriate information has been sent, which provides the user with Improved visual feedback.

[0549] In some embodiments, upon detecting user input corresponding to a request to communicate via satellite communications, the computer system initiates transmission of a message via the one or more satellites (e.g., in response to a request to send a message; e.g. , as shown in Figure 9J); after initiating the transmission of the message (or, in some embodiments, when initiating the transmission of the message): according to the determination (or, in some embodiments, in response to the determination) the computer The system is connected for communication with the one or more satellites (e.g., alignment and/or connection with the one or more satellites is complete), and the computer system displays an indication that a message application is being opened (e.g., 910J, graphical indication , icons, colors, fonts, text, animations, symbols, thumbnails, images and/or glyphs); and after displaying an indication that the Messages application is being opened (e.g., in response to detecting that the Messages application is being opened) a selection of instructions to open, or based on a determination that a predetermined amount of time has elapsed), The computer system displays the user interface of the messaging application (eg, 902K). In some embodiments, the indication that the messaging application is being opened is selectable. In some embodiments, an indication that a messaging application is being opened is displayed simultaneously with an indication of the transmission status of the message and/or an alignment element. In some embodiments, the user interface of the messaging application includes a representation of the message, such as in a message conversation area that includes one or more messages between a user associated with the computer system and a recipient of the message. . Displaying an indication that the messaging application is being opened after initiating transmission of the message and then opening the messaging application enables the computer system to automatically display the message to the user and provide the user with an interface to send additional messages and/or view responses. No additional user input is required, which provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the amount of input required to perform an action, and allows actions to be performed without further user input when a set of conditions have been met.

[0550] In some embodiments, displaying the alignment element includes displaying an animation (e.g., the animations shown and described with reference to Figures 9R-9U) that includes: a graphical representation of the satellite (e.g., 929, icon, color , fonts, text, animations, symbols, thumbnails, images and/or glyphs); graphical representations of computer systems (e.g., 932, icons, colors, fonts, text, animations, symbols, thumbnails, images and/or glyph); and traveling between (e.g., traveling back and forth between) the graphical representation of the satellite and the graphical representation of the computer system over time (e.g., traveling from the graphical representation of the satellite to the graphical representation of the computer system and/or A graphical representation (e.g., 933, icons, colors, fonts, text, animations, symbols, thumbnails) of a signal (e.g., a wave and/or one or more curves) that travels from a graphical representation of a computer system to a graphical representation of a satellite , images and/or glyphs). In some embodiments, the animation includes a graphical representation of the satellite alternating (eg, rotating back and forth) between a first state (eg, a first orientation) and a second state (eg, a second orientation) over time. Displayed between satellite and computer system

136

The animation of the traveling signal notifies the user that there is back-and-forth communication between the computer system and the satellite or satellites, reminds the user that alignment with the satellite or satellites is required to send and receive communications, and reminds the user that satellite communications may be slower than terrestrial communications Communications take longer to send and receive, which provides improved visual feedback to users.

[0551] In some embodiments, displaying the alignment element includes: based on determining that the alignment element is in a first display state (e.g., an expanded user interface, such as, for example, the full-size and/or full-screen user interface in Figure 9J, or (for example) the full-size banner in Figure 9L, such as 926), displaying this animation while simultaneously displaying the computer system's satellite connection status (e.g., connected, connected, not connected, bad connection, aligned, misaligned, a text indication (e.g., 908J in Figure 9L, or "Connected" in 926) that the satellite is out of range and/or that the satellite is blocked; and based on the determination that the alignment element is in a second display state that is different from the first display state. Display a state (e.g., a reduced-sized, smaller, and/or non-expanded user interface such as a banner or a minimized banner, such as 926a in Figure 9L1) that displays the animation without simultaneously displaying the computer system's satellite connection Textual indication of status (eg, minimized banner 926a in FIGS. 9L1-9L1D does not include a textual indication of the computer system's satellite connection status). Displaying or not displaying a textual indication of the satellite connection status while displaying this animation based on the display state of the alignment element enables the computer system to contextually adjust the amount of information provided to the user without user input and, where possible, save Space on the user interface, which provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the amount of input required to perform an action, and performs an action without requiring further user input when a set of conditions has been met.

[0552] In some embodiments, when displaying an alignment element (e.g., in a reduced-size user interface, such as a banner, or in an expanded user interface, such as a full-screen user interface): as determined (or, in In some embodiments, in response to determining that) the computer system is not properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites (e.g., the computer system has been properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites) to not being properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites), the computer system outputs an error indicating that the computer system is not properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites. Visual output (e.g., 619, 650, haptic output, and/or audio output) (e.g., computer system output 619 and/or in Figures 9F-91, Figure 9M, Figure 9M1, Figure 19I, Figure 21F, Figure 21G 650). Outputting a non-visual output indicating that the computer system is not properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites based on a determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for communicating with the one or more satellites Notifies the user of the status (or changes in status) of the computer system even when the user is not looking at the computer system's display, enables the user to quickly and easily determine the alignment status of the computer system without having to navigate a user interface, and enables the user to respond to Changes in quasi-state, which provide improved feedback to the user, reduce the amount of input required to perform an action, and perform actions without requiring further user input when a set of conditions have been met. Feedback on important changes in the alignment status of the computer system enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where the user is responding to an emergency or stressful situation.

[0553] In some embodiments, when an alignment element is displayed (e.g., in a reduced-size user interface, such as a banner, or in an expanded user interface, such as a full-screen user interface): as determined (or, in In some embodiments, in response to determining that) the computer system is not connected for communicating with the one or more satellites (e.g., the computer system has transitioned from being connected for communicating with the one or more satellites to not being connected for communicating with one or more satellites; the computer system has lost its connection to communicate with one or more satellites), the computer system outputs a non-visual output indicating that the computer system is not connected for communication with one or more satellites (e.g., 619, 650, tactile output and/or audio output) (e.g., computer system outputs 619 and /or 650). Based on a determination that the computer system is not connected for communication with one or more satellites

137

non-visual output indicating that the computer system is not connected for communication with the one or more satellites provides feedback to the user of significant changes in the connection status of the computer system without the user looking at the computer system's display, and Enables users to respond to changes in connection status, which provides improved feedback to the user, reduces the amount of input required to perform an action, and performs actions without requiring further user input when a set of conditions have been met. Feedback on important changes in the computer system's connection status enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where users are responding to emergency or stressful situations.

[0554] In some embodiments, after detecting user input (in some embodiments, while displaying the alignment element): based on a determination that the satellite cannot be detected (e.g., an obstacle such as a wall, tree, or building is present) , or the computer system is located indoors), the computer system provides (e.g., outputs and/or displays) a warning (e.g., 619, 650, 908C, 908D, graphical warning, tactile output and/or audio output) that an obstacle has been detected (e.g. , "obstacle detected", "looking for satellites", "cannot connect", "poor connection" and/or "make sure you are outside with an unobstructed view of the sky"). Providing a warning that an obstacle has been detected based on a determination that the satellite cannot be detected provides the user with more information about what is preventing the connection to the satellite and enables the user to connect the computer system to the satellite with fewer errors, which provides Improved feedback that reduces the amount of input required to perform an action and performs an action without requiring further user input when a set of conditions has been met.

[0555] In some embodiments, providing an alert that an obstacle has been detected includes outputting a non-visual output (e.g., 619, 650, tactile output, and/or audio output) indicating that an obstacle has been detected (e.g., in Figure 9D Computer system outputs 619 and/or 650). Outputting non-visual output indicating that an obstacle has been detected notifies the user of the obstacle even if the user is not looking at the computer system's display, doing so provides the user with additional information about what is preventing connection to the satellite and enables the user to respond to the obstacle and connecting computer systems to satellites with fewer errors, which provides improved feedback to users and reduces the amount of input required to perform operations. Feedback on important changes in the computer system's ability to connect to the satellite enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where users are responding to emergency or stressful situations.

[0556] In some embodiments, after detecting the user input and after determining that the satellite is not available for communication by the computer system: based on the determination (or, in some embodiments, in response to the determination) that the satellite is available for use by the computer system To communicate (e.g., become available after being unavailable), the computer system outputs non-visual output (e.g., 619, 650, tactile output, and/or audio output) indicating that the satellite is available (e.g., Figure 9F, Figure 9P, and/or The computer system in Figure 21K outputs 619 and/or 650). Outputting a non-visual output indicating that the satellite is available upon determining that the satellite is available to the computer system for communication notifies the user that connection with the satellite is available even if the user is not looking at the computer system's display, and enables the user to respond to the availability of the satellite with less error to connect and/or align a computer system with a satellite, which provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation, and performs an operation without further input when a set of conditions has been met User input. Feedback on important changes in satellite availability enables computer systems to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where users are responding to emergency or stressful situations.

[0557] In some embodiments, after detecting user input, the computer system displays a user interface element (e.g., 926, 926a, banner, and/or popup window) in which the alignment element (e.g., 926 or 926a) is displayed including displaying an alignment element in that user interface element (e.g., displaying 931 in 926 or displaying 931a in 926a); the computer system detects cancellation (e.g., stopping display) when the alignment element is displayed in that user interface element ) a request for the user interface element (e.g., 936L); and in response to detecting a request to eliminate the user interface element: based on determining that the computer system is connected for communication with one or more satellites (e.g., as shown in Figure 9K and/or or Figure 9L), the computer system eliminates alignment elements including

138

(e.g., stop its display or reduce its size); and upon determining that the computer system is not connected for communication with the satellite (e.g., as in Figure 9M1), the computer system maintains the display of that user interface element (eg, the same size, or in some embodiments, reducing the display size of the user interface element, such as from 926 to 926a). In some implementations, the request to eliminate the user interface element includes a swipe (eg, swipe up) directed at the user interface element. Eliminating or maintaining display of a user interface element in response to a request by the computer system to eliminate a user interface element based on whether the system is connected for communication with one or more satellites enables the computer system to adjust the amount of information provided to the user based on context and Save space on the user interface when possible, which provides improved visual feedback to the user and performs actions without requiring further user input when a set of conditions has been met.

[0558] In some embodiments, after displaying the alignment element, the computer system ceases display of the alignment element (or, in some embodiments, reduces the size of the alignment element) (e.g., in response to detecting removal of the alignment element). a request to align the element) (e.g., to stop display 931 and, in some embodiments, display 931a); and after stopping display of the alignment element, in response to determining that the computer system is not properly aligned for use with a or multiple satellites for communication (e.g., a computer system has changed from being properly aligned for communicating with one or more satellites to not being properly aligned for communicating with one or more satellites; e.g., As shown in Figure 9M), the computer system displays the alignment elements (e.g., Display 931 or 931a, or display a user interface element, such as a banner (eg, 926 or 926a) or pop-up window) that includes the alignment element. Displaying the alignment element after ceasing display of the alignment element and in response to a determination that the computer system is not properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites enables the computer system to save time on the user interface when alignment is appropriate space and automatically notify the user of misalignments without requiring user input. This provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the amount of input required to perform an action, and performs an action when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. enter. Feedback on important changes in the alignment status of the computer system enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where the user is responding to an emergency or stressful situation.

[0559] Note that the details of the process described above with respect to method 1000 may also apply in a similar manner to the methods described above and below. For example, methods 700, 800, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000, and/or 2200 optionally include one or more features of the various methods described above with reference to method 1000. For example, method 1000 may be performed as part of a process for initiating communications according to methods 700 and/or 800. For example, method 1000 may include selecting a second recipient of the communication according to method 1200. For example, method 1800 may initiate method 1000 from a messaging application. For example, the alignment elements described in method 1000 may be displayed in an alternative communications network test mode in method 2000 . For example, method 1000 may be a procedure corresponding to the user interface object in method 2200. For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated below.

[0560] Figures 11A-11P illustrate exemplary user interfaces for managing message recipients in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in Figure 12.

[0561] FIGS. 11A-11J illustrate an exemplary scenario in which John Appleseed, a user of computer system 600, is sending an emergency communication to a first recipient (a search and rescue service). In this exemplary scenario, computer system 600 also sends the message to the second recipient, Jane Appleseed, in response to a request provided by John Appleseed during the process of initiating the emergency communication. In some embodiments, initiating and/or completing emergency communications includes performing one or more of the methods described with reference to FIG. 7, FIG. 8, and/or FIG. 10.

[0562] In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 1104A, 1104B, 1104C, 1104D, 1104E, 1104F, 1104G, and/or 1104H) is or includes a touch input (e.g., a tap gesture and/or swipe gestures). In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 1104A, 1104B, 1104C, 1104D, 1104E, 1104F, 1104G, and/or 1104H) is or includes speech input (e.g., to select a user interface element

139

or voice commands to activate features or perform functions (such as those associated with user interface elements). In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 1104A, 1104B, 1104C, 1104D, 1104E, 1104F, 1104G, and/or 1104H) is or includes an air gesture (e.g., to select a user interface element or air gestures used to activate features or perform functions (such as those associated with user interface elements). In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 1104A, 1104B, 1104C, 1104D, 1104E, 1104F, 1104G, and/or 1104H) is or includes a hardware device (e.g., a button, a rotatable input mechanism , activation (e.g., pressing, rotating, and/or moving) of a rotatable, pressable input mechanism, mouse button, remote control button, and/or joystick). In some embodiments, any of the user interface elements described herein as being selected (e.g., icons, affordances, buttons, and/or selectable options) are displayed when the user interface element is in focus (e.g., highlighted , bolded, outlined, visually distinguished from other user interface elements, and/or located at or near the cursor) is selected when the hardware device is activated.

[0563] In FIG. 11A, computer system 600 displays query user interface 1102. Query user interface 1102 includes text 1102A that may share a messaging conversation (eg, chat) with one or more emergency contacts (eg, recipients other than emergency services) and be provided during the process of initiating emergency communications. emergency information. In Figure 11A, the pre-selected emergency contacts include a first contact 1102B1 "Jane Appleseed") who is currently assigned to receive the chat, as indicated by check mark indication 1102c, and a second contact who is not currently assigned to receive the chat. Contact 1102B2 "Maria Fender") (e.g., as indicated by the missing check mark indication). In some implementations, more than one contact is pre-selected to receive the chat by default. In some implementations, emergency contacts are not pre-selected by default.

[0564] In Figure 11A, query user interface 1102 also includes an Add Contact affordance 1102D, which, when selected, initiates the process of adding one or more additional contacts to potentially receive the chat. . In some embodiments, when selected, add contact affordance 1102D opens a contacts application for selecting a contact from a set of contacts stored on or accessible from computer system 600. In some embodiments, the selected contact need not have been previously designated as an emergency contact.

[0565] In Figure 11A, query user interface 1102 also includes a notify affordance 1102E, a don't notify affordance 1102F, and an end affordance 1102G. When selected, the notification affordance 1102E causes one or more currently designated contacts to be selected as recipients of the chat and emergency information (eg, location information, information regarding the nature of the emergency) that is Provided during the process of initiating an emergency communication or when updating an emergency communication with additional messages and/or information. When selected, the Do Not Notify affordance 1102F causes the process for initiating emergency communications to proceed without specifying any contact (eg, whether specified with a check mark indication or not) as a recipient of chat and emergency messages. . When selected, the end affordance means that the 1102G cancels the process for initiating emergency communications without sending communications to any recipient (including search and rescue services). In Figure 11A, computer system 600 detects input 1104A (eg, a tap gesture or other selection input) corresponding to notification affordance 1102E.

[0566] FIG. 11B depicts a computer system 1100 belonging to user Jane Appleseed (eg, the user corresponding to first contact 1102B1 of FIG. 11A). In some embodiments, computer system 1100 includes one or more features of computer system 600 and/or devices 100, 300, and 500. In Figure 11B, computer system 1100 is shown at approximately the same time (10:09) as computer system 600 is shown in Figure 11A. In Figure 11B, computer system 1100 is currently in a display inactive state, with display screen 1106 turned off.

[0567] In Figure 11C, in response to input 1104A of Figure 11A, a computer system belonging to user John Appleseed

140

600 displays the emergency messaging user interface 1108. In some embodiments, after input 1104A is received and before emergency messaging user interface 1108 is displayed, one or more additional interfaces associated with the process for initiating emergency communications are displayed (eg, FIGS. 6M-6s one or more interfaces). Emergency messaging user interface 1108 includes a message bubble 1108A that includes certain information that has also been sent to the first recipient, the search and rescue service. Emergency messaging user interface 1108 also includes a share indication 1108B, which indicates that user Jane Appleseed has also been enabled to receive chats with the search and rescue service, and a stop sharing affordance 1108D, which, when selected, prevents communication with Jane Appleseed shares (eg, from a user of computer system 600 and/or from emergency services) future messages posted to emergency communications. In some embodiments, if Jane Appleseed is not designated to receive chat via query user interface 1102 as shown in Figure 11A (e.g., affordance 1102F is not notified that affordance 1102F is selected instead of affordance 1102E, and/or Jane Appleseed is not selected), the emergency messaging user interface 1108 will not include sharing instructions 1108B and the chat will not be with Jane Appleseed shared. The emergency messaging user interface 1108 also includes a set of authoring affordances 1108c for authoring additional messages to be added to the emergency messaging session with the search and rescue service.

[0568] In FIG. 11D, computer system 1100 belonging to Jane Appleseed displays wake screen user interface 1110 at 10:10 in response to receiving a notification triggered by the receipt of a chat message sent from computer system 600. Wake screen user interface 1110 includes notification 1110A indicating that user John Appleseed has contacted the search and rescue service and shared the chat with user Jane Appleseed. In Figure 11D, computer system 1100 detects input 1104B (eg, a tap gesture or other selection input) on notification 1110A.

[0569] In FIG. 11E, computer system 600 belonging to John Appleseed displays emergency messaging user interface 1108 now populated with writing field 1108C1 of text 1112 "We are near a big tree"), which text was written by John Appleseed (e.g., The second message written using the writing affordance represents 1108). In Figure 1 IE, computer system 600 detects input 1104c (eg, a tap gesture or other selection input) on sending affordance 1108c2.

[0570] In FIG. 11F , computer system 1100 belonging to Jane Appleseed displays messaging user interface 1114 in response to input 1104B on notification 1110A of FIG. 11D . Messaging user interface 1114 includes text 1114A that provides information about communications with emergency services initiated by user John Appleseed and an explanation of why the user of computer system 1100 is receiving a transcript of that chat; text 1114D provides similar information. In some embodiments, text 1114A and/or text 1114D also indicates that emergency communications are being sent via satellite. The messaging user interface 1114 also includes a message bubble 1114B that includes information that has been sent to the search and rescue service when the location bubble is selected, and a location bubble 1114c that provides when the information in the message bubble 1114B is sent to the computer. Additional location information for system 600. In some embodiments, additional location bubbles providing computer system 600 location information are displayed when new text is added to the chat. In some embodiments, additional location bubbles that provide computer system 600 location information are provided periodically (eg, at regular intervals (eg, every 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes)). Messaging user interface 1114 also includes a learn more affordance that, when selected, provides further information about the shared emergency communication. In some embodiments, if one or more messages are sent by an emergency service (eg, search and rescue service), the messaging user interface 1114 will present these messages in separate message bubbles. As shown in Figure 11F, the messaging user interface 1114 does not include a writing affordance representation for writing a response that can be added to the chat (eg, sent to John Appleseed and/or the search and rescue service). Accordingly, the messaging user interface 1114 is only used to view (eg, passively view) chat content posted by John Appleseed and/or the search and rescue service, both of which are active participants in the chat. Messaging user interface 1114 includes messaging affordance representation 1114E, which, when selected,

141

Represents initiating a process for sending a message to John Appleseed (e.g., via a separate messaging conversation (e.g., a conversation that also excludes search and rescue services) and/or a separate messaging user interface). In Figure 11F, computer system 1100 detects input 1104D (eg, a tap gesture or other selection input) on a learn more affordance 1114E.

In Figure 11G, in response to input 1104D in Figure 11E, computer system 600 belonging to John Appleseed updates the display of messaging user interface 1108 to now include message bubble 1116 (e.g., "We are near a big tree") and This message is sent to both the search and rescue service and user Jane Appleseed.

[0572] In FIG. 11H, in response to receiving additional chat content sent by computer system 600 in response to input 1104D, computer system 1100 belonging to Jane Appleseed updates the display of messaging user interface 1114 to include message bubble 1118 (e.g., , "We are near a big tree") and a location bubble 1120 that, when selected, provides additional location information for the computer system 600 when the information in the message bubble 1118 is sent. In FIG. 11H, computer system 1100 detects input 1104E on location bubble 1120.

[0573] In Figure 111, in response to input 1104E in Figure 11H, computer system 1100 displays a location user interface 1122 that includes a location marker 1122A that marks when the information in message bubble 1118 was sent to the computer. The receiving location of system 600; location tag 1122A also includes the text of the message itself (eg, "We are near a big tree"). Location user interface 1122 also includes a location marker 1122B that marks the receiving location of computer system 600 when the information in message bubble 1108A was sent. Location markers 1122A and 1122B are overlaid on a map (eg, a scrollable map) of the area that includes the two locations. Location user interface 1122 also includes an end affordance 1122C that, when selected, causes computer system 1100 to redisplay messaging user interface 1114 as seen in Figure 11H.

[0574] In Figure 11J, in response to input 1104 in Figure 11F, computer system 1100 displays additional information user interface 1124 that includes text 1124A providing additional information regarding emergency communications. In some embodiments, the additional information includes an explanation as to why the user of computer system 1100 is receiving a transcript of the chat and/or why a response cannot be posted to the chat.

[0575] Figures 11K-11P provide different embodiments of user interfaces illustrating how urgent messages from the same sender (e.g., John Appleseed) can be combined in the messaging conversation management user interface of a messaging application. One or more previously sent messages are grouped or ungrouped.

[0576] In FIG. 11K, computer system 1100 displays an emergency communication received from John Appleseed in messaging session management user interface 1126 in message session 1126A that is separate from message session 1126B, which includes a message sent by user John Appleseed. One or more previous messages that were not emergency communications and were not sent to the search and rescue service (or another emergency service). Message conversation 1126A is also separate from message conversation 1126c and is also separate from message conversation 1126D that does not include John Appleseed, message conversation 1126c is included in conversations between John Appleseed and other users (eg, users "Mom" and "Dad") One or more previous messages. In some embodiments, message conversation 1126A also includes other emergency communications (SOS communications) received from user John Appleseed or one or more other users, such that emergency communications from multiple users can be reviewed together by selecting message conversation 1126A . In Figure 11K, computer system 1100 detects input 1104F on message conversation 1126A.

[0577] In FIG. 11J, computer system 1100 displays an emergency communication received from John Appleseed in messaging conversation management user interface 1128 in message conversation 1128A that is separate from message conversation 1128B, which includes a message sent by user John Appleseed. One or more previous messages that were not emergency communications and were not sent to the search and rescue service (or another emergency service). Message conversation 1128A is also divided into message conversation 1128c

142

On, and also separate from message conversation 1128D that does not include John Appleseed, message conversation 1128c includes one or more previous messages included in conversations between John Appleseed and other users (eg, users "Mom" and "Dad"). In Figure 11J, message conversation 1128A is specific to emergency communications "John & SOS") for John Appleseed) and thus will not include other emergency communications (SOS communications) received from one or more users other than John Appleseed. In Figure 11L, computer system 1100 detects input 1104G on message conversation 1128A.

[0578] In FIG. 11M, computer system 1100 displays in messaging session management user interface 1130 an emergency communication received from John Appleseed in message session 1130A, which message session also includes one or more previous messages received from user John Appleseed. information. At Figure 11M, message conversation 1130B includes one or more previous messages in conversations with John Appleseed and Mom and Dad, and message conversation 1130c includes one or more previous messages in conversations with Sister. Thus, in the embodiment of Figure 11M, emergency communications from John Appleseed are grouped together with other messages in the conversation with user John Appleseed (eg, only user John Appleseed and/or only John Appleseed and emergency services). In Figure 11M, computer system 1100 detects input 1104H on message conversation 1130A.

[0579] In FIG. 11N, in response to input 1104F in FIG. 11K, computer system 1100 displays messaging user interface 1132. In some implementations, messaging user interface 1132 includes one or more features of messaging user interface 1114, as described above. The messaging user interface 1132 includes a message bubble 1132A that includes certain information that has also been sent to the first recipient, the search and rescue service. In some embodiments, as discussed above with reference to Figure 11K, messaging user interface 1132 will also include one or more other emergency communications (SOS communications) received from user John Appleseed or one or more other users, such that by Emergency communications received by Jane Appleseed from multiple users will be presented together.

[0580] In Figure 110, in response to input 1104G of Figure 11L, computer system 1100 displays messaging user interface 1134. In some implementations, messaging user interface 1134 includes one or more features of messaging user interface 1114, as described above. Messaging user interface 1134 includes message bubble 1134A, which indicates that a "yes" reply must be received at computer system 1100 to receive the details of the emergency communication from John Appleseed. In Figure 11N, computer system 1100 receives a "yes" reply, as seen in message bubble 1134B, and in response causes message bubble 1134C to be displayed that includes the content/details of the emergency communication from John Appleseed. In some embodiments, emergency communications received on a computer system using a first operating system and/or messaging application require authorization before details are provided, whereas emergency communications received on a computer system using a different second operating system and/or messaging application The computer system does not require authorization before providing details.

[0581] In FIG. 11P, computer system 1100 displays messaging user interface 1136 in response to input 1104H in FIG. 11M. In some implementations, messaging user interface 1136 includes one or more features of messaging user interface 1114, as described above. Messaging user interface 1136 includes message bubble 1136A ("On Hiking"), a message previously received from John Appleseed that was not an emergency communication (eg, it was not sent to emergency services). The messaging user interface 1136 also includes a message bubble 1136B that includes certain information that has also been sent to the first recipient, the search and rescue service. Messaging user interface 1136 also includes a set of writing affordances 1136C for composing a message to be sent to John Appleseed. Messaging user interface 1136 presents urgent and non-urgent messages from user John Appleseed together in a single messaging conversation.

[0582] Figure 12 is a flowchart illustrating a method for managing message recipients in accordance with some embodiments. The method is performed on a computer system (e.g.,

143

such as, 100, 300, 500, 600, or 1100) (e.g., smartphone, smartwatch, tablet, laptop, desktop computer, or head-mounted device (e.g., head-mounted augmented reality and/or extended reality device) )) is executed. In some embodiments, the computer system is in communication with an output generation component (eg, a display generation component, a display controller, a touch-sensitive display system, and/or a head-mounted display system). Some operations in the method are optionally combined, the order of some operations is optionally changed, and some operations are optionally omitted.

[0583] As described below, method 1200 provides an intuitive way to manage message recipients. This approach relieves the user of the cognitive load of managing message recipients, creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-powered computing devices, enabling users to manage message recipients faster and more efficiently saves power and increases the time between battery charges.

[0584] In preparation for initiating contact with a first recipient (e.g., a search and rescue service as shown in 1108) (e.g., a previously defined contact (e.g., an emergency contact and/or an emergency service or emergency responder (e.g., , 911 call center; police department; fire brigade))) when communicating (e.g., a communication session (e.g., SMS, and/or sending an emergency report in emergency reporting mode)) (e.g., before or during the start of that communication (e.g., while transmitting a UI from a text message Before or during receiving a selection of text to send)), the computer system outputs (1202) a query (e.g., the query at 1102) (e.g., a visual query (e.g., with one or more selectable options (e.g., " Notify" and "Don't notify" buttons); audio query) about whether to allow a second recipient (e.g., 1102B1 or 1102B2) that is different from the first recipient (e.g., the user, computer The emergency contact of the user of the system) receives information corresponding to the communication (e.g., the information in 1108A) (e.g., an indication that the communication is occurring, metadata about the communication (e.g., participants, time of the communication, the location of the computer system when the communication is occurring), and/or some or all of the content of the communication (e.g., text messages and/or audio)) without adding a second recipient to the conversation for that communication (e.g., A participant (e.g., a second recipient may receive information but not respond) in a thread) (in some embodiments, the query includes the identity of the second recipient).

[0585] After outputting a query as to whether the second recipient is allowed to receive information corresponding to the communication, the computer system detects (1204) one or more inputs corresponding to a request to send a message to the first recipient (e.g., 1104A )the sequence of. In some embodiments, a selection of a "notify" or "don't notify" visual query is detected as well as a selection of a "send" affordance displayed with the visual query.

[0586] In response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs (1206): detecting, as determined by the computer system (e.g., via the set of one or more input devices), a response to a request corresponding to allowing the second recipient to receive communications from the user and the first In response to one or more inputs to a communication between recipients corresponding to a request for information (e.g., 1104A), the computer system sends (1208) to the first recipient a request including the corresponding information (e.g., collected in preparation for initiating the communication information) (e.g., a message with content in accordance with 1108A) (e.g., content; text) (e.g., sending the message to an external emergency messaging service (server) for delivery to a first recipient), and enabling delivery to a second The recipient delivers the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information (e.g., instructing the external emergency message service (server) to send to the second recipient after or concurrently with the first recipient); and based on a determination that the computer system has not (e.g., via the set of one or multiple input devices) detects one or more inputs corresponding to a request to allow the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication between the user and the first recipient, the computer system sends (1210) the first recipient ) a message (e.g., a message with content in accordance with 1108A) including corresponding information (e.g., information collected in preparation for initiating communication) (e.g., sending the message to an external emergency messaging service (server) for delivery to the first recipient ) without enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to the second recipient. Enable or disable delivery of the message to the second recipient when sending the message to the first recipient based on a previous request to allow the second recipient to receive the information, doing so after a set of conditions have been met

144

Performs an action (enables delivery to a second recipient) upon receipt of the request without requiring further user input.

[0587] In some embodiments, before preparing to initiate communication via the set of one or more input devices at the computer system (e.g., when setting up the device), the computer system receives a request to the emergency recipient (e.g., 1102B1) as Selection of emergency contacts (e.g., adding this emergency recipient to the emergency contact list), where the secondary recipient is the emergency recipient. In some embodiments, the second recipient is a recipient who was previously designated (e.g., prior to preparing to initiate the communication; via a set of one or more inputs at the computer system) as an emergency contact of the user of the computer system (e.g., Specified at the computer system or at a different computer system associated with the user (e.g., logged in to the same user account as the computer system). Selecting a second recipient for query based on a previous selection of the recipient as an emergency contact Performing an action (selecting a second recipient) when a set of conditions has been met (the recipient was previously selected as an emergency contact) without Further user input is required.

[0588] In some embodiments, the query as to whether a second recipient is allowed to receive information corresponding to the communication without adding the second recipient as a participant in the conversation includes: A third recipient (e.g., 1102B2) of the second recipient (e.g., an additional previously identified emergency contact) receives a query for information corresponding to that communication without adding the third recipient as a participant in the conversation for that communication By. In some embodiments, the method further includes: in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs: determining that the device detects a communication corresponding to allowing at least one third recipient to receive communications between the user and the first recipient. One or more inputs of a request for corresponding information sends a message including the corresponding information to a first recipient, and enables delivery of a message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to a third recipient. Outputting queries related to third recipients (in addition to the second recipient) provides feedback to the user as to which recipients can be enabled to receive the message, which provides improved feedback (eg, visual feedback).

[0589] In some embodiments, outputting a query regarding whether a second recipient is allowed to receive information corresponding to the communication without adding the second recipient as a participant in the conversation includes: the computer system display including the first user interaction graphic A set of one or more user interaction graphical elements of an element (e.g., 1102D) (e.g., an affordance for removing a proposed recipient and/or an affordance for adding a new recipient) that, when selected when the first user interaction graphical element initiates the process of modifying the set of recipients to which the message was sent (e.g., adding or removing recipients (e.g., removing a second recipient and/or adding additional recipients)) .

[0590] In some embodiments, the set of one or more user interaction graphical elements includes: a second user interaction graphical element (e.g., 1102C) that, when selected, is modified to receive the message the selection status of the second recipient (for example, selecting the second recipient when the second recipient is not currently selected, or deselecting the second recipient when the second recipient is not selected) without modifying the The selection state of the third recipient who receives the message; and the third user interaction graphical element, when selected, the third user interaction graphical element modifies the selection state of the third recipient for receiving the message without modifying the user. The selection status of the second recipient to receive the message. Displaying separate user interaction graphical elements for second and third recipients provides additional control options and provides the user with improved visual feedback as to which recipients will be able to receive the message if it is sent to the first recipient. .

[0591] In some embodiments, outputting a query as to whether the second recipient is allowed to receive information corresponding to the communication without adding the second recipient as a participant in the conversation includes: the computer system displaying: the second recipient An indication (e.g., 1102C) that the second recipient is currently selected to receive information corresponding to the communication without adding the second recipient as a participant in the conversation (e.g., the query includes one or more recommendations/ Default Recipient) (In some embodiments, the second recipient is pre-selected (e.g., designated by default) to receive information corresponding to the communication between the user and the first recipient and will be sent the message is received unless deselected second

145

one or more inputs of the recipient)); and a third user interaction graphical element that, when selected, deselects the second recipient to receive information corresponding to the communication without converting the second A recipient is added as a participant in the conversation (e.g., a graphical element specific to the second recipient (e.g., a recipient-specific toggle switch)), or a graphical object that deselects some or all currently selected recipients (e.g., Cancel Select the "Do Not Notify" button for some or all potential recipients except the first recipient)). In some embodiments, the query does not include an indication of the identity of the second recipient (e.g., the query does not identify and/or select any particular recipient by default and includes one or more characters identifying the selected recipient. options). Displaying an indication that the second recipient is currently (eg, has been) selected as part of outputting the query provides the user with improved visual feedback regarding the current selection status of the second recipient and allows the user to enable delivery to the second recipient The message requires no further input, which reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation.

[0592] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the sequence of one or more inputs and upon determining that the computer system detects a signal corresponding to allowing the second recipient and the third recipient to receive communications between the user and the first recipient. To communicate one or more inputs corresponding to the request for information, the computer system sends a message including the corresponding information to the first recipient; and the computer system enables communication to the second recipient (e.g., 1102B1) and the third recipient (e.g., 1102B1) , 1102B2) delivers the message including at least part of the corresponding information.

[0593] In some embodiments, after enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to the second recipient (e.g., after the message has been sent to the second recipient) and according to a conversation in which the communication is determined Having been updated with additional information (e.g., 1116) (e.g., the user of the computer system and/or the first recipient has sent additional messages and/or status (e.g., location) updates), the computer system enables delivery of the second recipient to the second recipient. A second message (eg, 1118) (in some embodiments, while the second recipient remains a non-participant in the conversation for that communication), wherein the second message includes at least a portion of the additional information. Enable delivery of a subsequent second message after it has been determined that the conversation for that communication has been updated with additional information. Perform an action without requiring further user input when a set of conditions have been met.

[0594] In some embodiments, after enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to the second recipient (e.g., after the message has been sent to the second recipient) (in some embodiments, and Upon determining that the physical location of the computer system has changed), the computer system enables delivery to the second recipient of a third message (e.g., 1120) (e.g., a message separate from this message). In some implementations, multiple periodic messages (eg, 1114C and 1120) are sent along with information corresponding to the location of the computer system. In some embodiments, these messages are sent at regular intervals (eg, every 30 minutes or other recurring period).

[0595] In some embodiments, enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to the second recipient is enabled (e.g., by a computer system and/or an external computer system (e.g., message Server) enabled) to participate in the conversation of that communication (e.g., contribute information to the conversation of that communication; the second recipient is capable of receiving at least a portion of the information in that conversation but not sending any information posted to the conversation) (e.g., As can be seen in Figure 11F, this occurs in the absence of affordance representations for writing responses).

[0596] In some embodiments, enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to the second recipient includes: causing (e.g., causing) (in some embodiments, to a messaging application with an external computer system The external computer system associated with the second recipient is capable of sending (e.g., directly or via a server) the message in a format compatible with the messaging application (e.g., the messaging application that generates 1114) (e.g., a text message Transmission should

146

Display the message including at least part of the corresponding information sent to the second recipient in a program).

[0597] In some embodiments, a messaging application of an external computer system associated with the second recipient (e.g., the messaging application that generated 1114) is in communication with a user that includes receiving from the computer system (e.g., and being One or more prior messages (e.g., also excluding prior messages of the first recipient) sent to the second recipient) (e.g., according to Figures 11K and 11N); prior messages of the first type (e.g., non-urgent messages) )) The message including at least part of the corresponding information addressed to the second recipient is displayed in a separate messaging dialog. Displaying the message addressed to the second recipient in a messaging conversation that is separate from another conversation that includes one or more prior messages provides information about the message being different from the one or more prior messages (e.g., in that The message is also sent to the first recipient) with improved visual feedback.

[0598] In some embodiments, a messaging application of an external computer system associated with the second recipient (e.g., the messaging application that generated 1114) receives a message that includes one or more previous messages received from a user of the computer system. A message (e.g., as seen in Figures 11M and 11P) is shown in a messaging conversation (e.g., the message is grouped in a messaging application with other messages from users of the computer system) addressed to a second recipient. The message of the party including at least part of the corresponding information. Displaying a message addressed to a second recipient in a messaging conversation that also includes one or more previous messages provides improved understanding of the source of the message (e.g., it is from the same sender as the one or more previous messages) Visual feedback.

[0599] In some embodiments, the messaging application of the external computer system associated with the second recipient (e.g., the messaging application generating 1114) displays a fourth selectable user interaction graphical element that, when selected, displays a messaging conversation that includes one or more previous messages received from a user of the computer system. A fourth selectable user interaction graphical element is initiated for displaying a message to a second recipient including a corresponding message in a messaging conversation that is separate from the messaging conversation that includes one or more previous messages (eg, the conversation in Figure 11N). Information about at least part of the message process. In some embodiments, a message addressed to the second recipient including at least a portion of the corresponding information may be accessed from a separate messaging conversation that includes one or more previous messages received from the user of the computer system without having to navigate back To the user interface of a messaging application that presents multiple messaging conversations. In some embodiments, messages to the second recipient may be accessed by accessing an information panel associated with the user of the computer system while displaying a separate messaging conversation that includes one or more previous messages received from the user of the computer system. A message that includes at least part of the corresponding information. Displaying a fourth selectable user interaction graphical element in a messaging conversation that includes one or more previous messages provides improved visual feedback on how to access the message and reduces the actions performed to access the message while viewing the previous message. The required number of inputs. Displaying this message in a conversational user interface that does not include user interaction graphical elements for writing responses provides improved visual feedback about the unavailability of the response functionality.

[0600] In some embodiments, the messaging application of the external computer system associated with the second recipient does not include user interactive graphical elements (e.g., does not include a method for composing a response to the second recipient including Any user-interactive graphical element (e.g., 1114) that displays at least a portion of the message in response to the message is sent to the second recipient and includes at least a portion of the corresponding information (e.g., the message is displayed in in an interface that does not provide options/features for responding to this message). Displaying this message in a conversational user interface that does not include user interaction graphical elements for writing responses provides improved visual feedback about the unavailability of the response functionality.

[0601] In some embodiments, a conversational user interface (e.g., 1114) that does not include a user interactive graphical element for composing a response to the message to the second recipient that includes at least a portion of the corresponding information includes indicating that the message was sent to the second recipient. Go to second

147

An indication (eg, graphical indication or textual indication) of the recipient that the message (eg, 1114A, 1114D), including at least a portion of the corresponding information, is an emergency message. In some embodiments, the indication is displayed in the conversation user interface at a location where the external computer system's messaging application would display one or more instructions for composing a response in a messaging conversation that is not an emergency conversation. User interaction graphic elements. Displaying an indication that the message is an emergency message provides improved visual feedback to the user as to the nature of the message received.

[0602] In some embodiments, the external computer system generates one or more notifications (e.g., 1110A) regarding the message to the second recipient that includes at least a portion of the corresponding information based on a first set of notification criteria, and based on A second set of notification criteria that is different from the first set of notification criteria generates a corresponding message (e.g., a non-urgent message from a user of the computer system) that is different from the message that includes at least a portion of the corresponding information sent to the second recipient. One or more notifications. In some embodiments, the first set of notification criteria is more permissive than the second set of notification criteria (eg, notifications are generated when do not disturb and/or silent mode is set for the first group but not the second group). In some embodiments, the external computer system is configured (e.g., including a computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs including instructions for operating) when the external computer system is in the first Status (e.g., do not disturb status; silent mode) receive corresponding messages. In response to receiving the corresponding message while the external computer system is in the first state and based on determining that the message is a first type of message (eg, an emergency message), a notification corresponding to the corresponding message is delivered. In response to receiving the corresponding message while the external computer system is in the first state and upon determining that the message is a second type of message different from the first type (eg, a non-urgent message), foregoing delivery of the notification corresponding to the corresponding message. Generate notifications about this message using a different set of notification criteria than the notification criteria used to generate notifications about different messages, doing so using different sets of conditions to perform the actions generated by the notifications about the two different messages without Further user input, this performs an action when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input and also provides different feedback in the form of notifications regarding these two different types of messages. Displaying an indication that the message is an emergency message provides improved visual feedback to the user as to the nature of the message received.

[0603] In some embodiments, the messaging application of the external computer system associated with the second recipient displays the message addressed to the second conversation user interface in a second conversation user interface that includes a fifth user-selectable graphical element (e.g., 1114E). a second recipient of the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information and, when selected, a fifth user-selectable graphical element to initiate a separate communication session (e.g., a separate text, phone, or video communication session) with the user of the computer system; separate from the communication session used to send the message). Including a fifth user-selectable graphical element when displaying the message provides additional control options without cluttering the UI with additional display controls.

[0604] In some embodiments, the external computer system associated with the second recipient provides an option (e.g., a user-selectable graphical element) that, when enabled (e.g., when selected), prevents Presenting at the external computer system one or more update messages associated with the message to the second recipient that includes at least the portion of the corresponding information (in some embodiments, preventing the update message from being received and/or sent from the message server) .

[0605] In some embodiments, the communication with the first recipient is a communication regarding an emergency, and preparing to initiate communication with the first recipient includes: receiving via one or more input devices (e.g., via FIG. 6M to One or more of the interfaces shown in Figure 6s) include one or more details about the emergency (e.g., the nature of the emergency (e.g., medical, fire, police), details about the user, the user/computer system a set of information (for example, the information included in 1114B).

[0606] In some embodiments, the portion of the corresponding information included in the message to the second recipient includes at least a portion of one or more details (e.g., as seen in 1114B) about the emergency (e.g., as seen in 1114B) , emergencies

148

quality).

[0607] In some embodiments, preparing to initiate communication with the first recipient includes connecting to a non-terrestrial wireless communications network (e.g., a satellite communications network); and the message including the corresponding information to the first recipient is transmitted via the Sent over a non-terrestrial wireless communications network (e.g., as indicated by the text above 1114B). In some embodiments, enabling delivery of the message including the corresponding information to the second recipient includes aligning the computer system for communication with the one or more satellites; and wherein enabling delivery to the second recipient including the corresponding information The message is via the one or more satellites. In some embodiments, the message is sent in response to a determination that the terrestrial wireless network cannot be reached (e.g., the computer system cannot connect to the cellular network; and/or the computer system does not receive a cellular signal of sufficient strength and/or consistency (e.g., , sent to emergency services).

[0608] In some embodiments, after enabling delivery of a message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to the second recipient (in some embodiments, and upon determining that the second recipient has received the message), the computer system displays An indication that the second recipient is receiving the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information addressed to the second recipient (eg, 1108B). An indication that the second recipient is receiving the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information addressed to the second recipient provides improved visual feedback that the second recipient has been enabled to receive the message.

[0609] In some embodiments, after enabling delivery of the message including at least a portion of the corresponding information to the second recipient, the computer system displays a fifth user interaction graphical element (e.g., "Stop Sharing" in 1108B) (e.g., "Stop Sharing" in 1108B). , an option to stop sharing updates with the second recipient), when selected, the fifth user interaction graphical element configures the computer system to send to the first recipient a message corresponding to the conversation with the first recipient. or multiple subsequent (eg, future) messages without enabling delivery (eg, abandoning and/or blocking delivery) of the one or more subsequent messages to a second recipient. Displaying a fifth user interaction graphical element provides the user with the option to abort or prevent the execution of an action (sending a subsequent message to a second recipient) if a set of conditions is later met (a subsequent message is sent to a first recipient), Doing so enhances the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user provide appropriate input and reducing user errors when operating/interacting with the device), which in turn by enabling the user to more quickly And use the device efficiently to reduce power usage and extend the battery life of the device.

[0610] Note that the details of the process described above with respect to method 1200 may also apply in a similar manner to the methods described above and below. For example, methods 700, 800, 1000, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000, and/or 2200 optionally include one or more features of the various methods described above with reference to method 1200. For example, method 1200 may optionally be performed as part of communications initiated via methods 700 or 800. For example, method 1200 optionally includes providing alignment elements according to method 1000 . For example, the ability to manage message recipients described in method 1200 may be simulated in an alternative communications network test mode in method 2000 . For example, method 1200 may be a procedure corresponding to the user interface object in method 2200. For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated below.

[0611] Figures 13A-13AA illustrate an example user interface for sending updated location information in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in Figure 14.

[0612] Figure 13A illustrates a computer system 1300A that includes a display 1302A (eg, a touch-sensitive display). In some embodiments, computer system 1300A is a smartphone, smart watch, desktop computer, laptop, computer, or tablet computer. In some implementations, computer system 1300A is device 100, device 300, or device 500.

[0613] In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 1310A, 1310B, 1310C, 1310D, 1310E, 1310F, 1310G, 1310H, 1310I, 1310J, 1310K, and/or 1310L) is or includes Touch input (e.g.

149

e.g. tap gesture and/or swipe gesture). In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (eg, inputs 1310A, 1310B, 1310C, 1310D, 1310E, 1310F, 1310G, 1310H, 1310I, 1310J, 1310K, and/or 1310L) is or includes speech input ( For example, a voice command to select a user interface element or to activate a feature or perform a function (such as a feature or function associated with a user interface element). In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (eg, inputs 1310A, 1310B, 1310C, 1310D, 1310E, 1310F, 1310G, 1310H, 1310I, 1310J, 1310K, and/or 1310L) is or includes an air gesture ( For example, an air gesture to select a user interface element or to activate a feature or perform a function (such as a feature or functionality associated with a user interface element). In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 1310A, 1310B, 1310C, 1310D, 1310E, 1310F, 1310G, 1310H, 1310I, 1310J, 1310K, and/or 1310L) is or includes a hardware device ( For example, buttons, rotatable input mechanisms, Activation (e.g., pressing, rotating, and/or moving) of a rotatable, pressable input mechanism, mouse button, remote control button, and/or joystick). In some embodiments, any of the user interface elements described herein as being selected (e.g., icons, affordances, buttons, and/or selectable options) are displayed when the user interface element is in focus (e.g., highlighted , bolded, outlined, visually distinguished from other user interface elements, and/or located at or near the cursor) is selected when the hardware device is activated.

[0614] In FIG. 13A, computer system 1300A displays a home screen 1304 that includes various icons that can be selected to open corresponding applications. Home screen 1304 includes an icon 1306 that corresponds to a location sharing application that provides a user interface and settings that allow a user to share location information with and view location information of other users and/or devices.

[0615] In FIG. 13A, computer system 1300A detects input 1310A that selects icon 1306 (eg, a tap gesture or other selection input). In response to detecting the input 1310A, the computer system 1300A displays the "people" tab user interface 1308A of the location sharing application corresponding to the icon 1306, as shown in Figure 13B. The "people" tab user interface 1308A corresponds to the location sharing application. People" label 1318A, as indicated by element 1318A being emphasized (eg, bolded) compared to, for example, the "Me" label 1320A. The "People" label user interface 1308A displays a map with pushpins indicating the location of the user and/or device. Pushpin 1312A indicates the location of computer system 1300A (also known as "Rachel's phone"), which is associated with a user named Rachel; pushpin 1314A indicates the location of user Jim (or a device associated with user Jim); And pin 1316A indicates the location of user John (or a device associated with user John). A user may be associated with the computer system 1300A by being logged into the computer system 1300A under a user account and/or by an application (such as a location sharing application) being logged into the computer system 1300A under the user account.

[0616] "People" tab user interface 1308A includes user information element 1322A and user information element 1324A. User information element 1322A is associated with user John and displays the city of John's location (eg, San Francisco) > the distance between John's location and Rachel's location (eg, 15 miles), and the last time John's location information was updated (for example, now). Similarly, user information element 1324A is associated with user Jim and displays the city of Jim's location (eg, Little Town), the distance between Jim's location and Rachel's location (eg, 9 miles), and the most recent update to Jim's The time of the location information (e.g., now).

[0617] FIG. 13C illustrates computer system 1300B (also referred to as Jim's phone) associated with user Jim discussed above with reference to the "people" tab user interface 1308A displayed on computer system 1300A. Computer system 1300B includes a display 1302B (eg, a touch-sensitive display). In some embodiments, computer system 1300A is a smartphone, smart watch, desktop computer, laptop, computer, or tablet computer. In some implementations, computer system 1300A is device 100, device 300, or device 500.

150

[0618] In FIG. 13C, computer system 1300B displays the "People" tab user interface 1308B of the location sharing application on computer system 1300B, as highlighted (e.g., bolded) by element 1318B compared to, for example, the "I" tab 1320B. ) as instructed. In the illustrated embodiment, computer system 1300A and computer system 1300B run the same location sharing application. In some embodiments, computer system 1300A and computer system 1300B run different location sharing applications. Thus, the "People" tab user interface 1308B is similar to the "People" tab user interface 1308A, but from Jim's perspective. The "People" tab user interface 1308B displays a map with push pins indicating the location of the user and/or device. Pushpin 1312B indicates the location of computer system 1300A (Rachel's phone), and pushpin 1314B indicates the location of computer system 1300B (Jim's phone).

[0619] "People" tab user interface 1308B includes user information element 1322B and user information element 1326B. User information element 1322B is associated with user John and displays the city of John's location (eg, San Francisco), the distance between John's location and Jim's location (eg, 24 miles), and the last time John's location information was updated (for example, now). Similarly, user information element 1326B is associated with user Rachel and displays the city of Rachel's location (eg, Livermore), the distance between Rachel's location and Jim's location (eg, 9 miles), and the most recent update to Rachel's location The time of the message (e.g., now).

[0620] Returning to Figure 13B, computer system 1300A detects input 1310B (eg, a tap gesture or other selection input) on the "I" tab 1320A. In response to detecting input 1310B (eg, a tap gesture) on the "i" tab 1320A, the computer system 1300A displays the "i" tab user interface 1328A of the location sharing application, emphasizing the "i" tab 1320A, and de-emphasizing the "person" "Tag 1318A, as shown in Figure 13D. "Me" tab user interface 1328A includes a map with pushpin 1330A representing the location of computer system 1300A, and user information element 1331A. User information element 1331A includes update indicator 1332A, location 1334A, and source indicator 1336A. Update indicator 1332A shows when (or how long ago) Rachel's location information was last updated (eg, 1 minute ago). Location indicator 1336A displays Rachel's location (eg, 123 Martin Ave., Livermore, CA). The source indicator displays the source of Rachel's location information, where "this phone" indicates that computer system 1300A is the source of location information for Rachel's location. In Figure 13E, computer system 1300B maintains the display of People" tab user interface 1308B, and compared to Figure 13C, user information element 1326B has been updated to reflect Rachel 's location was last updated 1 minute ago.

[0621] In FIG. 13D, computer system 1300A detects input 1310c (e.g., tap gesture, swipe up gesture, or Other selection input). As shown in Figure 13F, in response to detecting input 13103 computer system 1300A expands or scrolls the display of user information element 1331A to display additional elements of user information element 1331A, including a "share my location" option 1342A, a security warning notification option 1338A, and Invite notification option 1340A. The user may select "Share My Location" option 1342A to enable and disable location sharing (eg, by tapping or swiping "Share My Location" option 1342A). In Figure 13F, "Share My Location" option 1342A indicates that computer system 1300A is sharing a location (eg, location sharing is enabled or turned on). In response to detecting input (e.g., tap gesture, swipe gesture, or other selection input) on "Share My Location" option 1342A while "Share My Location" option 1342A is open, computer system 1300A shuts down (e.g., disabled) Location sharing and set the "Share my location" option 1342A to off. In response to detecting input (e.g., tap gesture, swipe gesture, or other selection input) on "Share My Location" option 1342A when "Share My Location" option 1342A is closed, computer system 1300A turns on (e.g., Enable) location sharing and set the "Share my location" option 1342A to on.

[0622] In some embodiments, when location sharing is enabled, computer system 1300A automatically

151

Send updated location information (e.g., without user input). For example, when location sharing is enabled and computer system 1300A is connected to a terrestrial communication network (e.g., wireless cellular communication and/or Wi-Fi network), computer system 1300A may predetermined intervals (e.g., 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes , 5 minutes or 10 minutes) to send updated location information. In Figures 13B-13H, network indicator 1303A indicates that computer system 1300A has cellular service (eg, is connected to and/or can communicate via cellular communications). Thus, computer system 1300A at time 10:10 in Figures 13D-13G (eg, where update indicator 1332A and user information element 1326B show that the location was updated 1 minute ago) is the same as time 10 in Figures 13H-13I Updated location information is automatically sent between :11 (eg, where update indicator 1332A and user information element 1326B indicate that the location is now updated). The updated location information sent by computer system 1300A may be used by other computer systems, such as computer system 1300B (Jim's phone), as indicated by user information element 1326B. In some embodiments, updated location information sent by computer system 1300A is available to other designated computer systems, such as computer systems of users identified as friends and/or family members.

[0623] Security alert notification option 1338A allows a user to enable and disable notifications of security alerts received by computer system 1300A, such that computer system 1300A outputs notifications of security alerts when security alert notification option 1338A is enabled (e.g., on), and when Security alert notification option 1338A forgoes outputting security alert notifications when disabled (e.g., Off). Invitation notification option 1340A allows a user to enable and disable notifications of invitations received by computer system 1300A, such as invitations by other users to receive updated location information from computer system 1300A and/or to computer system 1300A receiving updated location information from other users. invitation. Computer system 1300A outputs a notification of the invitation when invitation notification option 1340A is enabled (eg, on) and forgoes outputting a notification of the invitation when invitation notification option 1340A is disabled (eg, off). In Figure 13G, user interface 1308B on computer system 1300B remains unchanged relative to Figure 13E.

[0624] In FIG. 13F, computer system 1300A detects input 1310D (e.g., tap gesture, swipe down) on user information element 1331A (e.g., a designated portion of user information element 1331A, such as the pill and/or top) gesture or other selection input). In response to detecting input 1310, computer system 1300A reduces (eg, minimizes) user information element 1331A, as shown in Figure 13H (eg, reduces to the same state shown in Figure 13D). In Figure 13I, user interface 1308B displayed on computer system 1300B remains unchanged relative to Figure 13G.

[0625] FIG. 13J shows computer system 1300A at a later time after approximately two hours have elapsed compared to FIG. 13H. In Figure 13J, computer system 1300A is in a locked state and lock screen 1344A is displayed. Location sharing is enabled on computer system 1300A, and network indicator 1303A indicates that a cellular communications network is not available to computer system 1300A (e.g., computer system 1300A does not have cellular service, the cellular communications network of the service provider associated with computer system 1300A is not available available, and/or cellular communications networks from any service provider are unavailable). Because location sharing is enabled but the cellular communications network is unavailable, computer system 1300A displays manual update notification 1346A. In some embodiments, computer system 1300A determines that the cellular communications network is not available to computer system 1300A for a predetermined amount of time and/or that computer system 1300A has not sent updated location information for a predetermined amount of time (e.g., because The cellular communication network is not yet available) and manual update notification 1346A is displayed. In some implementations, computer system 1300A activates display 1302A, or causes display 1302A to transition from a low power state to display manual update notification 1346A. In some embodiments, when computer system 1300A is not in a locked state (e.g., computer system 1300A Computer system 1300A displays the manual update notification as a pop-up window and/or banner (e.g., at or near the top of display 1302A) while 1300A is displaying the home screen or application's user interface). Manual update notification 1346A includes text informing the user that it is possible to manually update the location of computer system 1300A via the satellite communications network in the location sharing application when the cellular communications network is unavailable.

152

[0626] In Figure 13K, pushpin 1316B displayed in user interface 1308B on computer system 1300B indicates updated location information for needle John, and pushpin 1312B displayed in user interface 1308B on computer system 1300B is visually distinguished (e.g., grayed out) to indicate that Rachel's updated location information has not been received within a predetermined amount of time (e.g., Rachel's location information is old or out of date), and user information element 1326B indicates Rachel's location information Last updated two hours ago.

[0627] In FIG. 13K, computer system 1300A detects input 1310E (eg, tap gesture, swipe gesture, or other selection input) on manual update notification 1346A. In response to detecting input 1310E, computer system 1300A displays "I" tab user interface 1328A, as shown in Figure 13L. In some embodiments (e.g., when computer system 1300A is locked), computer system 1300A requires user authentication (e.g., entering a password, facial identification, and/or fingerprint identification) in addition to input 1310E in order to unlock computer system 1300A and display "Me" tab user interface 1328A, as shown in Figure 13L.

[0628] In FIG. 13L, computer system 1300A displays a manual update option 1350A because the cellular communications network is unavailable for a predetermined amount of time. In some embodiments (eg, as shown in Figure 13D), computer system 1300A does not display manual update option 1350A when a cellular communications network is available (eg, because sufficient bandwidth resources are available to automatically send the updated location). In the embodiment shown in Figure 13L, a manual update option 1350A is displayed in the user information element 1331A in the "Me" tab user interface 1328A of the location sharing application. The "Me" tab user interface 1328A of the location sharing application does not include the map in Figure 13L because the cellular communications network is unavailable or unavailable for a predetermined amount of time (eg, to reserve bandwidth). In Figure 13M, the "people" tab user interface 1308B displayed on computer system 1300B has not changed relative to Figure 13K.

[0629] In FIG. 13L, computer system 1300A detects input 1310F (eg, tap gesture, swipe gesture, or other selection input) on manual update option 1350A. In response to detecting input 1310F, computer system 1300A initiates a process for sending updated location information via the satellite communications network. In some embodiments, if computer system 1300A is properly aligned for communication with the satellite when manual update option 1350A is selected, the computer system automatically (eg, without further user input) transmits the via satellite communications network. Update location information. In some embodiments, computer system 1300A displays a notification (eg, alignment assist element 1352A shown in Figure 13P or banner 926 described in Figures 9K-9N1) when computer system 1300A is sending updated location information, This notification instructs computer system 1300A to connect to the satellite communications network (e.g., 1352A1 in Figure 13P), provides instructions for keeping computer system 1300A pointed in the current direction (e.g., 1352A2 in Figure 13P and/or the graphic pair in Figure 13P quasi element 1352A3), and/or provide an indication of the transmission status of the updated location information (eg, 1352A4 in Figure 13P).

[0630] In the embodiment shown in Figure 13L, when manual update option 1350A is selected, computer system 1300A is not properly aligned for communicating with the satellite. Accordingly, in response to detecting input 1310F, computer system 1300A initiates a process for instructing the user to properly align computer system 1300A with the satellite. In some embodiments, in response to detecting input 1310F when computer system 1300A is not properly aligned for communicating with a satellite, computer system 1300A initiates an alignment process and/or displays one or more alignment interfaces or Elements, such as the alignment interfaces 902C-902J and 902O-902P depicted and described in Figures 9c-9J and 90-9P, the banner 926 depicted and described in Figures 9K-9N1, and/or Figures 9K-9N1 Graphical elements depicted and described in 931.

[0631] In FIG. 13N, in response to detecting input 1310F when computer system 1300A is not properly aligned for communicating with a satellite, computer system 1300A displays an alignment assistance element 1352A that includes a connection status indicator. 1352A1 (eg, "not connected"), textual alignment instruction 1352A2 (eg, "turn left to align with satellite"), and graphical alignment element 1352A3 (eg, it includes a curved arrow pointing in a counterclockwise direction). In some embodiments, alignment assist elements

153

1352A is the banner 926 described in Figures 9K-9N1 (or operating in the same manner). In some embodiments, graphic alignment element 1352A3 is (or operates in the same manner as) graphic element 931 described in Figures 9K-9N1. In Figure 13O, the "people" tab user interface 1308B displayed on computer system 1300B has not changed relative to Figure 13h.

[0632] FIG. 13P shows that computer system 1300A has been properly aligned for communicating with satellites (eg, after turning left relative to the position of computer system 1300A in FIG. 13N). Because computer system 1300A is properly aligned for communicating with satellites, computer system 1300A displays alignment assistance element 1352A (or updates its display) based on the current connection and transmission status of the updated location information. Specifically, connection status indicator 1352A1 indicates that the status is Connected; manual alignment instructions 1352A2 instruct the user to keep pointing at the satellite to update position (e.g., keep pointing in the current direction and/or not move computer system 1300A); graphical alignment element 1352A3 is displayed a graphic indicating that computer system 1300A is within range of the satellite (e.g., represented by a sector-shaped element); and transmission status indicator 1352A4 includes a status bar (e.g., it is filled to represent the percentage of transmission complete) and indicates that computer system 1300A is in a transmitting state Text in the process of updating location information. In Figure 13Q, the "people" tab user interface 1308B displayed on computer system 1300B has not changed relative to Figure 130.

[0633] Figure 13R shows computer system 1300A after sending updated location information via a satellite communications network. After sending the updated location information via the satellite communications network (eg, transmission of the updated location information via the satellite communications network is complete), computer system 1300A removes (eg, stops displaying) alignment assist element 1352A and based on sending via the satellite communications network Update indicator 1332A and location 1334A are displayed (eg, updated) with the updated location information. Update indicator 1332A indicates that Rachel's location was updated one minute ago, and location 1334A indicates Rachel's latest location (eg, 202 Mountain View).

[0634] FIG. 13S illustrates the "people" tab user interface 1308B displayed on computer system 1300B after accessing (or receiving) updated location information sent by computer system 1300A via a satellite communications network. Based on the updated location information, user information element 1326B corresponding to Rachel displays (or is updated to display) the updated location (eg, Palo Alto), how long ago the location was updated (eg, one minute ago), and Jim's The distance between the location and Rachel's updated location (for example, 102 miles). In Figure 13S, computer system 1300A displays pushpin 1312B on the map in "People" tab user interface 1308B to reflect Rachel's updated location, and displays satellite indicator 1354B (eg, on pushpin 1312B) to indicate Rachel's location. is based on updated location information sent via the satellite communications network.

[0635] In FIG. 13S, computer system 1300B detects input 1310G (eg, a tap gesture or other selection input) that selects pin 1312B. In response to detecting the input 1310G, the computer system 1300B displays additional information associated with the user (eg, Rachel) corresponding to the selected pin, including a user information element 1356B, a satellite location notification 1358B, a directional affordance 1360B, and a contact. Affordance means 1362B. In the embodiment shown in Figure 13U, user information element 1356B, satellite position notification 1358B, direction affordance 1360B, and contact affordance 1362B replace user information element 1322B and user information element 1326B (e.g., computer system 1300B stops displaying User Information Element 1322B and User Information Element 1326B).

[0636] User information element 1356B includes a satellite location element 1356B1 that describes that Rachel's location is based on a satellite location (e.g., updated location information sent via a satellite communications network and/or a location determined via one or more satellites), and a location status element 1356B2, which indicates how long ago Rachel's location was updated (for example, one minute ago). Satellite location notification 1358B includes a message indicating that Rachel's location is based on satellite locations and that Rachel's location has not been updated (e.g., automatic update) because Rachel is not currently connected (e.g., cellular and/or terrestrial wireless communications). . Directional affordance 1360B may be selected (e.g., via a tap gesture), and in response to detecting

154

With selection of direction affordance 1360B, computer system 1300B displays the direction from Jim's location to Rachel's location. Contact affordance 1362B may be selected (eg, via a tap gesture), and in response to detecting selection of contact affordance 1362B, computer system 1300B displays contact information associated with Rachel, such as a phone number, Address, email address and/or optional options for contacting Rachel. In Figure 13T, the "I" tab user interface 1328A displayed on computer system 1300A has not changed relative to Figure 13T.

[0637] In FIG. 13U, computer system 1300B detects an input 1310H (e.g., a tap gesture, a swipe up gesture, or other selection) on user information element 1356B (or a designated portion of user information element 1356B, such as a pill or top). enter). As shown in Figure 13W, in response to detecting input 1310H, computer system 1300B displays additional information and/or options associated with Rachel, such as notification affordance 1364B, which may be selected to display for receiving messages from Rachel. Related notification options.

[0638] In Figure 13V, computer system 1300A displays the "I" tab user interface 1328A unchanged relative to Figure 131 and detects input 1310I (eg, a tap gesture or other selection input) to select manual update option 1350A. In some embodiments, computer system 1300A limits whether location information may be manually updated via satellite, such as how often location information may be manually updated via satellite. In the embodiment shown in Figure 13V, input 1310I is detected before a time threshold is met (eg, a predetermined amount of time has not elapsed since computer system 1300A sent updated location information via satellite). Because the time threshold has not been met, in response to detecting input 13101 , computer system 1300A aborts sending (or initiating the sending process) updated location information via satellite or providing assistance to connect with the satellite, and displays error notification 1366A and removes the affordance. 1368A (e.g., as part of or separately from error notification 1366A). Error notification 1366A notifies the user that computer system 1300A is unable to update the location because the location was recently updated, And the user is instructed to wait and try again. In response to detecting input 1310J (eg, a tap gesture or other selection input) that selects cancel affordance 1368A, computer system 1300A ceases display of error notification 1366A and cancel affordance 1368A, as shown in Figure 13Z.

[0639] Returning to Figure 13W, computer system 1300B detects input 1310L (e.g., a tap gesture, a swipe down gesture, or other) on user information element 1356B (or a designated portion of user information element 1356B, such as a pill or top). Select input). As shown in Figure 13y, in response to detecting input 13101, computer system 1300B reduces the amount of information and/or options displayed associated with Rachel (eg, the computer system returns to the interface shown in Figure 13U).

[0640] Returning to Figure 13X, computer system 1300A detects input 1310K (eg, a tap gesture or other selection input) that selects the "people" tag 1318A. In response to detecting input 1310K, computer system 1300A displays a "people" tab user interface 1308A, as shown in Figure 13Z. Because computer system 1300A does not have cellular service, as indicated by network indicator 1303A, "people" tab user interface 1308A does not include a map, unlike in Figure 13B when cellular service was available. In Figure 13AA, the "people" tab user interface 1308B displayed on computer system 1300B has not changed relative to Figure 13y.

[0641] Figure 14 is a flowchart illustrating a method for using a computer system in accordance with some embodiments. Method 1400 operates on a computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, 600, 900, 1100, 13004, 13008, 15004, 15008, and/or 1500C) (e.g., smart phone, smart watch, laptop, tablet, desktop Executed at a computer or head-mounted device (e.g., an augmented reality and/or extended reality head-mounted device). In some embodiments, the computer system interacts with a display generation component (e.g., a display controller, a touch-sensitive display system, and/or a head-mounted display system) and/or one or more input devices (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface, a touch screen , buttons, keyboard, mouse, rotatable crown and/or microphone) communication. Some operations in method 1400 are optionally combined, the order of some operations is optionally changed, and some operations are optionally omitted.

155

[0642] As discussed below, method 1400 provides an intuitive way to send updated location information. This approach reduces the user's cognitive load in sending updated location information, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-powered computing devices, enabling users to send updated location information faster and more efficiently saves power and increases the time between battery charges.

[0643] When (1402) the computer system communicates with a first communications network (e.g., a terrestrial communications network, a wireless terrestrial communications network, a cellular communications network, and/or a Wi-Fi network): the computer system determines (1404) that the corresponding criteria have been met (For example, Remote Location Update Standard). In some embodiments, the first communications network is a cellular network associated with the computer system (eg, provided by the computer system's cellular service provider). In some embodiments, the first communications network is a cellular network that is different from the cellular network associated with the computer system (eg, provided by a different cellular service provider than the computer system's cellular service provider). In some embodiments, a computer system is determined to be communicating with a first communications network when the computer system is receiving sufficient signal and/or connection consistency for communications via the first communications network. In some embodiments, the corresponding criteria are met: when a user of the computer system has previously approved the recipient of the location information; when location sharing mode is activated to send location information; and when a selectable location sharing option is selected when; when a predetermined amount of movement of the computer system has been detected; when a predetermined time threshold has been met since the latest updated location information was sent; and/or when another user or device has requested the user's updated location information.

[0644] When (1402) the computer system communicates with the first communications network, in response to determining that the corresponding criteria have been met, the computer system automatically (e.g., at predetermined intervals or continuously) transmits (1406) without user input. ) (e.g., via a first communications network) updated location information (e.g., longitude, latitude, altitude, and/or Global Positioning System "GPS") coordinates) indicating an updated location of the computer system (e.g., In Figure 13F, 1332A indicates that Rachel's location was updated 1 minute ago; in Figure 13H, 1332A indicates that Rachel's location is updated now; in Figure 13F (e.g., time 10:10) and Figure 13H (e.g., time 10:11), computer system 1300A automatically sends updated location information) when computer system 1300A communicates with the cellular network (e.g., as indicated by cellular status indicator 1303A), where the updated location information may Accessed by a device other than that computer system. In some embodiments, the computer system sends updated location information to a location information server and/or to a remote device that the user has authorized to receive updated location information. In some embodiments, the updated location information of the computer system is determined based on a terrestrial wireless communications network, a first communications network (eg, using cell identification and/or satellite positioning information). In some embodiments, the computer system displays a selectable option for manually sending the computer system's updated location information via the first communications network (e.g., the user may select the option to send the updated location information before the computer system will automatically send it updated location information). In some implementations, the location sharing mode remains active after updated location information is sent.

[0645] After automatically transmitting updated location information one or more times when corresponding criteria are met, the computer system detects (1408) that the first communications network is unavailable (e.g., cellular status indicator 1303A in Figure 13J indicates that the cellular network is unavailable ) (e.g., the computer system is not communicating with the terrestrial wireless communications network and/or the computer system is not receiving sufficient signal and/or connection consistency for communication via the terrestrial wireless communications network). In some embodiments, the computer system detects that the first communications network is unavailable after sending different updated location information at multiple different times. In some embodiments, in response to detecting that the first communications network is unavailable, the computer system provides an indication to the user that the first communications network is unavailable (eg, changes the wireless connection status indicator to indicate that the first communications network is unavailable).

[0646] When (or optionally, in response to or upon a determination) that the first communications network is unavailable (e.g., cellular status indicator 1303A in FIG. 13J indicates that the cellular network is unavailable), the computer system is capable of communicating via the second communications network (For example, non-local

156

(e.g., computer system 1300A is capable of updating location information via a satellite communications network) and has met the appropriate criteria, The computer system gives up (1410) automatically sending the updated location information (e.g., in Figure 13J, the computer system 1300A gives up automatically sending updated location information). In some embodiments, foregoing automatically sending updated location information includes displaying (e.g., via a display generation component) selectable non-terrestrial communication options (e.g., affordances, buttons, graphical elements, graphical objects, and/or icons) instead Location information is not updated via the second communications network, where selection of the selectable non-terrestrial communication option (e.g., via one or more input devices) (e.g., touch input on the selectable non-terrestrial communication option and and/or a voice command selecting the non-terrestrial communication option via one or more input devices) initiates (eg, sends, sends, and/or attempts to send) updating the location information via the second communications network. In some embodiments, the selectable non-terrestrial communication option is displayed on a location sharing user interface that includes a graphical indication (eg, on a map) of the computer system's location. In some embodiments, the location sharing mode ends when the first communication network is unavailable and corresponding criteria have been met. Rather than automatically sending updated location information when the first communications network is unavailable, the computer system can update location information via the second communications network and send when accurate location information may not be available and/or would require additional user input (e.g., saves computer resources when input will be required to align a computer system with a satellite network), which performs operations without requiring further user input when a set of conditions has been met, and reduces the number of inputs required to perform operations.

[0647] In some embodiments, when the first communication network is unavailable (e.g., as indicated by cellular status indicator 1303A in Figure 13J): based on the determination (or in response to the determination) that the first communication network is available (e.g., A predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, or 2 hours) has elapsed since the first communications network became unavailable to the computer system, and the computer system indicates that the computer system is able to communicate via the second Notification (eg, 1346A in Figure 13J) of the communications network updating location information (eg, graphical elements, banners, prompts, and/or text). In some embodiments, the predetermined period of time is elapsed since the computer system connected to the first communication network (e.g., last connected to the first communication network, was in communication with the first communication network, and/or has met the requirements of the computer system-based The period of time since the connection (connection standard) of the signal strength, stability and/or consistency of the signal between the first communication network and the first communication network. Conditionally displaying a notification that the computer system is capable of updating location information via the second communication network based on a determination that a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first communication network was available indicates to the user that the first communication network is unavailable without notifying the user of the second communication network. A brief interruption in the availability of a communications network, which provides improved visual feedback and performs actions without requiring further user input when a set of conditions has been met.

[0648] In some embodiments, the predetermined time period is when the computer system is enabled to communicate (e.g., capable of communicating) via the first communications network (e.g., when computer system 1300A is enabled to communicate via the cellular communications network communication) (e.g., the computer system is not in airplane mode or a mode in which cellular and/or Wi-Fi communications are turned off) the period of time since the first communications network became available. Displaying a notification that the computer system is capable of updating location information via the second communications network based on a time period while the computer system is enabled to communicate via the first communications network, doing so under the condition that the user will expect the computer system to automatically send the updated location information This notification is provided, which provides improved visual feedback and performs an action when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input.

[0649] In some embodiments, the predetermined period of time is when the computer system is enabled such that the updated location information is accessible to devices other than the computer system (e.g., "Share My Location" option 1342A is enabled) (e.g., is enabled to automatically send updated location information; location sharing with one or more other users (or devices associated with the user) is enabled, such as via a setting that permanently or lasts for a predetermined time) since First communication network available

157

time period since. Displaying a notification that the computer system is capable of updating location information via the second communications network based on a time period when the computer system is enabled to generate updated location information accessible to devices other than the computer, in doing so the user would expect the computer system to automatically This notification is provided conditional on sending updated location information, which provides improved visual feedback and takes action when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input.

[0650] In some embodiments, when the first communications network is unavailable: a first predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first communications network became available (e.g., since the first communications network became unavailable to the computer system) (e.g., a non-zero amount of time, such as 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, or 2 hours) later (e.g., upon determination of the condition or in response to determination of the condition), the computer system provides for communication via the second communications network Option (e.g., 1350A) to send updated location information for a computer system (e.g., selectable options, user interaction graphical elements, affordances, icons, and/or buttons) (e.g., not providing a notification that the option for sending updated location information via the second communications network is available); and since the first communications network became available (e.g., since the first communications network became unavailable to the computer system) After a second predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, or 5 hours) has elapsed (e.g., upon determination of the condition or in response to determination of the condition), wherein the second predetermined time For a period greater than a first predetermined period of time, the computer system displays (e.g., on a system user interface such as a wake screen or home screen, or on a currently open application user interface) a notification (e.g., 1346A) (e.g., a graphical element , banner, prompt, and/or text), the notification indicates that an option for sending the computer system's updated location information via the second communications network is available (e.g., manual update option 1350A in the location sharing application before displaying the manual update notification 1346A (available in the "Me" tab user interface 1328A). In some embodiments, the first predetermined period of time is elapsed since the computer system connected to the first communications network (e.g., Last connected to, in communication with, the first communications network, and/or having a connection that meets connection criteria based on the strength, stability, and/or consistency of the signal between the computer system and the first communications network ) since. In some embodiments, the second predetermined period of time is elapsed since the computer system connected to the first communication network (e.g., last connected to the first communication network, was in communication with the first communication network, and/or has a requirement based on The period of time since the connection) of the signal strength, stability and/or consistency of the signal between the computer system and the first communications network. In some implementations, the notification indicating an option to send updated location information for the computer system is a notification that is not displayed after a first predetermined period of time has elapsed. In some embodiments, an option to send the updated location information of the computer system via the second communications network is provided (eg, displayed) in the user interface of the location sharing application. In some embodiments, options for sending the computer system's updated location information via the second communications network are displayed in response to a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display a user interface of the location sharing application (e.g., , users can access this option in the location sharing application). Providing an option for sending the updated location information of the computer system via the second communications network after a first predetermined period of time and displaying a notification that the option is available after a second predetermined period of time notifying the user that the updated location information is available Send via the second communication network and reduce disruption to the user, but allow the user to send updated location information via the second communication network before receiving the notification, which provides improved visual feedback, provides additional control options without making the user interface Clutter, and perform actions when a set of conditions have been met without further user input.

[0651] In some embodiments, when the first communication network is unavailable (and/or when the computer system is able to update location information via the second communication network): the computer system detects that the computer system detects that the location information is sent (or shared or made available) via the second communication network. a request (e.g., 1310F) for the computer system's updated location information accessible to the other device (e.g., a set of one or more inputs); and in response to detecting the transmission of the computer system's updated location information via the second communications network request, the computer system initiates a process for sending updated location information of the computer system via the second communications network, wherein the

158

The process of sending the computer system's updated location information by the second communications network includes displaying a prompt for the user to take action to connect to the second communications network (e.g., 1352A, 931, 908C, 908D, 908E, 908F, 908G, 908F, 908I , 9080, 90801, 926 and/or 931) (e.g., notifications, banners, text, graphical elements, audio and/or instructions). In some embodiments, the prompt for the user to take action to connect to the second communications network includes moving and/or positioning at least a portion of the computer system in a particular direction or location (e.g., turn left, point upward, and/or outward move) instructions. In some embodiments, the computer system displays causing the user to take action based on a determination that the computer system is not connected to the second communications network (e.g., not properly aligned for communication with one or more satellites of the second communications network) to connect to the second communications network. Initiating a process for sending updated location information for the computer system via the second communications network in response to detecting a request to send updated location information for the computer system via the second communications network provides the user with an idea of when and/or with what Control of how frequently updated location information is sent, which reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation, And provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface. Displaying a prompt that causes the user to take action to connect to the second communications network (e.g., providing a connection assistant) allows the user to quickly and efficiently resolve a problem that prevents the computer system from connecting to the second communications network (e.g., misalignment) with less input and/or barriers), which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform an action.

[0652] In some embodiments, when the first communication network is unavailable (and/or when the computer system is able to update location information via the second communication network): the computer system detects that the computer system's updated information is sent via the second communication network. a first request (e.g., 1310F or 1310I) for location information (e.g., a set of one or more inputs); and in response to detecting the first request for updated location information of the computer system being transmitted via the second communications network: according to determining Upon meeting a set of manual update criteria (e.g., since receiving a request to send updated location information via the second communications network, at least a threshold amount of time has elapsed before detecting the first request), the computer system sends the computer system via the second communications network the system's updated location information (e.g., as shown in Figure 13P); and upon determining that the set of manual update criteria is not met, the computer system foregoes (e.g., blocks) sending the computer system's updated location information via the second communications network ( For example, As shown in Figure 13X). In some embodiments, the computer system limits how frequently manual location updates can occur (eg, the computer system requires a threshold amount of time between sending manual requests for updated location information). In some embodiments, the manual update criteria include criteria that are met when at least a threshold amount of time has elapsed since the request to send updated location information via the second communications network before the first request was detected. Sending updated location information in response to a request based on whether manual update criteria are met enables the computer system to respond to a request by limiting the transmission of updated location information (e.g., when the computer system is unlikely to have changed location since a previous update by greater than by the second communication The network provides location information with a resolution or accuracy of distance that prevents the transmission of updated location information) to save resources by performing an operation when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input.

[0653] In some embodiments, when the first communication network is unavailable (and/or when the computer system is capable of updating location information via the second communication network) and upon detection of sending the computer system's updated location via the second communication network After the first request for information (e.g., 1310F) (or optionally, in response to detecting the first request to send the computer system's updated location information via the second communications network), the computer system's updated location information is sent via the second communications network. After updating location information): the computer system detects a second request (eg, 1310I) to send the computer system's updated location information via a second communications network (eg, a set of one or more inputs); and in response to detecting a request via The second communication network sends a second request for the updated location information of the computer system: according to determining that the second request for sending the updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network is the same as sending the updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network. The amount of time between first requests (or optionally, sending the computer system's process via the second communications network

159

An amount of time between the second request to update the location information and sending the updated location information of the computer system via the second communications network in response to the first request to send the updated location information of the computer system via the second communications network) satisfies (e.g., greater than, or equal to, or greater than) a time threshold (e.g., a non-zero amount of time, such as 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, or 1 hour), the computer system sends the computer system via the second communications network of updated location information (eg, as shown in FIG. 13P ); and based on determining that the second request to send the updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network is the same as the second request to send the updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network. The amount of time between a first request (or optionally, a second request to send updated location information for the computer system via the second communications network) and a response to a first request to send updated location information for the computer system via the second communications network. The amount of time between requests to send the computer system's updated location information via the second communications network) does not meet (e.g., less than, or equal to or less than) the time threshold, and the computer system abandons (e.g., blocks) the computer system's transmission of updated location information via the second communications network. The updated location information of the computer system is sent (eg, as shown in Figure 13X). The updated location is sent based on whether an amount of time between sending the second request for the updated location information of the computer system via the second communications network and the first request for sending the updated location information of the computer system via the second communications network satisfies a time threshold. Information that enables a computer system to transmit updated location information by limiting transmission (e.g., preventing transmission when the computer system is unlikely to have changed location since a previous update by a distance greater than the resolution or accuracy of the location information provided by the second communications network (updated location information) to save resources by performing an action when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input.

[0654] In some embodiments, when the first communication network is unavailable (and/or when the computer system is capable of updating location information via the second communication network) and upon detection of sending the computer system's updated location via the second communication network After the first request for information (e.g., 1310F) (or optionally, in response to detecting the first request to send the computer system's updated location information via the second communications network), the computer system's updated location information is sent via the second communications network. After updating location information): the computer system detects a second request (eg, 1310I) to send the computer system's updated location information via a second communications network (eg, a set of one or more inputs); and in response to detecting a request via The second communication network sends a second request for the updated location information of the computer system: according to determining that the second request for sending the updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network is the same as sending the updated location information of the computer system via the second communication network. The amount of time between a first request (or optionally, a second request to send updated location information for the computer system via the second communications network) and a second request to send updated location information for the computer system via the second communications network The amount of time between a request and sending updated location information of the computer system via the second communications network) is not met (e.g., less than, or equal to, or less than) a time threshold (e.g., a non-zero amount of time, such as 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, or 1 hour), the computer system provision will not (or cannot) Send a notification (eg, 1366A) of the computer system's updated location information (eg, message, audio alert, and/or haptic output). In some embodiments, based on determining an amount of time between sending a second request for updated location information for the computer system via the second communications network and a first request for sending updated location information for the computer system via the second communications network (or Optionally, sending the second request for the updated location information of the computer system via the second communications network and sending the computer system via the second communications network in response to the first request to send the updated location information of the computer system via the second communications network. (e.g., greater than, or equal to, or greater than) a time threshold (e.g., 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, or 1 hour), the computer system gives up providing Notification of the updated location information of the computer system will not be sent, and the updated location information of the computer system is sent via the second communications network. Providing an indication that a time threshold will be provided based on a determination that an amount of time between a second request to send updated location information for the computer system via the second communications network and a first request to send updated location information for the computer system via the second communications network does not satisfy a time threshold. does not respond to the

160

Send a request for updated location information to send a notification of updated location information to the computer system. Notify the user that the requested action will not be performed. This provides improved visual feedback and performs the action when a set of conditions has been met. Further user input is required.

[0655] In some embodiments, the computer system displays a location status indicator (e.g., 1312B and/or 1356B1) (e.g., a graphical element, a pin on a map, and/or text) corresponding to updated location information (e.g., The location status indicator indicates the geographical location represented by the updated location information), including based on determining that the location status indicator (or optionally, the location indicated by the location status indicator) corresponds to (e.g., based on) via the first communication The updated location information sent by the network displays the location status indicator in a first visual appearance (eg, 1312B in FIG. 13I ); and upon determining that the location status indicator corresponds to the updated location information sent via the second communication network, to A second visual appearance that is different from the first visual appearance displays a location status indicator (eg, 1312B in Figure 13S). Displaying the location status indicator in an appearance based on the communication network used to transmit the location information corresponding to the location status indicator provides the user with information about the source of the location information (and if the first communication network has a different accuracy than the second communication network , potentially providing greater accuracy in positional information), which provides improved visual feedback.

[0656] In some embodiments, displaying the location status indicator in a second visual appearance includes displaying an image (e.g., 1354B) of a satellite (e.g., a glyph and/or a thumbnail) (e.g., the status indicator includes a satellite image and/or the status indicator is displayed together with the satellite image). Displaying images of satellites indicating the location of the location status indicator to the user is based on location information sent via satellite communications networks (which may not be as accurate as location information sent via terrestrial wireless communications networks), which provides improved visual feedback.

[0657] In some embodiments, the computer system displays an update status indicator (e.g., 1326B, 1332A, and/or 1356B2) (e.g., a graphical element and/or text) that indicates when updated location information was sent ( For example, the most recent time) (and/or the most recent time the location information was shared and/or the amount of time since the location information was most recently shared). Displaying an indication of the time the updated location information was sent provides the user with information as to how recently the user's location information was updated, which provides improved visual feedback, particularly where the location information is updated manually rather than automatically.

[0658] In some embodiments, when (or upon determination) the computer system is in communication with the first communication network, the computer system displays a map (e.g., 1308A in Figure 13B, 1308B or 1328A in Figure 13D, and 13H) ( and optionally, simultaneously displaying a location indicator (e.g., a pushpin) on the map at a location corresponding to the location of the computer system; and when (or upon determination) that the first communication network is unavailable to the computer system, the computer system abandons display of the map (and displays the location indicator or does not display the location indicator) (e.g., Figure 13L, Figure 13N, Figure 13P, Figure 13R, 1328A in Figure 13T, Figure 13V, and Figure 13X, or 1308A in Figure 13Z). In some embodiments, the map is displayed in the user interface of the location sharing application. In some embodiments, the location sharing application includes the computer system, other computer systems associated with a user of the computer system (e.g., a computer system associated with a user account of the computer system and/or logged in to a user of the computer system). computer system with the same user account) and/or location information of other users or computer systems with which that computer system shares location information. In some embodiments, a location sharing application includes settings associated with location sharing, such as options for enabling and disabling location sharing and selecting users and/or devices with which location information is shared. In some embodiments, the computer system forgoes displaying the map when the first communications network is unavailable due to bandwidth limitations (eg, there is insufficient bandwidth to display accurate map information when the first communications network is unavailable). Displaying the map when the computer system is in communication with the first communication network and abandoning the display of the map when the first communication network is unavailable to the computer system indicates to the user that the first communication network is unavailable, saving the calculation required to display the map.

161

computing resources and avoids displaying potentially inaccurate (or outdated) map information when there is insufficient bandwidth to update the map at a predetermined rate. This provides improved visual feedback and performs actions when a set of conditions has been met without Further user input is required.

[0659] In some embodiments, when the first communications network is unavailable (either upon determination of such a condition or in response to a determination of such condition) (e.g., as indicated by cellular status indicator 1303A in Figure 13L), the computer system provides Options (e.g., 1350A) for sending updated location information of the computer system over the second communications network (e.g., selectable options, affordances, icons, buttons, and/or user interaction graphical user interface elements) (e.g., at the location displaying a selectable graphical user interface object in the sharing application); and when the computer system communicates with the first communications network (either upon or in response to determining the condition) (e.g., as indicated by the cellular status in FIG. 13D 1303A), the computer system forgoes providing (e.g., the computer system does not provide) an option for sending the computer system's updated location information via the second communications network (e.g., manual update option 1350A is not shown in FIG. 13D ) (e.g., the computer system does not provide) , the user interface of the location sharing application is displayed without a selectable GUI object). In some implementations, in response to detecting input selecting the option, the computer system sends the computer system's updated location information via the second communications network. In some embodiments, the computer system does not provide an option (eg, a manual option) for sending the computer system's updated location information (eg, via the first communications network and/or the second communications network) because the computer system (or Location information for a user associated with a computer system is being updated automatically on a regular schedule (e.g., at periodic intervals without requiring user input). An option is provided for sending the computer system's updated location information via the second communication network when the first communication network is unavailable, and is waived when the computer system is in communication with the first communication network. The option of updated location information that enables users to manually share updated location information when the computer system does not automatically send the updated location information without cluttering the user interface with additional elements when the updated location is automatically sent, provides Improved visual feedback and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface. [0660] In some embodiments, when the first communication network is unavailable, the computing system sends updated location information via the second communication network that is accessible to devices other than the computer system (e.g., in Figures 13L, 13P, 13R, Figure 13T, or Figure 13V, computer system 1300A sends updated location information via a satellite communications network). In some embodiments, based on (or in response to) determining that a corresponding criterion (eg, a remote location update criterion) has been met, the computer system sends updated location information via the second communications network when the first communications network is unavailable. In some embodiments, the corresponding criteria are met: when a user of the computer system has previously approved the recipient of the location information; when location sharing mode is activated to send location information; and when a selectable location sharing option is selected when; when a predetermined amount of movement of the computer system has been detected; when a predetermined time threshold has been met since the latest updated location information was sent; and/or when another user or device has requested the user's updated location information. In some embodiments, the corresponding criteria for sending updated location information via the second communication network are the same as the corresponding criteria for sending updated location information via the first communication network. In some implementations, the respective criteria for sending updated location information via the second communication network are different than the corresponding criteria for sending the updated location information via the first communication network. Sending updated location information via a second communications network that is accessible to devices other than the computer system enables a user to send updated location information when the first communications network is unavailable without requiring additional input, such as moving the computer system to a different location ) to connect to the first communication network, which reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation.

[0661] In some embodiments, sending updated location information accessible to devices other than the computer system via the second communications network is performed automatically without user input (e.g., in Figures 13L, 13P, In Figure 13R, Figure 13T, or Figure 13V, computer system 1300A sends updated location information via the satellite communications network without detecting manual updates.

162

Selection (or requirement for selection) of option 1350A) (eg, based on (or optionally, in response to) a determination that automatic update criteria have been met). In some embodiments, the automatic update criteria include criteria that are met when the user falls. In some embodiments, the computer system communicates with one or more motion sensors (eg, accelerometers and/or gyroscopes) configured to detect motion of the computer system. In some embodiments, when motion (e.g., detected speed and/or acceleration) of the computer system (or another device associated with the user) meets a set of motion criteria (e.g., meets or exceeds a threshold speed and/or acceleration), a determination is made that the user has fallen. In some embodiments, the computer system communicates with one or more biometric sensors (eg, heart rate sensor and/or blood oxygen monitor) that can be used to determine that the user has fallen. Automatically sending updated location information via the second communications network without user input enables the user to share updated location information without user input and if an emergency situation exists and/or if the user is unable to provide for updating the location Input of information (for example, manual input) provides location information more quickly, which reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation.

[0662] In some embodiments, the computer system (e.g., in a user interface of a location sharing application) displays an option (e.g., 1350A) for sending the computer system's updated location information via a second communications network (e.g., may select options, affordances, icons, buttons, and/or user interaction graphical user interface objects); and the computer system detects a set of one or more inputs (e.g., 1310E and/or 1310F), the set of one or more inputs including a selection of an option to send the updated location information of the computer system via the second communications network, wherein in response to detecting that the set of one or more options includes a selection of the option to send updated location information of the computer system via the second communications network input to perform sending updated location information via the second communications network that is accessible to a device other than the computer system. Displaying an option for sending the updated location information of the computer system via the second communications network provides the user with an efficient method of manually sharing the updated location information, which provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface.

[0663] In some embodiments, in response to determining that the predefined action has been successfully performed (e.g., the computer system has successfully connected to one or more satellites or has successfully transmitted updated location information), the computer system displays a display indicating that the predefined action has been successfully performed. Successfully executed messages (e.g., 1322A indicates (e.g., displays "Now") when location information has been sent, 1352A1 displays "Connected" when a connection has been established, 908L, and/or 908M). Displaying a message indicating that the predefined action has been successfully performed in response to a determination that the predefined action has been successfully performed enables the computer system to notify the user that a particularly relevant action has occurred without distracting the user with notifications regarding non-predefined actions. Attention, which provides improved visual feedback to the user and performs actions when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Feedback on the success of important actions enables computer systems to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where users are responding to emergency or stressful situations.

[0664] Note that the details of the process described above with respect to method 1400 (eg, FIG. 14) also apply in a similar manner to the methods described above and below. For example, methods 700 , 800 , 1000 , 1200 , 1600 , 1800 , 2000 , and/or 2200 optionally include one or more of the features of the various methods described above with reference to method 1400 . For example, methods 700, 800, 1000, 1200, and/or 1600 optionally include the techniques described in method 1400 for sending updated location information. For example, method 1800 may initiate sending updated location information as described in method 1400 from a messaging application. For example, sending updated location information as described in method 1400 may be simulated in an alternative communications network test mode in method 2000. For example, sending updated location information as described in method 1400 may be a process corresponding to the user interface object in method 2200. For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated below.

[0665] Figures 15A-15AF illustrate an exemplary user interface for initiating communications in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in Figure 16.

163

[0666] Figure 15A illustrates computer system 1500A and computer system 1500B. In some embodiments, computer system 1500A is a smartphone, smart watch, desktop computer, laptop, computer, or tablet computer. In some embodiments, computer system 1500A is device 100, device 300, or device 500. In some embodiments, computer system 1500B is a smartphone, smart watch, desktop computer, laptop, computer, or tablet computer. In some embodiments, computer system 1500B is device 100, device 300, or device 500. In the embodiment shown in Figure 15A, computer system 1500A is a smart watch including a display 1502A (eg, a touch-sensitive display), a rotatable (and optionally pressable) input mechanism 1505A, and hardware buttons 1507A. Computer system 1500B is a smartphone including a display 1502B (eg, a touch-sensitive display). In some embodiments, computer system 1500A and computer system 1500B communicate with each other wirelessly (eg, via Bluetooth and/or near field communication protocols). In some embodiments, computer system 1500A and computer system 1500B are paired.

[0667] In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 1510A, 1510B, 1510C, 1510D, 1510E1, 1510E2, 1510E3, 1510F, 1510G, 1510H, 1510I, 1510J, 1510K, 1510L, 1510M , 1510N, 1510O, 1510P, 1510Q, and/or 1510R) is or includes touch input (e.g., tap gestures and/or swipe gestures). In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 1510A, 1510B, 1510C, 1510D, 1510E1, 1510E2, 1510E3, 1510F, 1510G, 1510H, 1510I, 1510J, 1510K, 1510L, 1510M, 1510N, 1510O, 1510P, 1510Q, and/or 1510R) are or include voice input (e.g., voice commands to select a user interface element or to activate a feature or perform a function (such as a feature or function associated with a user interface element)). In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 1510A, 1510B, 1510C, 1510D, 1510E1, 1510E2, 1510E3, 1510F, 1510G, 1510H, 1510I, 1510J, 1510K, 1510L, 1510M, 1510N, 1510O, 1510P, 1510Q and/or 1510R) are or include air gestures (e.g., to select user interface elements or to use An air gesture to activate a feature or perform a function (such as a feature or functionality associated with a user interface element). In some embodiments, any of the inputs described herein (e.g., inputs 1510A, 1510B, 1510C, 1510D, 1510E1, 1510E2, 1510E3, 1510F, 1510G, 1510H, 1510I, 1510J, 1510K, 1510L, 1510M, 1510N, 1510O, 1510P, 1510Q, and/or 1510R) is or includes activation (e.g., pressing, rotating and/or move). In some embodiments, any of the user interface elements described herein as being selected (e.g., icons, affordances, buttons, and/or selectable options) are displayed when the user interface element is in focus (e.g., highlighted , bolded, outlined, visually distinguished from other user interface elements, and/or located at or near the cursor) is selected when the hardware device is activated.

[0668] In FIG. 15A, computer system 1500A and computer system 1500B coordinate to attempt to initiate a telephone call to a non-emergency number (eg, a number that is not associated with emergency services and has not been designated as an emergency contact). Computer system 1500A and computer system 1500B exchange call information such that calls may be initiated and/or ended by either computer system and call audio may be input and/or output by either computer system. In some embodiments, computer system 1500A and computer system 1500B include selectable options for coordinating shared calls. In some embodiments, computer system 1500A does not have cellular capabilities and cannot independently make phone calls (eg, without computer system 1500B or other cellular-enabled device). When computer system 1500A does not have cellular capabilities, computer system 1500A places a telephone call via computer system 1500B, causing computer system 1500B to establish a cellular connection and send call data to computer system 1500A.

[0669] In Figure 15A, computer system 1500A and computer system 1500B each display a call for a phone application

164

An interface that provides information and/or options associated with the call. Computer system 1500A displays a call interface 1504A of the telephony application that includes a number being called 1504A1, a call status 1504A2 (e.g., "on call"), an end call option 1504A3, and a keypad option 1504A4. In response to detecting a request to end the call Selection of option 1504A3 (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input on end call option 1504A3), computer system 1500A ends the call or an attempt to initiate the call in response to detecting selection of keypad option 1504A4 (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input on end call option 1504A3). , a tap gesture or other selection input on keypad option 1504A4), computer system 1500A displays a keypad with selectable numeric options.

[0670] Computer system 1500B displays the phone application's calling interface 1504B, which includes the number being called 1504B1, call status 1504B2 (eg, "no connection"), call management options 1504B3, and end call option 1504B4. In some embodiments, call management options 1504B3 include one or more (eg, all or a subset) of the call management buttons 603 shown and described in Figures 6K-6L. Call status 1504B2 indicates that computer system 1500B does not have a cellular connection, which is also indicated by network indicator 1503B, and therefore the call cannot be initiated. Because computer system 1500B does not have a cellular connection, some or all of call management options 1504B3 are disabled.

[0671] Because the call is directed to a non-emergency number, when the attempt to initiate the call fails, computer system 1500A and computer system 1500B display menu user interface 1506A and home screen 1506B, respectively, as shown in Figure 15B. Menu user interface 1506A displayed on computer system 1500A is a menu interface for the telephony application on computer system 1500A. Accordingly, when an attempt to initiate a call to a non-emergency number fails, computer system 1500A stops displaying call interface 1504A and displays (eg, returns to) menu user interface 1506A. Home screen displayed on computer system 1500B 1506B includes selectable icons corresponding to respective applications that, when selected, open and/or launch the respective applications. Accordingly, when an attempt to initiate a call to a non-emergency number fails, computer system 1500B stops displaying call interface 1504B and displays (eg, returns to) home screen 1506B. In some embodiments, if an attempt to initiate a call to a non-emergency number fails when computer system 1500A initiates the call, computer system 1500B displays home screen 1506B. In some embodiments, when computer system 1500B initiates the call, if the attempt to initiate the call to the non-emergency number fails, computer system 1500B displays a menu user interface for the telephony application (e.g., similar to what is displayed on computer system 1500A menu user interface 1506A). In some embodiments, when an attempt to initiate a call to a non-emergency number fails, computer system 1500B displays the user interface that was displayed when the attempt to initiate the call was made.

[0672] FIG. 15C illustrates an example technique for initiating a communication, such as a phone call, with a designated entity, such as an emergency contact or emergency service, eg, 911. The computer system detects input 1510A on hardware button 1507A (eg, press, multiple presses, or press and hold) while displaying clock face user interface 1508A. In response to detecting input 1510A, computer system 1500A displays user interface 1512A, which includes a shutdown option 1512A1, a medical ID option 1512A2, and an emergency SOS option 1512A3. In response to detecting input 1510B (eg, a tap gesture, swipe gesture, or other selection input) selecting emergency SOS option 1512A3, computer system 1500A attempts to initiate communication with emergency services (eg, 911) via computer system 1500B.

[0673] Figures 15E-15G illustrate alternative or additional techniques for initiating a call to emergency services. In Figure 15E, computer system 1500A displays a home screen 1514A (also referred to as a springboard or startup screen) that includes selectable icons corresponding to respective applications that, when selected, cause computer system 1500A to Open or launch the corresponding application. In response to detecting input 1510C (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input) that selects icon 1514A1 (corresponding to the phone application), computer system 1500A displays a menu for the phone application to the user

165

Interface 1506A, as shown in Figure 15F. In response to detecting input 1510D (eg, a tap gesture or other selection input) that selects keypad option 1515D, computer system 1500A displays the phone application's keypad user interface 1516A, as shown in Figure 15G. In Figure 15G, computer system 1500A detects a set of inputs, including input 1510E1 (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input on "9" button 1516A1), input 1510E2 (e.g., a tap gesture on "1" button 1516A2 two tap gestures or other selection inputs) and 1510E3 (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input on call button 1516A3). In response to detecting the set of inputs in Figure 15G, computer system 1500A attempts to initiate communication with emergency services (eg, 911) via computer system 1500B.

[0674] Figure 15H illustrates an alternative or additional technique for initiating a call to emergency services. In some embodiments, computer system 1500A is capable of detecting that the user has fallen. In response to detecting that the user has fallen, computer system 1500A initiates a process for attempting to communicate (eg, place a call) with emergency services and/or emergency contacts. In some embodiments, in response to detecting that the user has fallen, computer system 1500A displays menu user interface 1512A shown in Figure 15D that allows the user to easily access emergency SOS options 1512A3 for initiating communication with emergency services. . In some embodiments, if computer system 1500A If no input is detected within 30 seconds or one minute), the computer system displays user interface 1518A, as shown in Figure 15H. User interface 1518A includes indication 1518A1, countdown timer 1518A2, and cancel option 1518A3. Indication 1518A1 indicates that computer system 1500A is to initiate a call to emergency services. Countdown timer 1518A2 displays the amount of time (eg, seconds) until computer system 1500A will automatically initiate a call to emergency services. The user may select cancel option 1518A3 (eg, via a tap gesture) to end the countdown and prevent computer system 1500A from automatically initiating a call to emergency services. If the countdown reaches zero before being canceled, computer system 1500A automatically initiates a call to emergency services. In some embodiments, in response to detecting that the user has fallen, the computer system displays user interface 1518A and initiates a countdown without first displaying menu user interface 1512A.

[0675] Once computer system 1500A initiates a call to emergency services via computer system 1500B according to the techniques described with reference to Figures 15C-15H, computer system 1500A displays call interface 1520A (e.g., as shown in Figure 15I) and computer system 1500B A corresponding call interface 1520B is displayed (eg, as shown in Figure 15J). Call interface 1520A includes recipient indicator 1520A1 indicating that a 911 call is ongoing. Call interface 1520B includes a recipient indicator 1520B1, a call status indicator 1520B2, call management options 1520B3, and an end call affordance 1520B4. In some embodiments, call interface 1520B is call interface 1503B shown and described in Figure 15A. In some embodiments, call interface 1520B is call interface 602K or 602L shown and described in Figures 6K and 6L, respectively. In some embodiments, call management options 1520B3 include one or more (eg, all or a subset) of the call management buttons 603 shown and described in Figures 6K-6L.

[0676] In Figure 15J, network indicator 1503B indicates that computer system 1500B does not have a cellular connection. Because computer system 1500B does not have a cellular connection, and therefore cannot initiate a call to 911, and because the call is directed to emergency services, computer system 1500A displays satellite communications button 1520B5 (e.g., as shown in Figure 15L) and computer system 1500A displays Prompt 1522A2 (eg, as shown in Figure 15K) includes instructions for the user to attempt to text 911 via satellite on computer system 1500B. In some embodiments, satellite communications button 1520B5 is satellite communications button 604G in Figure 6G, satellite communications button 604I in Figure 6I, or satellite communications button 904A in Figure 9A.

[0677] In FIG. 15K, because computer system 1500B does not have a cellular connection, computer system 1500A displays call status indicator 1522A1 and again in user interface 1522A in addition to (eg, concurrently with) prompt 1522A2. Call option 1522A3 (e.g., as described with reference to Figure 15O), the call status indicator utilizes a warning graphic (e.g.,

166

For example, there is an exclamation mark within a circle) to indicate a no-connection status. In some embodiments, computer system 1500A replaces user interface 1520A with user interface 1522A (eg, computer system 1500A stops display of user interface 1520A and displays user interface 1522A). In some embodiments, in addition to or instead of the call again option 1522A3, the computer system 1500A displays a cancel option that, when selected, causes the computer system 1500A to cease display of the user interface 1522A and display the phone user interface (e.g., 1506A, 1516A , 1520A) or other user interface, and optionally ends the attempt to initiate the call. In some embodiments, in response to detecting input (e.g., pressing of rotatable input mechanism 1505A, rotation of rotatable input mechanism 1505A, and/or pressing of hardware button 1507A), computer system 1500A ceases display of user interface 1522A, displays Telephone user interface (eg, 1506A, 1516A, or 1520A) or other user interface, and optionally ends the attempt to initiate the call.

[0678] In FIG. 15L, because computer system 1500B does not have a cellular connection, call status indicator 152082 has a warning graphic (eg, an exclamation point within a circle) showing (or being updated to show) a no connection status. In response to detecting input 1510F (eg, a tap gesture or other selection input) that selects end call option 1520B4 in Figure 15L, computer system 1500B ceases attempting to initiate the call to 911. In response to detecting input 1510G (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input) that selects satellite communications button 1520B5 in FIG. 15L , computer system 1500B initiates actions to align computer system 1500B with the satellite and/or transmit via the satellite communications network The communication process is as described in Figures 6M to 6y and/or Figures 9A to 9U. In some embodiments, in response to detecting input 1510G selecting satellite communications button 1520B5 when computer system 15008 is not properly aligned for communicating with a satellite, computer system 1500B initiates an alignment process and/or displays a or A plurality of alignment interfaces or elements, such as alignment interfaces 902C-902J and 902O-902P depicted and described in Figures 9c-9J and 9O-9P, banner 926 depicted and described in Figures 9K-9N1, and/or or graphical element 931 depicted and described in Figures 9K-9N1.

[0679] In some embodiments, if computer system 1500B does not detect selection of satellite communication button 1520B5 within a predetermined amount of time, computer system 1500B automatically sends the communication via the satellite communication network (or initiates a communication via the satellite communication network communication process), as described in Figure 6I, Figure 6M to Figure 6y, and/or Figure 9A to Figure 9B.

[0680] After the communication has been sent by the satellite communications network, computer system 1500A maintains display of user interface 1522A (e.g., as shown in Figure 15M) and computer system 1500B displays notification 1524B1 (e.g., as shown in Figure 15N). In some embodiments, user interface 1522A is updated to indicate the change in cellular signal status and maintains display of prompt 1522A1 or stops display of prompt 1522A1. Notification 1524B1 notifies the user that computer system 1500B sent the request via satellite. In Figure 15N, notification 1524B1 is displayed on lock screen 1524B. In some embodiments, when computer system 1500B is in a sleep state or a low power state, computer system 1500B displays notification 1524B1, as shown in Figure 15N. In some embodiments, notification 1524B1 is displayed as a banner (e.g., at or near the top of display 1502B) when computer system 1500B is in an active state (e.g., not in a locked state and not in a hibernation or low power state) ). In some embodiments, computer system 1500B displays notification 1524B1 upon determining (eg, only if) the communication was automatically sent via satellite (eg, without user input and/or because the user did not respond).

[0681] In FIG. 15N, computer system 1500B detects input 1510H (eg, a tap gesture or other selection input) that selects notification 1524B1. In response to detecting input 1510H, computer system 1500B displays reporting interface 1526B, as shown in Figure 15P. In some embodiments, reporting interface 1526B includes end button 1526B1, message area 1526B2, text message 1526B3, text input field 1526B4, and send button 1526B5. In some embodiments, reporting interface 1526B is messaging interface 602T depicted in FIG. 6T, reporting interface 602U depicted in FIG. 6U, or summary interface 602W depicted in FIG. 6W (or provides the same functionality as these interfaces).

167

[0682] In FIG. 15O, computer system 1500A detects input 15101 (eg, a tap gesture or other selection input) selecting call again option 1522A3. In response to detecting input 15101, computer system 1500A attempts (eg, reattempts) to initiate a call to emergency services via computer system 1500B. Because computer system 1500A had cellular service (e.g., as indicated by network indicator 1503B in Figure 15P) when computer system 1500A attempted to initiate the call, computer system 1500A and computer system 1500B were able to establish calls with 911, as shown in Figures 15Q and 1500B. As shown in Figure 15R. In Figure 15Q, computer system 1500A displays call interface 1520A, which shows the recipient (911) and the duration of the call (1 minute 16 seconds). In Figure 15R, computer system 1500B displays call interface 1520B. In contrast to call interface 1520B that is displayed when cellular service is unavailable (eg, as shown in Figures 15J and 15L), call status indicator 1520B2 displays the duration of the call and call management option 1520B3 is enabled.

[0683] Figures 15S-15AF illustrate techniques for attempting to initiate calls using computer system 1500B and computer system 1500c and for sending communications via satellite if a cellular communications network is unavailable. Figure 15S illustrates a computer including a display 1502c (eg, a touch-sensitive display). In some embodiments, computer system 1500c is included in a vehicle (eg, a car or truck). In some embodiments, computer system 1500c is or includes an in-vehicle infotainment system. In some embodiments, computer system 1500c displays the user interface on a display in the vehicle (eg, on the vehicle's console). In some embodiments, the user interface displayed by computer system 1500c is controlled by computer system 1500B (eg, via a wired or wireless communication link). In some embodiments, the user interface displayed by computer system 1500c is generated by computer system 1500B. In some embodiments, the user interface displayed by computer system 1500c is generated by computer system 1500c and displays information provided by computer system 1500B (eg, computer system 1500B coordinates with computer system 1500c to display information).

[0684] In Figure 15S, computer system 1500c displays user interface 1527c, which includes a home screen 1528c and a taskbar 1530C. Home screen 1528c includes selectable icons corresponding to respective applications that, when selected, open and/or launch the respective applications. Task bar 1530c includes network indicator 1503C. In some implementations, network indicator 1503c indicates the network status of computer system 1500B. In some implementations, network indicator 1503c indicates the network status of computer system 1500c (eg, if computer system 1500c is enabled to communicate independently via cellular communications). In Figure 15T, while computer system 1500c displays the user interface shown in Figure 15S, computer system 1500B displays home screen 1506B described with reference to Figure 15B.

[0685] In FIG. 15S, computer system 1500c detects input 1520J (eg, a tap gesture or other selection input) that selects icon 1528C1 corresponding to the phone application. In response to detecting input 1520, computer system 1500c displays a telephony user interface 1532c for the telephony application corresponding to icon 1528C1, as shown in Figure 15U. Telephone user interface 1532c includes options 1532C1-1532c5 (e.g., tabs) that can be selected to display favorite contactable users, recently contacted users, contact lists (e.g., contactable users associated with computer system 1500c), respectively. list), keypad, and voicemail. In Figure 15U, with favorite option 1532C1 selected (eg, as indicated by the outline surrounding favorite option 1532C1), computer system 1500c displays a list of specified contactable entities, including emergency services option 1532c6 associated with emergency services. In Figure 15V, user interface 1506B displayed on computer system 1500B remains unchanged compared to Figure 15T.

[0686] In FIG. 15U, computer system 1500c detects input 1510K (eg, a tap gesture or other selection input) that selects keypad option 1532c6. In response to detecting input 1510K, computer system 1500C displays keypad 1532c7, recipient indicator 1532c8, and call options 1532c9. In Figure 15X, while computer system 1500c displays the user interface shown in Figure 15W, user interface 1506B displayed on computer system 1500B remains unchanged compared to Figure 15V

168

Change.

[0687] In FIG. 15W, keypad 1532c7 has been used to enter digits 911, as indicated by recipient indicator 1532c8, and computer system 1500c detects input 1510M (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input) to select call option 1532c9 ). In response to detecting input 1510M, computer system 1500c displays call interface 1534c (eg, as shown in Figure 15y), and computer system 1500B displays call interface 1520B (eg, as shown in Figure 15Z). Call interface 1534c includes a recipient indicator 1534c1, a call status indicator 1534c2, and call management options 1534c3-1534c7, including an end call option 1534c3, a mute option 1534c4, and a keypad option 1534c5. In some embodiments, call management options 1534c3-1534c7 perform functions similar to call management button 603 shown and described in Figures 6K-6L. In some embodiments, computer system 1500c displays call interface 1534c (e.g., as shown in Figure 15Y), and computer system 1500B responds to detecting input 1510L (e.g., a tap gesture) that selects emergency services option 1532c6 in Figure 15U or other selection input) and the call interface 1520B is displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 15Z).

[0688] Network indicator 1503c in Figure 15y and network indicator 1503B in Figure 15Z indicate that cellular service is unavailable. Because cellular service is unavailable and the attempted call is directed to emergency services, computer system 1500c and computer system 1500B display options for sending communications via satellite, as shown in Figures 15AA and 15AB. Computer system 1500c displays satellite communications button 1534c6 on call interface 1534c, and computer system 1500B displays satellite communications button 1520B5 on call interface 1520B (eg, as described above with reference to Figure 15L). In some embodiments, satellite communications button 1534c6 is satellite communications button 604G in Figure 6G, satellite communications button 604I in Figure 6I, or satellite communications button 904A in Figure 9A.

[0689] In FIG. 15AA, in response to detecting input 1510N (eg, a tap gesture or other selection input) selecting end call option 1534c3, computer system 1500c causes the call to end. Similarly, in Figure 15AB, in response to detecting input 1510P (eg, a tap gesture or other selection input) selecting end call option 1520B4, computer system 1500B causes the call to end. In response to detecting input 1510O (eg, a tap gesture or other selection input) that selects satellite communications button 1534c6 in FIG. 15AA, computer system 1500c initiates actions to align computer system 1500B with the satellite and/or transmit via the satellite communications network The communication process is as described in Figures 6M to 6y and/or Figures 9A to 9U. In some embodiments, in response to detecting input 15100 selecting satellite communication button 1534c6 when computer system 15008 is not properly aligned for communicating with a satellite, computer system 1500B initiates an alignment process and/or displays a or A plurality of alignment interfaces or elements, such as alignment interfaces 902C-902J and 902O-902P depicted and described in Figures 9c-9J and 9O-9P, banner 926 depicted and described in Figures 9K-9N1, and/or or graphical element 931 depicted and described in Figures 9K-9N1.

[0690] In some embodiments, if computer system 1500c and computer system 1500B do not receive any input while displaying user interface 1534c in Figure 15AA and user interface 1520B in Figure 15AB, respectively, computer system 1500B will attempt to use the satellite To contact emergency services using text messaging, as indicated on user interface 1536c displayed on computer system 1500c in Figure 15AC. User interface 1536c includes an indication 1536C1 that emergency communications via satellite are available, an indication 1536c2 that computer system 1500B will attempt to contact emergency services by texting using satellite 1536c2, a check option 1536c3, and a call again option 1536c4. In response to detecting input 1510Q (eg, a tap gesture or other selection input) selecting check option 1536c3, computer system 1500c causes computer system 1500B to output audio (eg, sends instructions to the latter to do so), as shown in Figure 15AD , in order to help the user locate computer system 1500B. In response to detecting input 1510R (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input) selecting call again option 1536c4, computer system 1500c attempts (e.g., reattempts) to send a call using the cellular communications network (e.g., independently or via computer system 1500B).

169

Initiate a call to emergency services. In response to detecting input 1510R selecting call again option 1536c4 in Figure 15AC, a call to emergency services can be established because a cellular communications network is available, as indicated by network indicator 1503c in Figure 15AE and network indicator 1503B in Figure 15AF instruct. 15AE illustrates call interface 1534c displayed on computer system 1500c in response to detecting input 1510R selecting call again option 1536c4 in FIG. 15AC and by displaying the call duration in call status indicator 1534c2 and by enabling call management Option 1534c3T534C7 to indicate that the call has been established. Similarly, Figure 15AF illustrates call interface 1520B displayed on computer system 1500B in response to detecting input 1510R selecting call again option 1536c4 in Figure 15Ac and by displaying the call duration in call status indicator 1520B2 and by Call management option 1520B3 is enabled to indicate that the call has been established.

[0691] Figure 16 is a flowchart illustrating a method for initiating communications using a computer system, in accordance with some embodiments. Method 1600 operates on a computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, 600, 900, 1100, 1300A, 1300B, 1500A, and/or 1500c) (e.g., a device wired and/or wirelessly connected to an external computer system, in-vehicle infotainment device, smart watch, laptop, tablet, smartphone, desktop computer, or head-mounted device (e.g., head-mounted augmented reality and/or extended reality device)), the computer system interacts with the output generating component ( For example, a display controller, a display generation component, a touch-sensitive display system, a speaker, a haptic generation component, and/or a head-mounted display system), one or more input devices (e.g., 1502A, 1502B, or 1502c) (e.g., touch sensitive surfaces, touch screens, buttons, accelerometers, heart rate sensors, blood oxygen monitors, and/or microphones) and external computer systems (e.g., 1500B) (e.g., smartphones, smartwatches, laptops, and/or tablets) communication. In some embodiments, the computer system communicates with external computer systems via wired and/or wireless networks (eg, Bluetooth and/or Wi-Fi). Some operations in method 1600 are optionally combined, the order of some operations is optionally changed, and some operations are optionally omitted.

[0692] As described below, method 1600 provides an intuitive way for initiating communications. This approach reduces the cognitive load of user-initiated communication, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-powered computing devices, enabling users to initiate communications faster and more efficiently saves power and increases the time between battery charges.

[0693] The computer system receives (1602) a request to initiate communication (e.g., to emergency services and/or emergency contacts) via the one or more input devices (e.g., 1510A, 1510B, 1510C, 1510D, 1510E1, 1510E2 , 1510E3, 1510I, 1510J, 1510K, 1510L, 1510M, and/or 1510R) (e.g., inputs on selectable options, affordances, buttons, graphical elements, graphical objects, and/or icons displayed on the output generating component) . In some embodiments, the request is a voice command. In some embodiments, the request to initiate communication is directed to an external computer system. In response to receiving a request to initiate communication (1604): based on a determination that the external computer system is connected to (e.g., communicating with) the terrestrial wireless communications network (e.g., as indicated by cellular status indicators 1303A, 1503A, 1503B, and/or 1503c) (e.g., cellular and/or Wi-Fi networks), the computer system initiates (1606) for communicating via a terrestrial wireless communications network (e.g., communicating with emergency services or contacts, sending text messages, initiating audio calls, sending emails, and/or the process of initiating an audio/video conference) (e.g., as shown in Figure 15Q, Figure 15R, Figure 15AE, and/or Figure 15AF); and upon determining that the external computer system is not connected to the terrestrial wireless communication network (e.g., the external computer system is not connected to the terrestrial wireless communication network and/or or the computer system is unable to receive a signal with sufficient reception and/or consistency for communication via a terrestrial wireless communications network), the computer system provides (1608) via the output generation component using an external computer system to connect to (e.g., connect the computer system and/or or external computer systems connected to) prompts (e.g., 1522A2 or 1534c6) of non-terrestrial networks (e.g., satellite communications networks and/or low-bandwidth communications networks) (e.g., notifications, audio output, tactile output, visual notifications, text instructions, video instructions, graphic elements, graphic objects and/or icons). Providing prompts for using an external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network based on a determination that the external computer system is not connected to a terrestrial wireless network provides the user with information about what is available on the external computer system.

170

Information about the operation and directing the user to the appropriate device to initiate that communication, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation.

[0694] In some embodiments, the terrestrial wireless communications network is a cellular network associated with the computer system (e.g., provided by the user's cellular service provider) or another cellular network (e.g., provided by another cellular service provider) ). In some embodiments, for emergency calls, the computer system may use a network provided by a network provider that is different from the provider associated with the computer system. In some embodiments, the external computer system connects to the terrestrial wireless communications network when the external computer system is receiving sufficient cellular service and/or connection consistency to communicate. In some embodiments, the prompt has not been previously displayed. In some embodiments, upon determining that the external computer system is connected to a terrestrial wireless communications network, the computer system forgoes providing prompts to use the external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network (e.g., Initiating a process for communicating via a terrestrial wireless communications network without providing a prompt to use an external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network). In some embodiments, in response to receiving a request to initiate communication, the computer system provides based on determining that the external computer system is configured to connect to a non-terrestrial network, is connected to a non-terrestrial network, and/or is configured to communicate via a non-terrestrial network Tips for using external computer systems to connect to non-terrestrial networks. In some embodiments, in response to receiving the request to initiate communication, the computer system determines that the external computer system is not configured to connect to the non-terrestrial network, is not connected to the non-terrestrial network, and/or is not configured to communicate via the non-terrestrial network Communications to Waiver provides tips for using external computer systems to connect to non-terrestrial networks.

[0695] In some embodiments, prompts for using an external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network include that satellite communications are available (e.g., the external computer system is capable of connecting to a satellite communications network and/or the external computer system is capable of communicating via satellite communications, such as Instructions (e.g., instructions, text, and/or graphical indicators) to send a text message (e.g., "Try texting 911 via satellite on your phone" in 1522A2 and/or "Try texting 911 via satellite" on your phone in 1534c6) Text 911 via satellite"). Displaying an indication that satellite communications are available provides the user with additional information regarding the types of communications that can be performed with the external computer system, which improves visual feedback to the user and reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation.

[0696] In some embodiments, after receiving a request to initiate communication (e.g., 1510A, 1510B, 1510C, 1510D, 1510E1, 1510E2, 1510E3, 1510I, 1510J, 1510K, 1510L, 1510M, and/or 1510R): according to Upon determining that an attempt to communicate via the non-terrestrial network has been made (or, optionally, that a communication has been sent) (e.g., by the computer system and/or by an external computer system), the computer system causes an output (e.g., display) (e.g. , displayed on the computer system and/or external computer system) An attempted communication notification (e.g., 1524B1) that an attempt has been made to communicate via a non-terrestrial network (e.g., visual notification, text notification, tactile notification, and/or audio notify). In some embodiments, the communication attempted notification is displayed on the wake screen (eg, lock screen). Providing notifications based on a determination that an attempt to communicate via a non-terrestrial network has been made provides the user with information regarding operations performed by the computer system that may not yet be known to the user, which provides improved visual feedback.

[0697] In some embodiments, the computer system is wearable (e.g., the computer system is 1500A) (e.g., the computer system includes a wearable device, a watch, a bracelet, a strap, and/or an operating system on the wearable device) . Wearable computer systems provide convenient access to information and an efficient way to provide input, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform actions. In some embodiments, the computer system is included in a vehicle (eg, the computer system is the 1500C) (eg, a car or truck; the computer system is or includes an in-vehicle infotainment system). In some embodiments, the computer system displays the user interface on a display in the vehicle (eg, on a console of the vehicle). In some embodiments, the user interface is controlled by an external computer system (eg, via a wired or wireless communication link). In a

171

In some embodiments, the user interface is generated by an external computer system. In some embodiments, the user interface is generated by the computer system and displays information provided by an external computer system (eg, the external computer system coordinates with the computer system to display the information). Including this computer system in the vehicle provides convenient access to prompts for using external computer systems to connect to non-terrestrial networks while the user is in the vehicle, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform operations.

[0698] In some embodiments, when prompted to connect to a non-terrestrial network using an external computer system, the computer system attempts (e.g., continues to attempt) to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communications network (e.g., when computer system 1500A displays Figure 15K , 15M and/or 15O prompt 1522A2, the computer system 1500A and/or the computer system 1500B attempts to communicate via the cellular communication network; when the computer system 1500c displays the satellite communication button in FIG. 15AA At 1534c6, computer system 1500c and/or computer system 1500B attempts to communicate via the cellular communications network). In some embodiments, the computer system and/or the external computer system attempts to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communication network when providing a prompt to use the external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network. In some embodiments, attempting to communicate via a terrestrial wireless communications network while providing a prompt to connect to a non-terrestrial network using an external computer system is performed upon determining that the request to initiate communication is a request to initiate communication with emergency services. In some embodiments, upon determining that the request to initiate communication is not a request to initiate communication with emergency services, the computer system (and/or optionally, the external computer system) foregoes the prompt to use the external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network. When attempting (or continuing to attempt) to communicate via a terrestrial wireless communications network (e.g., the computer system and/or the external computer system only responds to a request to initiate communication with emergency services when prompted to use the external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network) Attempts to communicate via terrestrial wireless communication networks). Attempting to communicate via a terrestrial wireless communications network allows a computer system to continue attempting one communication method (e.g., a more data-intensive method) without additional user input while providing the option of another communication method, which reduces the actions required by the user to perform number of inputs and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface.

[0699] In some embodiments, after attempting to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communications network when a prompt to connect to a non-terrestrial network using an external computer system is provided: based on a determination that attempts to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communications network have ceased (e.g., in response to Upon receiving input corresponding to a request to cease attempted communication or upon determining that a time threshold is met), the computer system changes (e.g., updates) the user interface (e.g., computer system 1500A ceases display of 1522A2 and optionally displays user interfaces 1506A, 1508A , 1514A or 1516A; computer system 1500C stops display of satellite communications button 1534c6 and optionally displays user interface 1527c, 1532c in Figure 15U, 1532c in Figure 15W, or 1536C). Changing the user interface upon a determination that attempts to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communications network have ceased provides feedback to the user that the computer system and/or the external computer system is no longer attempting to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communications network and indicates to the user that further steps may be required. user input to reinitiate an attempt to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communications network, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation. In some embodiments, the computer system and/or the external computer system ceases attempting to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communications network in response to detecting a user input corresponding to a request to cease attempting to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communications network. In some embodiments, changing the user interface is performed in response to detecting user input corresponding to a request to cease attempts to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communications network. In some embodiments, changing the user interface includes changing one or more elements of the user interface (eg, notifications, prompts, textual and/or graphical indications). In some embodiments, the computer system and/or the external computer system stops based on a determination that a time threshold has been met, such as a predetermined amount of time after receiving a request to initiate communication or after providing the prompt for a predetermined amount of time. Attempt via terrestrial wireless communication network

172

communicate. In some embodiments, changing the user interface includes displaying an option that, when selected, causes the computer system and/or the external computer system to attempt to communicate (e.g., call or redial emergency services) via the terrestrial wireless communications network. In some embodiments, changing the user interface includes replacing End Service and /or undo the option.

[0700] In some embodiments, prompts are provided to connect to a non-terrestrial network using an external computer system (e.g., 1522A2 and/or 1534c6) and attempts (e.g., continues to attempt) to communicate via a terrestrial wireless communications network, the computer system detects user input corresponding to a request to eliminate the prompt to use an external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network (e.g., 1510I , pressing of rotatable input mechanism 1505A, rotation of rotatable input mechanism 1505A and/or pressing of hardware button 1507A, such as input 1510A) (e.g., a tap gesture or other selection input on a delete option, and/or a voice command ); and in response to detecting user input corresponding to a request to eliminate a prompt to use an external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network, the computer system displays a telephony user interface (e.g., 1506A, 1516A, or 1532C in Figure 15U or Figure 15W) ( For example, the user interface of a telephony application and/or the calling user interface). In some embodiments, the telephone user interface includes an indication that an attempt to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communications network is being made (eg, by the computer system and/or by an external computer system). In some embodiments, the telephone user interface includes functions for controlling telephone calls (e.g., ending a telephone call and/or attempting to initiate a telephone call), controlling speaker functions, controlling mute functions, displaying a keypad, and/or viewing and/or selecting available Options for contacting users. In some embodiments, the telephone user interface is displayed before providing a prompt to connect to a non-terrestrial network using an external computer system (e.g., in response to detecting user input corresponding to a request to eliminate a prompt to connect to a non-terrestrial network using an external computer system) instead of redisplaying the phone user interface). In some embodiments, in response to detecting user input corresponding to a request to eliminate a prompt to use the external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network, the computer system and/or the external computer system ceases attempting to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communications network. In some embodiments, in response to detecting user input corresponding to a request to eliminate a prompt to use an external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network, the computer system and/or the external computer system stops displaying a prompt to eliminate using an external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network. Options for terrestrial network prompts. Displaying a telephony user interface in response to detecting user input corresponding to a request to eliminate a prompt to connect to a non-terrestrial network using an external computer system notifies the user of the status of the attempt to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communications network and provides the user with a response to the attempt ( or retry) rapid access to the ability to initiate communication (with emergency services or another entity) via a terrestrial wireless communications network, which provides improved visual feedback to the user and reduces the amount of input required to perform an action.

[0701] In some embodiments, attempting to communicate via a terrestrial wireless communications network includes responding to receiving a request to initiate the communication (e.g., 1510A, 1510B, 1510C, 1510D, 1510E1, 1510E2, 1510E3, 1510I, 1510J, 1510K, 1510L, 1510M, and/or 1510R) and automatically (e.g., without user input) attempt to initiate such communications (e.g., telephone calls and/or test messages) via the terrestrial wireless communications network, and After the wireless communications network communicates (or, optionally, simultaneously with) and while providing a prompt to use the external computer system to connect to the non-terrestrial network (e.g., 1522A2 and/or 1534c6), the external computer system (e.g., 1534c6) 1500B) displays the telephone user interface (e.g., 1505B or 1520B). In some embodiments, the telephone user interface includes an indication that an attempt to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communications network is being made (eg, by the computer system and/or by an external computer system). In some embodiments, the telephone user interface includes functions for controlling telephone calls (e.g., ending a telephone call and/or attempting to initiate a telephone call), controlling speaker functions, controlling mute functions, displaying a keypad, and/or viewing and/or selecting available Options for contacting users. Automatically attempts to initiate this communication via the terrestrial wireless communication network and displays the phone user interface such that

173

The ability to communicate without requiring user input is beneficial in emergency situations where the user is unable to provide user input to initiate the communication via the terrestrial wireless network. This provides improved visual feedback and reduces the time required to perform the operation. Enter the quantity.

[0702] In some embodiments, in response to receiving a request to initiate this communication (e.g., 1510A, 1510B, 1510C, 1510D, 1510E1, 1510E2, 1510E3, 1510I, 1510J, 1510K, 1510L, 1510M, and/or 1510R), and upon determining that the external computer system (e.g., 1500B) is not connected to the terrestrial wireless communications network, the computer system displays an option (e.g., 1534C6) via the output generation component that, when selected (e.g., via a tap gesture on the option), This option initiates communications (e.g., sending text messages, Instant messaging, voice messaging, and/or email) processes (e.g., on a computer system and/or an external computer system). In some embodiments, the prompt to connect to a non-terrestrial network using an external computer system includes an option, when selected, to initiate a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial network. In response to receiving a request to initiate communication and based on a determination that the external computer system is not connected to the terrestrial wireless communications network, displaying an option to initiate a process for communicating via the non-terrestrial network provides the user with the option to use a call or other form of communication as compared to a call or other form of communication. The option of a less data-intensive method of initiating communication, which can be beneficial in situations where a computer system cannot communicate via other forms of communication, provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform an operation.

[0703] In some embodiments, the request to initiate the communication includes data indicating that the user of the computer system has fallen (eg, as described with reference to Figure 15H). In some embodiments, in response to receiving a request to initiate the communication: the computer system automatically (e.g., without user input) attempts (e.g., via a terrestrial wireless communications network and/or a non-terrestrial wireless communications network) to communicate with Communicate to determined entities (eg, 911, emergency services, and/or one or more predetermined contactable entities, such as designated emergency contacts) (eg, as described with reference to Figure 15H). In some embodiments, the computer system communicates with one or more motion sensors (eg, accelerometers and/or gyroscopes) configured to detect motion of the computer system. In some embodiments, when motion (e.g., detected speed and/or acceleration) of the computer system (or another device associated with the user) meets a set of motion criteria (e.g., meets or exceeds a threshold speed and/or acceleration), a determination is made that the user has fallen. In some embodiments, the computer system communicates with one or more biometric sensors (eg, heart rate sensor and/or blood oxygen monitor) that can be used to determine that the user has fallen. In some embodiments, in response to receiving the request to initiate the communication and before automatically attempting the communication, the computer system displays a countdown (eg, a numeric countdown for the amount of time until the computer system will automatically attempt the communication). In some embodiments, the computer system displays a selectable option to cancel the countdown concurrently with the countdown (e.g., if the option to cancel the countdown is selected before the countdown ends, the computer system does not automatically attempt communication). In some embodiments, the computer system displays the countdown, displays an option to cancel the countdown, and/or automatically attempts communication based on a determination that the user of the computer system has fallen. Automatic attempts to communicate in response to detection that the user has fallen provides the user with a means to communicate when the user is injured and/or unable to interact with the computer system (e.g., if the user is unable to initiate communication), which reduces the amount of input required to perform an operation .

[0704] In some embodiments, after automatically attempting to communicate with a predetermined entity: upon determining that a message was automatically sent via a non-terrestrial network (e.g., via one or more satellites), the computer system (e.g., 1500A, 1500B and/or 1500C) displays an indication (e.g., 1524B1, 1526B3, and/or 1536c2) that a message was automatically sent via the non-terrestrial network (e.g., summary user interface, notification, text, and/or graphics). In some embodiments, an indication that the message was automatically sent via the non-terrestrial network (eg, based on a determination that the message was automatically sent via the non-terrestrial network) is displayed on the external computer system. In some embodiments, displaying the indication that the message was automatically sent via the non-terrestrial network includes displaying that the message includes

174

A summary of the information in the message (e.g., location, medical information, and/or identifying information). An indication that a message was automatically sent via a non-terrestrial network, based on a determination that the message was automatically sent via a non-terrestrial network, is provided to the user with information about the message, enabling the user to make an attempt to communicate (e.g., an attempt to call emergency services) when it is not required or desired. ), and/or enable the user to provide additional information, which provides improved visual feedback to the user.

[0705] In some embodiments, after receiving a request to initiate the communication (or optionally, in response to the receipt), the computer system displays selectable sound options (e.g., 1536C3) via the output generation component (e.g., button, affordance, and/or graphical indication) that, when selected, causes the external computer system to output audio (for example, as shown in Figure 15AD). In some embodiments, the computer system displays selectable sound options based on determining that the external computer system is not connected to the terrestrial wireless communications network. In some embodiments, the computer system displays selectable sound options simultaneously with a prompt to connect to a non-terrestrial network using an external computer system. In some embodiments, the computer system displays selectable sound options in response to detecting selection of a prompt to use an external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network. In some embodiments, the computer system combines the selectable sound option with an option that, when selected, causes the computer system and/or the external computer system to attempt (or retry) to call the predetermined entity via the terrestrial wireless communications network (e.g., again Call Options) are also displayed. Displaying selectable sound options provides the user with a technique for locating the external computer system, which reduces the amount of time the user needs to locate the external computer system, and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface.

[0706] In some embodiments, after receiving a request to initiate the communication, the computer system attempts to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communications network; and after attempting (e.g., unsuccessfully attempting) to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communications network, The computer system displays, via an output generation component, a selectable calling option (e.g., 1522A3 and/or 1536c4) (e.g., a button, affordance, and/or graphical indication) that, when selected, initiates a call via the terrestrial wireless communications network An attempt to communicate (e.g., another attempt). In some embodiments, selectable calling options are displayed simultaneously with a prompt to use an external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network. Displaying selectable calling options after attempting to communicate via the terrestrial wireless communications network provides the user with an efficient means of reattempting communication via the terrestrial wireless communications network (which may be the preferred communication method), which improves visual feedback to the user and reduces the number of inputs required to perform operations.

[0707] In some embodiments, providing a prompt to use an external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network is based on a determination that the request to initiate such communication includes initiating a communication with a predefined entity (e.g., emergency services, or a user associated with the computer system). A request for communication from a contactable user designated as an emergency contact (eg, computer system 1500A displays prompt 1522A2 for a call to 911 in FIG. 15I ). In some embodiments, in response to receiving the request to initiate the communication: based on determining that the external computer system is not connected to the terrestrial wireless communication network and the request to initiate the communication does not include a request to initiate communication with a predefined entity, the computer system waives the provision Prompts for connecting to non-terrestrial networks using an external computer system (e.g., computer system 1500A does not display prompt 1522A2 for the number called in Figure 15A) (e.g., computer system only provides use in response to a request to initiate communication with a predefined entity Tips for connecting external computer systems to non-terrestrial networks). Provided based on whether the request initiating the communication includes a request to initiate communication with a predefined entity (or forgo providing) prompts for using external computer systems to connect to non-terrestrial networks, which provides improved visuals by providing the prompt when context relevant and avoiding distracting the user with options that are unlikely to be relevant in typical situations Feedback, performs an action when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input, and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface. Abstaining from providing a prompt to use an external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network reduces bandwidth constraints when the request to initiate that communication does not include a request to initiate communication with a predefined entity (e.g., emergency services)

175

Limiting non-emergency use of bandwidth increases the likelihood that sufficient bandwidth will be available for emergency communications.

[0708] In some embodiments, providing a prompt to use an external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network (e.g., 1522A2 and/or 1534c6) is based on determining that the external computer system (e.g., 1500B) is capable of connecting to a non-terrestrial network (or any Optionally, communication is performed via a non-terrestrial network) (eg, the external computer system includes hardware and/or software that enables the external computer system to connect to and communicate via the non-terrestrial network). In some embodiments, in response to receiving a request to initiate the communication: based on a determination that the external computer system is not connected to the terrestrial wireless communications network and the external computer system is capable of connecting to (or optionally communicating via) the non-terrestrial network, Computer systems waive prompts for using external computer systems to connect to non-terrestrial networks (e.g., computer systems offer to use external computer systems to connect to non-terrestrial networks only if the external computer systems are capable of connecting to and/or communicating via non-terrestrial networks). Tips for terrestrial networks). Providing (or forgoing providing) a prompt for using an external computer system to connect to a non-terrestrial network based on whether the external computer system is capable of connecting to a non-terrestrial network will provide the prompt when context relevant and avoid options that are unavailable because the external computer system's capabilities are not available to distract the user, this provides improved visual feedback, performs actions when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input, and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface.

[0709] Note that the details of the process described above with respect to method 1600 (eg, FIG. 16) also apply in a similar manner to the method described above. For example, methods 700 , 800 , 1000 , 1200 , 1400 , 1800 , 2000 , and/or 2200 optionally include one or more of the features of the various methods described above with reference to method 1600 . For example, methods 700, 800, 1000, 1200, and/or 1400 optionally include the techniques described in method 1600 for initiating communications. For example, method 1800 may initiate communication from a messaging application in accordance with method 1600 . For example, initiating communications as described in method 1600 may be simulated in an alternative communications network test mode in method 2000. For example, initiating communication described in method 1600 may be a process corresponding to the user interface object in method 2200. For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated below.

[0710] Figures 17A-17R illustrate an exemplary user interface for initiating communications via an alternative communications network, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in Figure 18. In some embodiments, initiating and/or completing communications via the alternative communications network includes performing one or more of the methods described with reference to FIG. 7 , FIG. 8 , and/or FIG. 10 (eg, methods 700 , 800 , and/or 1000 ). indivual.

[0711] In some embodiments, any of the selections, requests, and/or inputs (eg, 1750a-1750z) described herein are or include touch inputs (eg, tap gestures and/or swipe gestures). In some embodiments, any of the selections, requests, and/or inputs described herein (e.g., 1750a-1750z) are or include voice input (e.g., to select a user interface element or activate a feature or perform a function (such as with Features or functions associated with user interface elements) voice commands). In some embodiments, any of the selections, requests, and/or inputs described herein (e.g., 1750a1750z) are or include air gestures (e.g., to select user interface elements or activate features or perform functions (such as with user interface air gestures) that feature or function the element is associated with). In some embodiments, any of the selections, requests, and/or inputs described herein (e.g., 1750a-1750z) are or include hardware devices (e.g., buttons, rotatable input mechanisms, rotatable depressible input mechanisms, mouse Activation (e.g., pressing, rotating and/or moving) of buttons, remote control buttons and/or joysticks). In some embodiments, any of the user interface elements described herein as being selected (e.g., icons, affordances, buttons, and/or selectable options) by placing that user interface element in focus (e.g., highlighted, bolded, outlined, visually distinguished from other user interface elements, and/or or at or near the cursor) is selected by activating the hardware device.

176

[0712] Figures 17A-17R illustrate the computer system 600 described above with reference to, for example, Figure 6A. Notably, FIGS. 17C-17F illustrate embodiments in which computer system 600 has cellular service, while FIGS. 17G-17R illustrate embodiments in which computer system 600 does not have cellular service, as indicated by cellular status indicator 1701. instruct.

[0713] In FIG. 17A, the computer system displays a home screen 1700 that includes selectable application icons for launching corresponding applications, including a messaging application icon 1700a. In response to detecting selection 1750a of messaging application icon 1700a, computer system 600 displays user interface 1702 for the messaging application, as shown in Figure 17B. User interface 1702 includes a new messaging option 1702a, as well as a list of messaging conversations (eg, previous and/or existing messaging conversations) between a user associated with computer system 600 and one or more other entities. The list of messaging conversations in user interface 1702 includes a conversation item 1702b corresponding to a messaging conversation with emergency services, a conversation item 1702c corresponding to a messaging conversation with 911 (eg, an emergency number), and a conversation item 1702c corresponding to a messaging conversation with non-emergency services or Conversation item 1702d for the message conversation of a number (eg, a contactable user named Trevor).

[0714] In response to detecting selection 1750b of new message option 1702a, computer system 600 displays a new message interface 1704 for sending a new message, as shown in Figure 17C. New message interface 1704 includes a recipient field 1704a, a message composition field 1704c for entering content (e.g., text, images, and/or icons) for a new message, and a message composition field 1704c for sending a message that includes content entered into message composition field 1704c. Send option 1704d, and a keyboard 1704e for selecting text to enter into the message composition field 1704c. In Figure 17C, the user has entered an emergency number (e.g., 911 or other local emergency number) into the recipient field 1704a (e.g., via inputs 1750x and 1750 on keys "9" and "1" in keyboard 1704e, respectively. 1750y). In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 17C, in response to the emergency number being entered into the recipient field 1704a, the computer system 600 displays a recipient suggestion 1704b corresponding to the emergency service as the emergency number is entered into the recipient field 1704b. in field 104a. In some embodiments, in response to the emergency number being entered into recipient field 1704a, computer system 600 does not display emergency services as a suggested recipient (eg, recipient suggestion 1704b).

[0715] In response to detecting selection 1750g of message writing field 1704c in Figure 17C, computer system 600 displays a message conversation with the emergency number, as shown in Figure 17D. Message area 1706 includes previous messages between users associated with computer system 600 and 911, including message 1706b from the user associated with computer system 600 to the emergency number and from the emergency number to the emergency number associated with computer system 600. User's message 1706c. Time indicator 1706a indicates the time when message 1706b was sent. In the new message interface 1704, the user can use the keyboard 1704e to generate a message in the message composition field 1704c and select the send option 1704d to send the message to the emergency number.

[0716] Turning to Figure 17F, computer system 600 displays a user interface 1708 (eg, of a messaging application or emergency messaging application) that includes messages between emergency services and users associated with computer system 600 dialogue. In some embodiments, user interface 1708 is messaging interface 602T, reporting interface 602U, messaging interface 902K, messaging interface 902L, messaging interface 902M, messaging interface 902N, and/or reporting interface 1526B (or a combination of these interfaces). feature). In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays user interface 1708 in response to detecting selection 1750f in FIG. 17C corresponding to recipient suggestion 1704b for emergency services. In some embodiments, when computer system 600 has cellular service, computer system 600 displays user interface 1708 as shown in Figure 17E in response to detecting selection 1750c of dialogue item 1702b in Figure 17B corresponding to emergency services.

[0717] In Figure 17E, user interface 1708 includes a text to emergency number option 1710a and a call emergency number option 1710b. In response to detecting selection of the call emergency number option 1710b, computer system 600 initiates a call to the emergency number (eg, 911 or other emergency number). In response to detecting selection of the Text to emergency number option 1710a, the computer system 600 initiates a process for sending a text message to the emergency number. For example, in some embodiments, the

177

In response to detecting selection 1750 of the text to emergency number option 1710a, the computer system 600 initiates a new text message to the emergency number (e.g., displays a new message interface 1704 as shown in Figure 17D, with the recipient field pre-populated with the emergency number, and optionally display previous message conversations with 911 1706). In some embodiments, when computer system 600 has cellular service, user interface 1708 includes message writing field 1708b, sending options 1708c, and optional keyboard 1706d (eg, as shown in Figure 17I).

[0718] In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 17F, in response to detecting selection 1710 of the text to emergency number option 1750a, the computer system 600 displays a user interface 1712 of the messaging application having a message area 1712a, message writing field 1712b, send message option 1712c, and keyboard 1712d. Message area 1712a includes message 1706b from a user associated with computer system 600 to 911 and message 1706c from 911 to a user associated with computer system 600 (eg, the same message as in message area 1706). In user interface 1712, the user can use keyboard 1712d to generate a message in message composition field 1712b and select send option 1712b to send the message to 911. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays user interface 1712 in response to detecting selection 1750d of dialog item 1702c in Figure 17B.

[0719] FIG. 17G illustrates an embodiment in which computer system 600 does not have cellular service, as indicated by cellular status indicator 1701. In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 17G, when computer system 600 does not have a cellular connection, in response to entering an emergency number (eg, 911) into recipient field 1704a of new message interface 1704 (eg, via Upon input 1750x and 1750y on keys "9" and "1" in keyboard 1704e), computer system 600 displays a recipient suggestion 1704b corresponding to the emergency service and a call emergency number option 1704f (e.g., because the emergency number is entered into the recipient). in the To field 1704a and the computer system 600 does not have a cellular connection). Call emergency number option 1704f indicates that computer system 600 is attempting to connect to a cellular network (eg, "Looking for service..."). In some embodiments, in response to detecting selection of the call emergency number option 1704f, computer system 600 attempts to initiate a call to the emergency number (eg, as shown in Figure 6E).

[0720] In Figure 17G, computer system 600 detects selection 1750r of message composition field 1704c. As shown in Figure 17H, in response to detecting selection 1750r of message writing field 1704c, computer system 600 displays message area 1706, This area includes a time indicator 1706a, a message 1706b from a user associated with computer system 600 to the emergency number, and a message 1706c from the emergency number to a user associated with computer system 600 (e.g., as shown in Figure 17D description). Because computer system 600 does not have cellular service in Figure 17H (eg, for standard communications and/or emergency communications purposes), computer system 600 displays (eg, in message area 1706) a Connect via satellite option 1706d. In some embodiments, when message area 1706 is initially displayed (eg, in response to detecting selection 1750r of message writing field 1704c in Figure 17G), computer system 600 displays the connect via satellite option 1706d. In some embodiments, when computer system 600 does not have cellular service, when a user attempts to send a message to the emergency number (e.g., in response to detecting a selection of content to include in message writing field 1704c, such as keyboard 1704e Upon input 1750u) and/or selection 1750t) of transmit option 1704d), computer system 600 displays the connect via satellite option 1706d.

[0721] In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 17I, in response to detecting selection 17501 of the connect via satellite option 1706d, computer system 600 displays a user interface 1708 for sending a message to emergency services via the satellite communications network. User interface 1708 includes messaging conversations between emergency services and users associated with computer system 600 . In some embodiments, user interface 1708 is messaging interface 602T, reporting interface 602U, messaging interface 902K, messaging interface 902L, messaging interface 902M, messaging interface 902N, and/or reporting interface 1526B (or a combination of these interfaces). feature). In some embodiments, because computer system 600 does not have cellular service, user interface 1708

178

Includes message writing field 1708b, send option 1708c, and keyboard 1706d (eg, instead of text to emergency number option 1710a and/or call emergency number option 1710b, as described above with reference to Figure 17E). In user interface 1708 shown in Figure 17I, the user can use keyboard 1708d to generate a message in message writing field 1708b and select send option 1708c to send the message to emergency services. In some embodiments, when computer system 600 does not have cellular service, computer system 600 displays user interface 1708 as shown in Figure 17I in response to detecting selection 1750c of dialogue item 1702b in Figure 17B corresponding to emergency services.

[0722] Turning to Figure 17L, computer system 600 displays user interface 1712 for a messaging application (eg, described above with reference to Figure 17F). In some embodiments, when computer system 600 does not have cellular service, computer system 600 displays user interface 1712 as shown in Figure 17J in response to detecting selection 1750d of dialogue item 1702c in Figure 17B.

[0723] In Figure 17J, because computer system 600 does not have cellular service (eg, as opposed to Figure 17F), user interface 1712 (eg, in message area 1712) includes a connect via satellite option 1706d. In some embodiments, when user interface 1712 is initially displayed, computer system 600 displays the Connect via satellite option 1706d (e.g., when computer system 600 does not have cellular service, in response to detecting selection 1750d of dialog item 1702c in FIG. 17B ). In some embodiments, when computer system 600 does not have cellular service, when a user attempts to send a message to the emergency number (e.g., in response to detecting a selection of content to be included in message writing field 1712b, such as keyboard 1712d Upon input 1750v) and/or selection 1750s) of transmit option 1712c, computer system 600 displays the connect via satellite option 1706d.

[0724] In some embodiments, in response to detecting selection 1750k of the connect via satellite option 1706d, computer system 600 displays a user interface 1708 for sending a message to emergency services, as shown and described with reference to Figure 17I.

[0725] In some embodiments, in response to detecting a selection of the connect via satellite option 1706d (e.g., selection 1750j in FIG. 17H or selection 1750k in FIG. 17J ), computer system 600 initiates generating a message to be sent to Communications for emergency services and/or the process of connecting computer system 600 to an alternative communications network, such as a non-terrestrial wireless communications network (eg, a satellite communications network). For example, in response to detecting selection of the connect via satellite option 1706d, computer system 600 performs the process described in Figures 6M-6Y, method 800, the process described in Figures 9c-9U, and/or method 1000. In some embodiments, when computer system 600 does not have cellular service, computer system 600 performs the process, method 800, Figure 9c described in Figures 6M-6Y in response to detecting selection 1750d of dialogue item 1702c in Figure 17B To the process and/or method 1000 described in Figure 9U. In some embodiments, when computer system 600 does not have cellular service, in response to detecting an attempt to send a message to an emergency number (eg, selection 1750t of send option 1704d in Figure 17H and/or selection of send option 1712c in Figure 17J Selection 1750s), computer system 600 performs the process described in FIGS. 6M-6Y, method 800, the process described in FIGS. 9c-9U, and/or method 1000.

[0726] In some embodiments, in response to detecting selection 1750k of the connection via satellite option 1706d in Figure 17J, computer system 600 displays a reporting interface 1714 for generating communications to be sent via the alternative communications network, as shown in Figure 17K shown. In some embodiments, the computer system displays reporting interface 1714 in response to selection 1750j of connection via satellite option 1706d in Figure 17H. In some embodiments, when computer system 600 does not have cellular service, computer system displays reporting interface 1714 in response to detecting selection 1750d of dialog item 1702c in Figure 17B. In some embodiments, when computer system 600 does not have cellular service, the computer system responds to detecting an attempt to send a message to an emergency number (e.g., selection 1750t of send option 1704d in Figure 17H and/or selection of send option 1750d in Figure 17J Select option 1712c 1750s) to display the report interface 1714.

179

[0727] In some embodiments, reporting interface 1714 is (or includes features thereof) reporting interface 602M (eg, as described with reference to Figure 6M). In Figure 17K, reporting interface 1714 includes an interface for receiving a selection of an emergency type option via selection of an option from a set of options 1714a. The set of options 1714a includes selectable options for various types of emergencies (eg, vehicle problems, illness/injury, crime, lost or trapped, and fire). In response to receiving a selection of an emergency type (eg, an option in the set of options 1714a), the emergency type is included in the communication to be sent to the emergency services. For example, the set of options 1714a includes the lost or trapped option 1714a1.

[0728] In response to detecting selection 17501 of the lost or trapped option 1714a1, computer system 600 displays reporting interface 1716, as shown in Figure 17L. Reporting interface 1716 includes a set of options 1716a for providing additional information regarding the selected emergency type. For example, as shown in Figure 17L, the set of options 1716a includes options for selecting who needs help. [0729] In response to detecting selection 1750m of multi-person option 1716a1, computer system 600 displays a summary 1718a of content selected for communications to be sent to emergency services, as shown in summary interface 1718 in Figure 17M. In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays one or more additional sets of options for content to be included in the communication before displaying summary interface 1718. In some embodiments, summary interface 1718 is summary interface 602R and/or summary interface 602S (or is similar to or includes features of these summary interfaces).

[0730] In response to detecting selection 1750n of send report option 1718b or expiration of timer 1718c in FIG. 17M, computer system 600 initiates a process for sending the communication summarized in summary interface 1718. In some embodiments, if computer system 600 is connected to an alternative communications network, computer system 600 begins sending the communication in response to detecting selection 1750n of send report option 1718b in FIG. 17M or expiration of timer 1718c (e.g., , displaying the user interface 1722 described with reference to FIG. 17P).

[0731] In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 17N, if computer system 600 is not aligned with and/or connected to an alternative communication network, computer system 600 initiates a process for connecting computer system 600 to an alternative communication network. The process of aligning and/or connecting computer system 600 with an alternative communications network. In some embodiments, the process for aligning and/or connecting computer system 600 with an alternative communication network is the process and/or method 1000 described in Figures 9c-9Q ( or including its characteristics).

[0732] For example, in some embodiments, if computer system 600 is not aligned with an alternative communications network, computer system 600 displays alignment interface 1720, as shown in Figure 17N. For example, if computer system 600 is not aligned with an alternative communications network, computer system 600 displays as shown in Figure 17N in response to detecting selection 1750n of send report option 1718b in Figure 17M or expiration of timer 1718c. Alignment interface 1720.

[0733] In some embodiments, alignment interface 1720 is alignment interface 902C, alignment interface 902D, alignment interface 902E, alignment interface 902F, alignment interface 902G, alignment interface 902H, alignment interface 902I, alignment interface Quasi-interface 902J, alignment interface 902O, alignment interface 902O1, and/or alignment interface 902P (or features thereof), depending on the alignment and/or connection between computer system 600 and the alternative communications network, computer system 600 and/or the availability of alternative communications networks (e.g., the location of one or more satellites and/or whether the satellites are within range). For example, in some embodiments, alignment interface 1720 includes alignment elements 909 as described with reference to Figures 9c-9J and 9O-9P.

[0734] In Figure 17N, alignment interface 1720 includes alignment element 1720a, connection status indicator 1720b, and connection information 1720c. Alignment element 1720a provides a graphical representation of the alignment and/or connection status between computer system 600 and alternative communications networks. In some embodiments, alignment element 1720a is graphical element 931 (or includes features thereof). Connection status indicator 1720b provides a textual indication of the connection status between computer system 600 and an alternative communication network (e.g., looking for

180

signal, connected, connecting, not connected, bad connection, satellite out of range and/or satellite moved out of range). Connection information 1720c includes additional information regarding connection status and/or instructions for connecting (or remaining connected) to an alternative communications network. In some embodiments, connection status indicator 1720b and/or connection information 1720c is (or includes) text element 908C, text element 908D, text element 908E, as described with reference to Figures 9c-9J and 9O-9P. Text element 908F, text element 908G, text element 908H, text element 9081, text element 908J, text element 9080, text element 90801, and/or text element 908P, depending on the alignment between computer system 600 and the alternative communications network and/or connectivity, any obstruction between computer system 600 and the alternative communications network, and/or the availability of the alternative communications network (e.g., the location of one or more satellites and/or whether the satellites are within range).

[0735] In Figure 17N, computer system 600 is looking for a signal as indicated by connection status indicator 1720b (e.g., computer system 600 has just begun attempting to connect, there is an obstacle between computer system 600 and the satellite, and/or there is no satellite within the scope). Therefore, alignment element 1720a displays neither a connection nor an indication of an action to be taken by the user, and connection information 1720c provides general guidance for tracking satellites to send and receive messages.

[0736] Turning to Figure 170, computer system 600 is connected to an alternative communications network, and alignment interface 1720 (including alignment element 1720a and connection status indicator 1720b) has been updated accordingly. For example, in Figure 17O, the computer system 600 is in the same connection state as in Figure 9J, and the alignment interface 1720 is similar to the alignment interface 902J described with reference to Figure 9J, including the display of an open message option 1720d.

[0737] In response to detecting selection 1750o of open messaging option 1720d (or expiration of the time threshold), computer system 600 displays messaging interface 1722 as shown in Figure 17P. Messaging interface 1722 is, for example, messaging interface 902K (or includes features thereof). For example, messaging interface 1722 includes banner 1724 (eg, banner 926), message area 1722a, message writing field 1722b (eg, text box 912k), send option 1722c (eg, send affordance 916K), and message 1722d. In response to selection 1750P of message composition field 1722b, computer system 600 displays a keyboard. The user may send a message to emergency services via messaging interface 1722 by entering content into message composition field 1722b and selecting send option 1722c.

[0738] In some embodiments, computer system 600 performs the process of generating and/or initiating transmission of the communication (e.g., the processes described with reference to FIGS. 17K-17M, the processes described with reference to FIGS. 6M-6y, and/or methods 800) prior to performing a process for aligning and/or connecting computer system 600 with an alternative communication network (e.g., the processes described in FIGS. 17N-17P, 9c-9U process, and/or method 1000). For example, in some embodiments, computer system 600 responds to detecting selection 1750k of connection via satellite option 1706d in FIG. 17J, in response to selection 1750j of connection via satellite option 1706d in FIG. 17H, in response to when computer system 600 does not have Selection 1750d of conversation item 1702c in FIG. 17B is detected when cellular service is detected, and/or in response to an attempt to send a message to an emergency number is detected when computer system 600 does not have cellular service (e.g., selection of send option 1704d in FIG. 17H Alignment interface 1720 is displayed by selection 1750t and/or selection 1750s of send option 1712c in Figure 17J).

[0739] Turning to Figure 17Q, computer system 600 displays the new message interface 1704 described with reference to Figures 17C-17D and 17G-17H. In Figure 17Q, the text "TREVOR" has been entered into recipient field 1704a (eg, via input 1750z on keyboard 1704e). In response to entering "TREVOR" into the recipient field 1704a, the computer system 600 displays a recipient suggestion 1704g corresponding to a contactable user named Trevor for a non-emergency service or number. Notably, unlike the new message interface 1704 in Figures 17C and 17G, because the recipient entered into the recipient field 1704a is not an emergency number, the computer system 600 does not display an option to contact emergency services (e.g., Recipient suggestions 1704b or call emergency number options 1704f) corresponding to emergency services are not displayed, even if computer system 600 does not have beekeeping capabilities.

181

cellular service (e.g., as indicated by cellular status indicator 1701).

[0740] In some embodiments, in response to detecting selection 1750q of recipient suggestion 1704g (or in response to detecting selection 1750e of conversation item 1702d in Figure 17B), computer system 600 is displayed in association with computer system 600 A messaging interface 1726 for a messaging conversation in the messaging application between the connected user and the contactable user Trevor, as shown in Figure 17R. Messaging interface 1726 includes message area 1726a, message writing field 1726b, send options 1726c, and keyboard 1726d. Message area 1726a includes a message 1726e from a user associated with computer system 600 to contactable user Trevor and a message 1726f from contactable user Trevor to a user associated with computer system 600. It is worth noting that unlike the new message interface 1704 in Figure 17H and the user interface 1712 in Figure 17J, since the message conversation is not with an emergency number, even if the computer system 600 does not have cellular service (e.g., as a cellular status indication 1701), message interface 1726 also does not include an option to connect and/or send messages via an alternative communications network (eg, message interface 1726 does not include a connect via satellite option 1706d).

[0741] FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating a method for initiating communications via an alternative communications network using a computer system, in accordance with some embodiments. Method 1800 at a computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, 600, 900, 1100, 1300A, 1300B, 1500A, 1500B, 1500c, smart phone, smart watch, laptop, desktop computer, and/or tablet computer) Execution, the computer system with an output generating component (e.g., a display generating component, a display controller, a display device, a monitor, a touch-sensitive display system, one or more speakers, and/or one or more tactile output generators) and a or multiple input devices (e.g., 601, 901, 1106, 1302A, 1302B, 1502A, 1502B, 1502c, touch-sensitive surfaces, touch screens, buttons, keyboards, mice, cameras, rotatable input mechanisms, and/or microphones). Some operations in method 1800 are optionally combined, the order of some operations is optionally changed, and some operations are optionally omitted.

[0742] As described below, method 1800 provides an intuitive way to initiate communications over alternative communications networks. This approach reduces the cognitive load on users to initiate communications via alternative communication networks, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling users to initiate communication sessions over alternative communication networks more quickly and efficiently saves power and increases the time between battery charges.

[0743] The computer system detects (1802) a set of one or more inputs via one or more input devices (e.g., the input of "911" in 1750b, 1750d, 1750g, 1750x, 1750y, 1704a, the input to 1704c in Figure 17G Select 1750r, contact and/or touch gestures on touch-sensitive surfaces, air gestures, mouse clicks, key presses, button presses, and/or voice commands), including for text-based communications (e.g., SMS, MMS, instant Selection of the corresponding number (or, in some embodiments, the corresponding recipient) for messaging, IP-based messaging, or other text-based messaging communications). In some embodiments, corresponding numbers are associated with and/or correspond to contactable entities (eg, people, users, businesses, and/or services). In some embodiments, selection of the corresponding number includes entry of the corresponding number (e.g., via a keyboard) or selection of a contactable person associated with the corresponding number from a menu or list (e.g., a contact list and/or a search results list). entity. In some embodiments, selecting the corresponding number for the text-based communication includes selecting the corresponding number as an intended recipient of the text-based communication. In some embodiments, the computer system operates in a messaging application (eg, a text messaging application and/or an instant messaging application; the set of one or more inputs corresponds to a selection of the intended recipient of the new text message, a A search request for a corresponding number in a messaging application, and/or a selection of an existing or previous text message conversation that includes a corresponding number) is detected in the user interface (e.g., when the user interface is displayed). input. In some embodiments, the text message conversation including the corresponding number is included in the list of existing and/or previous text messages and/or text message conversations.

[0744] In response to (1804) detecting inclusion of a corresponding number for text-based communications (or, in some implementations

182

In the scheme, the set of one or more inputs selected by the corresponding recipient: determines according to (1806) to satisfy a set of alternative communication criteria, wherein the set of alternative communication criteria includes when the corresponding number (or in some embodiments, The first criterion is met when the corresponding recipient) is a corresponding type of number (or in some embodiments, a corresponding type of recipient), and when the corresponding communication network (or in some embodiments, the corresponding communication service, the corresponding communication protocol , a corresponding type of communication network, a corresponding type of communication service or a corresponding type of communication protocol) is not available (for example, when a terrestrial communication network such as a cellular communication network or a Wi-Fi network is not available; when no terrestrial communication network is available) Second criterion met: The computer system outputs (1808) via the output generation component a prompt (e.g., 1704b) that includes an indication (e.g., visual appearance, text, fonts, highlighting, animation, color, graphics, sound, and/or tactile output) and/or 1706d), the indication indicates the corresponding number (or in some embodiments, a corresponding recipient or emergency service) may be via an alternative communication network (or in some embodiments, an alternative communication service, an alternative communication protocol, an alternative type) that is different from the corresponding communication network communications network, alternative types of communications services, or alternative types of communications protocols). Outputting a prompt including an indication that communication with the corresponding number can be performed via the alternative communication network upon determining that a set of alternative communication criteria is met notifies the user that communication with the corresponding number is possible (even if the corresponding communication network is unavailable), and can Provides a fast and efficient means for communicating over alternative communications networks, which provides improved feedback to the user, reduces the amount of input required to perform operations, and provides additional control options without the burden of additional display controls The user interface is cluttered and performs actions when a set of conditions have been met without further user input. Providing fast and efficient access to the corresponding numbers allows the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in emergency situations when users may be stressed and more prone to errors.

[0745] In some embodiments, the corresponding type of number is a number associated with emergency services, a number designated as an emergency number, and/or a number associated with an emergency contact (e.g., a contactable entity designated as an emergency contact) associated number. Examples of numbers associated with emergency services include 911 in the United States, 999 in the United Kingdom, 112 in Europe, 110 and/or 119 in Japan, and 000 in Australia. In some embodiments, the corresponding communications network is a terrestrial communications network, a wireless terrestrial communications network, a cellular communications network, and/or a Wi-Fi network. In some embodiments, the second criterion is met only if no terrestrial communications network is available, including a cellular communications network of a service provider not associated with the computer system. In some embodiments, the set of alternative communication criteria is not met if the first criterion is not met and/or the second criterion is not met (e.g., the first criterion and the second criterion are necessary to satisfy the set of alternative communication criteria of). In some embodiments, if the strength and/or consistency of the signal and/or connection of the communication network is insufficient (e.g., does not meet a set of signal criteria) for the computer system to communicate via the communication network (e.g., via the communication network making phone calls and/or sending text messages), the communications network is unavailable. In some embodiments, if the computer system is not authorized to use or join the communications network (e.g., Wi-Fi network) (e.g., the computer system is not provided with the required authentication and/or password), the communications network is unavailable. In some embodiments, outputting the prompt includes displaying the prompt, outputting audio, and/or generating haptic output. In some embodiments, the prompt includes (or is) a graphical user interface object, an icon, a graphic, an animation, a selectable graphical user interface object, an affordance, a button, text, a sound, a haptic output, a pop-up menu, and/or Selectable options (such as those in a list of selectable options for a method to communicate with the corresponding number). Examples of methods for communicating with corresponding numbers include, but are not limited to, telephone calls, text messages (e.g., via terrestrial communication networks such as cellular communication networks or Wi-Fi networks, or non-terrestrial communication networks such as satellite communication networks), video calls, and electronic mail. In some embodiments, the alternative communication network is a non-terrestrial communication network (eg, a satellite communication network). In some implementations, the alternative communication network has a lower communication bandwidth (eg, data rate) than the communication bandwidth of the corresponding communication network.

[0746] In some embodiments, the response to detecting includes selection of a corresponding number for text-based communication

183

One or more inputs of the set: Based on a determination that the corresponding number is not a number of the corresponding type (e.g., the corresponding number is not a number associated with emergency services; and/or the set of alternative communication criteria is not met), the computer system abandons the prompt The output of (eg, neither 1704b nor 1706d is shown in Figure 17P or Figure 17Q). Discarding the output of the prompt based on a determination that the corresponding number is not a number of the corresponding type enables the computer system to provide the prompt only for a specific type of number (e.g., emergency number) and avoids cluttering the user interface with options when the options are not needed, which Provides improved feedback to the user, provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls, and performs actions when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input.

[0747] In some embodiments, the corresponding communication network is a terrestrial wireless communication network (eg, a cellular network and/or a WiFi network). In some embodiments, the second criterion is met when the terrestrial wireless communications network is unavailable (eg, when no terrestrial wireless communications network is available; and/or the computer system lacks connectivity to the terrestrial wireless communications network). Providing this prompt (as well as other criteria) when terrestrial wireless communications networks are unavailable enables computer systems to provide this prompt only when preferred (eg, higher speed, higher bandwidth, and/or lower power) communications networks are unavailable, and avoid This provides improved visual feedback to the user by cluttering the user interface with the prompt when it is not needed, and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls.

[0748] In some embodiments, after outputting the prompt, the computer system detects a set of one or more inputs (e.g., 1750i, 1750j, 1750k, selection 1750r of 1704c in Figure 17G and/or selection 1712c of Figure 17J Selection 1750s), the set of inputs includes a request to communicate with (e.g., send a message to) a corresponding entity (e.g., a corresponding number and/or emergency service) via an alternative communications network; and in response to detecting a request including communicating via an alternative communication network The set of one or more inputs to the network's request to communicate with the corresponding entity, the computer system displays a set of selectable communication content options (e.g., 1714a, 1716a, as shown in FIG. 6M to 604M, 604N, shown in Figure 6Q 604O, 604P and/or 604Q). In some embodiments, the set of selectable communication content options is specific to a mode for communicating over an alternative communication network (eg, a low bandwidth communication mode). In some embodiments, in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs that include a request to communicate with the corresponding entity via an alternative communications network, the computer system performs the operations described in FIGS. 6M-6W and/or method 800. Displaying a set of selectable communication content options corresponding to corresponding content for the communication in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs including a request to communicate with the corresponding entity via the alternative communication network provides for communication via the alternative Options that are optimal for network communication (e.g., require limited bandwidth), reduce the amount of input required to generate a message (e.g., do not use a keyboard), and guide users through the process for communicating over alternative communication networks, which provides Users are provided with improved visual feedback, reduce the amount of input required to perform actions, and provide additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls.

[0749] In some embodiments, after outputting the prompt, the computer system detects a set of one or more inputs (e.g., 1750i, 1750j, 1750k, 1750n, selection 1750r of 1704c in Figure 17G and/or 1750r in Figure 17J Selection 1750s of 1712c), the set of inputs includes a request to communicate with (e.g., send a message to) a corresponding entity (e.g., a corresponding number and/or emergency service) via an alternative communications network; and in response to detecting In response to the set of one or more inputs of a request to communicate with the corresponding entity over the selected communications network, the computer system initiates a process for connecting to the alternative communications network (or, in some embodiments, if the computer system is already connected to the alternative communications network, then remain connected to the alternative communication network), wherein the process for connecting to the alternative communication network includes displaying a prompt (e.g., 1720a, 1720c, 1724, notification, banner, text, graphical elements, audio, and/or instructions; and/ or 908C, 908D, 908E, 908F, 908G, 908H, 908I, 908J, 908O, 908O1, 908P, 926 and/or 931), which prompts the user to take action to connect the computer system to (or in some embodiments remain Computer systems are connected to) alternative communications networks. In some embodiments, for connection to

184

The process for an alternative communication network includes the user interface and/or features described in FIGS. 9c-9Q and method 1000. In some embodiments, the prompt for the user to take action to connect to the alternative communication network includes moving and/or positioning at least a portion of the computer system in a particular direction or location (e.g., turn left, point upward, and/or outward move) instructions. In some embodiments, the computer system displays causing the user to take action to connect based on a determination that the computer system is not connected to the alternative communications network (e.g., not properly aligned to communicate with one or more satellites of the alternative communications network) Tips to alternative communication networks. In some embodiments, the process for connecting to the alternative communication network includes displaying a status of the connection between the computing system and the alternative communication network (e.g., not connected, bad connection, attempting to connect, connecting, and/or connection) instructions. Initiating the process for connecting to the alternative communication network in response to detecting a request to communicate with the corresponding entity via the alternative communication network provides the user with a fast and efficient method of communicating via the alternative communication network, which reduces the number of operations to be performed number of inputs required, and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface. Displaying prompts that enable the user to take action to connect to the alternative communications network (e.g., providing a connection assistant) allows the user to quickly and efficiently resolve issues that prevent the computer system from connecting to the alternative communications network (e.g., misalignment) with less input and/or barriers), which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform an action.

[0750] In some embodiments, after outputting the prompt, the computer system detects a set of one or more inputs (e.g., 17501, 17501n, and/or 1750n) that includes sending a message via an alternative communications network (e.g., a request (or, in some embodiments, a command); and in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs that includes a request to send the message via the alternative communications network, the computer system sends the message via the alternative communications network . In some embodiments, the set of one or more inputs including a request to send a message via an alternative communications network includes a selection of an option for generating a message, a selection of message content (e.g., via a keyboard and/or a selection of a preset message). Define the selection of content options) and/or the selection of options for sending the generated message. Sending messages via an alternative communications network enables users to send messages even if the primary communications network is unavailable, which provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls.

[0751] In some embodiments, based on (or in some embodiments, in response to) determining that the corresponding communication network is unavailable, the computer system displays an indication of the communication capabilities of the computer system via a display generation component (e.g., Figures 17G-17Q 1701, graphical indications, icons, colors, fonts, text, animations, symbols, thumbnails, images and/or glyphs) (for example, where a computer system communicates with a corresponding number or entity (such as an emergency number or emergency service) an indication of capability); and upon determining that the corresponding communications network is available, the computer system waives an indication of the computer system's communications capability status (e.g., 1701 in Figures 17A-17F does not include "SOS"). In some embodiments, an indication of the communication capabilities of the computer system is displayed in a portion of the user interface that includes the status of the computer system (e.g., cellular status, Wi-Fi - one or more indicators of Fi status, time, short range communication status, and/or battery level). In some embodiments, an indication of the communication capabilities of the computer system is displayed somewhere on the display and/or user interface, The cellular status indicator is displayed there when cellular service is available. An indication of the computer system's communication capabilities is displayed based on whether the corresponding communication network is available (or forfeited to be displayed) when relevant information about the computer system's communication capabilities is required, e.g. Automatically provide this information to the user when the corresponding communication network is unavailable) and prevent cluttering the user interface when the corresponding communication network is available, which provides improved visual feedback to the user and performs actions when a set of conditions has been met without further need user input.

[0752] In some embodiments, displaying an indication of the computer system's communication capabilities includes displaying an indication (e.g., 607c) of the computer system's ability to communicate via a satellite communications network (e.g., an indication of satellite connectivity and/or an image of a satellite , icons or other graphic representations). In some embodiments, if (e.g., only if) the computer system's Wi-Fi

185

The computer system displays an indication of the computer system's ability to communicate via a satellite communications network if the computer system's Wi-Fi capabilities are disabled (e.g., Wi-Fi is turned off), and if the computer system's Wi-Fi capabilities are enabled (e.g., Wi-Fi is turned on) , an indication showing the computer system's ability to communicate via a satellite communications network is waived. An indication showing the computer system's ability to communicate via a satellite communications network provides clear feedback to the user that communications via satellite are possible even if the corresponding communications network is unavailable, and the user does not have to navigate a user interface to determine the computer system's communications capabilities. Provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform actions. Feedback regarding the communication capabilities of the computer system enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where users are responding to emergency or stressful situations.

[0753] In some embodiments, displaying an indication of the communication capabilities of the computer system includes: upon determining that the computer system is displaying a first type of user interface (e.g., 602Y, a user interface having a full or expanded area for displaying status icons , and/or a control center user interface that includes selectable controls for setting operating parameters and/or activating functions of the computer system), display an indication of the computer system's ability to communicate via the satellite communications network (e.g., 607c) (e.g., an indication of satellite connectivity and/or an image, glyph, or other graphical representation of a satellite); and based on a determination that the computer system is displaying a second type of user interface (e.g., 602J, with a zoom out for displaying status icons) size or compact area of the user interface), giving an indication of the computer system's ability to communicate via a satellite communications network. An indication of a computer system's ability to communicate via a satellite communication network based on the type of user interface displayed by the computer system provides the user with the ability to communicate via satellite even if the corresponding communication network is unavailable when sufficient space is present on the user interface. clear feedback and the user does not have to navigate the user interface to determine the communication capabilities of the computer system, rather than displaying that indication when there is less space on the user interface, this provides improved visual feedback to the user and reduces the amount of time spent on the user interface reduces clutter and reduces the number of inputs required to perform operations. Feedback regarding the communication capabilities of the computer system enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where users are responding to emergency or stressful situations.

[0754] In some embodiments, the corresponding type of number is an emergency number (e.g., 911 in the United States, 999 in the United Kingdom, 112 in Europe, 110 and/or 119 in Japan, or 000 in Australia), and: in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs (e.g., 1750b, 1750d, 1750g, 1750x, 1750y, input of "911" in 1704a, selection 1750r of 1704c in Figure 17G), the computer system displays options for initiating a process for communicating with emergency services (e.g., 1704b and/or 1706d) ( The option is a selectable option, icon, button, affordance, and/or user interaction graphical user interface object). In some embodiments, in response to a request to send a message to an emergency number or to search for an emergency number (e.g., to start a new conversation or to continue a previous conversation), the computer system initiates a process for communicating with the emergency service or displays a request to initiate a communication with the emergency service. Communication process options. In some embodiments, if the user selects 911 as the recipient of the text message when the corresponding communications network is unavailable, the computer system displays an option to initiate a process for sending the message to emergency services. In some embodiments, in response to detecting selection of an option to initiate a process for sending a message to emergency services, the computer system displays a display for generating a message and/or sending a message to emergency services (e.g., as shown in Figures 6M-6s As shown in ) and/or a set of user interfaces for aligning and/or connecting a computer system with an alternative communication network (e.g., as shown in Figures 9c through 9P ). In some embodiments, In response to detecting selection of an option to initiate a process for sending a message to the emergency services, the computer system displays a messaging interface (eg, of a messaging application) for sending a message to the emergency services. In some embodiments, if the user selects 911 as the recipient of the text message when the corresponding communications network is unavailable, the computer system automatically (e.g., without displaying an option to initiate a process for sending a message to emergency services) displays: for generating a message and/or notify emergency services

186

A set of user interfaces for sending messages (e.g., as shown in Figures 6M through 6s); a set of user interfaces for aligning and/or connecting computer systems with alternative communication networks (e.g., as shown in Figures 9c through Figures 9P); and/or a messaging interface (e.g., a messaging application's) for sending messages to emergency services. Displaying an option to initiate a process for communicating with emergency services based on a determination that the set of alternative communication criteria is met provides feedback to the user regarding being able to communicate in an emergency and provides the user with a quick and efficient way to communicate in an emergency. Without cluttering the user interface in non-urgent circumstances, this provides improved visual feedback to the user, provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls, and executes when a set of conditions has been met operates without further user input. Feedback regarding the communication capabilities of the computer system enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where users are responding to emergency or stressful situations.

[0755] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs that include a selection of a corresponding number for text-based communication: upon determining that a corresponding communication network is available, the computer system displays a display for initiating a communication for text-based communication. Options (e.g., 1704b, 1710a, 1710b, selectable options, icons, buttons, affordance representation and/or user interaction graphical user interface objects). Displaying an option to initiate a process for communicating with emergency services via the respective communications network upon determining that the respective communications network is available provides feedback to the user regarding being able to communicate in an emergency situation and enables the user to communicate with emergency services more quickly and easily , which provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the amount of input required to perform an action, provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls, and performs actions when a set of conditions have been met No further user input is required. Feedback regarding the communication capabilities of the computer system enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where users are responding to emergency or stressful situations.

[0756] In some embodiments, the computer system detects a set of one or more inputs (e.g., 1750d and/or 1750r) that includes a request to display a message conversation with the corresponding number (e.g., includes a request associated with the computer system a user interface of a messaging application for a messaging conversation between a user and a corresponding number, wherein the messaging conversation includes one or more messages between a user associated with a computer system and a corresponding number); in response to detecting a message including displaying The set of one or more inputs requested for a message conversation with the corresponding number, the computer system displays the message conversation with the corresponding number (e.g., 1706 in Figure 17H and/or 1712a in Figure 17I); and when displaying a message conversation with the corresponding number: based on a determination that a set of message communication criteria (e.g., the set of alternative communication criteria) is satisfied, wherein the Group message communication criteria include criteria that are met when a corresponding communications network is unavailable (or, in some embodiments, when a terrestrial communications network is unavailable) and the computer system displays an option to connect to an alternative communications network (e.g., 1706d, selectable option, icons, buttons, affordances, and/or user interaction graphical user interface objects) (and/or in some embodiments, an option to initiate a process for connecting to an alternative communication network). Displaying the option to connect to an alternative communication network when displaying a message conversation with the corresponding number and based on a determination that a set of message communication criteria are met provides the user with feedback on being able to communicate in an emergency and a quick way to connect to the alternative communication network and efficient means of eliminating the need to navigate the user interface when the option may be needed and not cluttering the user interface when the option is not required, which provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the amount of input required to perform an action, and provides Provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls, and performs actions when a set of conditions has been met without requiring further user input. Feedback regarding the communication capabilities of the computer system enables the computer system to be controlled more quickly and efficiently, which is particularly important in situations where users are responding to emergency or stressful situations.

[0757] In some embodiments, displaying a connection to an alternative communication network based on a determination that the set of message communication criteria is met

187

The option of occurs in response to detection of the set of one or more inputs including a request to display a message conversation with the corresponding number (e.g., 1706d is displayed when 1706 and/or 1712 is displayed) (e.g., if the corresponding communications network is not available , the computer system displays the option to connect to an alternative communications network when displaying a message dialog). Displaying an option to connect to an alternative communications network in response to detecting a request to display a message conversation with a corresponding number enables the computer system to display the option when displaying the message conversation without requiring the user to navigate the user interface and when the option is not required Without cluttering the user interface, this provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the amount of input required to perform an action, and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls.

[0758] In some embodiments, displaying the option to connect to an alternative communication network based on a determination that the set of message communication criteria is met occurs in response to detecting a set of one or more inputs that includes a request to send a message to a corresponding number. (e.g., 1706d is displayed when 1706c and/or 1712c is selected) (e.g., sending a new message in the message conversation) (e.g., if the corresponding communication network is unavailable, the computer system responds to receiving a message to the corresponding number in the message conversation) A request to send a text message and the option to connect to an alternative communications network is displayed). Displaying the option to connect to an alternative communications network in response to detecting a request to send a message to a corresponding number enables the computer system to avoid displaying the option until the user indicates an intent to send a message and does not require the user to specify the option to connect to the alternative communications network While navigating the user interface, this provides users with improved visual feedback, reduces the amount of input required to perform actions, and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls.

[0759] In some embodiments, outputting the prompt (e.g., 1704b and/or 1706d) includes in the messaging application's user interface (e.g., 1704, 1712, providing for generating the text message and/or sending the text message and/or This prompt appears in applications that display a user interface for a messaging conversation between two or more participants in a messaging conversation. Displaying this prompt in the user interface of the messaging application automatically informs the user that communication with the corresponding number can be performed via an alternative communication network in the context that the user has indicated an intention to send the communication, which provides improved visual feedback to the user, The amount of input required to perform an operation is reduced, and additional control options are provided without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls.

[0760] Note that the details of the process described above with respect to method 1800 (eg, Figure 18) also apply in a similar manner to the methods described below and above. For example, methods 700, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 2000, and/or 2200 optionally include one or more of the features of the various methods described above with reference to method 1800. For example, initiating communication according to method 1800 may initiate display of the set of options in method 800. For example, initiating communication in accordance with method 1800 may initiate display of the alignment elements in method 1000 . For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated below.

[0761] Figures 19A-19O illustrate an exemplary user interface for providing alternative communication network test modes in accordance with some embodiments. The user interface in these figures is used to illustrate the process described below, including the process in Figure 20. In some embodiments, providing an alternative communication network test mode includes performing one or more of the methods described with reference to FIG. 7, FIG. 8, and/or FIG. 10 (eg, methods 700, 800, and/or 1000).

[0762] In some embodiments, any of the selections, requests, and/or inputs described herein (eg, 1950a-1950s) are or include touch inputs (eg, tap gestures and/or swipe gestures). In some embodiments, any of the selections, requests, and/or inputs described herein (e.g., 1950a-1950s) are or include voice input (e.g., to select user interface elements or activate features or perform functions (such as with Features or functions associated with user interface elements) voice commands). In some embodiments, any of the selections, requests, and/or inputs described herein (e.g., 1950a1950s) are or include air gestures (e.g., to select user interface elements or activate features or perform functions (such as with user interface air gestures) that feature or function the element is associated with). In some embodiments, the selection, request, and

188

and/or any of the inputs (e.g., 1950a-1950s) is or includes a hardware device (e.g., a button, a rotatable input mechanism, a rotatable depressible input mechanism, a mouse button, a remote control button, and/or a joystick) Activation (e.g., pressing, rotating, and/or moving). In some embodiments, any of the user interface elements described herein (e.g., icons, affordances, buttons, and/or selectable options) are selected by selecting , bolded, outlined, visually distinguished from other user interface elements, and/or located at or near the cursor) is selected when the hardware device is activated.

[0763] Figure 19A illustrates the computer system 600 described above with reference to, for example, Figure 6A. In Figure 6A, computer system 600 has cellular service, as indicated by network indicator 607, and displays a home screen 1900 that includes applications for launching, opening, and/or displaying corresponding applications and/or user interfaces. Program icon. The computer system detects a request 1950a to display selectable options for displaying the user's medical information associated with computer system 600 (e.g., one or more presses on button 617a and/or button 617b; in some embodiments, 617a and button 617b are pressed simultaneously). In response to the detected request 1950a, the computer system 600 displays a user interface 1902, as shown in Figure 19B, which includes a display shutdown option 1902a, a medical ID option 1902b, and an emergency communications option 1902c. In Figure 19B, computer system 600 detects selection 1950c of medical ID option 1902b (eg, touch and drag to the right or swipe, tap, and/or other selection input).

[0764] In response to detecting selection 1950c of medical ID option 1902b, computer system 600 displays user interface 1904, as shown in Figure 19C, which user interface includes medical information about the user associated with computer system 600, the medical The information relates to the user's medical history and/or status or may be relevant in a medical emergency. This medical information includes, but is not limited to, for example, the user's name, age, medical conditions, allergies and reactions, medications, blood type, weight and/or height. Displaying the user interface 1904 includes displaying the emergency communication object 1906 (eg, the user interface 1904 includes the emergency communication object 1906). Emergency communications object 1906 includes a description 1906a of the emergency communications capabilities of computer system 600 to connect to satellites and communicate with emergency services when cellular service is unavailable (e.g., emergency SOS via satellite: your phone can initiate a satellite connection to help if the call is unavailable Contact emergency services when completed). Emergency communications object 1906 includes a demonstration option 1906b for initiating an alternative communications network test mode that demonstrates and/or simulates emergency communications capabilities. For example, in response to detecting selection 1950o of presentation option 1906b (eg, a tap on presentation option 1906b and/or other input selecting presentation option 1906b), computer system 600 displays guidance user interface 1912 shown in Figure 19F .

[0765] Returning to Figure 19A, computer system 600 detects selection 1950b of settings icon 1900a (eg, a tap on settings icon 1900a and/or other input that selects settings icon 1900a). In response to detecting selection 1950b of settings icon 1900a, computer system 600 displays settings menu user interface 1908, as shown in Figure 19D. Settings menu user interface 1908 includes emergency SOS option 1908a. In Figure 19D, computer system 600 detects selection 1950d of emergency SOS option 1908a (eg, a tap on emergency SOS option 1908a and/or other input selecting emergency SOS option 1908a).

[0766] In response to detecting selection of emergency SOS option 1908a, computer system 600 displays emergency SOS settings user interface 1910, as shown in Figure 19E. Emergency SOS settings user interface 1910 includes information and settings options for emergency communication features of computer system 600, such as how to make emergency calls. Emergency SOS settings user interface 1910 includes emergency communication object 1906 described with reference to Figure 19C. In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 19E, the emergency communication object 1906 is displayed in a prominent position (eg, overlaid on or at or near the top of the emergency SOS settings user interface 1910). By displaying the emergency communication object 1906 in a prominent position, the computer system 600 prompts the user to use an alternative communication network test mode, suggests an alternative communication network test mode to the user, and/or provides the emergency communication object 1906 as a way to notify the user of the alternative communication network.

189

Notification that network test mode is available. In some embodiments, emergency communication object 1906 is displayed at different locations in emergency settings user interface 1910 (eg, away from the top of emergency settings user interface 1910, at or near the middle, and/or toward the bottom thereof). In some embodiments, the computer system 600 displays the emergency communication object 1906 overlaid on or at or near the top of the user interface 1904 shown in FIG. 19C to prompt the user to use an alternative communication network test mode to suggest alternative options to the user. The communication network test mode is selected, and/or the emergency communication object 1906 is provided as a prompt to notify the user that an alternative communication network test mode is available.

[0767] In FIG. 19E, computer system 600 detects selection 1950e of presentation option 1906b (eg, a tap on presentation option 1906b and/or other input selecting presentation option 1906b). In response to detecting selection 19506 of presentation option 1906b, computer system 600 displays guidance user interface 1912 shown in Figure 19F. Guidance user interface 1912 includes text (eg, 1912b), graphics (eg, 1912a), animations, demonstrations, and/or other information regarding emergency communications capabilities and/or alternative communications network test modes.

[0768] In Figure 19E, the guidance user interface includes a next button 1912c, and the computer system 600 detects a selection 1950f of the next button 1912c (e.g., a tap on the next button 1912c and/or a selection of the next button 1912c other input). In response to detecting selection 195Of of next button 1912c, computer system 600 displays notification 1914 shown in Figure 19G. Notification 1914 includes prompt 1914a (e.g., "Temporarily turn off cellular to test satellite connectivity") that indicates that the cellular communications capabilities of computer system 600 are disabled during the alternative communications network test mode and prompts the user to turn off cellular communications capabilities (e.g., to Test satellite connection). Notification 1914 includes a close option 1914b and a cancel option 1914. In response to detecting selection of the cancel option 1914c, the computer system 600 stops displaying the notification 1914 and forgoes turning off the cellular communications capability (eg, keeping the cellular communications capabilities enabled and/or on).

[0769] In Figure 19G, computer system 600 detects selection 1950g of close option 1914b. In response to detecting selection 1950g of shutdown option 1914b, computer system 600 turns off cellular communications capabilities (eg, as indicated by network indicator 607) and displays demonstration reporting interface 1916 shown in Figure 19H. Demonstration reporting interface 1916 is similar to reporting interface 602M (eg, as shown in FIG. 6M) displayed in response to, eg, selection of Send SMS via satellite communications button 604G (eg, as shown in FIG. 6G). For example, demonstration report interface 1916 includes a set of options 1916a corresponding to information for a test report to be sent in an alternative communications network test mode.

[0770] In contrast to reporting interface 602M (and other reporting interfaces displayed for generating reports, as described with reference to, for example, FIGS. 6M-6y), presentation reporting interface 1916 includes presentation notifications 1918 (e.g., in the presentation reporting interface 1916 at the top), which notifies the user that the alternative communications network test mode is activated and that the demonstration reporting interface 1916 is for demonstration and/or testing purposes and not for reporting a true emergency (e.g., "Emergency SOS Demonstration: This is not true Emergency situations"). In some embodiments, the demonstration notification 1918 is displayed persistently while the computer system 600 is in the alternative communication network test mode to continually remind the user that the user interface is for demonstration and/or testing purposes.

[0771] Figure 19H illustrates a satellite 1975 that indicates the computer system 600 can connect to the satellite for communication in an alternative communications network test mode. In Figure 19H, there is empty space between computer system 600 and satellite 1975, indicating that computer system 600 is not connected to satellite 1975.

[0772] As shown in Figure 19H, computer system 600 detects selection 1950h of option 1916a1, which corresponds to a hypothetical emergency situation in which a person is lost or trapped. In response to selection of option 1916a1 1950 computer system 600 displays a presentation report interface 1917 that includes another set of options 1917a corresponding to further information about the hypothetical emergency situation, as shown in Figure 19H1. In response to selection 1950P of multiplayer option 1917a1, computer system 600 displays summary interface 1919 shown in Figure 19H2, which includes a summary of the presentation report 1919a, a timer 1919b, and a sending option 1919c. In a

190

In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays options for generating a presentation report and sending a presentation report, similar to the options and user interface described with reference to Figures 6M-6Y. In some embodiments, as shown in Figures 19H, 19H1, and 19H2, computer system 600 maintains display of demonstration notification 1918 while displaying options for generating a demonstration report and sending a demonstration report in an alternative communications network test mode.

[0773] After initiating transmission of the demonstration report (e.g., in response to selection 1950q of send option 1919c, or in response to expiration of timer 1919b), computer system 600 displays an alignment interface 1922 (e.g., similar to an alignment interface 902F and/or alignment interface 902G) and continues to display the demonstration notification 1918, as shown in Figure 19I. Alignment interface 1922 includes graphical elements 1922a, connection status indicators 1922b, and connection instructions 1922c. Graphical element 1922a provides a graphical indication of the alignment status between computer system 600 and satellite 1975 (eg, similar or identical to graphical element 931). In Figure 19I, graphical element 1922a indicates that computer system 600 is not aligned with the satellite and that computer system 600 needs to turn left to find the satellite. Connection status indicator 1922b provides a textual indication of the connection status between computer system 600 and satellite 1975. In Figure 19I, connection status indicator 1922b indicates that computer system 600 is looking for satellite 1975's signal. Connection instructions 1922c provide instructions for aligning and/or connecting computer system 600 with satellite 1975 . In Figure 19I, connect instructions 1922c prompt the user to turn left to find satellite 1975.

[0774] Turning to Figure 19J, computer system 600 is connected to satellite 1975 (eg, turned left to align with satellite 1975 and establish a communication connection), as indicated by the bidirectional arrow between computer system 600 and satellite 1975. Graphical element 1922a and connection status indicator 1922b (eg, "Connected") indicate that computer system 600 is connected to satellite 1975 . In Figure 19J, connect instructions 1922c instruct the user to keep pointing computer system 600 towards satellite 1975. Since computer system 600 is connected to satellite 1975 in Figure 19J, alignment interface 1922 includes an open messaging option 1922d to indicate that the computer system is opening a messaging application (eg, automatically, without further user input). In some embodiments, in response to detecting selection 1950r of open messaging option 1922d, computer system 600 opens the messaging application (eg, before automatically displaying the messaging application).

[0775] In some embodiments, computer system 600 updates alignment interface 1922 (including graphical element 1922a, connection status indicator 1922b, and connection instructions 1922c) based on the alignment and/or connection status of computer system 600, as described with respect to FIG. 9c through 9J and 9O through 9P and/or as described by method 1000.

[0776] Turning to Figure 19K, computer system 600 displays messaging interface 1924 and maintains presentation notification 1918 displayed. In some implementations, messaging interface 1924 is similar to messaging interfaces 902K, 902L, 902M, and/or 902N. In Figure 19K, the message interface 1924 displays a demonstration message 1924a that includes options based on the options selected in the demonstration reporting interface 1916 and/or other options selected when generating the report (e.g., as described with reference to Figures 6M-6y and/or or method 800 described) a summary of a demonstration report sent via the satellite communications network in the alternative communications network test mode.

[0777] Messaging interface 1924 includes a message input field 1924b for generating a message, a send option 1924c for sending the generated message, and an indication that messages sent and/or received via messaging user interface 1924 are with emergency services. Presentation indicator 1924d of the exemplary dialogue.

[0778] In Figure 19K, computer system 600 displays banner 926 in accordance with the techniques described with reference to Figures 9K-9N1 (e.g., based on alignment of computer system 600 with satellite 1975 and/or message status).

[0779] Turning to Figure 191, computer system 600 has received demonstration response 1924e via satellite communications from the demonstration communication service (eg, the communication service that received demonstration report 1924a). Demonstration response 1924e includes demonstration response 1924e for

191

An indication of an exemplary response for testing purposes (e.g., "Emergency Services Response Example"). Because computer system 600 is still in the alternative communication network test mode, computer system 600 continues to display demonstration notification 1918.

[0780] In Figure 19L, the user has entered a demonstration message into message input field 1924b (e.g., via input 1950s on keyboard 1924g), and computer system 600 detects selection 1950i of send option 1924c (e.g., tap and/or other selection inputs). As shown in Figure 19M, in response to detecting selection 1950i of send option 1924c, computer system 600 sends text entered into message input field 1924b via satellite communications, and message 1924f is added to the conversation, such as in a messaging In the message dialogue area 1924h of the interface 1924. Banner 926 indicates that computer system 600 is sending the message and instructs the user to keep pointing computer system 600 towards satellite 1975 .

[0781] In FIG. 19M, computer system 600 detects a request to exit the alternative communications network test mode. In some embodiments, the request to exit the alternative communications network test mode includes pressing (e.g., 1950k) a physical button (e.g., 617a, 617b, and/or 617c), selecting (e.g., 1950j, tapping, and/or other selection input ) end options 1920 and/or a request to display the home screen (eg, 19501, such as a tap and/or swipe gesture at a predetermined location of the messaging interface 1924).

[0782] In response to detecting the request to exit the alternative communications network test mode, the computer system 600 displays a confirmation prompt 1926 (e.g., a pop-up object, user interface, and/or notification) and obscures the messaging interface 1924, as shown in Figure 19N. In response to detecting a request to remain in the alternative communications network test mode (e.g., input 1950m, such as a tap or other input not directed to confirmation prompt 1926), computer system 600 removes confirmation prompt 1926 and displays messaging interface 1924 (e.g., , no occlusion).

[0783] The confirmation prompt 1926 includes an indication 1926a that the alternative communications network test mode has ended and the cellular capabilities and Wi-Fi capabilities of the system 600 will be enabled (eg, turned on). In some embodiments, the Wi-Fi capabilities of the computer system 600 are not turned off during the alternative communication network test mode, and in such embodiments, the confirmation prompt 1926 does not indicate that the Wi-Fi capabilities of the computer system 600 will be enabled. .

[0784] Confirmation prompt 1926 includes confirmation option 1926b. In response to detecting selection 1950n of confirmation option 1926b (e.g., tap and/or other selection input), computer system 600 exits the alternative communications network test mode, displays, for example, user interface 1928, and enables the cellular capabilities of computer system 600, As indicated by network indicator 607 shown in Figure 19O.

[0785] Figure 20 is a flowchart illustrating a method for testing alternative communications networks using a computer system, in accordance with some embodiments. Method 2000 at a computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, 600, 900, 1100, 1300A, 1300B, 1500A, 1500B, 1500c, smart phone, smart watch, laptop, desktop computer, and/or tablet computer) Execution, the computer system with display generation components (e.g., 601, 901, 1106, 1302A, 1302B, 1502A, 1502B, 1502c, display controller, display device, monitor, and/or touch-sensitive display system) and one or more input device (e.g., 601, 901, 6172, 6176617. , touch-sensitive surface, touch screen, buttons, keyboard, mouse, camera, rotatable input mechanism and/or microphone), wherein the computer system is configured to communicate over a corresponding communication network (e.g., a terrestrial communication network, such as a cellular communication network or Wi-Fi -Fi network) is unavailable (e.g., when no terrestrial communications network is available) via an alternative communications network (e.g., a non-terrestrial communications network, such as a satellite communications network). In some embodiments, the computer system is configured to communicate via an alternative communication network only when the corresponding communication network is unavailable (e.g., the ability to communicate via the corresponding communication network is disabled and/or a connection sufficient to communicate with the corresponding communication network cannot be established). Communication network for communication. Some operations in method 2000 are optionally combined, the order of some operations is optionally changed, and some operations are optionally omitted.

[0786] As described below, method 2000 provides an intuitive way to test alternative communication networks. This method reduces the use of

192

The cognitive load on users testing alternative communication networks creates a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-powered computing devices, enabling users to test alternative communication networks faster and more efficiently saves power and increases the time between battery charges.

[0787] When the computer system communicates via a corresponding communication network (and/or the ability to connect to a corresponding communication network is enabled (e.g., Wi-Fi and/or cellular communication capabilities are enabled)), the computer system communicates via one or more inputs Device Detection (2002) A set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communications network test mode (e.g., an operating mode of a computer system that simulates a process for connecting and/or sending communications via an alternative communications network) (e.g., 1950a, 1950b, 1950c, 1950o, 1950d, 1950e, 1950f, 1950g, contact and/or touch gestures on touch-sensitive surfaces, air gestures, mouse clicks, key presses, button presses, and/or voice commands). In some embodiments, the computer system is capable of sending communications via the alternative communication network while in the alternative communication network test mode. In some embodiments, the computer system is unable to send via the alternative communication network while in the alternative communication network test mode. Communication (e.g., the ability to communicate via the alternative communication network is disabled). In some embodiments, when the computer system is operating in the alternative communication network test mode, the computer system is configured to communicate to the recipient via the alternative communication network. (e.g., non-emergency services recipients and/or test recipients) to send communications when the computer system is not operating in the alternative communications network test mode, and the computer system is not configured to send communications to the recipient via the alternative communications network.

[0788] In response to detecting a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate an alternative communications network test mode, the computer system activates (2004) the alternative communications network test mode (e.g., as shown in FIG. 19F, FIG. 19G, or FIG. shown in 19H). When the alternative communications network test mode is activated (e.g., when the computer system is operating in the alternative communications network test mode), the computer system displays (2006) via the display generation component a set of user interfaces (e.g., 1916, 1922, 926 and/or 1924). Activating the alternative communication network test mode and displaying a set of user interfaces provides the user with a means for testing features suitable only for emergency use in non-emergency situations so that the user knows how to operate in an emergency with fewer errors Using this feature (eg, so that the user does not have to learn how to use the feature during an actual emergency) allows the user to use the computer system more quickly and efficiently and reduces the amount of input required to perform an operation.

[0789] In some embodiments, activating the alternative communication network test mode includes disabling the computer system's ability to communicate via (and/or in some embodiments connect to the corresponding communication network) the corresponding communication network (e.g., turning off Wi-Fi and/or cellular capabilities) (e.g., as shown in Figures 19G and 19H). Disabling a computer system's ability to communicate via a corresponding communications network enables the computer system to more accurately simulate the process of connecting to and/or communicating via an alternative communications network, disabling communications antennas, and reducing interaction with the alternative communications network of electromagnetic interference, and/or reduce the amount of energy emitted, which reduces power usage and extends battery life.

[0790] In some embodiments, displaying the set of user interfaces includes displaying (e.g., the set of user interfaces includes): including an indication (e.g., a graphical indication, icon, color, font, Text, animations, symbols, thumbnails, images and/or glyphs; and/or 1922a, 1922b, 908C, 908D, 908E, 908F, 908G, 908H, 908I, 908J, 908O, 908O1, 908P, 926 and/or 931) and a user interface (e.g., 1922, 1924, 926, and/or a connection assistant user interface) (e.g., 1922a, 1922c) for instructions to establish a connection (or, in some embodiments, maintain the connection) to an alternative communications network , 908C, 908D, 908E, 908F, 908G, 908H, 908I, 908J, 908O, 908O1, 908P, 926, and/or 931); and/or for generating a device that can be used via the alternative communication network test mode when the alternative communication network test mode is activated. User interface (e.g., 1916, 602M, 602N, 1916, 602M, 602N, 602O, 602P, 602Q, 602R, 602S, 602T, 602U, 602V and/or 602W). In some embodiments, a user interface including an indication of a connection status to an alternative communication network and instructions for establishing a connection to the alternative communication network includes:

193

9c through 9Q and the user interface and/or features described in method 1000. In some embodiments, the user interface for generating the communication includes the user interface, options, and/or operations described in FIGS. 6M-6W and/or method 800. Displaying a user interface that includes an indication of the status of the connection to the alternative communications network allows the user to quickly and efficiently resolve problems (e.g., misalignments and/or obstructions) that prevent the computer system from connecting to the alternative communications network with less input, This provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform actions. Displaying a user interface for generating communications that can be sent via an alternative communication network enables the computer system to provide options that are optimal (eg, requiring limited bandwidth) for communicating via the alternative communication network, reducing the need to generate messages number of inputs (e.g., without using a keyboard) and guides the user through the process of communicating via alternative communication networks, which provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the amount of input required to perform an action, and provides additional control options Without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls.

[0791] In some embodiments, the computer system detects a set of one or more inputs (e.g., 1950h) directed to the user interface used to generate the communication (e.g., to an input corresponding to information to be included in the communication selection of one or more options); and after (e.g., in response to) detecting the set of one or more inputs directed to the user interface used to generate the communication, the computer system sends the communication via the alternative communication network (e.g., in response to) , 1924a), wherein the communication includes content based on the set of one or more inputs directed to the user interface used to generate the communication (e.g., 1924a is based on 1950h). In some embodiments, the content of the communication includes a text message composed by the user (eg, using a keyboard). In some embodiments, the content of the communication includes the user's response to questions and/or prompts (e.g., questionnaire, 1916a, 604M, 604N, 6040, 604P and/or 604Q). Sending a communication via an alternative communication network that includes content based on the set of one or more inputs directed to a user interface for generating the communication, doing so to enable the user to generate messages quickly and efficiently, which provides improvements to the user visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform an action.

[0792] In some embodiments, activating an alternative communication network test mode simulates an emergency communication process (e.g., a low bandwidth communication process that can be used to communicate with emergency services when a higher bandwidth communication network is unavailable; e.g., as indicated at 1918) . Simulating the emergency communication process enables users to test emergency communication features in non-emergency situations so that users can use the computer system more quickly and efficiently in emergency situations, which reduces power usage and extends the battery life of the computer system.

[0793] In some embodiments, the alternative communication network is a non-terrestrial communication network (eg, a satellite communication network). Activating the mode for testing communications via non-terrestrial communications networks enables the computer system to provide user interfaces not required for communications via terrestrial communications networks, such as interfaces for aligning with non-terrestrial communications networks and generating low-bandwidth messages so that users can More rapid and efficient use of computer systems during emergencies reduces the number of inputs required to perform operations, reduces power usage, and extends computer system battery life.

[0794] In some embodiments, displaying the set of user interfaces includes displaying an indication (e.g., 1922a, 931, 926, graphical indications, icons, colors, fonts, text, animations, symbols, thumbnails, images and/or glyphs). Displaying an indication of the alignment of the computer system with one or more elements of the non-terrestrial communications network enables the user to align the computer system with one or more elements of the non-terrestrial communications network with fewer errors, which provides improvements to the user visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform an action.

[0795] In some embodiments, displaying the set of user interfaces includes output indications (e.g., 1914, 1914a, graphical indications, sounds, tactile output, icons, colors, fonts, text, animations, symbols, thumbnails, images, and/or or icon), which indicates

194

Indicates that the computer system's ability to communicate via (and/or in some embodiments, connect to the respective communications network) will be disabled when the alternative communications network test mode is activated (e.g., Wi-Fi and/or Cellular capabilities will be turned off) (e.g., the computer system's cellular antenna will be turned off during the alternative communications network test mode). Output an indication that the computer system's ability to communicate via the respective communications network will be disabled when the alternative communications network test mode is activated informs the user that potential primary means of communications will be unavailable and that there may be missed communications during the test mode (e.g. , required to receive communications from the corresponding communication network), which provides improved feedback to the user.

[0796] In some embodiments, when the alternative communications network test mode is activated, the computer system communicates via the alternative communications network to a non-emergency entity (e.g., as received while performing the actual process simulated by the alternative communications network test mode). A different entity than the communicating entity) sends the communication (e.g., 1924a). In some embodiments, when the alternative communications network test mode is activated, the computer system does not communicate with emergency services and/or is unable to communicate with emergency services. Sending communications to non-emergency entities via alternative communication networks enables computer systems to realistically simulate communications via alternative communications networks and enables users to quickly and efficiently test communications via alternative communications networks without contacting emergency services and blocking Emergency services participate in actual emergency messages, which enables users to use computer systems more quickly and efficiently, reduces power usage, and extends battery life.

[0797] In some embodiments, when the alternative communications network test mode is activated and after sending the communication to the non-emergency entity via the alternative communications network, the computer system receives communications from the non-emergency entity via the alternative communications network (e.g. , 1924b) (e.g., in response to this communication being sent to a non-emergency entity). Receiving communications from non-emergency entities via the alternative communication network provides the user with quick feedback of the success of the communication via the alternative communication network without burdening the emergency services and preventing the emergency services from attending to the actual emergency message, which enables the user to be more rapid and efficient Optimizes the use of computer systems, reduces power usage, and extends battery life.

[0798] ISE communications from non-emergency entities include predetermined content (e.g., prerecorded responses, predetermined messages, and/or content not based on communications that have been sent to the non-emergency entity); e.g., 1924b includes predetermined content Content). In some embodiments, the communication from the emergency services includes a customized response with content responsive to the emergency situation and/or content of the message sent to the emergency services. receiving a communication with predetermined content enables the computer system to indicate to the user that the communication is for testing purposes (e.g., the communication was not sent to emergency services) and to provide quick feedback to the user that the communication via the alternative communication network was successful, Without burdening and preventing emergency services from attending to actual emergency messages and allowing the computer system, this enables users to use the computer system more quickly and efficiently, reduces power usage, and extends battery life.

[0799] In some embodiments, when the alternative communications network test mode is activated, communications with the alternative communications network (and/or in some embodiments, connections to the alternative communications network) are limited in the following manner : When the alternative communication network test mode is not activated (e.g., during the actual process simulated by the alternative communication network test mode; for example, the computer system 600 in FIGS. 19H to 19M operates in the same manner as in FIGS. 6M to 6W and/ or restricted in the same manner as in Figures 9B-9M), communication with the alternative communication network (and/or in some embodiments, connection with the alternative communication network) is restricted. In some embodiments, when the alternative communications network test mode is activated, the computer system cannot send messages via the alternative communications network unless the computer system is aligned with and connected to one or more satellites. Restricting communications with the alternative communications network in a manner that limits communications with the alternative communications network when the alternative communications network test mode is inactive enables a more accurate simulation of the computer system used to connect to the alternative communications network in an emergency. and/or the process of communicating via an alternative communications network so that the user can use the computer system more quickly and efficiently during an emergency, which reduces power usage and extends battery life.

195

[0800] In some embodiments, the computer system displays a settings user interface (e.g., 1908 and/or 1910) that includes options for controlling one or more settings of the computer system (e.g., selectable options, icon, Buttons, affordances, and/or user interaction graphical user interface objects; for example, the list of options in Figure 1908 and/or the options in options in Figure 1910 such as "call on hold" and "press 5 times to call"), and with An option (e.g., 1906 and/or 1906b) for initiating activation of (e.g., activating the mode) of the alternative communications network test mode, wherein the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to activate the alternative communications network test mode includes An input (eg, 19500 and/or 1950e) that selects an option for initiating activation of an alternative communications network test mode. In some embodiments, in response to detecting a selection of a respective one of the options for controlling one or more settings of the computer system, the computer system adjusts the respective setting of the computer system that corresponds to the selected respective option. In some embodiments, in response to detecting selection of an option for initiating activation of the alternative communications network test mode, the computer system initiates activation of the alternative communications network test mode. Displaying an option in the settings user interface for initiating activation of the alternative communications network test mode notifies the user of the availability of the alternative communications network test mode and provides a quick and efficient means for accessing the alternative communications network test mode, which Reduces the number of inputs required to perform operations.

[0801] In some embodiments, the computer system displays medical ID options (e.g., 1902b, selectable options, icons, buttons, affordances, and/or user interaction graphical user interface objects); the computer system detects selection of the medical ID option (e.g., 1950c); and in response to detecting selection of the medical ID option, the computer system displays the associated user information (e.g., 1904), and options (e.g., 1906, 1906b, selectable options, icons, buttons, affordances) for initiating activation of the backup communications network test mode (e.g., activating the mode) and/or user interaction graphical user interface object), wherein the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to activate the alternative communications network test mode includes an input that selects an option for initiating activation of the alternative communications network test mode (e.g. , 19500 and/or 1950e). In some embodiments, the user's information includes the user's name, the user's age, the user's weight, the user's height, allergies, blood type, medical conditions, a designated contact person (e.g., the name of an emergency contact), and/or a designated Contact information for the contact (for example, phone number). Displaying an option for initiating activation of the alternative communications network test mode in response to detecting selection of the medical ID option, notifying the user of the availability of the alternative communications network test mode at the relevant location, and providing access to the alternative communications network test A fast and efficient means of schema, which reduces the amount of input required to perform an operation.

[0802] In some embodiments, the computer system displays a prompt (e.g., 1906) that includes suggestions (e.g., 1906a, prompts, and/or notifications that features are available) related to alternative communication network test modes, wherein the prompt includes using Options (e.g., 1906b, selectable options, icons, buttons, affordances, and/or user interaction graphical user interface objects) for initiating activation of the alternative communications network test mode (e.g., activating the mode), where corresponding to the activation The set of one or more inputs to the request for the alternative communications network test mode includes an input (eg, 19500 and/or 1950e) that selects an option for initiating activation of the alternative communications network test mode. Displaying an option for initiating activation of the alternative communications network test mode in a prompt including suggestions regarding the alternative communications network test mode Notifying the user of the availability of the alternative communications network test mode and providing access to the alternative communications network A fast and efficient means of testing patterns, which reduces the amount of input required to perform operations.

[0803] In some embodiments, prior to activating the alternative communications test mode (and in some embodiments, in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to activate the alternative communications network test mode), The computer system displays instructions that include information (eg, instructions and/or demonstrations) regarding the alternative communications network test mode (and/or in some embodiments, information about the actual process simulated by the alternative communications network test mode) ( For example, 1912, 1912a and/or 1912b). In some embodiments, activating the alternative communications network test mode includes activating the alternative communications network test mode

196

This guidance is displayed, for example, in the initial user interface during network test mode. In some embodiments, the computer system displays the guidance in an initial user interface in the set of user interfaces. Displaying guidance including information about the alternative communication network test mode before activating the alternative communication test mode Providing information about the test mode to the user before the user attempts to use the test mode and enabling the user to use the test mode with fewer errors , which provides improved visual feedback to users and reduces the amount of input required to perform actions.

[0804] In some embodiments, when the alternative communications network test mode is activated, the computer system displays an indication that the alternative communications network test mode is activated (e.g., 1918, graphical indication, icon, color, font, text, animation, symbols, thumbnails, images and/or glyphs) that indicate when communicating via the alternative communications network (and/or in some embodiments, connecting to the alternative communications network) when the alternative communications network test mode is not activated network) (eg, during actual processes simulated by the alternative communication network test mode; eg, 1918 is not shown in Figures 6M-6W and/or Figures 9B-9Q). In some embodiments, the computer system maintains display of the indication that the alternative communications network test mode is active until the alternative communications network test mode is deactivated (eg, the indication is persistent). Displaying an indication that the alternative communication network test mode is active notifies the user of the status of the computer system and prevents the user from providing input that is not relevant to the status of the computer system, which provides improved visual feedback to the user and reduces the amount of input required to perform an operation .

[0805] In some embodiments, the computer system detects a set of one or more inputs (e.g., 1950j, 1950k, 1950l, and/or 1950n); and in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs including a request to exit the alternative communications network test mode, the computer system exits (e.g., terminates, shuts down, disables, and/or deactivates) Alternative communication network test modes (e.g., as shown in Figure 19N and/or Figure 19O), including enabling (e.g., turning on) the computer system to communicate via the corresponding communication network (and/or in some embodiments, connecting to the corresponding communication network) capabilities (e.g., turning on Wi-Fi and/or cellular capabilities). The ability of a computer system to communicate via a corresponding communication network in response to detecting a request to exit an alternative communication network test mode allows a user to automatically resume communication via the corresponding communication network without having to manually enable the ability to communicate via the corresponding communication network, which Reduces the number of inputs required to perform operations. Enabling the computer system's ability to communicate via the corresponding communication network in response to detecting a request to exit the alternative communication network test mode enables the computer system to automatically enable (or re-enable) the computer system's ability to communicate via the corresponding communication network, such that the computer system The ability to use the corresponding communication network to send and receive information (for example, if the user has disabled the computer system's ability to communicate via the corresponding communication network and did not (or forgot) to turn on the computer system's ability to communicate via the corresponding communication network), which reduces the execution The number of inputs required for the operation. The ability to enable a computer system to communicate via a corresponding communications network in response to detecting a request to exit an alternative communications network test mode enables the computer system to automatically operate in (or switch to) a lower power mode (e.g., if The user has enabled the computer system to operate in a higher power mode in the Alternate Communications Network Test Mode and has not (or forgotten to) turn off the higher power mode), which reduces power usage and extends battery life.

[0806] In some embodiments, the set of one or more inputs including a request to exit the alternative communications network test mode includes closing (e.g., running) an application that provides (e.g., running) the alternative communications network test mode (and/or in some In embodiments, the application's user interface) requests (eg, 1950j and/or 1950l) (eg, the computer system exits the alternative communications network test mode in response to detecting a request to close the application). Exiting the alternative communications network test mode in response to a request to close an application that provides the alternative communications network test mode provides a fast and efficient method for ending the alternative communications network test mode, which reduces the input required to perform the operation. quantity. Exiting the alternative communications network test mode in response to a request to close an application that provides the alternative communications network test mode enables the computer system to

197

be able to automatically enable (or re-enable) the computer system's ability to communicate via the corresponding communication network so that the computer system can send and receive information using the corresponding communication network (for example, if the user has disabled the computer system's ability to communicate via the corresponding communication network and does not (or forget) opens the ability of computer systems to communicate via corresponding communication networks), which reduces the number of inputs required to perform operations. Exiting the alternative communications network test mode in response to a request to close an application that provides the alternative communications network test mode enables the computer system to automatically operate in (or switch to a lower power mode) (e.g., if the user has Enables the computer system to operate in a higher power mode in the alternative communications network test mode and does not (or forgets to) turn off the higher power mode), which reduces power usage and extends battery life.

[0807] In some embodiments, the set of one or more inputs including a request to exit the alternative communications network test mode includes a request (e.g., 1950k) to lock the user interface of the computer system (and/or in some embodiments , a request to place the computer system in a sleep state, a low power state, and/or a wake state) (e.g., the computer system exits the alternative communications network test mode in response to detecting a request to lock the computer system's user interface). Exiting the alternative communications network test mode in response to a request to lock the computer system's user interface provides a quick and efficient method of ending the alternative communications network test mode without requiring additional user input, which reduces the input required to perform the operation. quantity. Exiting the alternative communication network test mode in response to a request to lock the user interface of the computer system enables the computer system to automatically enable (or re-enable) the computer system's ability to communicate via the corresponding communication network, such that the computer system can use the corresponding communication network to send and Receiving information (for example, if the user has disabled the computer system's ability to communicate via the corresponding communication network and did not (or forgot to) turn on the computer system's ability to communicate via the corresponding communication network), which reduces the number of inputs required to perform the operation. Exiting the alternative communications network test mode in response to a request to lock the computer system's user interface enables the computer system to automatically operate in (or switch to) a lower power mode (e.g., if the user is already in the alternative communications network Test mode enables the computer system to operate in a higher power mode and does not (or forgets to) turn off the higher power mode), which reduces power usage and extends battery life.

[0808] Note that the details of the process described above with respect to method 2000 (eg, Figure 20) also apply in a similar manner to the methods described below and above. For example, methods 700, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, and/or 2200 optionally include one or more of the features of the various methods described above with reference to method 2000. For example, alternative communication network test modes in method 2000 may simulate methods 700, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, and/or 2200. For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated below.

[0809] Figures 21A-21L illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing user interface objects corresponding to processes, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the process in Figure 22. In some embodiments, processes associated with user interface objects include one or more of the methods described with reference to Figures 7, 8, and/or 10 (eg, methods 700, 800, and/or 1000).

[0810] In some embodiments, any of the selections, requests, and/or inputs (eg, 2150a-2150l) described herein are or include touch inputs (eg, tap gestures and/or swipe gestures). In some embodiments, any of the selections, requests, and/or inputs described herein (e.g., 2150a-2150l) are or include voice input (e.g., to select a user interface element or activate a feature or perform a function (such as with Features or functions associated with user interface elements) voice commands). In some embodiments, any of the selections, requests, and/or inputs described herein (e.g., 2150a21501) are or include air gestures (e.g., to select user interface elements or activate features or perform functions (such as with user interface air gestures) that feature or function the element is associated with). In some embodiments, any of the selections, requests, and/or inputs described herein (e.g., 2150a-21501) are or include hardware devices (e.g., buttons, rotatable input machines

198

Activation (e.g., pressing, rotating, and/or moving) of a device, a rotatable, pressable input mechanism, a mouse button, a remote control button, and/or a joystick. In some embodiments, any of the user interface elements described herein (e.g., icons, affordances, buttons, and/or selectable options) are selected by selecting , bolded, outlined, visually distinguished from other user interface elements, and/or located at or near the cursor) is selected when the hardware device is activated.

[0811] FIG. 21A illustrates the computer system 600 described above, for example, in FIG. 6A. In Figure 21A, computer system 600 displays call management interface 602G depicted in Figure 6G and detects selection 2150a (eg, tap or other selection input) of Send text message via satellite communications button 604G. In response to detecting selection of the send text message via satellite communications button 604G, computer system 600 initiates a process for sending the communication via satellite communications, such as processes 700, 800, and/or 1000.

[0812] In some embodiments, the process for sending a communication via satellite communication initiated in response to detecting selection of the send text message via satellite communication button 604G includes displaying one or more reporting interfaces (e.g., 602M, 602N, 6020, 602P, and/or 602Q), such as reporting interface 602M shown in Figure 21B and described with reference to Figure 6M. While reporting interface 602M is displayed, computer system 600 detects a request to stop displaying reporting interface 602M (eg, a request to display a system user interface such as a lock screen, wake screen, or home screen). In Figure 21B, input 2150b (e.g., a press of a physical button) corresponds to a request to lock the user interface of computer system 600, and input 2150c (e.g., a tap, starting from a predefined portion of display 601 and/or interface 602N swipe up, and/or other input) corresponds to a request to display the home screen (eg, 1304 depicted in Figure 13A). In some embodiments, in response to detecting input 2150c, computer system 600 displays home screen 2108 and active user interface objects 2106, as described in greater detail with reference to Figure 21D.

[0813] In response to detecting input 2150b, computer system 600 locks the user interface of computer system 600, which includes turning off or dimming display 601, or displaying user interface 2102, as shown in Figure 21C. In some implementations, computer system 600 displays user interface 2102 in response to detecting input 2150b. In some embodiments, computer system 600 turns off display 601 in response to input 2150b and then displays user interface 2102 in response to detecting further input, such as a button press on computer system 600, a button on display 601 Contact and/or movement of computer system 600 (eg, movement that meets movement criteria). In Figure 21C, user interface 2102 is a system user interface such as a lock screen or a wake screen that is displayed when computer system 600 transitions from a low power state (eg, when computer system 600 turns on display 601).

[0814] In some embodiments, computer system 600 continues to run the process for sending the communication (eg, as a background process) while displaying user interface 2102. In FIG. 21C , computer system 600 displays active user interface objects 2106 corresponding to the process for sending the communication (eg, the activity of sending the communication) and notifications from different applications (eg, electronic mail in an email application). Notifications for emails 2112a and notifications for messages in messaging applications 2112b). In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays active user interface object 2106 concurrently with (eg, displayed on or in) user interface 2102 and/or concurrently with notification 2112a and/or notification 2112b. In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 21C, computer system 600 displays notifications in a stacked configuration (eg, a stack of notifications separate from active user interface object 2106).

[0815] Active user interface objects 2106 include process indicators 2106a, process graphics 2106b, and process status indicators 2106c. Process indicator 2106a indicates the process and/or application associated with active user interface object 2106 (eg, the process used to send the communication). Process graphic 2106b is a graphic indicating a process and/or application associated with active user interface object 2106 (eg, the process used to send the communication). Process status indicator 2106c indicates for

199

The current status or status of the process of sending this communication via satellite communication. For example, process status indicator 2106c is based on the current status or status of the process used to send the communication. In some embodiments, process graph 2106b is based on the current status or status of the process used to send the communication. Because computer system 600 is displaying reporting interface 602N when input 2150b is received, the process for sending the communication is in a state to prompt the user to answer questions and/or provide responses used to generate content for the communication. Based on the fact that the process for sending the communication is in a state of prompting the user to answer questions and/or to provide responses for use in generating content for the communication, process status indicator 2106c includes an indication that the process for sending the communication is in a state of prompting the user to answer questions and/or or content (eg, text and/or graphics) that provides input for generating a state of content for that communication. In the embodiment shown in Figure 21C, process status indicator 2106c displays text that prompts the user to answer questions and/or provide input to generate the content of this communication (e.g., "Answer questions to help get a faster response") Indicates that the process used to send the communication is in a state to prompt the user to answer questions and/or provide input for use in generating the content of the communication.

[0816] In some embodiments, computer system 600 does not display activity when displaying a non-system user interface (e.g., a user interface for an application such as an email application, a web browsing application, and/or a messaging application). User interface object 2106 (eg, stop its display). In some embodiments, upon determining that the displayed user interface is a corresponding type of user interface (eg, a system user interface), computer system 600 displays active user interface object 2106; and upon determining that the displayed user interface is not a corresponding type of user interface, computer system 600 System 600 displays the user interface without displaying active user interface object 2106.

[0817] In FIG. 21C, computer system 600 detects a request 2150d to unlock the user interface of computer system 600 and/or display the home screen (eg, swipe up and/or other input from a predefined portion of user interface 2102). In response to detected request 2150d, computer system 600 displays home screen 2108 shown in Figure 21D. Home screen 2108 is a system user interface that includes application icons for launching, opening, and/or displaying the user interface of the corresponding application. While displaying home screen 2108, computer system 600 displays active user interface objects 2106. Compared to Figure 21C where active user interface object 2106 is displayed on user interface 2102, active user interface object 2106 is displayed (eg, moved to) a different position relative to home screen 2108 (eg, at the top of home screen 2108 or nearby). In some embodiments, active user interface objects 2106 have the same appearance when displayed with home screen 2108 as when displayed with user interface 2102 (e.g., process indication 2106a, process graphic 2106b, and process status indication in Figure 21C Device 2106c is the same as in Figure 21D). In some embodiments, the appearance and/or content of active user interface object 2106 does not depend on (eg, is not based on) the user interface displayed with active user interface object 2106 .

[0818] In FIG. 21D, computer system 600 detects a selection 2150f of active user interface object 2106 (eg, a tap and/or other selection input). In response to detecting selection 215Of of active user interface object 2106, computer system 600 displays a user interface for a process that sends communications corresponding to the current state of the process indicated by active user interface object 2106. For example, in response to detecting selection 2150f of active user interface object 2106 in Figure 21D, computer system 600 displays (eg, returns to) reporting interface 602M because when computer system 600 detects navigation away from the process for sending the communication Reporting interface 602M is displayed when requested (eg, and the process is not advancing because a request to navigate away from the process is detected), as shown in Figure 21E.

[0819] In some embodiments, computer system 600 displays (e.g., returns to) the reporting interface as shown in FIG. 21E in response to detecting selection 2150e of active user interface object 2106 in user interface 2102 in FIG. 21C 602M. In some embodiments, computer system 600 responds to detecting selection 2150e of active user interface object 2106 and upon determining that the user is authorized to unlock computer system 600 (eg, via facial recognition) by displaying (eg, returning) as

200

Report interface 602M shown in Figure 21E. In some embodiments, in response to detecting selection 21506 of active user interface object 2106, the computer system initiates a process for unlocking the user interface of computer system 600 (e.g., via facial ID, fingerprint ID, and/or personal identification number). input), and once computer system 600 is unlocked reporting interface 602M is displayed as shown in Figure 21E.

[0820] After displaying the reporting interface 602M in Figure 21E, the computer system 600 detects one or more inputs that continue to generate content for the communication (e.g., selection 2150j of an option in option group 604M, or skip button 616 option 2150k). In some embodiments, generating the content of the communication and sending the communication is performed according to the techniques described in Figures 6M-6A. For example, in some embodiments, in response to selection of an option in option group 604M (eg, selection 2150j) or selection of skip button 616 2150k, computer system 600 displays one or more additional group options (eg, 604N, 604O and/or 604P) and/or selection of additional options (eg, 608N, 608O, and/or 608P), and then display a summary interface, such as summary interface 2109 in Figure 21E1, based on the selected option.

[0821] In some embodiments, the process for sending the communication includes aligning with and/or connecting to the communication network. For example, in some embodiments, in response to detecting selection 2150a of send text message via satellite communication button 604G in FIG. 21A or after initiating transmission of that communication (e.g., in response to detecting selection of send option 2109c in FIG. 21E1 2150l or expiration of timer 2109b), computer system 600 provides a user interface, prompts, and/or output for aligning with and/or connecting to the satellite communications network, as described with reference to Figures 9c-9U and/or Process 1000 is described such as alignment user interface 2110 shown in Figure 21F. Alignment user interface 2110 includes alignment elements 909 described with reference to, for example, Figures 9c-9J and Figures 9O-9P.

[0822] Computer system 600 may detect a request to stop displaying the user interface of the process for sending the communication while the process for sending the communication is aligned and/or connected to the satellite communications network. For example, while displaying the alignment user interface 2110, the computer system 600 detects a request to stop displaying the alignment user interface 2110 (eg, a request to display a system user interface such as a lock screen, wake screen, or home screen). In Figure 21F, input 2150h (e.g., a press of a physical button) corresponds to a request to lock the user interface of computer system 600, and input 2150h (e.g., a tap, starting from a predefined portion of display 601 and/or interface 2110 swipe up, and/or other input) corresponds to a request to display the home screen (eg, 1304 depicted in Figure 13A). In some embodiments, in response to detecting input 2150 computer system 600 displays active user interface object 2106 as shown in Figure 21G on home screen 2108 as shown in Figure 21D.

[0823] In response to detecting input 2150g, computer system 600 locks the user interface of computer system 600, which includes turning off or dimming display 601, or displaying user interface 2102, as shown in Figure 21G. In some implementations, computer system 600 displays user interface 2102 in response to detecting input 2150g. In some embodiments, computer system 600 turns off display 601 in response to input 2150g and then displays user interface 2102 in response to detecting further input, such as a button press on computer system 600, a Contact and/or movement of computer system 600 (eg, movement that meets movement criteria). As described with reference to, for example, FIG. 21C, user interface 2102 is a system user interface such as a lock screen or wake screen that is displayed when computer system 600 transitions from a low power state (eg, when computer system 600 turns on display 601).

[0824] In FIG. 21G, computer system 600 displays notification 2112a, notification 2112b, and active user interface object 2106 on user interface 2102. As described with reference to Figures 21C and 21D, the appearance of active user interface object 2106 is based on the current state of the process for sending the communication via satellite communications. Compared to active user interface object 2106 in Figures 21C and 21D, process indicator 2106a is the same (eg, active user interface object 2106 in Figure 21G corresponds to the same process in Figures 21C and 21D), whereas Process graph 2106b and process status indicator 2106c are different because in Figure 21G for

201

The state of the process for sending this communication is different from the state of the process for sending this communication in FIGS. 21C and 21D.

[0825] In FIG. 21G, because the process for transmitting the communication is in a state of being aligned and/or connected to the satellite communications network, process graph 2106b displays graphical elements corresponding to the state of being aligned with the satellite communications network (e.g., , 931) and indicates an action that the user can take to align with the satellite communications network (eg, a curved arrow indicating turning computer system 600 to the left). Similarly, because the process used to send the communication is in a state of alignment and/or connection with the satellite communications network, process status indicator 2106c displays the status of the connection between computer system 600 and the satellite communications network (e.g., "Not Connected" "), an action that the user can take to align with the satellite communications network (e.g., "turn left to find satellites"), and a graphical indication that computer system 600 is not connected to the satellite communications network (e.g., an exclamation point within a circle) . In some embodiments, active user interface object 2106 is banner 926 described with reference to, for example, FIGS. 9K-9M1 (or includes the same feature).

[0826] When the connection status of computer system 600 changes, active user interface object 2106 updates to reflect the current connection status of computer system 600. For example, when computer system 600 is rotated to the left as indicated in action user interface object 2106 in FIG. 21G by an amount that appropriately aligns computer system 600 with the satellite communications network, computer system 600 begins establishing communication with the satellite communications network. Connection. In response to a change in the state of the process used to send the communication (eg, the connection state changes from unaligned to aligned), computer system 600 updates active user interface object 2106, as shown in Figure 21H. Specifically, computer system 600 updates process graphic 2106b to indicate that computer system 600 is properly aligned, and updates process status indicator 2106c to indicate that computer system 600 is connecting (eg, "Connecting..."), instructing the user to keep the device pointed the current direction (e.g., "keep pointing toward the satellite to send and receive messages"), and a progress indicator (e.g., a ring with the filled portion of the ring indicating progress) showing progress in connecting to the satellite communications network and/or sending that communication amount). [0827] Turning to Figure 211, computer system 600 has successfully connected to the satellite communications network (eg, computer system 600 is connected) and the communication has been sent. In response, process status indicator 2106c instructs computer system 600 is connected (e.g., by changing "Connecting..." to "Connected") and the progress indicator is updated to indicate that the message has been sent (e.g., the ring is completely filled, or to indicate that the message is being sent to another instructions are displayed in the user interface).

[0828] Turning to Figure 2j, computer system 600 is no longer connected to the satellite communications network because the satellite has moved out of range of computer system 600. In response, computer system 600 updates process graph 2106b to indicate that computer system 600 is not connected and alignment is not currently possible (eg, process graph 2106b does not indicate an action to align computer system 600). Computer system 600 updates process status indicator 2106c to indicate that satellite communications are currently unavailable (e.g., by changing "Connected" to "Service Unavailable"), indicating an amount of time until the next satellite will be available (e.g., "Next Satellite available in 4 minutes"), and a graphical indication of the status is displayed (for example, an exclamation point in an octagon, or other indication of the status).

[0829] Turning to Figure 21, computer system 600 has successfully re-established the connection to the satellite communications network. In response, computer system 600 updates (eg, returns) process status indicator 2106c to the same state as in Figure 21I, except that there is no process indicator because no new messages are being sent. In Figure 21K, computer system 600 has received a message from emergency services. In some embodiments, the emergency service is the recipient of the communication and the message from the emergency service is a response to the communication. In response to receiving the message from emergency services, computer system 600 displays message notification 2114 on user interface 2102 . For example, as shown in Figure 2K, computer system 600 updates the notification stack to display message notification 2114 as the top or first notification in the notification stack that includes notification 2112a and/or notification 2112b. Message notification 2114 includes an indication of the application associated with the notification (e.g., an icon representing a speech bubble for a messaging application), the

202

Instructions from the sending party (e.g., the text "Emergency SOS" and a circle with Dragon 05 inside), at least part of the content of the message (e.g., "Hello, we have received your request"), and that the message was received An indication of time (e.g., "now"). In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 21K, active user interface object 2106 moves (eg, moves upward) so that message notification 2114 is displayed (eg, active user interface object 2106 is not removed and/or replaced by message notification 2114; and / or the active user interface object 2106 is displayed simultaneously with the message notification 2114). In some embodiments, in response to the user aligning a sensor (eg, camera) with the user's face for facial recognition, the user placing a finger on the fingerprint sensor for fingerprint ID, and/or entering a personal identification number, or Password, computer system 600 is unlocked.

[0830] In FIG. 21K, computer system 600 detects selection 2150i (eg, tap or other selection input) of message notification 2114. In response to detecting a selection of the messaging notification 2114 (and, in some embodiments, an input to unlock the computer system 600), the computer system 600 displays the messaging application's messaging user interface 2116, as shown in Figure 21L. Messaging user interface 2116 includes a messaging area 2116a that includes messages between users associated with computer system 600 and emergency services. In Figure 21L, message area 2116a includes: message 2116b, which includes a summary of the communication sent to the emergency services as a result of the process for sending the communication via satellite communications; and message 2116c received from the emergency services, This message corresponds to the message associated with message notification 2114.

[0831] In some embodiments, while displaying the messaging user interface 2116 (e.g., in response to selection 2150i), the computer system 600 does not display (e.g., stops displaying) the active user interface object 2106, e.g., because the messaging user interface 2116 is not the system user interface. In Figure 21L, while displaying messaging user interface 2116, computer system 600 displays banner 926 described with reference to Figures 9K-9N1 (eg, in place of active user interface object 2106).

[0832] Figure 22 is a flowchart illustrating a method for using a computer system to provide user interface objects corresponding to a process, in accordance with some embodiments. Method 2200 at a computer system (e.g., 100, 300, 500, 600, 900, 1100, 1300A, 1300B, 1500A, 1500B, 1500c, smart phone, smart watch, laptop, desktop computer, and/or tablet computer) Execution, the computer system with display generation components (e.g., 601, 901, 1106, 1302A, 1302B, 1502A, 1502B, 1502c, display controller, display device, monitor, and/or touch-sensitive display system) and one or more Input device (e.g., 601, 901, 1106, 13024, 13028, 15024, 15028, 1502, or 6172, 61766176 touch-sensitive surface, touch screen, button, keyboard, mouse, camera, rotatable input mechanism, and/or microphone) communication. Some operations in method 2200 are optionally combined, the order of some operations is optionally changed, and some operations are optionally omitted.

[0833] As described below, method 2200 provides an intuitive way to provide user interface objects corresponding to processes. This approach reduces the cognitive load on the user to provide user interface objects corresponding to the process, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated computing devices, enabling users to interact with user interface objects corresponding to processes more quickly and efficiently saves power and increases the time between battery charges.

[0834] The computer system detects (2202) via one or more input devices a response to an initiation for sending communications (e.g., emergency communications, text messages, and and/or audio messages) to process a request for a set of one or more inputs (e.g., 2150a. contact and/or touch gestures, air gestures, mouse clicks, key presses, button presses and/or voice commands). In response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to initiate a process for sending a communication to the corresponding recipient, the computer system initiates (2204) a process for sending the communication to the responding recipient (e.g., Figures 6M to The processes described in Figure 6Y, method 800, Figures 9B-9U, and/or method 1000, or portions thereof). During the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient (e.g., when the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient is active and/or when a display associated with the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient is displayed (example

203

For example, when a user interface is unique and/or specific), the computer system detects (2206) via one or more input devices corresponding to the display system user interface (e.g., 2102, 2108, 1900, 1304, 1506B, 1508A, 1514A , 1524B, a set of one or more inputs (e.g., 2150b, 2150c, 2150d, 2150g, and/or 2150h) requested by a user interface other than the user interface associated with the process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient. ).

[0835] In response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to the request to display the system user interface, the computer system displays (2208) (e.g., simultaneously with) the system user interface (e.g., the user of the operating system) via the display generation component interface, such as the lock screen, wake screen, home screen, notification center, or other system user interface or another application outside the application used to send the message), and corresponding to that communication (e.g., corresponding to the application used to send the message the process of communicating) user interface objects (e.g., 2106) (e.g., notifications, text, graphics, icons, buttons, affordances, banners, pop-ups, and/or selectable graphical user interface objects) (in some In an embodiment, the user interface object is overlaid on the system user interface), including: according to determining that the process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient is in the first state (for example, 600 in Figure 21B), the computer system Appearance (e.g., 2106 in Figure 21C, first visual appearance, text, graphics, images, icons, colors, fonts, highlighting, and/or animation; indicating the appearance of a first state of the process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient) display (2210) a user interface object corresponding to the communication; and based on the determination for The process of sending the communication to the corresponding recipient is in a second state (e.g., 600 in Figure 21F) that is different from the first state, and the computer system displays a second appearance (e.g., 2106 in Figure 21G, a second visual appearance, text , graphics, images, icons, colors, fonts, highlights, and/or animations; indicating the appearance of the second state of the process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient) display (2212) a user interface object corresponding to the communication, The second appearance is different from the first appearance (eg, the appearance of the user interface object is based on the current state of the process used to send the communication to the corresponding recipient). In some embodiments, the user interface object corresponding to the communication is displayed concurrently with (or overlaid on) the user interface of an application other than the application used to generate, author, and/or send the communication, rather than Or supplemented and displayed simultaneously with the system user interface. Display the system user interface and the user interface object corresponding to the communication, where the appearance of the user interface object is based on the state of the process used to send the communication, Doing so provides the user with information about the status of the process and enables the user to interact with the process with fewer errors while the system user interface is displayed (e.g., aligning the computer system with satellites, sending messages, and /or view received messages), which provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the amount of input required to perform an action, and performs an action without requiring further user input when a set of conditions has been met. Displaying the system user interface and the user interface object corresponding to the communication, wherein the appearance of the user interface object is based on the state of the process for sending the communication, doing so allows the computer system to execute the process for sending the communication via the alternative communication network (e.g., generating communications and/or connecting to alternative communications networks) for other purposes and optimizing the use of limited space on the display, which allows users to operate computer systems more quickly and efficiently, reducing power usage, and extended battery life.

[0836] In some embodiments, the process for sending a communication to a respective recipient includes displaying a set of one or more user interfaces (e.g., 602M, 602N, 602O, 602P, 602Q, 602R, 602S, 602T, 602U, 602V, and/or 602W); detecting, while displaying the set of one or more user interfaces used to generate the communication, that corresponding to the display system user interface the set of one or more inputs requested (e.g., 2150b and/or 2150c); and the appearance of the user interface object corresponding to the communication indicates that the process used to send the communication to the corresponding recipient is in display of the process used to generate the communication The state of the set of one or more user interfaces (eg, 2106 in Figure 21C). In some embodiments, a process for sending the communication to the respective recipient includes displaying a set of selectable communication content options corresponding to respective content of the communication. In some embodiments, the group may select communication content options specific

204

For modes for communicating over alternative communication networks (e.g., low-bandwidth communication mode). In some embodiments, the set of one or more user interfaces for generating the communication includes the user interfaces, options, and/or operations described in FIGS. 6M-6y and/or method 800. Displaying a user interface for generating the communication enables the computer system to provide options that are optimal for the communication (e.g., requiring limited bandwidth), reduce the amount of input required to generate the communication (e.g., not using a keyboard), and Guide the user through the process used to generate that communication, which provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the amount of input required to perform an action, and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls. Indicating that the process is in a state of displaying the user interface used to generate the communication allows the computer system to be used for other purposes while generating the communication and optimizes the use of limited space on the display, which enables the user to operate the computer system more quickly and efficiently , reducing power usage and extending battery life.

[0837] In some embodiments, the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient includes: displaying a prompt (e.g., notification, banner, text, graphical elements, audio, and/or instructions; and/or 908C, 908D, 908E , 908F, 908G, 908H, 908I, 908J, 9080, 90801, 908P, 909, 926 and/or 931), the prompt causes the user to take action to connect to (or in some embodiments remain connected to) the alternative communications network , the communication will be sent via the alternative communication network; detection of the set of one or more inputs (e.g., 2150g and/or 2150h) corresponding to a request to display the system user interface causes the user to take action to connect to the alternative communication Occurs when prompted by a network; and the appearance of the user interface object corresponding to the communication indicates that the process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient is to display a prompt that causes the user to take action to connect to the alternative communication network (e.g., Figure 21G, 2106 of 21H, 21I, 21J or 21K) status. In some embodiments, user interface objects corresponding to the communication include graphical elements 931 and/or textual elements 908C, 908D, 908E, 908F, 908G, The contents of 908H, 908I, 908J, 908O, 908O1, or 908P, depending on the status of the alignment and/or connection between the computer system and the alternative communications network. In some embodiments, the user interface object corresponding to the communication is banner 926 (or includes content thereof) in Figure 9K, Figure 9L, Figure 9M, or Figure 9M1, depending on the relationship between the computer system and the alternative communication network. The status of alignment and/or connection. In some embodiments, the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient includes Figure 9c 9Q and the user interface and/or features described in method 1000. In some embodiments, the prompt for the user to take action to connect to the alternative communication network includes moving and/or positioning at least a portion of the computer system in a particular direction or location (e.g., turn left, point upward, and/or outward move) instructions. In some embodiments, the computer system displays causing the user to take action to connect based on a determination that the computer system is not connected to the alternative communications network (e.g., not properly aligned to communicate with one or more satellites of the alternative communications network) Tips to alternative communication networks. In some embodiments, the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient includes displaying a status of the connection between the computing system and the alternative communication network (e.g., not connected, bad connection, attempting to connect, connecting, and/or connected) indication. Displaying prompts that enable the user to take action to connect to the alternative communications network (e.g., providing a connection assistant) allows the user to quickly and efficiently resolve issues that prevent the computer system from connecting to the alternative communications network (e.g., misalignment) with less input and/or barriers), which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform an action. Displaying prompts for the user to take action to connect to an alternative communication network (e.g., providing a connection assistant) allows the computer system to be used for other purposes while connected to the alternative communication network and optimizes the use of limited space on the display, which allows the user to Ability to operate computer systems more quickly and efficiently, reducing power usage and extending battery life.

[0838] In some embodiments, displaying the user interface object corresponding to the communication includes displaying the user interface object (eg, , 2106c in Figure 21H includes a partially filled message progress ring; 2106c in Figure 21I includes a fully filled message progress ring). In some embodiments, the first status is a first message status, and the first appearance indicates the first message status (e.g., "Send

205

in); and the second status is a second message status, and the second appearance indicates the second message status (eg, "receiving"). Displaying the user interface object with an appearance based on the status of the communication provides the user with information about the progress of the communication and enables the user to interact with the process with fewer errors while displaying the system user interface, which provides the user with Provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform actions. Displaying user interface objects with an appearance based on the status of the communication allows the computer system to monitor the status of the communication while being used for other purposes and optimizes the use of limited space on the display, which enables the user to operate the computer system more quickly and efficiently , reducing power usage and extending battery life.

[0839] In some embodiments, the system user interface is a displayed user interface (e.g., 2108, 1304, 1506B, 1514A, user interface 400, home screen, and/or application springboard) that includes a corresponding A user interface object for an application that, when activated, causes the computer system to display the corresponding application corresponding to the activated user interface object. Displaying user interface objects and including user interface objects corresponding to corresponding applications provides the user with access to other applications, allowing the computer system to be monitored while monitoring the status of the process used to send the communication to the corresponding recipient. For other purposes and to optimize the use of limited space on the display, this allows users to operate computer systems more quickly and efficiently, reduces power usage, and extends battery life.

[0840] In some embodiments, the system user interface is a wake screen user interface (e.g., 2102, 1110, 1344A, 1524B, wake screen, and/or lock screen), and the computer system exits an inactive state (e.g., a low power state , hibernation and/or dimming state). Display user interface objects and user interfaces that are displayed when the computer system leaves the inactive state, so as to provide the user with the status of the process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient immediately when the computer system leaves the inactive state and enable the user to Interact with the process more efficiently (e.g., without manually requesting the status of the process) and/or with fewer errors, which provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the amount of input required to perform the action, and enables the user to Operate computer systems more quickly and efficiently, reducing power usage and extending battery life.

[0841] In some embodiments, the process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient includes a first sub-process for generating (e.g., composing) the communication (e.g., the first sub-process includes a user interface (such as 602M, 602N, 6020, 602P, 602Q, 602R, 602S, 602T, 602U, 602V, and/or 602W), options and/or operations described in FIGS. Two sub-processes (eg, the second sub-process includes a user interface (such as 2110, 902C, 902D, 902E, 902F, 902G, 902H, 902I, 902J, 902O, 902O1, or 902P) and/or Figures 9c-9Q and method 1000 characteristics described in ). Executing the first sub-process for generating the communication enables the computer system to provide options that are optimal for the communication (eg, requiring limited bandwidth), reducing the amount of input required to generate the communication (eg, not using a keyboard) , as well as guiding the user through the process used to generate that communication, which provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the amount of input required to perform an action, and provides additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional display controls . executing the second sub-process for connecting to the communications network enables the computer system to provide a user interface, The user interface allows users to quickly and efficiently resolve issues that prevent a computer system from connecting to a communications network (e.g., misalignments and/or obstructions) with less input, which provides improved visual feedback and reduces the number of actions required to perform input quantity.

[0842] In some embodiments, displaying the system user interface and the user interface object corresponding to the communication includes simultaneously displaying the system user interface (e.g., 2102, 1110, 1344A, or 1524B) and the user interface object corresponding to the communication (e.g., 2102, 1110, 1344A, or 1524B). , the computer system displays the user interface object corresponding to the communication in the system user interface (or overlays the system user interface)), and: while simultaneously displaying the system user interface and the user interface object corresponding to the communication, the computer system

206

detecting a set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display a second system user interface that is different from the system user interface (e.g., 2150d); and in response to detecting the set of one or more inputs corresponding to a request to display a second system user interface or multiple inputs, the computer system simultaneously displays the second system user interface (e.g., 2108, 1304, 1506B, or 1514A) and the user interface object corresponding to the communication (e.g., the computer system displays the user interface object corresponding to the communication in the second system user interface). the communicating user interface object; and/or the computer system maintains a display of the communicating user interface object when the system user interface changes). In some embodiments, the system user interface and/or the second system user interface is a wake screen, a home screen, a lock screen, and/or a user interface that includes two or more notifications. Displaying user interface objects with multiple different system user interfaces allows the computer system to be used for other purposes and optimizes the use of limited space on the display, while enabling the user to monitor the status of the process used to send the communication to the respective recipients and navigate different The user interface interacts with the process more efficiently (e.g., utilizing less user input), which reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation, enables the user to operate the computer system more quickly and efficiently, reduces power usage, and extends improved battery life.

[0843] In some embodiments, after displaying the user interface object corresponding to the communication in a third appearance (e.g., e.g., the first appearance or the second appearance) (e.g., in response to detecting that the user interface object corresponding to the display system user interface the set of one or more inputs of the request): based on a determination that the process used to send the communication to the corresponding recipient has changed state (e.g., in response to detecting a change in the state of the process used to send the communication to the corresponding recipient) ), the computer system displays the user interface object corresponding to the communication in a fourth appearance that is different from the third appearance, wherein the fourth appearance provides information about the changed status of the process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient (e.g., The computer system changes and/or updates the appearance of the user interface object corresponding to the communication over time when the state of the process used to send the communication to the corresponding recipient changes). For example, the appearance of user interface object 2106 changes from Figure 21G to Figure 21H, from Figure 21H to Figure 21I, and from Figure 21I Change to Figure 21J, and change from Figure 21J to Figure 21K. Changing the appearance of a user interface object in response to a determination that the process used to send the communication to the appropriate recipient has changed state allows the computer system to be used for other purposes while providing the user with up-to-date information regarding the state of the process, allowing the user to update Interact with the process efficiently (e.g., using less user input) and optimize the use of limited space on the display, which provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the amount of input required to perform the action, and provides A set of conditions that perform an action without requiring further user input.

[0844] In some embodiments, determining that the process for sending the communication to the respective recipient has changed state includes determining that the computer system is connected to an alternative communication network over which the communication is to be sent (e.g., a non-terrestrial wireless communication network, such as satellite communications network) (e.g., not connected, bad connection, trying to connect, connecting, and/or connected) (and/or in some embodiments, the alignment state) has changed from a first connected state to a second connected state (e.g., from unconnected in Figure 21G to connected in Figure 21H, from Figure 21H The connection in Figure 21I is changed to the connected in Figure 21I, the service is changed from the connected in Figure 21I to the service unavailable in Figure 21J, and the service is unavailable in Figure 21J is changed to the connected in Figure 21K); with the first Three appearances of displaying the user interface object corresponding to the communication include: based on the first connection state, displaying in the user interface object corresponding to the communication causes the user to take a first action to connect to (or in some embodiments, remain connected to ) prompts for alternative communication networks (e.g., 2106b, 2106c, notifications, banners, text, graphical elements, audio, and/or instructions); and displaying the user interface object corresponding to the communication in a fourth appearance includes: based on the second connection Status, display in the user interface object corresponding to the communication a prompt for the user to take a second action different from the first action to connect to (or in some embodiments, remain connected to) the alternative communication network (e.g., 2106b , 2106c, notifications, banners, text, graphical elements, audio, and/or instructions) (eg, 2106b and/or 2106c change in Figures 21G-21K based on the connection status of computer system 600). Display based on the computer system's connection status to alternative communications networks

207

Prompts for the user to take action to connect to the alternative communications network enable the user to quickly and efficiently resolve issues (e.g., misalignments and/or obstructions) that prevent the computer system from connecting to the alternative communications network with less input, which Provides improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform actions. Displaying prompts for the user to take action to connect to the alternative communication network based on the computer system's connection status to the alternative communication network allows the computer system to be used for other purposes while connected to the alternative communication network and optimizes use of limited space on the display Use, which allows users to operate computer systems more quickly and efficiently, reduces power usage, and extends battery life.

[0845] In some embodiments, when displaying a user interface object corresponding to the communication, the computer system displays an indication of the message received from the corresponding recipient (e.g., 2114, notification, graphical indication, icon, color, font, text, animations, symbols, thumbnails, images and/or glyphs). Displaying an indication of messages received from the corresponding recipient notifies the user of received messages, optimizes the use of limited space on the display, and allows the user to monitor incoming messages and the status of the process while displaying the system user interface and interact more efficiently with The process interacts (e.g., utilizes less user input), which provides improved visual feedback to the user, reduces the number of inputs required to perform an operation, enables the user to operate the computer system more quickly and efficiently, reduces power usage, and extended battery life.

[0846] In some embodiments, displaying an indication of a message received from the corresponding recipient includes displaying the message received from the corresponding recipient in an appearance based on content (e.g., text and/or images) of the message received from the corresponding recipient. indication (e.g., the content of 2114 is based on (and/or includes) the content of 2116c). In some embodiments, based on the determination that the message from the corresponding recipient includes a first content, the computer system displays the indication in a first appearance (eg, the first content of the message); and based on the determination that the message from the corresponding recipient includes a content other than Second content of the first content, the computer system displays the indication in a second appearance (eg, second content of the message) that is different from the first appearance of the indication. Displaying an indication of a message received from a respective recipient in an appearance based on the content of the message received from the respective recipient allows the computer system to provide the user with information regarding the content of the message while serving other purposes, enabling the user to more efficiently Interact with the process (e.g., utilize less user input) and optimize the use of limited space on the display, which provides the user with improved visual feedback and reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation, allowing the user to be faster and more efficient Operate computer systems more efficiently, reducing power usage and extending battery life.

[0847] In some embodiments, the computer system detects a selection (e.g., 2150e or 2150f) of a user interface object corresponding to the communication (e.g., a tap or other touch on the user interface object corresponding to the communication input, a press of a button while a user interface object corresponding to the communication is designated and/or focused, and/or a voice command selecting a user interface object corresponding to the communication); and in response to detecting a request to the user interface object corresponding to the communication Select the user interface object, and the computer system displays the user interface (for example, 602M, 602N, 6020, 602P, 602Q, 602R, 602S, 602T, 602U, 602V, 602W, 902C, 902D, 902E, 902F, 902G, 902H, 902I ,902J,902K,902L,902M,9020, 90201 or 902P, based on the status of the process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient via the alternative communication network), the user interface provides more detailed information about the process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient via the alternative communication network (For example, information regarding the status of sending and/or receiving communications, options for sending and/or receiving communications, and/or controls for performing operations associated with sending and/or receiving communications). For example, in response to selection of 2106 in FIG. 21G, 21H, 21I, 21J, or 21K, computer system 600 displays user interface 2110 in a state corresponding to state 2106 at the time of selection. Responsive to detecting selection of a user interface object corresponding to the communication, displaying a user interface that provides more detailed information regarding a process for sending the communication to the corresponding recipient via the alternative communication network, doing so provides for access A process for sending this communication to the appropriate recipient and/or a fast and efficient method of interacting with the process, which reduces the amount of input required to perform the operation, provides additional control options without the overhead of additional display controls user interface

208

Clutter allows users to operate computer systems more quickly and efficiently, reducing power usage and extending battery life.

[0848] Note that the details of the process described above with respect to method 2200 (eg, FIG. 22) also apply in a similar manner to the method described above. For example, methods 700, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, and/or 2000 optionally include one or more of the features of the various methods described above with reference to method 2200. For example, methods 700, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, and/or 2000 may be procedures corresponding to the user interface objects in method 2200. For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated below.

[0849] For purposes of explanation, the foregoing description has been by reference to specific embodiments. However, the above illustrative discussion is not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in light of the above teachings. These implementations were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of these techniques and their practical applications. Others skilled in the art are thereby best able to utilize these techniques and various embodiments with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated.

[0850] While the present disclosure and examples have been fully described with reference to the accompanying drawings, it is to be noted that various changes and modifications will become apparent to those skilled in the art. It is to be understood that such changes and modifications are deemed to be included within the scope of the disclosure and examples as defined by the claims.

[0851] As noted above, one aspect of the present technology is the collection and use of data available from a variety of sources to provide efficient methods and interfaces for managing communications. This disclosure contemplates that, in some instances, these collected data may include personal information data that uniquely identifies or can be used to contact or locate a specific person. Such personal information data may include demographic data, location-based data, phone numbers, email addresses, social network IDs, home addresses, data or records related to the users health or fitness level (e.g., vital sign measurements, medications information, exercise information), date of birth, or any other identifying or personal information.

[0852] The present disclosure recognizes that use of such personal information data in the present technology can be used to benefit users. For example, personal information data can be used to deliver suggested content and emergency information that are more useful to the user. Therefore, the use of such personal information data enables users to use a more efficient emergency user interface containing relevant emergency information and recommended recipients. In addition, this disclosure also contemplates other uses of personal information data that benefit users. For example, health and fitness data can be used to provide insights into a user's overall health, or can be used as positive feedback for individuals using technology to pursue health goals.

[0853] This disclosure contemplates that entities responsible for collecting, analyzing, disclosing, transmitting, storing, or otherwise using such personal information data will comply with established privacy policies and/or privacy practices. Specifically, such entities shall implement and adhere to privacy policies and practices that are recognized as meeting or exceeding industry or governmental requirements for maintaining the privacy and security of personal information data. Such policies should be easily accessible to users and should be updated as data collection and/or use changes. Personal information from users should be collected for the entity's lawful and reasonable purposes and not shared or sold outside of those lawful uses. Furthermore, such collection/sharing should be done after receiving informed consent from the user. Additionally, such entities should consider taking any steps necessary to safeguard and secure access to such Personal Information Data and ensure that others who have access to Personal Information Data comply with its privacy policies and procedures. Additionally, such an entity may subject itself to third-party evaluations to demonstrate compliance with generally accepted privacy policies and practices. Additionally, policies and practices should be tailored to the specific types of personal information data collected and/or accessed and to applicable laws and standards, including jurisdiction-specific considerations. For example, in the United States, the collection or acquisition of certain health data may be governed by federal and/or state laws, such as the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA); while health data in other countries may be subject to other regulations and policies and should be handled accordingly. Thus, in

209

Each country should maintain different privacy practices for different types of personal data.

[0854] Regardless of the foregoing, the present disclosure also contemplates implementations in which users selectively block use of or access to personal information data. That is, the present disclosure contemplates that hardware components and/or software components may be provided to prevent or block access to such personal information data. For example, with respect to managing communications, the Technology may be configured to allow users to choose to "opt in" or "opt out" of participating in the collection of personal information data during registration for the Service or at any time thereafter. As another example, a user may choose not to provide emergency data for a target content delivery service. As another example, users can choose to limit the length of time emergency-related data is retained, or to prohibit the development of a baseline emergency profile altogether. In addition to providing "opt-in" and "opt-out" options, this disclosure also contemplates providing notices regarding access or use of personal information. For example, users can be notified that their personal data will be accessed when the app is downloaded, and then warned again just before the personal data is accessed by the app.

[0855] Furthermore, it is the purpose of this disclosure that personal information data should be managed and processed to minimize the risk of inadvertent or unauthorized access or use. Risks are minimized by limiting data collection and deleting data once it is no longer needed. Additionally, and when applicable, including in certain health-related applications, data de-identification can be used to protect user privacy. This can be achieved where appropriate by removing specific identifiers (e.g. date of birth, etc.), controlling the amount or specificity of data stored (e.g. collecting location data at the city level rather than at the address level), controlling how the data is stored (e.g. , aggregating data across users), and/or other methods to facilitate de-identification.

[0856] Thus, while the present disclosure broadly covers the use of personal information data to implement one or more of the various disclosed embodiments, the present disclosure also contemplates that various embodiments may also be implemented without access to such personal information data. situation is realized. That is, various embodiments of the present technology will not be unable to function properly due to the lack of all or part of such personal information data. For example, emergency information may be selected by inferring preferences based on non-personal information data or an absolute minimum amount of personal information such as the content requested by the device associated with the user, other non-personal information available to emergency services, or publicly available information. and proposed recipients and delivered to the user.

210